Library of Congress Cataloging-in-Publication Data
Magne, Pascal.
Bonded porcelain restorations in the anterior dentition: a biomimetic
approach / Pascal Magne, Urs Belser.
p.; em.
Includes bibliographical references and index.
ISBN 0-86715-422-5 (hardback)
1. Crowns (Dentistry). 2. Dental ceramics. 3. Dental bonding. 4.
Dentistry-Aesthetic aspects.
[DNLM: 1. Dental Bonding-methods. 2. Dental Porcelain. 3.
Esthetics, Dental. 4. Tooth Preparation, Prosthodontic. WU 190 M196b
2002] I. Belser, U. II. Title.
RK666 .M24 2002
617.6'9-dc21
2001006636
~
quintczmzncc
bookl
© 2002, 2003 by Quintessence Publishing Co, Inc
All rights reserved. This book or any part thereof may not be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or
transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or otherwise,
without prior written permission of the publisher.
Quintessence Publishing Co, Inc
551 Kimberly Drive
Carol Stream, IL 60188
www.quinlpub.com
Printed in Germany
-
----------------------------------
-
------
-
(""
Bonded Porcelain Restorations
in the Anterior Dentition:
A Biomimetic Approach
Pascal Magne, PD, DR MED DEI\lT
Senior Lecturer
Deportment of Fixed Prosthodontics and Occlusion
University of Geneva
School of Dentistry
Geneva, Switzerland
Urs Belser, PROF, DR MED DENT
Professor and Head
Deportment of Fixed Prosthodontics and Occlusion
University of Geneva
School of Dentistry
Geneva, Switzerland
r
Quintessence Publishing Co, Inc
quintCllCftcc Chicago, Berlin, London, Copenhagen, Tokyo, Paris, Barcelona, Milano,
boolu Sao Paulo, New Delhi, Moscow, Prague, Warsaw, and Istanbul
4
--
-----------~--~-
DEDICATION
To my wife, Ceibi. and my father, Albin, who supported me and
encouraged me in all situations. To my brother, Michel, who shared and
brought to light his passion for dentistry and dental technique. In memory
of my mother, Agnes, who was token from us by cancer too early.
-PM
In memory of my mother, Heidi. To my father, Theodor.
To my wife, Christine, for her unfailing support and patience.
To my children, Marc and Michele.
-UB
TAB LE OF CONTENTS
FOREWORD
PREFACE
19
20
CHAPTER
I
UNDERSTANDING THE INTACT TOOTH AND
THE BIOMIMETIC PRINCIPLE
23
Biology, Mechanics, Function, and Esthetics
1
1
Optimal Compliance and Flexibility
Rationalized Anterior Tooth Shape
Mechanics and Geometry During Function
Ph y s i 0 log icE n am e I C r a c kin g and the D Ej
Natural Tooth Aging and Enamel Thinning
Biomimetics Applied to Mechanics
\
CHAPTER
1
2
NATURAL ORAL ESTHETICS
57
General Considerations
Fundamental Criteria
Esthetic Integration
1
CHAPTER
3
ULTRACONSERVATIVE TREATMENT OPTIONS
Chemical Treatments and Biomimetics
Nightguard Vital Bleaching
Microabrasion and Megabrasion
Nonvital Walking Bleach Technique
Reattachment of a Tooth Fragment
Simplified Direct Composites
99
CHAPTER
4
EVOLUTION OF I~IDICATIONS FOR ANTERIOR BONDED
PORCELAIN RESTORATIONS
129
Historic Perspective
Type I: Teeth Resistant to Bleaching
Type II: Major Morphologic Modifications
Type III: Extensive Restoration in the Adult
Combined Indications
Biologic Considerations
Perspectives for Occlusal Veneers in Posterior Teeth
CHAPTER
INITIAL
5
TREATME~IT PLA~INING A~ID
DIAGNOSTIC APPROACH
179
Interactive Patient-Operatory-Laboratory Relationships
Patient Management by the Operatory Team
Patient Management by the Laboratory Team
Treatment Planning and l n i.t i o l Therapy
Diagnostic Waxup
Diagnostic Mock-up
Peculiar Cases
Summary of Diagnostic Approaches
Clinical Photography
Shade Documentation
CHAPTER
6
TOOTH PREPARATION, IMPRESSION,
A~ID PROVISIONAUZATION
General Considerations
Tissue Reduction
Margin Configuration and Localization
Peculiar Situations
Immediate Dentin Bonding
Definitive Impressions
Direct Provisionals and Provisional Bonding
239
CHAPTER
7
LABORATORY PROCEDURES
293
Choice of Restorative Material and Technique
Master Casts in the Refractory Die Technique
Ceramic Layering and Finishing
Special Effects
Configuration of the Ceramic Workpiece
CHAPTER
8
TRY-IN A",ID ADHESIVE LUTING PROCEDURES
335
Choice of Luting Composite Resin
Try-in and Preparatory Steps
Conditioning of the Ceramic Surface
Conditioning of the Tooth Surface
Plocement of the Ceramic Restoration
Final Adjustments and Occlusal Control
Special Considerations
CHAPTER
9
MAINTENANCE AND REPAIRS
371
Maximum Performance, Reduced Maintenance
Routine Professional Hygiene
Complications and Repairs
Replacement of Class 3 Composite
GUIDE TO CLINICAL CASES
387
INDEX
400
FOREWORD
It is with considerable pleasure that I write the foreword to Dr Magne and Prof Belser's book, which
takes the science of esthetic dental reconstruction to a new level both clinically and academically.
Dr Magne spent 2 years as a visiting associate professor in the Minnesota Dental Research Center
for Biomaterials and Biomechanics at the University of Minnesota, where many of the ideas pro­
mulgated in this book were hotly debated, refined, and tested in a modeling and experimental en­
vironment. In this book, the clinician will find all that he or she could wish for in terms of indications
and the classic clinical steps for tooth preparation, laboratory procedures, adhesive luting proce­
dures, and maintenance protocol. Those who have heard Dr Magne lecture will not be disop­
pointed. In fact, they will find much more that is practically and intellectually satisfying.
The central philosophy of the book is the biomimetic principle, that is, the idea that the intact tooth
in its ideal hues and shades, and perhaps more importantly in its intracoronal anatomy and loca­
tion in the arch, is the gUide to reconstrudion and the determinant of success. The approach is ba­
sically conservative and biologically sound. This is in sharp contrast to the porcelain-fused-to-metal
technique, in which the metal casting with its high elastic modulus makes the underlying dentin hypo­
functional. The goal of the authors' approach is to return all of the prepared dental tissues to full
function by the creation of a hard tissue bond that allows functional stress to pass through the tooth,
drawing the entire crown into the final esthetic result.
I hope that this book will receive a wide readership and that its principles will be carefully studied
and become fully established in teaching and research, as well as de rigueur in the practice of
restorative dentistry.
William H. Douglas, BDS, MS, PhD
Director, Minnesota Dental Research Center for Biomateriais and Biomechanics;
Chair, Department of Oral Science, University of Minnesota
Minneapolis, Minnesota
19
PREFACE
The most exciting developments in dentistry have emerged within the past decade. Oral implant
dentistry, quided tissue regeneration, and adhesive restorative dentistry are strategic growth areas
both in research and in clinical practice. However, the many advances in dental materials and tech­
nology have generated a plethora of dental products in the marketplace. Clinicians and dental tech­
nicians are faced with difficult choices as the number of treatment modalities continues to grow. Fur­
ther, changes in technology do not always Simplify technique or decrease treatment costs. Prudence
and wisdom need to be combined with knowledge and progress when it comes to improving our
patients' welfare.
In this perplexinq context, no one will contest the need for less expensive, satisfactory, and rational
substitutes for current treatments. The answer might come from an emerging interdisciplinary bioma­
terial science called biomimetics.' This concept of medical research involves the investigation of the
structure and physico] function of biologic "composites" and the design of new and improved substi­
tutes. Biomimetics in dental medicine has increasing relevance. The primary meaning for denlistry
refers to processing material in a manner similar to that by the oral cavity, such as the calcification of
a soft tissue precursor. The secondary meaning refers to the mimicking or recovery of the biome­
chanics of the original tooth by the restoration. This. of course, is the goal of restorative dentistry.
Several research disciplines in dental medicine have evolved with the purpose to mimic oral struc­
tures. However, this nascent principle is applied mostly at a molecular level, with the aim to enhance
wound healing, repair, and regeneration of soft and hard tissues2,3 When extended to a macro­
structural level, biomimetics can trigger innovative applications in restorative dentistry. Restoring or
mimicking the biomechanical, structural, and esthetic integrity of teeth is the driving force of this
process. Therefore, the objective
tistry based on biomimetics.
of this book
is to propose new criteria for esthetic restorative den­
Biomimetics in restorative dentistry starts with an understanding
of herd
tissue structure and related
stress distribution within the intact tooth, which is the focus of the opening chapter of this book. It is
immediately followed by a systematic review of parameters related to natural oral esthetics. Because
the driving forces of restorative dentistry are maintenance of tooth Vitality and maximum conserva­
tion
of intact
hard tissues, a brief chapter describes the ultraconservative treatment options that can
precede a more sophisticated treatment. The core of the book centers on the application of the bio­
mimetic principle in the form of bonded porcelain restorations [BPRs). The broad spectrum of indi­
cations for BPRs is described, followed by detailed instruction on the treatment planning and diag­
nostic approach, which is the first step in learning this technique. The treatment is then described
step-by-step, including tooth preparation and impression, laboratory procedures related to the fab­
rication of the ceramic workpiece, and its final insertion through adhesive luting procedures. The
book ends with discussion of the follow-up, maintenance, and repair of BPRs.
20
I would have been unable to achieve this work without the valued collaboration of other dentists,
dental technicians, specialists, and researchers. We should always remember that a key element
for successful and predictable restoration is teamwork and an essential ingredient for teamwork is
humility, to consider others better than oneself. We must try to serve each other rather than expect
to be served.
I am fortunate to have studied under Prof Urs Belser; his teaching and gUidance have been invalu­
able to me.
Speciol thanks goes to Drs William Douglas, Ralph Delong, Maria Pintado, Antheunis Versluis, and
Thomas Korioth at the University of Minnesota for their help and friendship during my 2-year re­
search scholarship there. They expanded my vision and knowledge of scientific research in bio­
materials and biomechanics.
I extend appreciation to Michel Magne, CDT, for his significant contributions to the chapter on lab­
oratory procedures and for his skills in fabricating the ceramic restorations for all of the cases in this
book. I also acknowledge my patients, who indirectly contributed to the realization of this book,
and the private practitioners who donated extracted teeth for the studies and illustrations. Special
thanks in this regard goes to Drs Rosa Serrano of Geneva, Switzerland, and Jose de Souza Ne­
grao of Sao Paulo, Brazil.
Finally, I give honor and glory to my lord and Savior, Jesus Christ, who has made all
possible through his gracious love.
of
my projects
Pascal Magne
:-
References
1. Sarikaya M. An introduction to biomimetics: A structural viewpoint. Microsc Res Tech 1994;27:360-375.
2 Slavkin He. Biomimetics: ReplaCing body parts is no longer science fiction.
J Am
Dent Assoc 1996; 127: 1254-1257.
3 Mann S. The biomimetics of enamel: A paradigm for organised biomaterial synthesis. Cibo Found Symp 1997;205:261-269.
21
CHAPTER
l
UNDERSTANDING THE
INTACT TOOTH AND THE
BIOMIMETIC PRINCIPLE
Mimicry in the field of science involves reproducing or copying a model, a
reference. If we as dentists want to replace what has been lost, we need
to agree on what is the correct reference. The accepted frame of reference
must be the same for the entire profession, and it should be timeless and
unchanging. Once this is established, we can then construct appropriate
research designs, devise valid concepts, and create rational dental treat­
ment plans. For the restorative dentist, the unquestionable reference is the
intact natural tooth. Remains of Inca civilization in South America as well as
mummies in Egypt 1 demonstrate age-old principles: the original number,
dimensions, and structure of teeth have not changed. While the pattern of
oral disease (infections, wear, parafunctions) has been influenced by the
ever-changing human lifestyle, the original structure of enamel and dentin
appears to be the same today as it was 3,000 years ago. In this context,
it seems commendable to study and understand the marvelous design of
natural teeth before considering any further concepts in restorative dentistry.
1
I
UNDERSTANDING THE INTACT TOOTH AND THE BIOMIMETIC PRINCIPLE
BIOLOGY,
MECHA~IICS,
FUNCTION, AND ESTHETICS
Physiologic performance of intact teeth is the
result of an intimate and balanced relationship
between biologic, mechanical, functional, and
esthetic parameters (Fig 1-1 a).
The most educational situations supporting that
fact are found in cases of traumatic lnjuries like
lhot illustrated in Fig 1-1. The price of on injury
can be paid in the form of either a mechanical
(hard tissue involvement) or a biologic failure
(pulpal involvement). In both cases, the influ­
ence on the esthetic and functional parameters
is obvious. Fortunately for the patient in Fig 1­
1, simple and economic treatment strategies
could be used [fragment reattachment on the
left central incisor, root canal therapy and
bleaching on the other]. Yet a critical question
can be raised: What would have been the out­
come if, instead of being intact, these central
incisors had been previously restored by two
rigid and extremely resistant full crowns? We
know from impact experiments" that a more
profound fracture [root involvement], which
would be problematic to restore, is encoun­
tered when stiff and unyielding crowns are
used. This contrasts with the behavior of the
more fragile jacket crowns, which often shatter,
leaving the remaining tooth substance intact. A
partial crown fracture might be preferable if
one considers that the energy dissipated during
fracture can prevent further biologic damage or
root injury.
In consideration of the above-mentioned
parameters, it is of primary importance to ask
ourselves: Is it better to pursue the development
of strong and stiff restorations or, instead, to
find treatment modalities that reproduce the
biomechanical behavior of the intact tooth?
Stronger and stiffer might not always be better.
FIGURE 1-1: PHYSIOLOGIC PERFORMANCE OF TEETH. Performance of teeth is the result of an intricate physio­
logic puzzle including biology, mechaniCS, function, and esthetics (1-1 ol. Illustrative case: The moxillorv left central
incisor fractured follOWing trauma that involved both moxillory central incisors [1-'1 b). The tooth fragment was recov­
ered [1-1 c). The situation was potentially compromised by pulpal exposure (1-1 d). After direct capping under rubber
dam, the tooth fragment was rebonded to the remaining tooth substance [see Fig 3-10). A 1-week postoperative view
reveals the favorable situation [1-1 e). One month later, the unfractured right central incisor showed signs of pulpal
damage (1-1f). The severe organic discoloration was completely removed by internal bleaching ("walking bleach
technique," see Fig 3-6) after root canal treatment was accomplished. [The root canal therapy was indicated only by
the presence of symptoms and radiographic evidence.) The tooth was slightly overbleached to anticipate the initial
color relapse [1-1 g). The 5-year postoperative view shows stable results i 1-1 h). (Figures 1-1 b to 1-1 g are reprinted
from Magne and Magne 2 with permission.)
24
1
I UNDERSTANDING THE
INTACT TOOTH AND THE BIOMIMETIC PRINCIPLE
OPTIMAL COMPLIANCE AND FLEXIBILITY
The previous section calls for a strong and nat­
ural protection concept present in natural teeth
called compliance or flexibility. The latter is an
essential quality that enables a structure to
absorb the energy of a force. In other words, a
compliant structure will cushion a sudden
impact by bending elastically under a given
load. Up to a certain point, the more resilient a
structure is, the better. This ability to store
energy without undergoing permanent damage
is inherent to intact anterior teeth and can be
considered a reference. Dentin is the key ele­
ment in this capability. Figures 1-2a and 1-2b
show the exact shape and structure of this
essential "resilient" component. It was demon­
strated by Stokes and Hood" that during
impact, an intact tooth is able to absorb the
highest energy of fracture when compared to
teeth restored with different types of crowns.
Although resilience promotes protection against
impact through energy absorption, excessive
elasticity might also render a structure too
"floppy" for its purpose (Fig 1-2b, lett). The
dentin core alone would be functionally inade­
quate without its rigid outer shell of enamel (Fig
1-2b, right).
In this respect, natural teeth,rhrough the opti­
mal combination of enamel and dentin,
demonstrate the perfect and unmatched com­
promise between stiffness, strength, and
resilience. Restoralive procedures and alter­
ations in the structural integrity of teeth can
easily violate this subtle balance.
FIGURE 1-2: RESILIENT COMPOt\IENT OF TEETH. An extracted tooth was specially acid treated to eliminate the
enamel shell 11-20) and expose the dentin core (proximal view, left; palatal view, right), The lost enamel volume is
evident in 1-2b. The dentin core alone is weak, and bending under 5 kg can be perceived with the naked eye (1­
2b, bottom left, incisal edge displacement about 0.5 mm). The enamel shell provides the tooth crown with sufficient
resistance to bending (1-2b, bottom right, incisal edge displacement about 0.1 mm). (The bottom diagrams in Fig 1­
2b were produced with the finite element method.]
26
1
I UNDERSTANDING
THE INTACT TOOTH AND THE BIOMIMETIC PRINCIPLE
RATIONALIZED ANTERIOR TOOTH SHAPE
Moving from the posterior segment in the ante­
rior direction within the dental arch, the process
of "incisivization" tokes place (Fig 1-3a),
the cutting efficiency of the tooth. In some
instances, vertical lobes rising from the cingu­
whereby the
of the crown
occlusal
table
is gradually
replaced by an incisal edge that has the obvi­
ous function of cutting.
Anatomically, incisors show a distinct contrast
between facial and palatal surface morphol­
ogy. The labial aspect of the crown features
smooth and mainly convex contours, whereas
the palatal surface displays a deep concavity
extending oxiollv from the dental cingulum to
the incisal edge and laterally between the two
pronounced proximo] ridges (Fig 1-3b). With
lum interrupt the palatal concavity. The portion
featuring the thinnest enamel layer,
namely the cervical third, is also the area of
maximum thickness of dentin. Inversely, the thick
incisal enamel is supported by a thin dentin
wall.
Canines display a different morphology. The
cingulum is large and the marginal ridges are
strongly developed. All of these convex ele­
ments are confluent and there is no palatal
fossa [Figs 1-3b to 1-3d). The peculiarity of
this shape, the incisal edge is desiqned like a
such architecture will be explained later in view
of the specific functional requirements of this
blade, which undoubtedly plays a major role in
strateg ic tooth.
INCISIVIZATION
FIGURE 1-3: BASIC ANATOMY OF THE ANTERIOR DENTITION. Comparative views showinq functional surfaces
right; 1-3c; 1-3dj display soft and convex curva­
of extracted teeth. Palatal surfaces of canines [1-30, center; 1-3b,
tures compared to the concavities of incisors (1-3b, left).
28
1
I
UNDERSTANDING THE INTACT TOOTH AND THE BIOMIMETIC PRINCIPLE
MECHANICS AND GEOMETRY DURING FUNCTION
Thorough understanding of stress and related
strain allows restorotive techniques to be opti­
mized. Load-to-failure tests have been popular
among the wide range of mechanical testing
approaches. However, these "conventional"
strength studies, no matter how accurately con­
ducted, are not always sufficient to guarantee
structural integrity under operational conditions.
Failure under load conditions well below the
yield stress often occurs in structures with small
cracks or cracklike flaws, such as teeth and
some dental materials. Therefore, modern test­
ing approaches must include nondestructive
methods. For instance, the effect of functional
loading can be quantitatively determined by
the crown flexure, which can be measured
under simulated conditions by bonded strain
gauges (Fig 1-4a) and numeric methods, such
as the finite element method (FEM, Figs 1-4b to
1-7).5-9
Such investigation instruments must reproduce
the loading configuration of anterior teeth,
which has been clearly established and can be
characterized as follows:
• Because of the arrangement and position of
the anterior dentition, mechanical loads act
primarily in the buccolingual plane of each
tooth. Proximal contact areas restrain
mesiodistal loads [Fig 1-4b).
• The horizontal component of realistic biting
loads induces bending, which is the major
challenge for the incisor.
FIGURE 1-4: NONDESTRUCTIVE EXPERIMENTAL METHODS IN MECHANICAL TESTING. Experimental specimen
(intact central incisor) mounted with gauges for comparison of strains at the fossa and cingulum; strain gauges were
oriented along the long axis of the tooth (1-4a1. Numeric modeling of anterior teeth can be achieved using bucca­
lingual cross sections and two-dimensional finite element methods* 11-4bl. [Figure 1-4a is reprinted from Magne et
al 9 with perrnission.]
*In a finite element analysis, a large structure is divided into a number of small simple-shaped elements (Fig 1-4bl, for which individual deformation
(strain and stress) can be more eosily calculated than for the entire, undivided structure. By determining the deformation of each small element simul­
taneously, the deformation of the entire structure can be reconstructed. The finite element method has become an accepted modeling tool, and new
trends in research tend to combine both the experimental strain gauge approach and FEM evaluation in the same investigation.
30
I
1
UNDERSTANDING THE INTACT TOOTH AND THE BIOMIMETIC PRINCIPLE
of
the yield criteria
MOVing toward an edge-to-edge position (Fig
used for failure prediction in numeric analyses.
1-5bL significant tensile stress concentrations
The VOt) Mises criterion (VMj is commonly used.
are detected in the palatal fossa.
It is important to be aware
It works well with materials for which the yield
stresses measured in uniaxial tension and com­
Even in that challenging position, which in­
pression are equal. However:
duces maximum bending moments, the facial
half of the tooth and the cingulum area still do
Both enamel and dentin are brittle materials
not display detrimental stresses. It is appropri­
that present a higher strength in compression
ate to analyze stresses in a direction for which
than in tension.
the x and y components
of stresses
will display
their maximum values. The resulting analysis
The ratio between compressive strength and
(upper right of Figs 1-5a and 1-5b) outlines the
tensile strength has been incorporated in an
principal stresses in the form of areas of com­
adapted failure criterion for brittle materials: the
pression and tension. The original maxillary
modified Von Mises criterion (mVM).lO Figures
incisor is separated into two distinct areas
1-5a and 1-5b illustrate the stress distribution
when subjected to maximum
[using the mVM criterion] throughout the central
palatal half of the tooth exhibits positive values,
incisor during protrusive movements.
namely tensile stresses, whereas the facial half
bending:
the
of the tooth displays compressive stresses. Note
Initial guidance starting at the intercuspal
again the quiescent area of the cingulum
position (Fig 1-5a) does not cause significant
regard ing tensiIe stresses.
stresses. as determined by mVM.
In this position. most of the tooth crown is sub­
jected to compressive lorces. and bending is
minimal.
FIGURE 1-5: STRESS DISTRIBUTION ON A NATURAL MAXILLARY CENTRAL INCISOR DURING FUNCTION. Non­
linear finite element contact analysis. The mandibular incisor is sliding in protrusion starting at the intercuspal position
(1-5a) and moving toward an edge-to-edge position (1-5b). Real tooth deformation is magnified 5x to emphasize
the bending mode of the crown. In 1-5a, most of the cross-sectional area is subjected to compression (gray area in
the principa! stress) or negligible tensile stresses. In 1-5b, the tooth behaves like a cantilever beam with a compres­
sive side [facial half) and a tensile side [palatal half) separated by a neutral axis. Maximum tensile forces are found
at the level of the fossa. The external force created by the mandibular incisor is about 50 N, and real horizontal defor­
mation at the maxillary incisal edge is about 100 ~m [1-5b, distance from dotted !ine). The tooth is fixed (zero dis­
placement) at the cut plane of the root.
32
1
I UNDERSTANDING THE
INTACT TOOTH AND THE BIOMIMETIC PRINCIPLE
One may wonder what happens to mandibu­
lar incisors (Fig 1-60) when subjected to simi­
lar loading conditions. As with maxillary
incisors, initial quidonce starting at the inter­
cuspal position does not produce significant
mVM stresses. In this position, the mandibular
crown is subjected only to compressive forces
[Fig 1-6b). Moving toward an edge-to-edge
position, tensile stresses begin to develop at
the facial surface (Fig 1-6c). This stress pattern
is exactly the opposite of that of the antago­
nistic tooth. Because of the favorable facial
geometry of mandibular incisors, which dis­
plays flat or convex contours (Fig 1-60), the
level of facial tensile stresses remains moder­
ate and less detrimental compared to those
found at the antagonistic fossa (see Figs 1-5b
and 1-6c).
FIGURE 1-6: STRESS DISTRIBUTION ON A l'-lATURAL MANDIBULAR INCISOR DURING FUNCTION. Nonlinear
finite element contact analysis. The facial aspect of a mandibular incisor exhibits extremely simple morphology with
mostly flat or slightly convex surfaces (1-6a]. As in Fig 1-5, the mandibular incisor is sliding in protrusion starting at
the intercuspal position (1-6b) and moving toward an edge-to-edge position (1-6c]. Real tooth deformation is magni­
fied 5 X. In 1-6b, most of the cross-sectional area is subjected to compression (gray area in the principal stress). In 1­
6c, the tooth behaves like a cantilever beam with a compressive side [lingual half] and a tensile side (facial half] sep­
arated by a neutral axis. Maximum tensile forces are found at the facial middle third of the crown but are minor
compared to the stresses of the antagonistic tooth at the palatal fossa. The external force created by the contact is
about 50 N, and real horizontal deformation at the mandibular incisal edge is about 60 IJm (1-6c, distance from dot­
ted line). The tooth is fixed (zero displacement) at the cut plane of the root.
34
1
I UNDERSTANDING THE
INTACT TOOTH AND THE BIOMIMETIC PRINCIPLE
As previously outlined, form (ie, geometry) and
function are essential determinants of stress dis­
tribution.
It is important to remember that low stress lev­
els are found in surfaces of maximum convex
curvature, ie, the cingulum and the cervical
part of the facial surface. Therefore, it is con­
cluded that convex surfaces with thick enamel
experience fewer stress concentrations than
do concave areas, which tend to accumulate
them.9
This statement is clearly supported by Fig 1-7a,
which shows the influence of enamel geometry
and thickness after modification of the palatal
surface contour of a mandibular incisor. The
resulting contour might be assumed as the prox­
imal aspect of an incisor (Fig 1-7b) or as verti­
cal lobes extending from the cingulum. The
addition of enamel discloses a seemingly better
balance and stress distribution. In this regard, it
can be presumed that moderate stress concen­
trations would occur on the totally convex
palatal surfaces, such as that found on canines.
Canines have very curvilinear facial surfaces
that may better withstand compressive forces.
A canine with its accentuated biconvex con­
tour (buccolingual section) displays an almost
perfect convex design, which leads to a favor­
able mechanical configuration.
An irregular surface anatomy, ie, the palatal
surface anatomy of an incisor [Fig 1-7bl, logi­
cally yields to a different stress pattern. Stress
concentration in the palatal fossa contrasts with
the low stresses observed on smooth and con­
vex areas (ie, the cervical half of the crown for
both palatal and facial surfaces). Accordingly,
the following conclusions can be mode":
• The palatal concavity provides the incisor
with its sharp incisal edge and cutting abil­
ity but is shown to be an area of stress con­
centralion.
• Specific areas featuring thick enamel, such
as the cingulum and the marginal ridges,
can compensate for this shortcoming and
act as stress redistri butors.
Cingula and marginal crests also represent
essential palatal stops that allow for mainte­
nance of the vertical dimension of occlusion in
the anterior segment.
FIGURE 1-7: STRESS DISTRIBUTIONS WITH VARYING ENAMEL THICKNESS AND GEOMETRY. An original buc­
copalatal cross section (1-7 a, left) is compared to a modified incisor with a thickened, convex palatal enamel [1-7 a,
right). The modified tooth displays the lowest palatal surface stresses. Two small stress peaks still subsist in the palatal
surface and correspond to concave areas delimiting the thickened enamel. * The modified finite element model repro­
duces the prominent distal crest of the tooth [1-7b). This typical incisal feature helps to improve stress distribution along
the palatal surface.
* Although the loading condition [50 N palatally) was chosen to reflect a realistic situation, it should be emphasized that the conclusions are based
only on this one loading condition. However, the conclusions about the effect of shape (convex versus concave) and composition [enamel-dentin dis­
tribution) are universal and do not depend on the load direction or magnitude.
36
1
I UNDERSTANDING THE
INTACT TOOTH AND THE BIOMIMETIC PRINCIPLE
PHYSIOLOGIC ENAMEL CRACKING AND THE DEJ
The assembly of two tissues with distinctly dif­
ferent elastic moduli requires a complex fusion
for long-term functional success. Stress transfer
in simple bllorninote structures with divergent
properties usually induces increased focal
stresses at the interjoce.!' If enamel and dentin
at the functional surfaces of a tooth comprised
such a simply bonded bilaminate, then
enamel-initiated cracks would easily cross the
dentinoenamel junction (DEjl and propagate
into dentin. In reality, the situation seems to be
quite different. Although multiple enamel
cracks are typically encountered in aged teeth,
they seldom affect the structural integrity of the
enamel-dentin complex.
The explonotion
ture inherent to
fusion at the DEj
be regarded as
lies in the most fascinating fea­
the natural tooth-a complex
(Figs 1-8a to 1-8cl, which can
a fibril-reinforced bond. 1'2
The DEj is a moderately mineralized interface
between two highly mineralized tissues
[enamel and dentin). Parallel, coarse collagen
bundles (probably the von Korff fibers of the
mantle dentin) form massive consolidations
that can divert and blunt enamel cracks
through considerable plostic deformation.
Scanning electron microscopy fractographs of
DEj specimens have demonstrated crack deflec­
tion to another fracture plane when forced
through the DEl 14 The structure of the DEj shows
two levels of scalloping (Fig 1-8a), which
increase the effective interfacial area and
strengthen the bond
between enamel
and
dentin. The scalloping is most prominent where
the [unction is subject to the most functional
stresses.
FIGURE 1-8: SPATIAL DEJ ARCHITECTURE AND FORMATION. Schematic representation of the spatial relationship
of collagen fibrils 11-80). Thick bundles and tufts reinforce the fusion of enamel and dentin (middle). Coarse collagen
bundles form "mieroscallops" (bottom, black dotted arrows) within the major scallops of the DE;] outline (middle, white
dotted arrows). These bundles merge with other fibrils before or after entering the enamel matrix (bottom). [The top fig­
ure is reprinted from Sieber l 3 with permission. The middle and bottom figures are modified from Lin et 01 12 with per­
mission.]
38
1
I UNDERSTANDING THE
INTACT TOOTH AND THE BIOMIMETIC PRINCIPLE
Intereslingly, the DEJ is preformed in the earliest
developmental stage of the tooth crown, at the
time of incipient mineralization and much ear­
lier than an identifiable pulp (Fig 1-8d). This
chronology is not coincidentol, and another
sequence would not allow the creation of such
a complex dentinoenamel fusion. It is probably
more correct to regard the crown of the tooth
as growing out bidirectionally from the DEj,
rather than from the pulp.
In other words. the DEJ is the "center" of the
tooth, not the pulp.
FIGURE 1-8 (CONTINUED). Thin tooth section under polarized light showing the collagen tufts in the enamel 11-8b;
original magnification x250; courtesy of N. Allenspach, University of Geneva). Low-voltage field-emission scanning
electron microphotograph of the DEj decalcified with neutral ethylenediaminetetraacetic acid: 80- to 120-nm-diame­
ter collagen fibrils merge with dentin matrix fibrils (arrowheads) and splay out into the enamel matrix (open arrows);
note the cross banding of the collagen fibrils every 600 A (black arrows) (1-8c; original magnification x50,000).
This deep penetration of collagen into the enamel, which is the sine qua non of the DEj, could not take place with
fully calcified enamel (99% mineral by weight]. This points to the fact that the DEj forms early in embryonic develop­
ment and subsequently calcifies. The DEj of a primary tooth is being formed at the late bell stage (early crown stage]
of tooth formation; dentin and enamel have begun to form at the crest of the folded internal dental epithelium. At this
stage and in the continuing early growth, interpenetration of collagen into the contiguous enamel organ takes place.
At maturity, this forms the fully functional DEj, which should be considered an interphase rather than an interface [1­
8d; courtesy of Dr W. H. Douglas, University of Minnesota). (Figure 1-8c is reprinted from Lin et al 12with permission.)
40
1
I
UNDERSTANDING THE INTACT TOOTH AND THE BIOMIMETIC PRINCIPLE
Due to the inherent brittleness of enamel and
the collagenous consolidation of the DEl
enamel cracking should be considered a nor­
mal aging process. In addition, there are other
effects of enamel cracks, which are visible in
finite element models. Stress in the enamel is
redistributed around the crack through the DEl
which creates a stress concentration at the
crack tip and leaves the tooth surface in the
area of the crack relatively quiescent (Fig 1-8e).
Thus, enamel cracks can be considered an
acceptable enamel attribute, and the DEJ
plays a significant role in assisting stress trans­
fer (as opposed to stress concentration) and in
resisting enamel crack propagation (Fig 1-8f).
The fascinating properties of the DEJ must
serve as a reference for the development of
new dentin bonding agents, which should
allow for the recovery of the biomechanical
integrity of the restored crown.
FIGURE 1-8 (COt'--ITINUED). A photomicrograph of a strain gauge study specimen displays multiple cracks on the
palatal surface [1-8e, top). Similar experimental conditions including modeling of Single and multiple cracks were sim­
ulated in FEM. Enamel surrounding the flaws appears to be totally quiescent with regard to tensile forces (gray areas
correspond to mVM stresses between 0 and 1 MPa). Stresses at the crack tip are well above 200 MPa (1-8e, bot­
tom; teeth are loaded horizontally with 50 N on the incisal edge, 7x deformation factor). Scanning electron micro­
graphic view 11-8f) of palatal enamel cracks above a strain gauge (G). This appears to be the area of maximum ten­
sile stresses in the numeric model. The full thickness of enamel lEI is cracked, but the flaws never propagate into dentin
(PI. (Figure 1-8e is reprinted from Magne et 01 9 with permission. Figure 1-8f is reprinted from Magne and Douglas 7
with permission.)
42
Equivalent mod ified Von M ises (MPa)
--
-
----
-------
-
---
-=
= --
-----
~~----
-
-
-
-
--
~----
-
-
--=
----
-
.
1
I U NDE RSTAND ING THE
INTA CT TOO TH A ND THE BI OMI ME TI C P RIN CIPLE
NATURAL TOOTH AGING AND ENAMEL THINNING
As previously mentio ned, enamel and dentin
exhibit different phy sical properties .
Enamel can resist occlusa l wear but is fragile
and cracks eas ily. Dentin, o n the o ther hand ,
is flexible and co mplia nt but is not wear resis­
ta nt and does not age favora bly w hen dir ectly
ex posed to the ora l environment.
O rig ina l mo rphology and thickness of the
ena mel shell (Fig 1-9a) seem to have been
d esigned to a ntic ipa te w ear a nd function
requirements 16 : ma ximum w ear ar eas ar e
specifica lly those w ith grea ter bulks of ena mel,
ie, the incisal edge o f an terior teeth. This " pre­
ventive" arch itecture still a llows physio log ic
w ear to create dentin expos ure in the incisa l
area (Figs 1-9b to 1-9d). By the same to ken,
Becau se
of
their respective shortco mings, nei­
ther enamel nor dentin independentl y wou ld be
co nsidered effec tive restorati ve materials. How­
ever, they form a "co mposite" structure, w hic h
prov ides a tooth w ith unique characteristics 's :
the hard ness of enamel protects the soft under­
lying dentin, w hile the cra ck-arresti ng effect o f
dentin and the thick co llagen fibe rs at the DEJI 4
teeth in the posterior regi on , w here ma sticator y
force s are stronger, have thicker ena mel tha n
do an terior teeth. 17
The dynami c w ear pa ttern of the incisal edg e
must stand as a reference for the develo pment
of new materia ls, w hich sho uld be abl e to
age Similar ly to ena mel a nd dentin.
co mpe nsa te for the inherently brittle nature of
ena mel. This structural a nd physical interrela­
tionshi p betwee n an extremely hard tissue an d
Na tural tooth ag ing a lso impacts the oplico l
interactio n betwee n ename l an d dentin (Figs 1­
a more pliable tissue provides the natura l too th
g e and 1-9f). Her e ag a in, the inci sa l ed ge is
the most a ffec ted (see Fig 2-8).
wi th its o rig ina l bea uty but a lso its a bility to
w ithstan d mastication , thermal load s, a nd wear
dur ing a lifetime .
FIGURE 1-9: THE SEASONS OF TOOTH LIFE. Anterior teeth initia lly present typica l mamelons a nd surfac e texture
(1-9 0 ]. These elements are progressively eliminated by we ar. On going enamel cracking and dentin exposure (1-9 b
to 1-9 d ) o re linked to o bvious co lor cha nges. Extreme w ea r a llow s for understanding the op tical interaction betw een
enamel and dentin, especially the crucia l role of den tin in limiting lig ht tra nsmissio n in the incisal area (1-ge, 1-9f) .
O ptimized cera mic or com posite stratificatio n technique s a re needed to reproduc e the selective light transmission of
enamel a nd dentin.
44
=--- -
_
r
-
- - - .
=
- .= ~_ ='i::: = --=
.......:--==-- ~ - -- " - - -.- -- -
.
c'*'
..
t-
-
~~~.
=
_
--a=
_
.
~_
~~--~-
­
I U NDE RSTA NDING
1
T HE I NTAC T T OOTH A ND T HE BI O M IM ET IC P RINCIPLE
Age-related cha ng es o f the d entitio n are the
main cha llenge of modern dentistry, whi ch is
faced w ith a po pula tio n that is getting old er
a nd keeping mo re
of
In the physiologi c aging process, the o rig inal
ena mel thickness is prog ressively red uced [Fi g s
1- 1Oc to 1- 1Oe).
its natural teeth .
The colo r a nd cosmetic pro blems related to
Smiles ca n show physica l a nd esthetic sig ns o f
tooth agi ng should not be the o nly co ncern o f
agi ng . Amo ng these, excessive w ear in the
incisal area co ntributes to the loss of an terio r
tooth pro minence a nd insuffic ient a nterio r gUid­
ance, thus gene ra ting new respo nsib ilities fo r
the resto ra tive de ntist.' As mentio ned previ­
o usly, dentin pla ys a cruc ial role in provid inq
the toot h w ith co mp lia nce a nd fleXibil ity,
the restoralive dent ist. This degenerative phe­
w hereas the enam el shell w ill assure its rig id ity
and strength . The increased crow n fleXibility o f
nomenon is ove rshadowed by col or cha nges
worn teeth ca n be assoc ia ted w ith functional
fol low ing dentin exposure, ena mel cracking,
a nd related extrinsic infiltra tio n (Figs 1-1 Oa a nd
1-1 Ob). The Wides pread interest in vita l bleach­
and mechanical prob lems.
ing has beco me the dr iving fo rce o f esthetic
dentistry to rejuve nate tooth a ppearan ce a t a
limited cos t. How ever, this ultraco nserva tive
A sufficient a nd unifor m thic kness o f fa cia l
ena mel is essential to the ba lan ce o f func­
tional stresses in the anterior dentiti on ."
chemical trea tment addresses o nly the cosmetic
compone nt
of a
com p lex p rob lem .
FIGURE 1-10: ENAMEL IN THE AGING PROCESS. Teeth o f a 70-yea r-old pa tient w ith o bvious age-rela ted enamel
w ear, crac king, and extrinsic infiltratio n of both ce ntral inciso rs (1-100 , 1-10b). Bleaching w ill nol add ress the bio me­
cha nical issues, w hic h req uire cro wn stiffness recove ry through ad eq uate resto rative ap proaches (see treatment steps
in Fig s 5 -4 a nd 6 -22 ) Detail views of extracted ce ntral incisors (1 - 1Oc to 1-10 e) Tan gentia l lig ht is used to revea l
the loss of tooth form, surface architecture, a nd pa latoinc isa l w ear.
46
·
---~
-
~-
­
I UNDER STANDIN G TH E INT ACT
1
Comb ined results
of
TO OTH A N D TH E BI O MI M ETI C PRIN CI PLE
different stu di es yi eld sig­
facial ena mel negatively aff ects the be havior
of var io us
rema ining pal ata l ena mel . Similar ly, loss
nificant infor ma tion about the effec t
tissue red uction s on anterior c rown
flexure 7- 9 :
of
of
pa latal enamel w ill sig nifica ntly a ffect rema in­
ing faci a l ena mel.
Substantial loss
of fa ci al
ena mel o r p resence
o f end od onti c a ccess cav ities is mo re likely to
Recovery of the o rig ina l ename l thic kness a nd
a ffect crown rigi d ity than is the interdenta l
arc hitecture is necessary for the b io mec ha nica l
redu ction
of ena mel o r
large C lass 3 ca vities
[Fig 1-1 1a ).
As a ma tter
ba la nce
of
the tooth c rown. The c ho ice o f
restorative ma teria l is c ritica l in this matter (Fig
1-1 1d an d 1-1 1e).
of
fa ct, thin, a ged fa ci a l ename l
ca n lea d to hig h stress co ncentra tio ns dur ing
Restitution of ena mel thickne ss is therefore a
function . Surfac e cracks typ ica lly found o n
com b ined esthetic a nd b io mec ha nica l en­
ag ed teeth ac co unt for this p rob lem. The sig nif­
d ea vor . Bonding
ican t effec t
of the
enam el shell on stress d istri­
a nd
adh esive
resto rative proce d ures have the pot entiol to
b utio n w a s d emon strated using bo th stra in
reverse the esthetic mani festati on s
ga ug e ex periments an d finite element mod els
(Fig s 1-1 1b a nd 1-1 1C).7-9 The total lo ss o f
teeth (Figs 1-1 1b to 1-11 e).
.c
-
-
1. 8
-
~
0
1.6
-
Q)
1.4
-
0
Q)
1.2
'x
Q)
=
c
U
>
of ag ing
in
2.2
2 0
.:0
ce ram ic
1. 15
cY:
1.0
lnlocl"
Proximal
ena mel?
1. 30
1. 37
1.40
Facia l Cl ass 3
Endo
Facia l
ena mel, covitites" occess" ena mel,
%) 9
76 9
2 . 16
Facia l
enamel ,
16 9
Ha rd tissue remova l from inciso rs
"1
-,
FIGURE 1-11 : IMPACT OF ENAMEL LOSS AND ENAMEL RESTITUTION. G rap hic representa tion of relative flexi­
bility (cha nges in flexibi lity rela tive to the baseline) for natural inciso rs a fter remova l of co ro na l tissues [ 1-1 1c]: tota l
remova l of p roximal enamel (second col umn) does not a ffect crown rig id ity, but total remova l of facial enamel [last
co lumn] is most ad verse; %), 76, a nd YJ ind ica te the a mount o f fac ia l ena mel thickness removed . Tooth preparati on by
total facial enamel remova l w as simulated in FEM (1- 1 1b to 1-1 1e); the plot o f ta ngentia l stresses (red line) proceed s
for each tooth al o ng the pa latal surface from cervica l to incisal; a dra matic increase in tensile stresses is found in the
rema ining enamel of the pa lata l fossa (too th loaded palatal ly wi th 5 0 N onto incisa l edge, defo rmation factor l Ox
on mVM stress ma pp ing) (1- 1 1b, 1-1 1c]. The o rig ina l profile of ta ngentia l stress is co mpletely recovered after bond­
ing a feldspathic por cela in veneer (1-11 d ); the use of composite a s the veneering material a llows only par tial recov­
ery of stiffness (1- 1 1e]. The orig ina l stress distrib ution of the natural tooth (gray line) is reported as a reference .
48
..
- - - -
-----
I
-
-
-
-
­
1
I
UND ERSTAND IN G THE INTA CT TO OT H AN D T HE B IOM IM ETIC PRINCI PLE
BIOMIMETICS APPLIED TO MECHANICS
A natural tooth's uniq ue ab ility to with stand
recovery of tooth stiffness, wh ic h wa s not pos-
masticatory a nd thermal loads d uring a lifetime
is the result of the structural a nd physical inter-
sib le w ith a ma lga m fillings .
rela tionship between an extremely hard tissue
(ename l) and a more pliable tissue (dentin). The
How ever, it should be rememb ered that the
recog nition of this relati o nship has led to a
g rowing co ncern about the bio mecha nica l
respo nse o f intact hard tissue to restorati ve pro-
physica l properties o f co mposite resins are
so mewha t limited. One limita tion is the elastic
modu lus, w hich fo r a n a verage microfil led
cedures. The situation has been parti cularly
hybrid can be up to 80% lower [a p proxima tely
10 to 20 G Pa) tha n the elastic mod ulus of
informative about po sterior teeth. A sign ificant
step wa s made w hen researcher s focused their
ename l (a pproxima tely 80 G Pa). A s mentioned
before, the ena mel shell p roves to be instru-
attentio n o n the b io mec ha nica l side effects of
am al gam restoratio ns (ie, cuspa l fractures a nd
mental in the w ay stresses are d istrib uted w ithin
the crown.
crac ked tooth synoro rncs]." >" In respon se, a
number of stud ies2i-24 analyzing biophysica l
When a more flexible materia l rep laces the
stress a nd stra in have shown the fol lOWing :
•
Resto ra tive pro cedure s ca n ma ke the tooth
crow n more deformable.
• The tooth ca n be streng thened by inc reasing
its resistance to cro wn deformation .
ena mel shell, only par tia l recovery of crow n
rigi d ity ca n be expec ted .
Studies conducted by Reeh et 01 26 and Reeh and
ROSS6 showed a recovery of 76% to 88% in
crown stiffness aher the placement of co mposite
resto rations a nd co mposite veneers. O n the
Based on these principles, tooth reinfo rcement
w as obtained by some form
of
full o r par tia l
other hand , it wa s demonstra ted that crow n
rig id ity ca n be recovered 100% w hen feld-
co verage (extracoro na l streng thening ) a t the
expense of the intac t too th substance .25-27
spathi c
Today, adhesi ve technolog y has pro ved its efficiency in Simu ltaneou sly reestab lishing cro w n
os w ith porcelain veneer restorations (see Fig 11 1d ).7 Teeth resto red with de ntin-bo nded po rce-
stiffness a nd o llow inq maximum preserva tio n o f
lain
the remain ing hard tissu e (intraco rona l streng thening ).28-30 These stud ies demonstrated tha t
bio mimetic be havior w hen sub jected to cumula-
bon d ed
com posi te restoration s pe rmit the
porcela in (elastic modulu s approxi-
mately 70 GPa) is used as an ename l substitute,
ve neers
a lso
proved
the ir
absolu te
tive restorative procedures" and ca tastrophic
testing [Fig 1-1 2).
FIGURE 1-12 : CATASTROPHIC FAILURE OF INTACT INCISORS VERSUS INCISORS RESTORED WITH DENTIN BONDED PORCELAIN VENEERS . * Natural (1 -120, 1-12b) and veneered (1 -1 2c, 1-12dji ncisors have been subjected to cumulative restora tive procedures (endo dontic treatment fol low ed by C lass 3 restorations) fol low ed by simulated ag ing (thermocycling lOOOx at SOC to 55°C) and impac t testing (catastrophic palata l load at incisal edge,
notched palatal surface). Note the similar fracture pattern. Both teeth behaved like ca ntilever beams. Due to stress distribution w ithin the tooth, cracks d id not propag ate horizontally. but obl iquely by respecting the facial compressive
stress area (see Fi g 1-5b) . Crack prop ag ation in the restored tooth (1 -12c , 1-12dl; how ever, followed a characteristic path that precisely avoid s the dentin-bonded veneer. A sig nifica nt a mount of dentin cohesively foi led (1-1 2d l, leaving the restoration intact and uncracked. The restoration wa s made of feldspathic porcelain.
*The veneered specimen in Figs 1-12c' and 1-12d w as initially prepa red by compl etely removing enamel from the buccal surface, reducinq the
incisa l edge i .5 to 2 mm, and creating a mo derate interdental w rep ping (penetrating half of the proximal surface). A special den tin bo nd ing proced ure w as then used ? The extensive removal of enamel and de ntin exposure is not a tradi tiona l app roa ch for veneer preparation. This risky exper'
imental design w as chosen to creole a maximum cha tlenge for the teath-restora tio n complex. .
.
-
J
-
--
-
-
-
1
I U NDERSTA NDIN G TH E INTA CT TO OT H A ND THE
B IOM IM ETIC PR INCI PLE
Fro m Figs 1-1 1 a nd 1- 12 , it is ea sy to understa nd the impa ct o f the b io mime tic princ ip le,
The closest substitute fo r den tin is represented
whic h log ica lly lead s to a nalysis of w hich materia ls ca n best simulate the behav io r of enam el
by hybrid co mposites, due to thei r similar elastic modulus. M ost co mpo sites, howeve r, develop shrinkage stresses a nd exhibi t high ther-
a nd dentin. Part of this approac h is represented
in Tabl e 1-1 . Simple feldspa thic po rcelain ca n
mal expa nsio n (up to 4x the thermal expan sion
o f the natural tooth or po rcela in). This wi ll ra ise
be compared to ename l. It is important to mention that :
sign ifican t problems w hen co mbining thin layers
Most den tal ceram ics ha ve a higher ultimate
of
porcela in a nd luting composites, espec ia lly
w hen thick d ie spacers (> 20 0 ~ m ) are used
dur ing the fabricat ion of the restora tions (see Fig
tensile streng th than natural enam el. H ig hstrength material s such as reinfo rced cerami cs
8-13) .42-4.1
do not seem to be requ ired to comply w ith the
The most cha lleng ing parameter is the simula-
b io mimetic principle.
tion of the DEj, the co mp lexity of w hich seems
to be o ut of reach. 12 , 14 Nevertheless, prog ress
W ear properties (a brasiveness) of feldspathic
in adhesion has a llowed improvement in the
materia ls, how ever, remain a co ncern." espe-
integr ity of the tooth-resto rati o n interface (Figs 1-
cia lly fo r full cover age o f lateral segm ents of the
d entitio n, as we ll as inlay s and on lays . In this
12ca nd 1-12d ;seea lsoFig 8-11 ).
reg ard , bioa c tive g lass ce ram ics mig ht bring
sig nifica nt imp rove ments in the near future. O n
Applying the biomimetic princ ip le, it seems
reaso nabl e to co nclude that new restorati ve
the other ha nd :
approac hes sho uld aim to crea te not the
Po rcelain veneers migh t no t subject o pposi ng
stro ngest restora tion but ra ther a restorat ion
that is co mpati ble w ith the mechanical, bio-
teeth to significant wear prob lems because o f
the conservative nature o f the treatment : the
logi c , and optica l properties of underly ing
dental tissues.
pa latal a nd funcl io nal side
of the
tooth often
rema ins intact .
FIGURE 1-1 2 (CONTINUED) . The in vitro simula lio n in 1-12a to 1-12d a ppears to be clinically releva nt, os illustrated
by this case of fracture, a crack started in the pa lata l co ncavi ly and pro paga ted o bliquely tow ard the facial aspect
o f the root ( 1-12e, 1-1 2 f; courtesy o f Dr L. N . Bara tieri et ol , Fed eral Universily o f Santa Ca tar ina). The similar ily
betvveen 1-1 2a a nd 1-1 21 is striking . Such a clinica l situation is not a necdo tal, as demonstrated by Baratie ri et a l.45
Table 1-1 Physical properties of dental hard tissues and correspo nd ing bio materials *
Thermal
expan sion
coefficient
Ultimate
tensile
streng th
(MPa)
Dental
hard
tissue
Elastic
modulus
(GPa)
Enamel
80"
17 32
1033
Dentin
1437
1 ]32
105 37
(x 10-6/ o q
* All values ore approxima tions.
Correspond ing
material
Elastic
modulus
Therma l
expansion
coefficient
Ultimate
tensile
strength
Feldspathic ceramic s
60-70'<
13- 1635
25-40 36
Hybrid composites
10-20'8
20-40 39
40-60 40
I U NDERSTA NDING TH E I NTA CT T OOT H A ND TH E BI O MI METI C PRIN CIPL E
1
19 . Came ron C Eo The crac ked tooth syndrome: Add ito na l
findings. J Am Dent Assoc 19 7 6 ;9 3 :9 71-9 7 5 .
References
1. M elcher AH, H olowka S, Pharoa h M , Lewin PK Noninvasive co mputed tomogra phy and Ihree-dimensional
reco nstruction of the dentition of a 2 ,80o-year-old Egyptian mummy exhibiting extensive dental disease A mJ Phys
Anthro pol 19 9 7 ; 103:329-3 40
2 . M agne P, Mag ne M. Porcelain veneers at the turn of the
millenium: A w indow to bio mimetics [in French]. Real C lin
199 8 ;93 29-34 3 .
20 . Cove l VVT, Kelsey W P, Blankenau Rj. An in vivo study of
cuspal fraclure. J Prosthet Dent 19 85 ;5 3 :3 8-4 2 .
2 1. Hood JAA . M ethods to improve fracture resistance of teeth
[discussion]. In: Vanherle G, Smith DC (eds). International
SympOSium o n Posterior Composite Resin Restorative
Materials S, Paul: M innesota M ining & M a nufac turing,
19 8544 3-45 0.
3. Stokes AA N, Hood JAA . Impact fracture characteristics of
intact a nd crow ned human central incisors J Or al Reha bil
] 993 ;2 0 :89 -95 .
2 2 . Douglas W H . M ethods to improve fracture resistance of
teeth. In: Va nherle G , Smith DC leds) International Symposium on Posterior Composite Resin Restorative Materials. St Paul : Minn esota Mining & M a nufac turing, 19 85
4 3 3- 4 4 1.
4 . G ordo nJE. Stra in energy and modern fracture mechanics.
In: Gordon JE (ed) Structures: Why Things Do n't Fall
Down . Ne w York: Do Ca po Press, 1978 :70-1 0 9.
2 3 . Morin DL, Douglas WH , Cross M , Delong R Biophysica l
stress a nalysis of restored teeth: Experimental strain measurements. Dent M ater 198 8;4:41-48.
5 . Dougla s W Ho The esthetic motif in research a nd clinical
practice. Q uintessence Int 19 89;20 :739-745 .
24 . M orin DL, C ross M, Voller VR, Dougla s W H, Delong R.
Biophysical stress ana lysis of restored teeth : M odeling a nd
a na lysis. Dent Mater 19 8 8 ;4 :7 7-84.
6. Reeh ES, Ross GK . Tooth stiffness w ith co mposite veneers:
A strain gauge and finite element evaluation. Dent M ater
19 94 ; 10 :24 7- 2 5 2 .
7 . Magne P, Dougla s WH o Porcelain veneers: Dentin bonding optimization and biomimetic recovery of the crow n. Int
J Prosthodont 19 9 9 ; 12 : 11 1-1 21.
25 . M alcolm Pj, Hood JAA The effect of cast restorations in
red ucing cusp flexibili ty in restored teeth. J Dent Res 19 71 ;
56:D 207 .
26 . Reeh ES, Doug las W H, M esser HH . Stiffness of endodo ntically-treated teeth related to restoration technique. J Dent
Res 19 89 ;6 8: 154 0-1 544 .
8 . Magne P, Dougla s W H o C umulafive effect of successive
restorative procedures on anterior crown flexure: Intact versus veneered inci sors. Q uintessence Int 2000;3 ] :
5- 18 .
27 . Linn J, M esser HH . Effect of restorative proced ures on the
strength o f endodontically treated molar s. J Endod
1994 ;2 0 :479-4 85
9 . Mogne P, Versluis A, Douglas W H Rationalization of
incisor shape: Experimental-n umerical analysis. J Prosthet
Dent 19 9 9 ;81 :3 45-3 5 5 .
28 . Morin D, Delong R, Douglas W Ho C usp reinforcement by
the acid-etch technique. J Dent Res 1984 ;6 31 07510 7 8 .
lODe Groot R, Peters (vICRB, De Haan YM , Dop GJ, Plasschaert AJM . Failure stress criteria for co mposite resin. J
Dent Res 19 87; 66174 8-1 7 52.
29 . McCullock Aj, Smith BG . In vitro studies of cusp reinforcement w ith adhesive restorative material. Br Dent J
19 86 ; 161 :4 50-4 5 2.
1 1. G ere JM , Timoshenko SP. Mechanics of M aterials, ed 3.
London: Chapman & Hall, 19 91 301-3 0 8.
30. M acPherso n LC , Smith BG . Reinforcement of w eakened
cusps by adhesive restorative materials: A n in-vitro study.
Br Dent J 19 9 5 ; 17 8 :34 1-344 .
12 . Lin C P, Douglos W H, Erlandsen SL. Sca nning electron
microscopy of type I collagen at the de ntin-ena mel junction
of human teeth. J Histochem Cytochem 19 9 3 ;4 1:3 8 13 8 8.
13 . Sieber C. Voyage: Visions in C olor a nd Form. C hicago :
Q uintessence, 19 94.
14 . Lin C P, Douglas W H o Structure-property relatio ns and
crack resistance at the bovine dentin-enamel junction. J
Dent Res 19 94 ;73 : 1072 -107 8 .
15. Kraus BS, Jordan RE , Abrams L. Histo logy of the teeth and
their investing structures. In: Kraus BS, Abra ms L, Jorda n RE
[eds], Dental Anatomy a nd O cclusion: A Study of the Masticatory System. Ba ltimo re: Wi lliams and W ilkins, ] 969 :
135.
16 . Luke DA, Lucas PW . The sig nificance o f cusps. J O ral
Rehabil 19 8 3; 10 : 19 7-2 0 6.
17 . M acho G A, Berner M E. Enamel thickness of human maxillary molars reconsidered. Am J Phys Anthropo l 19 9 3;
.
9 2 : ] 89-200.
18 . C ameron C Eo The cracked tooth syndrome. J Am Dent
Assoc ] 9 64;68 :405- 4 ] 1.
31 . Crai g RG, Peyton FA, Johnson DW . Com pressive pro perties of ena mel, dental cements, and go ld . J Dent Res
1961 ;4 0 :936- 945.
32 . Xu HC , Liu VVY, W a ng T. M easurement of thermo I expa nsion coefficient of human teeth. Aust Dent J 1989 ;34:
5 30-5 35 .
3 3 . Bow en RL, Rodriquez M S Tensile strength and modulus of
elasticity of tooth structure and several restorative materials.
J Am Dent Assoc 1962 ;64 378-3 87
34 . Seg hi RR, Denry I, Bra jevic F. Effects of ion exchange on
hardness a nd fracture toughness of dental ceramics. Int J
Prosthodont 19 9 2;5 :30 9-3 14 .
35 . W hitlock RP, TeskJA, W idera GEO , Holmes A, Parry EE.
C onside ration of some factors influencing compatibility of
dental porcelains and alloys. Part I. Thermo-physical properlies. In: Precious M etals ] 9 8 1. [Proceeding s from the
4i h International Precious M eta ls C onference, Toronto ,
June 19 80 ] . W illow dale, O ntar io : Perga mon Press
Canada , 19 81 :27 3-2 8 2 .
54
- - ------
-=
---
- - ------- ----==------=-==-=--==--=
J=
_
'
~ --
~
_
-
-
--------
.
1_
U NDER STA NDI NG THE I NTA CT T OOTH A ND THE B IOM IM ETIC PR IN CIPLE
I1
36. Leone EF, Fa irhurst C W Bond strength and mechanica l
4 1. M ag ne P, O h WS, Pinlcdo M R, Delang R W ear of
proper ties of denta l porce lain enamels J Prosthet Dent
enamel and veneering ceramics oher la bora to ry a nd
chairside finishing proced ures. J Proslhe! Dent 1999 ;82:
1967 ;18:155- 159 .
37. So no H, Ci ucchi B, Matthews W G , Pashley DH . Ten sile
prop erties of mineralized a nd de mineralized human and
bo vine de ntin. J Dent Res 1994 ;731205- 121 1.
38 . Wi llems G, La mbrechts P, Braem M, Celis jf Vanherle G.
A clo ssll lco tion of dental co mposites according to their
mo rphol ogi ca l a nd mec hanica l characteristics Denl
Mater 199 2;8:3 10- 31 9
66 9- 679 .
42. Bargh i N , Berry TG . Post-bonding crack formatio n in
po rcelain veneers. J Esthet Dent 1997;9:51 -54
4 3. Magne P, Kwon KP , Belser U, Hodges JS, Doug las W Ho
C rack propensity of porcelain la minate veneers: A simula ted o peratory eva lualion. J Prosthel Denl 1999;81 '
39 . Versluis A, Doug las W H, Sakag uchi PL. Therma l expa n-
327-33 4 .
44 . Mag ne P, Versluis A, Doug las WH Effect of luting com-
sion coeffic ient o f dental co mpo sites measured w ith strain
gauges. Dent Mater 1996; 12 290-294
posite shrinkag e and thermal loads on the stress dislribu lion in porce lai n la minate veneers. J Prosthet Denl 1999;
40 . Eld iw any M , Powe rsJM, George LA. M echa nical prope rties of d irect and post-cured co mposites. A m J Dent 199 3;
6 :222-224 .
8 1:33 5-344.
45 . Baratieri LN , et 01(eds). Esthetics: Direct Adhesive Res toration on Fractured Anterior Teelh. S60 Paula: Qu intessence, 19 88 :135- 205 .
55
..
.
~
--
-
- - -
---~
--~-----
-
-.
------ -
-- ----------__
~_
-====---~
"
--------
--
.
1
CHAPTER
2
NATURAL ORAL ESTHETICS
Esthetic restorati ve procedures ca n be mastered co nsistently o nly if bo th cl inician a nd ce ra mist are intimately fami liar w ith the ba sic principles of natural o ra l esthetics. The most importa nt criteria have been selected a nd are
pre sented in this cha pter in the form
success. This overview
of esthetic
of
a checklist for esthetic resto ra tive
pri nc ipl es is not limited to only tooth
esthetics but includes g ingi va l esthetics a nd the final esthetic integ ra tio n
into the frame of the smile, face , a nd, more genera lly, the indi vidu al .
-
-
.
==- t=
-
=
I
2
N ATUR AL O RA L ESTHET ICS
GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS
Fundamental esthetic criteria
a p p ro ach. Duplicating the spec imens wi th den ta l stone ca n fa c ilitate the a p precia tio n o f form
A di d a ctic p resentatio n o f o ra l esthetics sho uld
a nd texture. The teeth themselves can be ob-
first incl ud e objective fund a menta l cri teria
served
relat ed to soft an d hard tissues, w hich can ea s-
effects of light reflection . Finall y, select ive gri nd-
ily be co ntrol led using a n esthetic c hec klist' (Fig
ing and sectio ning have been used to c rea te
2-1).
access to the internal structures of a tooth a nd
in tra nsilluminati o n to de termine the
to permit a be tter understand ing o f cer ta in
Both d enta l a nd g ingiva l esthetics a ct tog ether
intense coloration s inside the tissues, such a s
to p rovid e a smile with harm o ny a nd bal-
d entinal developm ental lobes and zo nes
ance . A defect in the surround ing tissues ca n-
dentin inli ltrotio ns."
not be compe nsated by the quali ty o f the de ntal restora tio n and vic e versa.
Co nfig uration
of
of
inc isa l ed ges a s w ell a s their
relati onsh ip wi th the low er lip line an d smile
of the
The fundamen tal cri teria related to g ingi val
symmetry are determinan ts for the age
esthetics are w ell estob lished."? Both g ing iva l
smile a nd are incl ud ed a mo ng ob jective cr ite-
health a s well as gi ngi val morphology have
ria
[12 to 14).
been included a mong the first param eters to be
eva luated (c riteria 1, 2 / 4/ an d 5 ).
Subjective esthetic integration
A s far a s c ha rac teristics of teeth a re conce rned ,
thei r relali ve
importance a mong
o b jective
param eters hav e been priori tize d a s fol low s:
The param eters mentio ned a bov e can be co ntrol led , yet not lead to final esthetic restora tive
success. As a matter
1. Form a nd d imension (criteria
7 a nd 8 )
2 . C haracteriza tio n (criterion
9L
especia lly
opalescence, translucency, and tra nsparency
of
fact, the esthetic o ut-
come depends o n the harm oni ous integration
of
the funda mental esthetic criteria w ith the smile
a nd , ultima tely, the c haract er of a n indivi duo] .'
3 . Surface texture (crite rion 10 )
4 . Color (criterio n 1 1), espec ia lly fluo rescence
a nd brig htness
Add itio na l c riteria must be considered a t this
stage, such a s var ia tio ns in too th fo rm, arrangement a nd
Analytic o bserva tio n
of
extrac ted teeth and nat-
ural teeth in vivo is essential to this didactic
posi tio ning , an d
lengths, a s w ell as fine-tuning
relative c row n
of
the so-call ed
nega tive space.
58
--
--------
----
-
--
. .
.
---=--~
-_
Fundamental objective criteria
1.
.2 .
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
G ingival health
Interdental closure
Tooth ax is
Zenith of the g ingiva l co ntour
Balance of the g ingiva l levels
Level of the interdental co ntact
Rela tive tooth dimensio ns
8 . Basic features of tooth form
. 9 . Tooth charaCterization
10. Surface texture
1 1. Color
12. Incisal edge co nfiguration
13 . Low er lip line
14. Smile symmetry
Subjective ·criteria (esthetic integration)
Variatio ns in tooth form
Tooth arrangement and po sitioning
Relative crown length
Negative space
FIGURE 2-1 :THE ESTHETIC CHECKLI ST (Modified from Belser i with permission.)
~
,
-.....------
------
-
2
I N ATU RAL
OR A L EST HETI CS
FUNDAMENTAL CRITERIA
Criterion 1: Gingival health
Hea lthy soft tissu es sho uld di splay the followi ng
elements (Fig 2-20 )6 :
• The free g ingiva extends from the free gingiva l
margin (co ro na l) to the gingiva l g roove [a pical) a nd has a co ral pin k, dull surface.
• The attac hed g ingiva extends fro m the free
ging ival g roove (co ro na l) to the mucogin gival
[unction and has a co ral pink color a nd firm
texture (keratinized and attached to underlying
alveo lar bone]. w ith a n "o ra nge-peel" a ppearanc e present in 30 % to 40% of adults.
• The alveolar mucosa is a p ical to the mucogingiv a l junction! w ith a loose [mo bile) a nd dark
red aspec t.
During ag ing , ging ival heal th can be maintai ned by o ptima l o ral hygiene7 and periodo ntal thera py if necessary. To ma intain gingiva l
health, atrauma tic clini ca l procedures should be
used d uring tooth prepara tio n and impression
ta king [see Figs 6 -4 a nd 6-23L respec ting the
so-ca lled biologi c wid th, 8.9 and prepara tion marg ins should be precise and provisional restorations adequa tely adapted . Finally! the axia l co ntours of the final resto rations as well as the
nature of the restorative materia l chosen w ill
influence gi ngival health. I 0-1 6
Criterion 2: Interdental closure
In the juvenil e hea lthy g ing iva , interd enta l
spaces are clo sed by the sca llop ing of the tissues formin g the pap illae (Fig 2-2b). Tra nsient
negl ect of ora l hygi ene a nd pe riodon tal d isease can a lter this g ingi va l arch itec ture (eg !
loss of interdenta l pa pi llae ; see Figs 4 -5, 5-4 ,
an d 6 -2 2) . It may be possibl e to co mpensate
fo r loss of a ttachmen t a nd o pened emb rasures
by restorati ve mea ns al on e (see Fig 4 -5 ).
FIGURE 2-2 : GINGIVAL ESTHETICS AND TOOTH-GINGIVA RELATIONSHIPS. Basic components o f healthy ging iva: free g ingi va (FGL gin gival groove (while dotted line), attached g ingiva (AGL mucog ingiv al junction (block dolled line), and alveola r mucosa [AM) [2-2a). Due to the presence of the interde nlal papillae, the free g ingival marg in
follows a sca lloped course that closes the g ing ival embrasure [2-2 b, arrows).
60
-
--
------
-
I
-
.
- -
- ~
1.
GINGIVAL
HEALTH
........ ...................... ....... .... ........ .........
2.
-
--,;;
- =- -----=--=------
INTERDENTAL
CLOSURE
2
I N ATURAL
O RAL ESTHET ICS
Criterion 3: Tooth oxis
Criterion 4: Zenith of the gingival
contour
The main axis of the tooth incli nes d istally in the
inci soapi cal direction . This inclina tio n seeming ly increases from the centra l incisor s to the
ca nines (Fig 2-2 c). This criterio n is mention ed a t
this stag e bec ause tooth positi on /morphology
and g ing iva l contour are interdepend ent, as
show n in cri terion 4 .
Variati ons in tooth axis and midline are fre-
The gin gi val zenith [the most a pical po int of the
g ing iva l outline] usually lies d ista l to the center
o f the tooth (Fi g 2-2d l, w hich results in a n
eccentric triang ular tooth neck. Accord ing to
Rufena cht,2 this rule does not alw ays a pply to
maxi llary lateral inciso rs or mand ibular inci sor s,
for wh ich the gin gi val zen ith can al so be centered al ong the too th axis.
quent a nd do not a lw a ys compromise the
final esthetic outcome (see Fig 2-14c).
Tooth preparations for full-cro wn
o r venee r
restorations must respect this ba sic sha pe o f the
g ing iva (see Fig 6 -7 ). A dequ a te pla cement of
the deflection cord is instrum ental in that matter.
FIG 2-2 (CONTINU ED). Each cri terion is demonstrated on the reference dentition (2-2c , left) a nd o n a w o rn den titio n (2-2c, rig ht). The central incisor a xis (white dolled lines) is co mpared with the ax is o f the lateral incisor and ca nine
(black lines); the di stoapi ca l inclin atio n tends to increase fro m the central inci sors to the can ines (2-2 c). The zenith of
the g ing ival margin lies d ista l in reference to the too th axis (2-2d ).
62
----------.
-
-1-----
-
--------
-~
3.
4 ,'
Z EN I THO F
TOOT H
THE
AX IS
G IN G I V A Le 0 N TO U R
T T
-
i
,
-
---------------
2
I
N ATUR AL OR AL ESTHETIC S
Cr iter ion 5: Balance of gingival levels
The gingiva l contour of lateral inc isors sho uld
lie so mewhat more coronal compared to that of
centra l incisors and canines (Fig 2-2e ). This
id eal situation represents the Closs 1 g ing iva l
height 2
Criterion 6 : Level of interdental
contact .
The position of interd ental co ntac t is related to
tooth positio n and morphol og y. W hereas it is
most cor ona l between centra l incisors, it tends
to prog ress apica lly from the incisors tow ard
the posterior dentiti o n (Fig 2-2g ).
M oderate var iation s related to this c riterio n
are frequent. In the Cl oss 2 gi ng iva l height,
the gingival contour of lateral incisors lies apica l to that of ce ntra l inci sors and ca nines; for
a har monious result, lateral inciso rs with more
a pica l ging iva must feature a shorter inci sal
edge (Fig 2-2f). C oncomita ntly, su ch lateral
inci sors should slig htly ove rlap the ce ntra l incisors, provi ding a natural variety to denta l
co mpositio n (acc ording to Rufenacht2) .
.'
::~
In case of seve re deform ity, plastic periodon tal
surgery must be used to o ptimize gin gi val co n.
tours for the restorat ive treatment. 17
Criterion 7: Relative tooth dimensions
Due to individua l var ia tio ns a nd proxima l!
incisa l too th w ear, it is d ifficult to provide
"mag ic numbe rs " to define ad eq uate tooth
dimension . Relative propor tio nali ty of teeth ha s
lo ng been co mpar ed w ith cla ssic elements of
art and archi tecture . As a result, mathe mat ic
theorem s such as the "golden propor tion "1 8.19
an d the "g olden perce ntage"20 have been proposed in the determinati on of so-ca lled idea l
mesiod istal spaces (Fig 2-3b) . These rules w ere
a pplied to the "apparent" size, as view ed
di rectly from the anterior.
FIG URE 2-2 (CO NTIN UED). The average horizontal level of the g ingiva is low er for lateral incisors co mpared to
ca nines and centra l inc isors, de fining the C loss 1 g ing ival height (2-2e) Var iatio ns in this criterion are co mmon, as
illustrated in this prosthetic ca se (2-2 f] view ed before a nd after replace ment of preexisting full ce ramic crow ns in the
maxillary arch . The g ing ival co ntour around the rignt la\eral inciso r is normal (C lass 1), but the high g ing iva l co nto ur
around the left lateral incisor (gingi val height Cla ss 2) had to be ba la nced by a relatively sho rter incisal edg e co mpore d to the preexistinq crown . Interdental co ntacts progress cervica lly from the central incisors to the ca nines (2-2g) .
64
-
-
-
-------
---
-
-
-
-
~
-~
5.
6 .
B A LAN C E O F THE
GIN G I V A L LE V E LS.
LEV E L 0 F I N T E R DE N T AL
CO N.T AC T
-
-- - -- - - - - - - -
-
.
2
I
NATUR AL OR AL E STHETI CS
of
Perce ption
symmetry, domin a nce, and pro-
po rtio n, how ever, is a lso strongly related to
tooth height, crown wi dth/length ratios , transition line ang les, and other" special effects" of
tooth form [see c r i terio ~ 8). As a result, strict
a pplica tio n of the golden proportion has proved
to be too strong in de ntistry, as stated by Lombar di, who was the first to mention gol den numbers for a nterio r teeth. IS The unreal istic nature of
the golden rule w as co nfirmed in measurements
by Presto n 21 Strict ad herence to this o rig ina l rule
would resu ll ill exce ssive narrowness of the maxillary arch and "co mpressio n" of la teral segments, as illustrated in Fig 2-3b.
Aga in, it must be po inted o ut that the perceived
w idth of a tooth is highly influenced by the
sho pe a nd espec ially the interincisal ang les.
A ltho ugh it is rare to ob serve gol den numbers
in a nterior teeth (Fig 2-30 ], la teral inci sors a nd
ca nines featu re ope ned interincisa l ang les that
naturally generate the pe rcep tion of nar rowness. These teeth appear narrow er than they
rea lly are, therefore providing the illusion of the
gol den pro portion, which is do minated by the
cen tral incisors.
As stated by Lombardi , IS "Just as unity is the
prime requisite of a good co mposition, dominance is the prime requisite to provide unity."
The mouth is the dominant feature of the face
by virtue of its size. By the some toke n, the
central incisor is the domina nt tooth of the
smile. It goes w ithout saying that domin ance
must be measured according to personal ity.
FIGURE 2-3: PROPORTIONS AND DIMENSIONS OF AN TERIOR TEETH. Measurements have been mode accord .ing to Ihe apparent width o f teeth, as viewed d irectly from the anterior. The original, untouched view o f the central
incisor to co nine doe s not co nform to the gol den prop ortio n 12-30). The so me image was d ig itally modi fied to generate golden numbers (2-3b) . The proporti on of the lateral incisor is now 1: 1.6 18 wi th the central incisor (which is
realistic for only 17% of individua ls, accordi ng to Preston"] a nd 1:0. 6 18 wi th the con ine (this ra tio w as not found in
any ind ividual, accordi ng to Preston"]. The size of the central incisor was maintained as in 2-30. The go lden proportion is unrealistic because it would result in on abnormally narrow moxillorv arch (endognathic or micrognathic).
66
=------ ---. -------------=
-
-
-~
-
-
---
==-==- - - -===---------=----=-=
-
-
-
~=
..
~
•
~
.
I N ATUR A L O RA L ESTHETI CS
2
Average mea surements ma d e o n norm a l w hite
to
fema les. The crown
sub jec ts offer significa nt help in defining relative
proved to be the mo st sta ble reference becau se
tooth d imensions." The find ing s of Sterrett et al
22
it show s minimal var ia tion s be tw een g e nd er o r
can be used to d etermine a working approximat ion of fina l too th w id th o r leng th (Fig 2-3c ].
be tw een teeth (Fig 2-3 c ). This roi o is essential
It appears that gen era l tooth d ime nsion s are not
trated in Fig 2-3d . A nother fa ctor that ca n sig-
in the perception
of
Wid th/ heig ht ratio
tooth d imen sion s as illus-
of
correlated to the sub ject sta ture (height ). The
nifica ntly affect the percep tio n
same stud y 22 revea led a grea ter moxill ory a nterior tooth w id th an d leng th for ma les compared
a nd po sitio n in the fro ntal pla ne is the brightness
7.
2·'· ~
R E LAT I V E
of the o b jec t [Fig
TO O T H
DI M
2-3e; see
dime nsion s
a lso c riterio n
11).
EN SI ON S
W id th/ he ig ht rati o s
FIGURE 2-3 (CONTINUED) . C row n w idth/heig ht ratios are identica l fo r inciso rs and ca nines w ithin the same gen-
der." A co mparison o f the ratios betwee n males a nd females found no d ifferences, exce pt for the ca nines (2-3cl,
w hich tend to be lo nger in males (see a lso 2-3 f). Teeth o f eq ual w idth but di fferent ratios a ppear to have d ifferent
wi dths (2-3d) In two teeth of the same size, the lighter tooth wi ll ap pear larg er a nd closer than the darker tooth (23e).
68
---------=-----
-
~
.---------
----
-
-----
------~~--
2
I
NATU RA L ORA L ESTHETICS
A dditi onal results from Sterrett et
0122 (Fig
2-3f)
along wi th other conclusions-" lea d to the following q uide lines for ma xillar y a nterio r teeth:
• Crown width/ length' rat ios of inciso rs a nd
ca nines are identica l (ran ge 77% to 86%) .22
• Ce ntra l inciso rs a nd canin es have similar
crow n height s (varia tion of only a bo ut 0 .5
mrn], o n ove rage of 1 to 1.5 mm longe r
than lateral inci so rs.
Ce ntro ] incisors are w ider tha n latera l inci-
In prosth odontic pa tients w ith a ltered maxillar y
teeth, mand ibular inci sors are often left intact
sors by abou t 2 to 3 mm.
• Central inci sors are w ider than ca nines by
about 1 to 1.5 mm.
an d can be of sign ifica nt help in redefining the
di mension of the maxillar y centra l inciso rs, as
illustrated in Fig 2-3g .
•
• Cani nes are w ider than lateral inciso rs by
a bout 1 to 1.5 mm.
FIGURE 2-3 (CONTINUED) . Average clinica l crow n height and wid th measured by Sterrett et 01 22 (2-3f, rows 1 and
2), a nd crow n w id th proposed by Reynolds 23 for abutment selection in fixed prosthodonti cs (2-3f, row 3). Actual measurements of anatomic crown heig hl a nd w idth (2-3f, row 4) of the extracted teeth pictured in this figure (all from the so me
patient). Mandi bular teeth ca n help to define the ap proxima te maxillary incisor w idth. The w id th of the maxillary centra l
incisor is o bta ined by add ing the mesiodista l diame ter of the mandi bular central incisor plus half that of the mand ibular
la tera l incisor (2-3g ).
70
-
-
- ------------
1
~
===---:--:--~-~
-
-
-
-
-
-
--
Avera ge crown width .
Average crow n height
1 1.0
- ---
- - - --=-- -
- - --
-
-
-
-
-
-
9.0
~
-
- - - - --
-
6.7
- -- - -- - - --- - - - - - - -
- - - - - .-
-
-
-
I N AT URAL
2
ORA L E STHETI CS
Criterion 8: Basic features of tooth
form
Realistic inci sor sha pe is a lso related to the
a na tomy of the interpr oximal ridg es, al so
called transition line a ng les, w hic h represent
stra teg ic ligh t-refl ecting area s (Fig s 2-4b and
2-4 c). These vertica l and o bl ique crests do
Central incisors. The rnoxillorv ce ntra l and latera l inci sors are anatomi cally and functionally
similar, being used for shear ing and cutting .
Incisors are charac terized as follows24 (Fi g 24 ):
• The mesial o utline
of
not influence the crown o utline; how ever, the
apparent tooth length and w id th ca n be ea sily modified by the length, positio n, and d irection of the transition line angles [see Fig 7-
10).
the crown ca n be
stra ig ht or slig htly co nvex for maxillary incisors,
w ith a more round ed mesioincisa l angl e for
lateral incisors.
• The d istal o utline of the crow n is more co nvex
co mpared to the mesial outline. Its curvature
and inclina tion can vary signi fica ntly according to the typa l form of the tooth (see Fig 2-5).
The distoincisa l ang le is rounded .
Erosion and wear tend to accelerate agin g ,
softening this characteristic architecture of the
facia l surface a nd possibly resulting in sig nificant co ro nal vol ume loss and disa strous esthetic
a nd mechani cal a lterations (see Fi g 5-7) .
• The inci sa l outline of the crow n can be irregular or rounded but usually beco mes more regular a nd straig ht because of functional wear.
8 .
T O OTH
F O RM
,,
-I.
72
.. .
----
- --
,
-
---
..-
-
-
=
- - .- - - - - --
----=----- ~ - - -----==- ----- -
~
\ ......
FIGURE 2-4: CENTRAL INCISOR OUTLINE AND TRANSITION LINE ANGLES . Typical facial aspects of central incisors [2-4a) : straig ht mesial outline (straight black arrows}, slightly rounded incisal edge (straight white arrows), curved
distal outline (curved black arrows). Distoincisal ang les are more op en than mesioincisal angles (plain white lines).
Tangential view of central incisor facia l surfac es (2-4 b): the mesial transition line angle (single arrows) is more prominent compared to the softer distal ridge (triple arrows). Intraoral photog raphy wi th a dual-poi nt lig ht (see device in Fig
5-14e) outlines the mesial crest (2-4c, single arrows a nd dotted area].
.
- -
-- ~
-
••=---=--=---=
~----------------
-
- - - -
.
-
-
-
2
I NATUR A L O RA L EST HETICS
Due to numerous ind ivid ual var ia tions (F ig 2-5 ),
the incisor sha pe to be restored can be derived
from neigh boring or a ntagonistic teeth, as well
as previous study ca sts. A bove a ll, because of
the subiecuvny of tooth shape, the final goa l
must be tested in the form of a d iagnostic
waxup and corresponding intraoral mock-up 25.26
to be approved by the patient [see Figs 5-7 to
5- 12) .
There are three main typal tooth forms (Fi g 2-
5)27:
• Square (F ig 2-5a ): Straight outline w ith marked
a nd parallel transition line a ngles and lobes.
• O vo id (F ig 2-5b): Rou nded outline wi th
smooth transition line an gles (no lobes) showing incisal a nd ce rvica l co nvergence ("bar rel"
shap e).
• Tria ng ular (Fig 2-5c]: Straight outline with
marked transition line angles and lobes showing ce rvical convergence (distinct inclination
of the dista l ou tline] ,
For full-crown coverage, prefab rica ted wax
veneers ba sed o n these natural typal forms (eg ,
Fo rmUp, Schuler Dental ) can be used to facil ita te and enhance the a nterior waxup technique . This method ("veneered waxup") allo w s
the production of a high-end full waxup in a
record time (about 25 minutes for six anterior
teetnj .25 f or porce\ail'\ veneers, the origil'\o\ tooth
shape can o ften be derived from the preexi sting
tooth substance; thus the d ia gnostic waxup is
ge nerally limited to the addi tion of wax over the
preliminar y ca st (see Figs 5-7 e to 5-7 k).
FIGURE 2-5 : EXTREME VARIATIONS OF INCISOR OUTLINE-TYPAL TOOTH FORMS. In the square Iype of too th,
the mesial and di stal outlines are straig ht and paralle l and def ine a large cervica l area ; the incisal edge is stra ight
or slightly curved (2-50) . In the ovoid Iype, both mesial and d istal outlines are curved and define a narrow cervica l
area; the incisal edge is narrow and occasional ly rounded (2-5b) . In the triangular Iype, fhe distal outline is not paralle l to the mesial outline but clea rly inclined , defining a narrow cervical area ; the incisal edg e is w ide and slightly
curved [2-5 c).
74
- ------==--===--------=-=--- = - = - - - ---:: .
~
-
- - - - - - - - - - --- ----- -- -- - -
..
".
--
~
-
--
-
-
2
I N ATU RA L ORA L
ESTHET ICS
Lateral incisors. As previously mentioned, lateral incisors bear a close resemblance to ce ntra l
incisors (in basic o utline a nd transitio n line
ang les), which they supp lement in function . They
d iffer ma inly by their red uced size (see Fig 2-3 f)
and more ro unded mesio incisa l angl e (Fi g 2-6 ).
Latera l incisors, how ever, can show the g reatest
varia tio n in fo rm of a ll teeth, a nd it is not unco mmo n for ind ividual s to have peg-shape d latera l
incisors (see Fig 4 -4 a ) o r other ano ma lies such
as a po inted tubercule a nd a deep develo pmenta l groove extending ling ua lly dow n the
root."
Canines. The maxi llary can ine is characterized
by a series of curves or orcs" (Fi g 2-6 ).
This special anatomy (w edge sha pel seems to
offset functional forces a nd provides this tooth
w ith a unique abi lity to resist nonaxia l loa ds.
• The mesia l o utline of the crown ca n be slightly
co nvex and resemble that of the lateral incisor. The mesial tra nsition line angle is well
develo ped in the form of a small mesia l lobe .
• The distal outline o f the crown is flat o r co ncave a nd resembles that of the premolar.
• The incisal outline of the crown is marked by
the cusp tip, w hich is in line w ith the ce nter of
the root (unw o rn tooth). In the w o rn ca nine, the
d istal slope of the tip is convex and well
curved a nd d iffers from the shorter a nd co ncave mesial slope .
Ca nines are "naturally reinforced teeth," being
thicker labioli ngual ly due to the increased
develo pment of the ci ngulum co mpared to that
of inc isors (see Fig 1-3 ).
FIGURE 2-6 : LATERAL INCISOR AND CANINE OUTLINES AND TRANSITION LINE ANGLES . Ta ngential view s of
ca nine (left) and la teral incisor (right) fac ial surfaces (2-60). Similar to cenlra l incisors, the mesial ridge (Sing le arrows)
is present a nd prominent on both teeth; the d istal aspect (triple arrows) is much softer. Intraoral photogra phy w ith a
dua l-point lig ht (see device in Fig 5·1 4e) outlines the mesial developmental ridges (2-6b, single arrows and dotted
areos).
76
~
----
---
---
---
---
-
---
.
- --
-----
I N ATUR AL
2
OR AL ESTHETI CS
range of natural light w av eleng ths (red-oran ge
tones) and reflect the others (blue-violet tones).
Criterion 9: Tooth characterizal"ion
Ch aracterization implies the phenomenon of reflection/tran smission of light (opalescence , trans-
Opalescence
paren cy, translucency), as w ell as intense co lo ra tion (spo ts, fissures, dentin lobes, zones of
w hen co mpared to the atmosphe re of the earth
(Fig 2-7a) . Beca use of the presence of small
dentin infiltration) and specific effects of form
(attrition , abrasion). These charac teristics deter-
part icles like water droplets that interac t w ith
mine the perceived age and character
of a tooth.
O pa lesce nce is a n optical property of enamel
and refers to the ability to transmit a certain
of
ena mel is easily understood
the sunlig ht, the sky ca n appear either blue (at
noon) or red (a t sunrise and sunset) . A similar
effect occurs a t the inc isal edge, due to the
sca tteri ng
of light
a t the level
of the microscop ic
hydroxyapatite cry stals (Fig 2-7b).
Earth
Daylight
78
---
--
--------
===:1=- ~r
-
-
---
= - -=
"'W-
-
-
-
----
------
------
-
=----=--=~------
--
....
o
PALE . S C E NC E
T R A NS PAR E N C Y
FIGURE 2-7: OPALESCENCE AND TRANSPARENCY (ACCORDING TO YAMAMOT02B) . The sky appears redorange in the mo rning or in the evening a nd blue during the day (210). The physical mechanism behind thisph enomenon ca n be expla ined by small part icles suspended in the atmosph ere (water' dro plets) that allow diffractiOn of
sunlig ht, especi ally short wavelengths (blue-violet) (right). Most of these short wovelenqths are not able, to penetrate
the thick layer of atmosphere created ,by the o bliq ue moidence of sunlight found .at sunrise and sunset. Only longer
w avelengths (red-orange) are able to "travel" tangentially to the earth ((eft). Enamel, especi ally at the incisal ed ge and
the .DEj, o cts similarly as the "atmosphere of the tooth" 12-7 b). It normally dis plays . a bl ~ i sh tra nsparenteffect under
d irec t lig hting .1 2-7c, arrows) or an orange opalesce nt tone under indir ect light (2-7b, arr o w s).
_
1=
=
-
-
I~~-----
-
-
.
2
I N ATURAL O RA L ESTHETI CS
Translucency is the appeara nce between co mplete o pacity (like ivory) and co mplete tra nsparency (like q loss].' ? Teeth, especi a lly incisal
ed ges, show intense characteristics integrating
the w ide range of effects defined by translucency and transparency.
At o ne end of the spectrum, a s illustrated in
Fig s 2-7b and 2-7 c , area s of bluish tran spar ency are present, al so showinq sig nifica nt
o pa lescence. Spec ific po rcela ins have bee n
D EN T IN
design ed to simula te these "ena mel" effects
(see C ha pter 7) . A t the other end of the spectrum, more o pa q ue "d entin" effects are fo und
at the inci sal edge as revea led by abra sion/
a ttritio n. The inner structure o f the d enlin co re
an d its co mplex arc hitecture bec ome visible in
the fo rm of dentin rays, den tin mamelons,
de ntin infiltra tions, etc (Fig 2-8 ). Dentin fluo rescence (see criterio n 11 ) is essentia l to these
kinds of effec ts.
EFFE CT S
80
-
-
___
-
-
~ ~F -
----==-==_"" - . l - .
~-
=---- -
~
-
- -
-- ----=- --- - - ---=------=--=-- - = - - =-=--=------=
-
DENTI N
DENTIN
MAMELONS
INFILTRATION
FIGURE 2-8: DENTIN EFFECTS. The most complex structural elements of the incisal edge can be better understood
by grind ing the palatal enamel of extracted teeth (2-8a, 2-8c, 2-8e). Vertical pa latal attrition of the incisal edge
emp hasizes the underlying dentin rays (2-8a, 2-8b). Dentin architecture usually shows three well-orga nized denti n
momelo ns (2-8c , arrovv'headsl. These structures ore often seen in the presence of transparent enamel (2-8d). Dentin
infiltration effects can also be noted ; their direction is precisely def ined by the convergence of the dentin rays, in
median a nd apica l directions; external denti n staining typica lly results from enamel edge chipping (2-8e, arrowhead)
or progressive wear.
-
-
-.
-. .--
-
-
-
~~----
-
----
2 r N ATU RAL OR AL ESTHETI CS
Criterion
10: Surface texture
Surface texture
is clo sely
related
• The
ve rtica l com pone nt is d efined by the
sup erfic ia l seg me nta tio n o f the tooth in dif-
to
color
ferent d evel opmental lobes (F ig s 2-9c and 2-
ge).
through brightness, a parameter that it influenc es directly. The marked surface topography
o f yo ung teeth ca uses them to refle ct more light
In resto ra tive d ent istry (either du ring compos ite
and appear br ighter (Fig 2-90 ). Texture dimin-
resin o r cera mic fini shing L reprod uction
ishes with age , resulling in decreased light
such details requires a spec ific chronology: the
reflection a nd d ar ker teeth.
ve rtical c haracteristics must be a chi eved first,
of
hor iz ontal growth lines bein g repr odu ced o nly
The determining elements
of texture are essen-
tiall y oriented hor izontally and vertica lly over
at the end of surface fin ishing. Rubbi ng ar tic ulating paper aga inst
the
to oth surfac e helps to
v isua lize these effe cts [Fig s 2-9d and 2-ge).
the labial tooth surface .
• The hor izontal component is a direct result of
~E; \\\E;'::, 0\ ~a'N\\\ \'s\\\e-s 0\ \<-.E;\ i\\.lS\, \E;G'0 \\\~
fine parallel stripes o n the ena mel surface,
a lso ca lled peri kymata IFigs 2-90 , 2-9b, and
2-9d ).
10 .
Surface texture an d mo rphology can al so be
used to genera te illusive effe cts of size (com-
"VGIE; t\~'::, 'l~"D G\\6. 'l-Ci e-\. ~~\~~~ 'II10\\lSj\\\~\
components w ill make a tooth a p pear larger
or sho rter; mcrked venice) components W'III
make a tooth appear lo ng e r or narr ower.
S U R FAC E
T E XT U R E
82
--
- --- - - -- - - -. , - - - - - ---- =
~
.C=
=
~~--
- -
---- - - - -- - - - - -- -- --
=----
.
-~--~-
HORIZONTAL
VERTICAL
FIGURE 2-9: BASIC COMPONENTS OF SURFACE TEXTURE. The horizontal component of surface texture is clearly
illustrated on incisors at the time of eruption (2-9a) and often remains on aged teeth 12-9b). A different inclination of
the light source reveals a well-defined vertical architecture on the same aged tooth (2-9c). Note that the tooth in 2-9b
appears larger than the tooth in 2-9c (an illusio n generated by the effect of segmentation). Selective rubbing of articulating paper helps to reveal the horizontal texture (2-9d , light rubbing) and the vertical lobes 12-ge, more aggressive
rubbing).
------
~ -;~ ~
- -;; - =
~
=
-- ----'..
- - -
- -
-
J
-
.
2
I N ATURA L OR A L ESTH ETICS
Value. As previo usly mentioned , b righ tness
Criterion 1 1: Color
Colo r is too o ften co nsidered a maj o r element
in the esthetic success o f a restoratio n. How ever, a minor error in color might not be noticed
if the other criteria have been we ll respected .
O f the three co mpo nents of color,30 value
(a lso ca lled luminosity or brigh tness) is most
influenti al, 18.31 fol lo wed by c hro ma (also
ca lled saturation o r intensity) a nd hue (the
color itself or " name" of the co lor).
Hue. Hue is not of critica l importance beca use
of the low co ncentration of hues in de ntal
shades. However, the perception of hue w ill be
inf luenced by e nv iro nmental factor s. For
instance , Lo mbard i suggested that the try-in in
female pa tients be made w hile lipstick is on,
due to the strong effect of co mplementary colors" : for instance, intense red w ill log ica lly ca ll
for g reen. By the same token, teeth next to red
lipstick may a ppear g reen (Figs 2-1 0 a a nd 2l Ob). The tooth must therefore co nta in enoug h
red o r pink pigments to neutralize the unde sired
greeni sh tinge.
might be the most important co mpo nent of
colo r l 8 ,3 1 and must be pr ioritized du ring shad e
selectio n (see Fig s 5 - 15 to 5 - 17) . In ad d ition ,
it is intimate ly co rrelated to surface texture .
It is qu ite co mmo n to o bserve a w ide ra ng e of
brightne ss w ithin the same tooth crown (F igs 210c to 2-10 e). Genera lly, the middle third is
the brighte st, fo llow ed by the cervica l third. The
incisal third often di spla ys the low est va lue,
w hich is expla ined by the hig her transparency
an d lig ht abs o rption of this area .
Brig htness ca n al so be used to crea te illusio ns
of size a nd position , Brighter teeth will ge nerally appear larg er and closer (see Fig 2-3e) .
It must be emphasized that va lue and chro ma
are inversely related . An increase in chroma
(eg , root dentin ) log ically induces a decrease
in brig htness. Th is acc ou nts for the loss of va lue
in the ce rvica l third , w hich is influenced by root
dentin, co mpare d to the midd le third of the
crown.
FIGURE 2-10: NATURAL TOOTH HUE At'-ID BRIGHTNESS. Red lipstick ca n make teeth a ppea r green [compare 2lOa and 2- 1Obi The middle third of the inci sor crown o ften represents the brig htest area , fol lowed by the cervica l
third; the incisa l third usually features the low est va lue due to light a bsorptio n thro ugh transparency and tra nslucency
[2- 10 cl . Intact teeth in vivo ca n show extreme var ia tio ns in brig htness w ithin the crown; the middle third remains the
brig htest (2- 1Od , 2-10e).
84
-
~_
- -
~
- __ .---f-
~
-
--
-
-
-_-
- -
~~
-
~
==-
-_---
.- - --- - - --
.----.-
~~
COL 0
R
.~.~> ' ~ :.~ :~ .~~~;~~.~.~: . ~ .?~ o:~ ~~.~ ?:~;~~~~~r~,~ :! '.
-
--
- ~.
...
.
-
--
:-
-.
B R GHT NE S S
~
,
-----.-------=-- - -------
-
---
--
~
-
- -
-
-=
--
---
.
---
-----
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- - - - - - - - -
~-
2
I NATU RAL
0 RAL ESTH ETI CS
Fluorescence. Because it make s teeth brighter
and w hiter in day lig ht,32 fluorescence is an
add itio na l para meter to be con sidered . It is
defined as the ability to absorb radiant energy
and emit it in the for m o f a d ifferent w a veleng th.29 Dentin a ppears to be three times more
fluorescent than ename l, which g enera tes an
" interna l luminescence ." The latter is instrumental in the rend ering o f a natura l tooth 's vita l
appearance , also ca lled "vital escen ce" (Fig 21Of). Certain ce ramic materia ls ha ve bee n
optimized w ith regard to this specific aspect
(Crea tion , Klema; see Figs 7 -9p to 7-9 r and 7-
9qq. )
However, it is very di fficu lt to fa ithfully reprod uce the luminescence spec tra [colo r and intensity) of enamel and dent in [Figs 2-1 Og to 2-1 Oil,
as demo nstrated by in vitro spectra l studies. 33,34
Rare-earth elements [ie . europiu m, terbium, cerium, and
ytterbium ) are currently used os
lumino pho res, but none definitely reproduces
the blue-mauve fluo rescence of natural teeth (Fig
2-1 Oil · For the clinician , a simple but efficient
w ay to app roximately evalu ate the fluo rescenc e
of a restoration in vivo (or a material) is to check
its optical interac tion w ith a modified light
source, such as a blac k lig ht (Figs 2-1Of, 2-10i,
and 2-1011 .35 This light source is often used to
create specia l light effects.
FIGURE 2-10 [CONTINUED) . Even though it is less saturated and may appear brighter than dentin (2- 10 f, leftl,
enamel actually shows less luminescence than the root (2- 1Of, right). A pa tient presents w ith sta ined teeth and preexisting resto ratio ns (2-1 Og). Black-and-white photographs (2-1 Oh) and bla ck light [2- 1Oil are useful far a quick eva luation of restorative material s. The deficiency of the old C lass 4 com posite resin restoratio n on the maxillary righ t centra l inci sor is eviden t, as is natural nonfluorescent staining on cervica l surface s. Another patien t presents with a
porcela in-fused-to-metaI crown o n the rig ht centra l inci so r, na tural left central inciso r, a nd a porcela in veneer o n the
lert lateral incisor (2-1Oil ; even thoug h luminescence of cera mic materia ls seems ea sier 10 control , variatio ns w ith the
blue-ma uve fluorescence of natura l teeth is still pe rceptib le.
86
-
-
--~-
.--- y-
---
~=~
---
-
- - - -
- - - --
- -- -
- -
-
------~~
-
-
-=
-
-
- - - - - - --=-===-------=
=
-
.
.
-
- -- -
-
.
F L U O RE S CE N C
t.~
-
~
-
- -
-
-- -
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ----
~-=----------=-===
---
.
-----
--
--
I
2
N ATURA L O RA L E ST H ET ICS
Criterion 12: Incisal edge
configuration
Config uration
of
11a, right). In the yo ung pa tient, inci sal edges
incisa l edges is a critica l
parame ter. W hen not a pp ropria tely des igned ,
incisal edges can make teeth loo k ar tificia l.
There are three compon ents to con sider.
General contour. In the old and middle-aged
patient, the course of the inc isal ed ges is often
a straigh t line or a n inverted curve that g ener-
are configured in a "g ull" shape due to the
o rig ina l relative dimen sions of teeth (Fig 2- 1 1a,
left, and 2-1 1b). It is extremely important to
note the inci sal edges of mand ibular teeth,
w hic h are often left intact a nd ca n prov ide significant assistance in co nfigu ring maxillary
teeth, eg , by creating a compa tible w ear pa ttern (Fig 2-1 1c). It is possible to rejuvenate or
ag e the smile by transforming the incisa l edge
co nfiguration accord ing to Fig 2-1 1a.
a tes unifo rmity and flatness w ithin the smile (2-
1 2 .
I N CI S AL
E D GE S
"G ull" shape
Inverted curve
FIGURE 2-1 1: CONTOUR OF INCISAL EDGES. Aged dentitions present flat, worn inciso rs (2- 1 1a, right), as op posed
to young denti tions that d isplay incisa l edg es w ith a gull-shope co nfig uratio n (2-1 1a, left) . The incisal edge of lateral
incisors is 0 .5 to 1.5 mm a bove the stra ig ht line join ing the most incisal po int of centra l incisors a nd ca nines (2-1 1b)
The incisal w ear pa ttern of a ntagonistic teeth must a lso be used as a gUide. A harmonious space ca n be seen between
ma ndibular and rnoxillo rv teeth wh en the pa tient ope ns the mo uth slig htly from the edge-to-edge position (2-11 c).
88
-
-
-
-
~--
--
-~=----===~=-=- - - - - - - - --
--------
----~
~--
-
-
-
----
---
-
-
-
-
-
- -_ .
- - -- -
-------=---=-=
I
~-
=-=----===___~
----
--------- -
- --- - - - - - - - - - ~
-----.
-
I N ATUR A L OR A L ESTHETI CS
2
Interincisal angles (see also criterio n 8 ).
Mesioin c isal a nd d istoin ci sa l angles have a
g rea t influence o n the definitio n of the so-ca lled
neg ative space, ie, ~h e dark spa ce betwee n
maxillary and mandibular teeth during laug hter
and mouth opening. An o b jec tive rule
["inverted V") is de scribed in Fig 2-11 d . Interinci sal a ng les ca n be used to crea te illusive
effects of d imensio n: ro unded inc isal edges
w ill co mpensa te for teeth that are too larg e,
and straig ht, worn edges (eventua lly notched)
are indica ted for incisor s that are too narrow.
It is importa nt to remembe r, how ever, tha t negative spaces have a n obvious subjecti ve co mponen t [see Fi g 2- 14 ).
Thickness. Esth etica lly pleasing incisors disp lay
a thin a nd de lica te edge . Thick incisal edges
ca n ma ke teeth look o ld , artificia l, a nd bulky.
I N TE RI N CI S A L
ANGL E S
Narrow inverted V
Asymmetrical inverted V
Wide inverted V
2 l ]c
FIGURE 2-11 (CONTINUED): INVERTED V RULE . lnterincisol relationships. Note the dark ("negative") space between
maxillary and mandibular teeth [2-11d).
90
-
-
-
-
----
~
--'-----
-
._ -
-
- - - - -
-
-------
----
--- - --
-
-
-
-
-- --- - -
-
-----
. -
----
----
-
-
NAT U RA L ORA L E STHETIC S
Criterion 13: Lower lipline
The ultimate co ntrol of crown
inc isa l edge co nfig ura tion is
har monious association wi th
ing moderate smiling . Lateral
form , length , and
revea led by their
the lower lip dur-
I
2
tog ingi val rela tionship . Dentogi ng iva l defects
wi ll not be visible in patients with a low upper
lip line, which becomes a co ver fo r poo r dentistry.
inci sors rema in a t
a distan ce of 0 .5 to 1.5 mm from the lip,
w hereas centra l incisors and canin es are in
close relationship with the lipline (Fig 2-1 2a) .
C oi ncidence of incisal edges w ith the lower
lip is essential for a plea sing smile. Proximal
co ntacts, inci sal edges, and lower lip define
parallel lines (Fig 2-12a), w hich usually connote hor rn o nv."
Criterion 14: Smile symmetry
Smile symmetry refers to the relative ly symmetric
placem ent of the co rners of the mo uth in the ve rtical plane, w hich can be d irectly derived from
the bipup illary line (Fig 2-1 3a )2 It is a prerequisite to the esthetic appra isal of the smile .
An unsig htly space between the lower lip and
ce ntra l inciso rs is typical in den titions that are
prone to accelera ted agi ng [Fig 2-1 2b), w hich
results in the loss of the co hesive fo rces of the
dentofa cial co mpositio n.2
The occlusa l line shou ld con fo rm to the co mmissural line, even though slight a symmetries
wi thin the dental seg ment are de sira ble (Fig
2-1 3 b). There are always varia tions between
both sides of the human facet a nd it is contrary to na ture to be lieve that absolute symmetry is required .
The upper lip contour ca n vary co nsidera bly
a nd does not appear to be as relevant to the
plea sing aspec t of the smile . Indi vid ual s wi th a
high upp er lip will display large amounts of ging iva l tissues, w hich ca n require more restorarive efforts to respect and o ptimize the den-
The same can be sa id about the midl ine axis,
the precise placement of w hich is of ten overestimated . Facial a nd dental midl ines co inc ide in
70% of peo ple; maxil lary and mand ibular midlines fa il to co incid e in al most three fourths of
the populati on .36
FIGURE 2-12 (NEXT PAGE) : LOWER LIP AS A GUIDE TO THE DE NTOFACIAL COMPOSITION . There is a d irect
co inc idence of interde nta l con tac ts (solid white line), inc isa l edges [dotted white line, a lso calle d the smile line), a nd
lower lip (dotted black line) that provides coh esive forces to the de ntofa cia l compositio n as de fined by Rufen ach t2 (212a). This equi libiru m is bro ken by an inverted incisal edge co nfig ura tio n, whi ch prod uces visua l tension (2- 12b; see
Fig s 6-23 , 6 -28 , and 8-2 for treatment of this case).
91
-
-----""------
- -
-
----------- - - - - - - -- -
----
-
- --
-
- --
-
-
3
LOW E R
p
N E
FIGURE 2-13 : COINCIDENCE OF FACIAL LANDMARKS. The commissural line (dotted black line, defined by the
co rners of the mouth) and the occl usal line (solid black line, defi ned by the cusp tips) must co incide with the bi pupil­
lory line (dotted white line); the latter is an important landmark to be referred to whe n defin ing the sym metry ol .the
smile (2-130) . Slight asymmetries in lip morphology and tooth position/a rrangement do not affect the ba lance of this
smile, wh ich features many other fundamental objective criteria of the esthetic checklist (2-13b, same indivi dual as in
2-13 0).
.
2
I NATUR AL ORAL ESTH ETICS
ESTHETIC INTEGRATION
Extremely useful "spec io l effects" have been
de scribed by Co ldstein" to solve difficult
esthetic p roblems, showing that "o bj ective" har­
mony of the smile can be crea ted by ta king into
account a ll of the fundament a l o b jective criteria
described in this chapter.
G loba l harmony of the final result, how ever,
remains sub jective and w ill depend o n the inte­
g ration o f these par am eters in relation to the
pat ient's smile, face sha pe, age, and charac­
ter.25 Final tooth ar ra nge ment, position , an d
relative length , as w ell as the d eterminatio n of
incisal embra sures a nd neg ative space, are
importa nt to sub jective integrati on o f the
restorati on. Each of these parameters can vary
w ithin the sa me pati ent accordin g to the cul­
tural environm ent. It is o ften difficult to define
w ith preci sion w hich co mponents are the key
elements of total esthetic integrat ion, w hic h
ca n be d efi ned as the co nformity wi th the ind i­
vid ua l's perso nali ty (Fig 2- 14 ). Therefor e, a
co mbined tech nical an d ar tistic effo rt is neces­
sar y a nd depends not only o n the intuitio n and
sensitivity of the operator, but also o n the
ca paci ty to accurately perceive the uniqu e
and dynami c character o f a patient.
Indi vidual s w ith poo r preexisting den tal w ork
are the most cha lleng ing to add ress beca use
they have lost their ow n perception of esthetics.
They must be "rep rog rammed" w ith d ifferent
diag nostic templat es that w ill allow the progres­
sive recovery of esthetic land marks (see Chapter
5 ). In this way, clini cian s and lab orator y techni­
cian s should not be afraid to add ress the sub­
jective components of the smile, know ing that:
The final treatment o b jec tive wi ll a lw ays result
from a co mbi nation of know ledge a nd a ppli­
ca tio n of the afo rementio ned o b jective crite­
ria , time, a nd the patient's inp ut.
FIGURE 2-14 : EXTREME VARIATIONS OF OBJECTIVE ESTHETIC CRITERIA IN RELATION TO PERSONALITY. These
three ind ivid ua ls present esthetica lly plea sing smiles that co nfo rm w ith Iheir pe rsona lity. So me elements o f their smiles,
how ever, largely d iffer from the a fo rementioned ob jective criteria : extreme shift betvveen ce ntra l and lateral inci sor
edges (2-140 ), irregular nega tive space a nd too th rotations (2 -1 4bl, a nd co nverge nt root axes an d prominen t cen­
trals [2-14c).
94
-----
----
.
- --
-
--
-
-
-
-.
--
I.
­
-
-.
---
---
----
---
- .
­
SEN SUA LI T Y
" .
CHARACTER
F ,A N T .A S Y
"
,
-
,
.
­
-
.'
\'
,
-----".­
2
I N ATUR AL
O RAL ESTHETIC S
Refe rences
1. Belser Ue. Esthetics checklist for the fixed prosthesis. Part
II: Biscuit-bake try-in In: Scharer P, Ri nn lA , Kop p FR (eds) .
Esthetic Guidelines for Restorative Dentistry. Chicago:
Quin tessence, 1982 188- )92.
2. I~ufena cht C R. Fundamenfals of Esthetics. Berlin: Q uintes­
sence, 1990:67-1 34 .
3. Chiche G, Pinouh A. Artistic and scientific principles
ap plied to esthetic dentistry. In Chiche G , Pinault A.
Esthetics of Anterior Fixed Prosthodontics. C hicago : Q uin­
tessence, 1994: 13-32.
4. Sieber e. Voyage: Visio ns in Co lor and Form. Berlin:
Q uintessence, 1994
5. M ag ne P, M ag ne M , Belser U. Natural and resto rative
oral eslheli cs. Part I: Rationale and basic strateg ies for suc­
cess ful esthetic rehabilitation s. j Esthet Dent 199 3;5 :
161-1 7 3.
6. Lindhe j, Korring T. Anatomy of the periodo ntium-Gin­
giva . In: Lindhe j , Karring T, Lang NP reds]. C linical Peri­
odo ntoloqy and Implant Dentistry. C op enhagen: Munk s­
goard , 1997:21-24 .
7 . Axelsson P, Lindhej . Effect of controlled oral hygiene pro­
cedures on corie s and periodontal diseases in ad ulis. j
C lin Period ontol 19 81 ;8:239-24 8
8. G arg iulo AW, W entz FM , O rba n B. Dimensions and rela­
lions of the dentoging ival junction in humans. j Periodon­
101 1961 ,32 261 -267.
9 . Ing ber j S, Rose LF, Co slet jG. The "biolog ic width " A con­
cept in periodo ntics and restorative dentistry. Alpha
O megan 1977 ; 10 :6 2- 65 .
10 loe HL, Silness j S. Tissue reactions to string packs used in
fixed restorations. j Prosthet Dent 1963 ; 13.318 -32 3.
1 1. Silness J Fixed prosthod ontics and period ontal health.
Denl Clin North Am 1980 ;24:317-330.
12. G oodacre CJ Gingival esthetics. j Prosthet Dent 1990 ;
64 : 1-12.
13. Kopp FR . Esthetic principl es for full crown restorations Port
I: Tooth preparati on. j Esthet Dent 199 3;5 :25- 28 .
14. Mag ne P, M ag ne iV\, Belser U. Natural and restora tive
o ral esthetics. Part III: Fixed par/ia l dentures. j Esthet Dent
1994;6 :14-21 .
15. M agne P, M agne M , Belser U. Impressions and esthetic
rehabilitati on. The preparatory w ork, clinical procedures
and materia ls. Schwe iz Mona tsschr Zahnmed 199 5;
105 : 130 2-1 316 .
16 . Reeves W G . Restorative margin place ment a nd peri­
od ontal health. j Prosthet Dent 1991 ;66 :733- 73 6 .
17. Hess D, M ag ne P, Belser U. Combined period ontal and
prosthetic treatment. Schwe iz M onatsschr Zahnmed
1994; 104 :1109- 1115 .
18 . Lombardi RE. The principles o f visual perception and their
clinical application to denture esthetics. j Proslhe! Dent
197 3;29:35 8-3 82.
19 . Levin EI. Dental esthetics and the go lden proportion. j Pros­
thet Dent 197 8;40244-25 2
20 . Snow SR. Esthetic smile analysis of moxillorv anterior tooth
width The golden percentage j Esthel Dent 1999 ; 1 I :
177- 184 .
2 1. Preston JD. The g olden p rop ortion revisite d J Esthet Dent
1993 ;5:247-25 ) .
22. Sterrettj D, O liver T, Robinson F, Fortson W , Knaak B, Rus­
se\1CM . Wid\h /\englh ralios of normal clinical crow ns of
the maxillary anterior dentition in man. j C lin Periodontol
1999 ;26 : 15 3-1 57.
23. Reynold s j M . Abutment selection fo r fixed prosthodontics.
j Prosthet Dent 196 8; 19:483-488 .
24 . Ash MM. W heeler's Dental Ana tomy, ed 7 . Ph iladelphia :
Sa unders, 199 3.
25 . M agne P, M ag ne M , Belser U. The dia gno stic template:
Key element of a comprehensive esthetic treatment con­
cept Int j Period ontic s Resto rative Dent 1996; 16 :
561-569 .
26 . M ag ne P, Dougla s W H o Additive co ntour of porcelain
veneers: A key element in enamel preservation, adhesion
and esthetic for the ag ing dentition. j Adhesive Dent
1999;1 81-91.
27 . Baratieri LN, et 01 (eds]. Esthetics : Direct Ad hesive Restora­
tions on Fractured Anterior Teeth, ed 2 . Sao Paulo : Q uin­
tessence, 1998 :33- 53.
28. Yama moto M . Une nouvelle evolution: La cerorniq ue
O pa l. En joeux cliniq ues et co nsideration de l'indice de
refraction relative. Art Technique Dentaires 199 0 ;1(1 ):
7-16 .
29 . The G lossary of Prosthodonlic Terms , ed 7. St Louis:
Mos by, 1999.
30 . Sproull Re. Co lor matching in dentistry. I. The three-dimen­
sional nature o f co lor. j Prosthet Dent 1973;29 :
416-424 .
3 1. Sproull Re. Color matching in dentistry. II. Practical appli­
cation s of the orga nization of color.
J
Prosthet Dent
1973;29 :556-566 .
32. Burdairon G . Abrege de rn oterioux dentaires, ed 2. Paris:
M asson, 1989:2 14-2 15.
33. Monsenego G , Burdairon G , C lerjoud B. Fluorescence of
dental porcela in. j Prosthet Dent 1993;69:106-1 ] 3.
34 . M onsenego G , Burdairon G , Po rte C , Naud e. Etude de
10 fluorescence de 10 porcelaine dentaire. Les Ca hiers Pro­
these 1990 ;70:79-85 .
35 . Magne P, Belser U Esthetic improvements and in vitro test­
ing of In-Ceram alumino and spinel! ceramic. Inl j Prostho­
dont 1997 ; 10 :459-466.
36. Miller EL, Bodd en W Rjr, j a mison He. A study of the rela­
tionship o f the de nIal midline to the facial median line. j
Prosthet Dent 1979;41 :657-660 .
37 . Goldstein RE . Esthetics in Dentistry. Philadelphia j .B lip­
pinco tt, 1976:4 25-455.
96
--~-
----
---~~~ - -- -
-
-
-
---
~----
---­
I
\
•
-
--..,--.~.
-
-
-
----
'
..
CHAPTER
3
ULTRACONSERVATIVE
TREATMENT OPTIONS
Althoug h bonded ce ramics seem to repre sent the ultimate bi ologic, func­
tional , mecha nical , a nd esthetic resto ration for co mpro mised a nterio r teeth
(see Fig 1-1 1), the number of ultraco nservative treatm ent strateg ies co ntin­
ues to grow , and the cli nic ian is faced w ith many esthetic trea tment moda l­
ities. The major di sad vantage of this evolutio n is that it beco mes increas·
ingly difficult to make the approp riate choic e in a g iven clini cal situa tio n.
O n the other hand , the avai labi lity of var io us treatment a lternati ves of ten
a llows for selectio n of a n a pproach tha t co nserves the maxi mum a mo unt
of intact tissue, which co mplies w ith the biomimetic principle. Treatm ent
o ptio ns should always first includ e the simplest procedures (such as chem­
ical treatments a nd freehand compos ites) a nd then prog ress toward more
sophistica ted ap proaches (la minate veneers an d full-coverag e cro w ns)
on ly w hen required . I This chapter's ai m is to determine w hich clin ical situ­
a tio ns d o not req uire ceram ic veneering and ca n be a pproached w ith ul­
traconservative techn ique s.
•
I
-
-------.---,- - _
-
I
-
-
. ­
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
------====-------
­
­
3
I ULTR A CON SERVATI VE T REATMENT O PTIONS
CHEMICAL TREATMENTS
A~ID
BIOMIMETICS
A mong ultracon servative modalities, chemical
w a lking blea ch tech nique (if the tooth has re­
treatments of disc olored teeth represent the most
biomimetic options d ue to the tota l conserva tion
of remainin g intact tooth substa nce.
ceived a root cana l treatment) ca n be repeated
to reestablish and maintain acceptable estheti cs
over several years. When the describe d meth­
Precise knowledge of these techn iq ues co m­
b ined with a w ell-defined selection of indi ca­
tions frequently all ow s more inva sive treatment
modalities to be avoided , an d , by the sa me
token, prevents any risk of violating the biome­
chani cs of the o rig ina l tooth.
A chemica l treatment can often be proposed as
a semi-definitive a lternative and allows a mo re
rad ica l approach to be postponed . A classic
exa mple is the yo ung pa tient w ith tra uma to
o ne o r more pe rma nent anterior teeth. Discol­
o ratio n may a ppear as a result of posttraumatic
pulp hemorrhage and , occasio nal ly, due to
physio logi c retraction of the co rona l and' rad ic­
ular extensio n of the pulp by a pposition of sec­
o ndary dentin. External bleaching (if the injured
tooth shows no symptoms and no rad iographic
evidence of pa tho logy) (Fig 3-1) or the interna l
ods no longer assure an esthetic and mechani­
ca l success, more invasive treatment modalities
such as porcelain veneers o r full-coverag e
crowns can be adopted. The latter are not rec­
ommended in children due to immature tooth
position and periodonti um.
For most vital teeth, che mica l treatme nt can be
proposed as the definitive the ra py for redu c­
tion of id iopa thic spo ts a nd sta ins o r d iffe rent
deg rees of fluorosis [Fig 3-2 ). W hitish and
brown ish sta ins ca n occasio na lly be elimi­
nated perman ently by co mbining blea chin g
w ith mechani cal abrasion treatments.
C hemical treatments have sig nifica ntly re­
duced the o rig ina l indication s for bonded ce­
ram ic restora tions o r other more inva sive a p­
proa ches.
FIGURE 3-1: SUCCESSFUL BLEACHING ON A VITAL TOOTH WITH POSTIRAUMATIC DISCOLORATION . Pre­
operati ve view (3-1a) The tooth shade w as tota lly recovered after bleach ing w ith carb amide peroxide in a niqhl­
guard (3-1b) A specia l approach was used to assu re bleaching in the cervical area [see de tails described in Fig 3­
3). The rad iogra ph show s physiologic pulp closure as a co nsequence of trauma (3-1c). The tooth di d no t reacl 10
trad itional vitality tests but proved positive to an electrica l test wi th a vita lity scon ner? (3- 1d , 3-1e).
FIGURE 3-2: PERMANENT REMOVAL OF BROWNISH FLUOROSIS STAINS. The diffu se brow nish di scolorati on (3­
2a) has pracl ica lly d isappeared after 2 10 3 w eeks of nig htguard bleaching . The pa tienl is 10 0 % satisfied , and no
Iuriher trea tment is desired (3-2b) . (Patient treated in co llabor ation wi th Dr O livier Duc, University o f G eneva .)
100
.
=======--------
,
-
--
-
~
,
-
- - - -
-
-
- - --
-------
------­
---I
.
~
- - - -------
-
­
- -
.~ =-=-
3
I
ULTRACONSERVATIVE TREATMENT OPTIONS
I I
NIGHTGUARD VITAL BLEACHING
Vital bleaching represents the most conserva­
tive esthelic treatment of a discolored vital
tooth.
It can be used for intrinsic organic discol­
orations of enamel and dentin, among others,
in patients treated with tetracycline during tooth
formation 3,4 Different techniques have been de­
I
in-office bleochinq." which suffered from exten­
gen. A transient and reversible inflammatory re­
of heat.
and Heymann started to investiqote the now
I
peroxide, already known as an oral antiseptic,
scribed in the literature, including the original
A turning point in chemical treatments was
reached in the late 1980s when Haywood
I
Nowadays, this technique has proved its effi­
ciencv." The bleaching agent, 10% carbamide
is applied as a viscous gel in a soft template,
o llowinq a continuous and slow release of oxy­
sive chair time and inconvenient use
I
well-known nightguard vital bleochlnq.' which
made chemical bleaching more accessible and
economical.
sponse of soft tissues and pulp is possible. The
technique is extremely versatile. Full dental
arches can be bleached (see Fig 3-2); local­
ized application is also possible for single-tooth
bleaching [Fig 3-3).
FIGURE 3-3: SEQUENTIAL NIGHTGUARD BLEACHING FOR MAXIMUM EFFECT IN THE CERVICAL AREA. The
posttraumatic discoloration is more intense cervically (3-3a; same patient as in Fig 3-1). After 2 weeks of single-tooth
nightguard bleaching, the incisal edge shade is recovered, but more bleaching is required in the cervical area [3­
3b) The splint must be modified by relining to prevent further bleaching in the incisal area. A retentive hole is drilled
through the facial aspect of the nightguard (3-3c]. A small amount of uncured composite resin is applied into the in­
cisal edge area of the splint (3-3dL then repositioned in the mouth and cured [3-3e) The splint is now tightly adapted
to the tooth except for the cervical area, where the bleaching agent will be selectively applied (3-3f).
102
I
I
I
-
-
-
----=-=-- _ ---- -
~----i--r--I -
_
­
--
-
--
--
~
_ _ _ __ _ _
,
_
------0;;;;==---
'- --= -
~
---=-------=-=--
--- ---­
-
-
----
---.
- --
-
:-=_..
­
-
- '~- -
3
I ULTRACONSERVATIVE
T REAT M ENT OPT IONS
Vital bleaching alone
Bleach ing a lone is effic ient for treating tetra cy­
cline staining? a nd endog enic tra uma tic discol­
oration due to physiobg ic pulp obstruction in
vita l teeth (Fig 3-3). It is a lso useful for removing
browni sh fluo rosis d iscoloratio ns (see Fig 3-2)1.8
or, classica lly, for brig htening a n intact de ntitio n
at a pa tient's req uest. W hitish fluorosis stains
might be eff iciently treated by bleaching a lone
without microa brasion (Fig 3-4 ). Vita l bleaching
alone, however, ca n requi re long er treotrnent
times to ach ieve the desired co lor in severe
cases of tetra cycl ine stain ing (up to 6 months)
or nicotine discolora tion [up to 3 months], or for
a tooth sta ined via de ntin infiltration, w hich fre­
que ntly beg ins at a w o rn inc isal edge .
Vital bleaching in conjunction
with another procedure
ca n co mplement bleac hing in cases of tra u­
matic di scoloration w hen so me tooth structure
has been lost, or to treat a hypoplastic perma­
nent tooth d iscolored due to trauma o r infection
of
the corresponding decid uous tooth . Seve re
di scolorat io n resistant to bleaching (eg , tetracy­
cl ine) is best addressed w ith lamina te veneers.
Even in these difficult ca ses, it is still sugge sted
to bleach first to lighten the base color of the
toot h a nd make the future restorations more life­
like.
A word of ca ution must be ernpncs .zed. As
origina lly revea led in a study by Titley et al ,9
bleach ing w ith pe roxides red uces ena mel ad­
hesio n strength s. A similar effect wa s de mon­
strated on the dentin bon d strength. 1O In a ll
cases, any bonding procedu re should be de­
laye d at least 2 weeks after completion of
blecch inq- to a llow leaching of pe roxide rem­
nants, especi ally fro m dentin, a nd shade sta­
bi lization.
This approac h can add ress other types of prob­
lems. Freehand p lacement of co mpos ite resin
FIGURE 3-3 (CONTINUED). Fin al result follOWing ad d itional cervical bleaching 13-3g). Th e overlay view shows the
preope rative situation.
FIGURE 3-4 : WHITE FLUOROSIS STAINS TREATED WITH BLEACHING ONLY. These "leo pordllke" teeth w ould be
id eal for microabr asion . Vital bleaching a lone, how ever, was sufficient to eliminate the contrast betwee n the previous
da rk a nd w hite a reas. The pa tient's primary expecta tion has been fulfilled, and no furlher treatment is desired .
104
-
-
-----.
------ ­
-
-
--
.... "
'"
,\
\.,'
•
II
3
I
U LT RACONS ERVAT IV E TRE ATMENT OPT IONS
MICROABRASION AND MEGABRASION
Microabrasion
Megabrasion
For lesions caused by moderate fluorosis and
The megabra sion techniqu e (also called mac­
involv ing supe rficia l ena mel, the original mi­
croab rasion techmo ue!' w o uld be indicated.
How ever, it is important to be aware that mi­
roabrasio n by Heymann et a1 12) is another ad­
croabrasion slig htly modifies the surface texture
of ena mel. Smoo th microabrad ed ena mel ab­
sorbs more lig ht, a nd , as a co nsequence, tooth
brightn ess is decreased and chroma is in­
creased . These negative side effects may be
easily co mpe nsated if mic roa brasion is co m­
bin ed w ith vita l blea chin g . If a tooth exhibits
mild fluo rosis, microa bras ion may not be
needed , beca use bleaching a lone is able to
provide good resu lts by decreasing the con trast
betwee n the w hite spots and the surro undi ng
tissues (Ta ble 3-1; see Fig 3-4).
I
I
junct treat ment moda lity that represents a
useful and predicta ble ap proac h for the elimi­
na tion of w hite opaque stains of enamel (Fig
3-5).1 2.13 Microab rasion is con tra ind icated in
the presence
of deep
d iscolorations ca used by
injury to developing teeth; the opaque area
ca n become more visible a fter treatment, re­
vea ling the internal aspect of the stai n. C lini­
cia ns are often intimidated by the id ea of me­
cha nica lly removing these stai ns. The most
effic ient w ay, how ever, to erase such w hite
ename l spots is by total mecha nica l erad ica tio n
of the lesion and subsequent restoratio n w ith a
neutral and tra nslucent composi te (Fig 3-5).
I
I
,]
,
,
I
I
I
I
I
I
FIGURE 3-5 : MEGABRASION FOR PERMANENT REMOVAL OF WH ITE ENAMEL SPOTS. Preo perative views [3­
5 0 , 3-5 b; same pa tient as in Figs 3-1 and 3-3) . Co a rse diam ond burs used at low speed (about 5 ,000 rpm) a llowe d
safe and con trolled removal of stained enamel (3-5c). Fine finishing was con traindica ted because a rough enamel
surface is a better substra te for adhesi on. A neutral compos ite (Herculite Incisa l, Kerr) w as ap plied along w ith the clas­
sic acid-etch technique [3-5 d ) Postoperative view af ter rehydration (3-5e).
106
-
-- --- . . _-
-.
.
-,
-
-
-
-L
~
"­
.
-
-
-----
-­
'0'0,
J
-­
-'-~--
_..._­ I-=--­
-
-
-----­ -
-
-­
-----­
-­
-
-
-----­
--­
._­
.
-----­
3
•
I
ULTRACONSERVATI V E T REAT ME NT O PT IO NS
1
M ega brasio n is indicated fo r these stains be­
cause the w hite opaq ue ena mel is not a good
substrate for a d hesio n. As a matter of fact, a
study by A nd rea sen et al 14 reported that the o ri­
g in of the sta in involves a d isturba nce in the
maturat ion stage of the tooth minera lization .
a p plica tio n of neutral , tra nslucent, a nd slig htly
fluorescent co mposite a llow s restorati on of the
ena mel surface morphology w itho ut overco n­
tourin g , lead ing to the most na tura l ap pear­
a nce of the tooth . As previously explained, the
brow nish aspect possibly associa ted w ith the
lesion may be elimin ated efficient ly w ith a pre­
Because the lesion usually doe s not extend into
liminary blea chi ng procedure.
den tin, on ly a limited amount of ename l must
be replaced with co mposites. Ab ove a ll, the
underlying intact dentin provide s the na tural o p­
tical effects of the tooth (co lor, intense dentin
Again, applicati on of ad hesive restora tive ma­
terials must be delayed fo r 2 w eeks (safety
elapsed time) a fter pre liminary bleachin g .6
lobes , fluorescence , etc). The simple freehand
Table 3-1 Ultraco nserva tive approac hes' a nd their indica tio ns
Microabrasion 11
Bleaching 5
Megabrasion 12,13
Yes*
Yes
No
Yes*
Yes
No
Injury during tooth development, white
and brow n spots and surface defects
No
Yest
Yes
Injury during toot h deve lopm ent,
white and brown spots
No
Yes'
Yes
Injury during t ooth development,
white spots
No
No
Yes
Clinical situation
Mild fluorosis, white and brown
Mild fluorosis, white
*Ind icated onl y when p relim inary b leaching does not p rovide a sat isfacto ry result .
' Prelim inary b leaching to elimi nate yello w-b rown disco lorati ons p rio r to me gab rasio n.
FIGURE 3-5 [CONTINUED). Fi nal result iollowmq rehyd ration (3-5f). The overlay view shows the preo pe rative situa­
tion. Another patient was treated w ith the sa me techniq ue, ie, w itho ut the use of colorants but only wi th the a pplica ­
tion of translucent composite that revea ls the inner opt ica l effects of den tin (3-5 g ). (Figure 3-5g is reprinted from
Magne l 3 with permission .)
108
I
3
U LTR A CO NSERVA T IV E TREAT M EN T O PT IO NS
NO NV ITA L WAL KI N G BLE ACH TE CHNI QUE
A n interna l d iscol o ratio n ca used by tra uma tic
extravasa tion of blood prod ucts or endod o ntic
materials can be treated by the a pp lica tion of
an oxi da nt pa ste/ a mixture of sodi um perbo­
rate/ and 3% to 30% hydrogen peroxid e dir ectly
placed in the pulp cha mber. Adequa te en­
dod o ntic treatment must preced e this procedure .
Endodo ntical ly treated teeth present impaired
crow n stiffness due to the structural loss of hard
tissues (see C hapter 1).15-1 7 At this stage / the
The lo ng-term success of interna l bleachin g can
be d isa ppo inting . 18 The success rate ca n fall
be low 50%. This proced ure has been associ ­
ated with a risk of externa l root resorptio n/ eti­
ologiC facto rs of which sugg est rhat:
1. Heat and 30% hydroge n pe roxide should
be avo ided . Internal blea ching is possib le
w ith sod ium perbo ra te mixed w ith w a ter o r
3% to 10 % hydr ogen pe roxide.
2. The bleaching ag ent should not be placed
most conservative approa ch mustb e used and
further loss of ena mel a nd dentin prevented .
too deep in the roo t co na l. A critica l foetor
is the app licati on of a zinc phosph ate bar­
rier to prevent d iffusion of the oxida nt into
The oldest and most reliable method is the w a lk­
ing bleach techniqu e/ wh ich involves the tem­
po rary sea ling of the oxidan t pas te (covered by
co tton pe llets) w ith IRM (C aul k/Dentsply) into
the pulp cha mbe r for about 1 w eek (Fig 3-6a).
The bleaching process norma lly requi res sev­
eral sessio ns. The agent is rep laced at each
consecutive appoi ntment until the desi red colo r
the proximal pe riodonta l ligament area [Fig
3-6 ).19,20
has bee n ob ta ined . Slig ht overblea chi ng is in­
d icated to acco unt for the small amount of im­
mediate relap se.
A typica l blea ching sess io n is described in Fig
3-7 . Recurrent di scolo ration s and no nrespo n­
dent pig mentations [eg/ meta llic ones) have to
be masked by bonded cera mic restoratio ns
(see Figs 4 -3 a nd 4 - 13) o r/ in severe ca ses/ by
full-coverag e crowns.
FIGURE 3-6 : WAL KING BLEACH TECHNIQUE-APPLICATION OF ADEQUATE BARRIER . Co nfiguration of materi­
a ls used in the w alking bleach technique (3-6 0 ; see a lso Figs 3-7g to 3-7i ). The endod ontic materia l is removed no
more than 2 mm below the gingiva (aste risk). A zinc phospha te barrier is appl ied l 9.20 (3-6b) and reprod uces the spa­
tial co nfiguration of the periodontal membrane or cementoenamel [unction (ie, scalloped bucca l con tour and proxi­
mal "Wings"). To create this barrier, the zi nc phospha te is initial ly appli ed in an "IRM-likel! co nsistency (3-6c ) and con­
densed into the canal . Aher setting, excess barrier material is removed w ith a diamond bur of low speed in a slight
buccolingual di rection (3-6dl . The config uration of the barrier is ultimately controlled by probing (3-6e \0 3-6g \. This
procedure should leave cement excesses (barrier w ings, 3-6 h/ arrows) aga inst the proximal w alls [3-6 h to 3-6j) and
prevent diffusio n of the bleac hing agent in the critical proximal zone. (Figures 3-6b , 3-6 d / 3-6f, and 3-6i are modi­
fied from Steiner and Vvesl" w ith permission.)
110
-
-
-
= -
--
-
-
- - - ._ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
~
I
-
-
-
­
--
~
Cuffo-pe rcho
......,.....,--- .
ZnPO ~
barrier
Bleaching agent
Cotton pellet
IRM seal
- --
-
-
-
-
-------
~~
,----..l!...
-
-
~-
~
-
•
- - --
-
-
-
3
I
ULTRACONSER VATIVE T REATME NT OP TIO NS
After co mpletio n of the bleac hing, the pulp
chamber is rinsed profusely. The z inc phos­
phate bar rier ca n be left in place .
After a ny blea ching trea tment, a pplica tio n of
ad hesive restorative materials must be de­
layed for 2 w eeks" because of the inhibiting
effect of oxygen residues o n the bo nd streng th
q
of composites · 1o During that time, ca lcium hy­
droxide " or cotclose" should be appl ied to
neutralize and inacti vate any peroxide that
may have leaked into the root ca nal. This
delay is necessary for the release of oxygen
resid ues from de ntin a lso.
Finally, the de ntin w a lls are co nditioned w ith 5 %
'sod ium hyp ochlorite23 24 or EDTA plus 1%sodium
hvpochlorile" to increase adhesion of g lass
ionomer, a nd the pulp chamber is filled with
g lass ionomer. The superficia l layer of the g lass
ionomer is then removed a nd replaced wi th a
layer of co mposite bo nded to etched enamel
(F igs 3-7 a nd 3-8) .
Filling of the entire pulp chamber w ith compos­
ite is not recommend ed . Retreatment is often re­
quired within 1 to 3 years, a nd a glass­
ionomer base in the pulp chamber facilitates
reentry.
Because d iscolored nonvita l teeth often present
some loss of incisal tooth structure, nonvital
bleac hing is frequently fol low ed by place ment
of direct composi te restora tions (Fig 3-7). This is
often necessary in child ren, in w hom it is ad­
visa ble to postpo ne the use of bond ed ceramic
resto ra tions.
FIGURE 3-7 : EXTREME INDICATIO N FOR INTERNAL BLEACHING AND COMPOSITES . The pa tient w as orig inally
seen by a gene ral practitioner for prosthetic treatment of the leh central incisor [3-7 0 ). Instead , the tooth w as treated
successfully w ith internal bleac hing and freeha nd restoration of the incisal edge (3-7 b, 3-7c ). Detailed treatment steps:
Preop erative view s [3-7 d , 3-7e ) show deep den tin d iscolo ration. Bleaching co uld be corried o ut o nly olter elimination
of a preexisting introradi culor post, endodontic retreatment (Dr Jean-Pierre Ebner, University of Geneva), a nd pla cement
of o n adequa te zinc phosphate borrier. Each bleac hing session consisted of rinsing and cleaning of the pulp chamber
(3-7 f), w hich w a s then port ia lly filled w ith the bleaching agent (3-7g) A con densed cotton pellet (3-7h) was inserted,
fol low ed by hermetic closinq of the ca vity with IRM [3-7i ). Intense burnishing of ~he margi ns during setting of IRM is re­
quired to ensure a perfect seal, wh ich is imperati ve for the success of the procedure. Five to six sess ions a t 5- to 10 ­
day intervals al lowed complete recovery of ~ h e origina l co lor (3-7 jl. Followinq the lost bleaching sess ion, it is reco m­
mended that calcium hydroxid e be applied for 1 mo nth to neutralize and release peroxide remnants. After this time, the
pulp cha mber is rinsed with 5% sod ium hypochlorite (3-7 k) and filled with traditional glass ionomer (3-71). A t the last
sess io n, a 1- to 2-mm layer of glo ss ionomer is removed . Osc illating instruments (3-7m; see a lso Fig 6-9) are the most
co nservative tools to generate clean proxirncl marg ins (3-7n ). After acid etching, adh esive resin and ename llike com­
posite are used to fill the palatal cav ity. The incisa l edge is layered using a three-in crement techniq ue, in which a dentin­
like increment is applied (3-70 , 3-7p) then covered by ename llike and incisa l mosses (see also Figs 3-14 and 3- 15).
A slig ht co ncavity created in the incisa l edge (3-7q ) allows application of yellow ish stains to Simulate de ntin exposure.
The final result is presented in 3-7 r and 3-7s. Further app lication of a bo nded ceramic restoration w ould be indi cated
to restore the orig inal crown strength and compe nsate for o n eventual bleac hing-resistant color relap se.
112
.
I
~
- -
--
---­
- - -
.
,
--
---
---~~
---
,
----
------
----
-v',
'\
-------
----
~-----------
,
-
"
-
~
-
--
--- -
--
- - -
--
--
3
I
ULTR A CON SERVATIVE TREATMENT OPTIONS
A fina l aspect of clo sing the pulp chamber w ith
composite must be emphasized . Due to the im­
paired crown stiffness of endodon tica lly treated
teeth, 15-1 7 it is not recommend ed to make the
W hen a llowed by the occlus io n, the palatal
composite shou ld be modeled to re-create
some kind of pa latal crest (Fig 3-9; see also
Figs 3-7s and 1-7a ) that mig ht par tia lly co m­
pa la tal surface too co nca ve.
pensate for the more flexible behavior of the
end odontically treated tooth .
FIGURE 3-7 (CONTINUED) . The situation rema ins unchanged 3 years followin g intervention (3-7t).
FIGURE 3-8 : FINAL MATERIALCONFIGURATION FOLLOWING INTERNAL BLEACHING . N o te the main cavily vol­
ume filled w ith glass ionomer a nd the simula tion of pa latal crests w ith the composite restora tion
FIGURE 3-9: PALATAL RESTORATION FOLLOWING INTERNAL BLEACHING . Preoperative clinica l view (3-90) . Fol­
lowin g successful internal bleac hing , the pulp chamber is filled w ith g lass ionomer, and the pa latal surface is restored
w ith compo site (3-9b). Specia l aitenl ion should be pa id to create ra ther flaf or convex elements [crests) in orde r to re­
inforce the remaining tooth substance (3-9c ).
116
~.~
,
-
-
..
-
-
-
-
-
-­
-
Gutta'~percha
ZnP04 barrier
. Glo'ss ionomer .
Composite '.
~
---
--
~.....-::::-
::.
f"_
-
~
.
--
-
- --====--===-- --
--­
3
I U LTRACONS ERVATI V E TR EAT MEN T O PTIONS
REATTACHME~IT
OF A TOOTH FRAGMENT
A d hesive reottc ch rn e nl o f a co ro na l fragment,
To increase the longevity of teeth restored by
when p o ssible , shou ld always be co nsid e red
fra g ment rea ttac hme nt in children , it appears
beca use it w ill simpl ify the trea tment , facili ta te
beneficial to crea te a "con trolled excess" (o r
the
o ve rlap) o f composi te over the frac ture line
(Fig 3- 10 ).31.32
est he tic
a mo unt
of
o utco me ,
a nd
d ecr eas e the
artifi ci al restor ati ve ma teria l.26.27 It
ca n p rove success ful eve n in the case o f p ulp
expos ure (see Fig 1-1 ). Ear ly clinica l exper i­
Creatio n o f a dd itive contours to enha nce tooth
e nce , however, has demon strated that 50% o f
mo rphology (in the fo rm of crests an d tra nsitio n
reattached fragm ents are lo st w ithin 2.5 years
line a ng les) is a universa l concept fo r stre ng th­
after initial
bondin q." For this reason, supple­
ening . This principle, which wi ll be further d is­
mentation
of reatta ch ed
a
cussed in C ha pter 5 [see Fig 5 -7 ), ca n be rec­
po rce la in la mina te has been suggested by An­
dreasen et a l, 29.30 who a lso demonstra ted that
om me nded for all cases of freehan d a p plica tio n
of composi te resin, especial ly in C loss 4 restora­
this method cou ld restor e o r eve n surpass the
tions (see Fig 3- 15), a nd fo r pala tal restora tio n
o rig ina l tooth streng th [see Fig 4-9 ). Pla c ement
foll owing internal b leach ing (see Fig 3-9 ).
of
fra gments with
b onded porce la in resto rat ion s in c hild ren,
howeve r, might not be reco mme nded du e to
the unstable toot h posi tions and o ngoi ng ma t­
uration
of the
soft tissues.
FIGURE 3-10: TRAUMA IN A YOUNG PERSON-INTERIM TREATMENT. The pa tient is 15 years old . The right cen­
tral incisor, which had been endo do ntical ly treated before trauma , a nd the left lateral incisor have fractured (3- 1Oa).
The fragment of the lateral incisor was recovered (3-1 Obi and reattached using the acid-etch technique (includ ing the
use of a dentin bondi ng agen t) a nd a regular light-cured restorat ive co mposite (3-1Oc, 3-10d) The bond ed fragment
was then supplemented w ith additiona l co mpo site materia l ena mel at the mesial aspect of the tooth wa s roughened
w ith a bur and etched ; ad hesive resin and co mposite materia l w ere added to overco ntour the mesia l tra nsition line
a ng le (3-1Oe; ar ticulating pape r ha s bee n rubbed on the tooth surface to show the mesia l addi tion of composite).
The tooth-restorati on tran sition is invisible (3- 1Of). The sa me principle (crea tio n of an additive con tour wi th a co mpos­
ite overla p) w as used to reinfo rce the cracked left ce ntra l incisor ; the right central incisor w as bleached a nd restored
w ith freehand applica tio n of co mposite [3-10 g , postope ra tive view). Ta ngential light outlines the translucent facia l
lobes and ridges tha t co ntribute to the enhanced esthetic a nd mecha nical treatment o utcome (3-1Oh]. This proced ure
is mean t as a n interim trea tment o nly; the patien t should now be referred to the or thodontist. The treated teeth sho uld
be carefully monitored bec ause bonded porc ela in restora tions might be required in adu lthood .
118
L
-
------­
-
--- ----===--====-- ­
~ - - -
-
..
-
n
3
I ULTR ACONS ERVATIVE T REATME NT
OPTIONS
SIM PLIFIED DI RECT COMPO SITE S
Acco rding to the biom imetic princ ip le, local­
ized missing tooth substance is not an indica­
tio n for ce ra mic veneers. It can be replaced in­
Direct composites have limitati o ns. They o ffer
stead with co mposite resins, provided that the
adequa te treatment outcom es for chi ldren, but
are sufficient in adults only w hen the volu me,
extension, or number of resto rat io ns is limited.
tooth w ill not have to bear significant functional
loads (Fig 3-11).
There are two reasons for this limitation: (I) It is
W hen multip le an terio r teeth presen t sign ifica nt
extremely d iffic ult to simulta neo usly master
marg ina l adaptatio n, form , and shade o n sev­
eral large restora tio ns; a nd (2) extensive
enamel replacement with the more flexib le com­
loss of crown substance , bonded porcelain
resto rat ion s are ind ica ted . Since the w o rk of
Bowen 33 and Buono core,34 the physicochemi­
co mpos ite resins
posi tes does not a llow recovery of crown stiff­
ness. 17 There is an associalion between incisa l
have been sig nifican tly improved . In par ticular,
w ith some hybrid lig ht-cured composites (eg ,
wear (eg, chipping , fracture] and the elastic
modulus and frac ture to ug hness of restorative
Herculite XRV, Kerr; Enamel Plus HFO , Myc­
erium; M iris, C o ltene], direct an terio r restora­
materia ls. Bonded ceramics offer better perfor­
ca l a nd esthetic pro perties
of
ma nce in tha t sense, espec ial ly for larg e incisal
edge reco nstruction of stress-bearing teeth.40
tio ns can be ac hieved w ith better pred ictab ility
startling illusions .35-39 The ma jor
of success and
esthetic improvements are based on the de vel­
op ment of rnoterio ls w ith differen t opaci ty (Figs
3-12 a nd 3-13).
FIGURE 3- 11: SINGLE-TOOTH TREATMENT W ITH FREEHAND APPLICATION OF COMPOSITES . This malformed
a nd rotated la teral incisor (3- 11 o] is ideal for freehand applicati on o f co mposites. Correctio n of sha pe and positio n
ca n be ea sily hand led w ith d irec t co mposi tes (3- 1 1b). Furthermore, the restora tive material is fully suppo rted by intact
unde rly ing enamel, and this tooth w ill not be sub jected to sig nifica nt functio nal load s.
FIGU RE 3-12 : ANATOMIC SHA PIN G AND DIFFERENTIAL OPACIT Y OF COMPOSITES . These layered sa mples
dem onstrate that the esthetic pote ntial of co mpo sites lies in the o p tima l co mbina tio n o f ana to mic de nfinlike co res cov­
ered by tra nslucent incisa l material . A key eleme nt is the mode ling o f the incisal edge: grou nd flat for a simple halo
effect (3- 120 ; 3-1 2b, left) o r anatomi cal ly carved to follow the morpho logy of underlying dent in in yo unger teeth (3­
120 ; 3- 12 b, right). No stain s have bee n used. (Figure 3- 12b was photograph ed under combined bla ck light and
tra nsmitted lig hts.)
120
- -~------
-----=-~-
~
--~-
- ­
",
-­
-
~------
-
~
,
-
-
- -------==----­
-­
-
-~ -
~
I
3
I
ULTRACONSERVATIVE TREATMENT OPTIONS
Three-increment technique
(eg, Herculite XRV Incisal Light) or more opales­
cent incisal materials [Enamel Plus HFO). The
Optical properties
of
current composites can
be qUickly evaluated on glass slides (Fig 3-13).
Direct placement
of
light-cured
incisal
shape
of
the dentin core must be
adapted according to the age
of
the tooth:
composites
sharp for young unworn teeth (Fig 3-14a), flat
does not allow for sophisticated stratification
and thicker for worn teeth (Fig 3-14b). The es­
techniques. A simplified three-increment tech­
thetic and mechanical outcome can be greatly
nique (dentin-enamel-incisal, or DEI) can be ap­
enhanced
plied (Figs 3-14 and 3-15).36 An anatomic
restoration to simulate the transition line angles
dentinllke core (Herculite XRV Dentin; or Enamel
at the facial and proximal aspects
Plus HFO dentin) is covered with translucent
[Fig 3-15; see also Fig 3-10). Finally, some
enamellike composite that extends onto the
particularly difficult cases can be addressed in
beveled enamel. Incisally, the dentin core is
a ~o-stage approach using the so-called sand­
covered with trcnsporent/fronslucerr enamels
wich technique."
Dentin
Enamel
by
augmenting
the bulk
of
of the
the
tooth
Incisal
-
FIGURE 3-13: RAPID EVALUATIOI"J OF COMPOSITE TRANSLUCENCY. Pressing small amounts of material between
two glass slides and then light curing provides quick evaluation of materials: Herculite Dentin (left), Herculite Enamel
(center), and Herculite Incisal Light (right) These three grades of opacity are required for natural composite layering
The slight opalescence (blue and yellow reflections) of the Incisal Light material is visible.
FIGURE 3-14: SIMPLIFIED AND EFFICIENT THREE-INCREMENT STRATIFICATION TECHNIQUE. Unworn (3-14a)
and worn (3-14b) teeth differ by the incisal shape of the dentin core (D) and the amount of incisal shade (I) The enam­
ellike composite (E) always covers the facial bevel and progessively thins onto the incisal dentin. Differential halo ef­
fects are created by the shape and architecture of the incisal edge (also illustrated in Fig 3-12)
122
-­
- -
-=
-, - ; ­
-
~~
- -
-
-
.­ ~--
--=
-­
-.......:...
-------=--===
U NW O R N
W 0
R N
.L­
.:
==---_._- -
--- - ­
------=--­
F"" '
·, D E N ·T I N
l
N C I SA L
FIGURE 3 c 15: MINOR CLASS 4 DEFECTS RESTORED WITH A THREE-INCREMENTTECHNIQUE. The pa tient co m- '
plained abo ut the yellowish a spect of the microlilled co mposite restorations on the central incisors (3-15 0), Follow ing
remOval of the old resin, csoh convex bevel wa s created (3: 15b). The DEI techniq ue w as used, starting with the
dentin lobes (3-) 5 c, 3-15d), then followed by the e,namel increment covering the bevel area (3-15e, borelyvislblel.
' F i n a lly~ the ,most translucent shade w as used to restore the incisal edg e (3 -1 5 f), This' lost increment should e~te,rid m ore
cervical ly (beyond the bevel, w hich often ca lls for use of a wed ge/matrix, asin 3-15f) to create a marked transition
,line angle (see 3',15i , 'arrowheads), C lihical resul t following finishing proced ures '(3-15 g t0 3-1 5j) .Note the' incisal
translucency and rnorked mesial ridge on the facial surface of both central incisors (see fla sh reflections in 3-15g and
3-15 i; arrowheads in 3~ 15 i) : w hich.en honces the tooth morphology and favors the optical transition betw een ioolh
and restora tion, These ridges also strengthen the restorations because the bocco fcclol bulk is increased. This w ill help
to prevent chipping of the incisal edge that co uld occur because of the limited elosticmodulus and fracture toughness
of the composite resin,
'
'
.
"
.
-
-
--
-
---­
~-
-
._--------------------~
-------~---~-----
---~
­
-
- -
-
-
-
-
-
- --
-
-
-- -- -
­ - -- ­
,
=--
-~
-
-­
3
I U LTRACO NS ERVATIVE T REATM ENT O PTIO NS
16. Linn j, Messe r HH . Effect of resto ra tive proced ures o n the
strength o f endodo ntica lly treated mo lars. J Endod 1994 ;
2 0 :4 7 9-485 .
Acknowledg ment
Dr Va n B. Hayvvood (Department of O ra l Rehabililatio n, Med­
ical Col lege of G eorgia, Aug usta, Georg ia) is g ratefully ac­
know ledged fo r his review of sectio ns related to bleac hing .
17 . Magne P, Doug la s W H o C umulolive effect of succe ssive
resto rative proced ures o n a nterior crow n flexure: Inta ct ver­
sus veneered inciso rs. Q uintessence Int 2 0 0 0 ;3 1:5- 18 .
18 . Friedman S. Internal bleac hing : Lo ng-term ou tcomes and
com pl ication s. j Am Dent Assoc 19 9 7 ; 12 8 (Suppl)
51 S-55S
References
1. M ag ne P, M ag ne M, Belser U. N a tura l a nd resto rat ive
o ra l esthetics Part II: Esthetic trea tment moda lities J Esthet
Dent 19 9 3 ;5 :239-2 4 6 .
2 . Do l Scntc FB, Throc kmo rto n G S, Ellis E III. Rep rod ucib i li~'
o f dat a from a ha nd-held di g ital pulp tester used o n teeth
a nd o ral soh tissue. O ral Surg O ra l Med O ral Pathol
1992;73 : ] 03- ] 08 .
3 . Jo rdan RE, Boksman L. C on servative vita l bleaching treat­
ment of discolored de ntitio n. Compend Contin Ed uc Dent
19 8 4 ;5 :80 3-80 8 .
4 . Feinmann RA, Goldstein RE, Garber DA Bleac hing Teelh
C hicago : Q uintessence, 19 87 .
5 . Hayvvood VB, Heyman n HO . N ig htguard vila l blea ching
Q uintessence Int 1989;20: 17 3-1 7 6.
6 . Hayvvood VB. Achieving, ma intaining a nd recovering suc­
cessful tooth bleaching J Esthet Dent 19 9 6 ;8 3 1-38 .
7 . Hayvvood VB, Leo nard RH, Dickinson G L. Efficacy of six
mo nths o f nightguard vital blea ching o f tetracycl ine-sta ined
teeth. J Esthet Dent 19 97;91 3- 19.
8 . Hayvvood VB, Leona rd RH Nig hlg uard vita l bleac hing re­
moves brown d iscolo ra tion for 7 years : A case repo rl.
Q uintessence Int 19 9 8 ,29 4 5 0 -451.
9 . Titley KC, Torne ck CD , Smilh DC , Adibfar A Ad hesion o f
co mposite resin 10 bleached a nd unb leached bovine
ena mel. J Dent Res 19 8 8 ;6 7 : 15 23 -1 5 2 8 .
10 Spyride s GM, Perd ig ao J, Pagani C , Ame lia M , Spyrides
SM. Effec t of w hitening age nts o n dentin bo ndi ng . J Esthel
Dent 2000; 12 :2 6 4 - 2 7 0
11. C ro ll TH P. Ena mel microa b rasion: The
Q uintessence Inl 19 8 9 ; 20 :3 5-46
tec hnique
12 . Heymann HO, Sockwell SL, Hayvvood VB. Addi tio nal
co nservative esthetic proced ures. In: Sturdeva nt CM led ).
The Arl and Science of Opera tive Dentistry, ed 3. St.
Lo uis: M osby, 19 9 5 :6 4 7 .
13. M ag ne P M egabrasion: A co nserva tive stra tegy for the
a nter ior d entitio n. Prac t Peri od on tics A esthet De nt
] 997;9:389-395 .
14 . A nd reasen j O , Sundstrom B, Ravn .ll The effecl o f Irau­
malic injuries to pri mary teeth o n their perma nent succes­
sors. I. A clin ical a nd histologic study of 1 17 injured per­
manent teeth. Sco nd ] Dent Res 19 7 1;7 9 :2 19 - 2 8 3 .
15 . Reeh ES, Do uglas W H, M esser HH . Stiffness of en­
dod o ntica lly treated tee th related to resto ra tion technique
J Dent Res 19 8 9 ;6 8 : 15 4 0 - 15 4 4 .
19 . Steiner DR, West JD. A method 10 determi ne the locatio n
a nd sha pe of an intracoro nal blea c h bar rier. J Endod
19 9 4 ; 20304 - 30 6.
20. G oldstein RA, Garber DA Complete Denta l Bleac hing
C hica go: Q uintessence, 19 9 5.
2 1 Bara tieri LN, Ritter AV, Monteiro Jr S, Ca ldera de And rada
MA, Cardoso Vieira LC Nonvita l tooth bleac hing : Guide­
lines for the cli nic ia n. Q uintessence Int 19 9 5 ,26 :
597-608 .
2 2 Rotstein I Role of ca ta lase in the elimination o f resid ua l hy­
drog en peroxide follow ing tooth bleac hing . J Endod
19 9 3 ; 19 :5 6 7-5 6 9 .
23 . N eg m MM, Beech DR, Gra nl AA. An eva luation o f me­
c ha nica l an d adhesive pro perties o f po lycar boxy late an d
g lass io no mer ce men ts. J O ra l Re ha bi l 19 82 ;9 :
16 1- 16 7
24 Van Dijken JW. The effec t of ca vity pretrea tment proce­
d ures on d entin bon d ing : A fo ur-year clinica l eva luatio n. J
Pro sthet Dent 19 9 0 ;6 4 : 14 8-1 5 2.
25 . W eiger R, Heuchert T, Ha hn R, Lost C Adh esion of a
g loss iono mer cement to human rad ic ular de ntine . Endod
Dent I rournotol 19 9 5 ; 1 ] :2 14 - 2 19 .
26 Baratieri LN Tooth frag ment reattach ment. In: Bara tieri LN
et 01(eds). Direct Ad hesive Resto ratio ns on Fractured A n­
terio r Teeth. S60 Paulo : Quin tessence, 19 9 8: 13 5-205 .
27. M unksgaard EC, Hoj tved L,Jorgensen EH, A nd reosen j O ,
Andrea sen FM . Enamel-dentin c row n fractures bo nd ed
wi th var ious bo nd ing ag ents. Endod Dent I rournctol
19 9 1;7 :73- 77 .
28 . A ndreasen FM , A ndreasen JO , Rindum j L, Mun ksgaard
EC Preliminary cl inica l and histologi cal results o f bond ing
de ntin-enamel c rown frog ments w ith the GLUMA tech­
nique Presented at the N o rdic A ssocia tio n o f Ped od on­
to logy, Bergen, N orway, June 19 8 8 .
29 Andreas en FM , Daugaa rd;lensen J, M unksgaar d EC Re­
inforcement o f bon ded c rown frac tured inciso rs w ith
por ce la in veneers. End od Denl Traumatol 19 9 1;7:
7 8- 83 .
30. A nd rea sen FM , Flug g e E, Daugaa rd;lensen j, Mu nks­
gaard EC Treatment of c rown fractured inci so rs w ith la m­
ina te veneer resto ra tio ns. A n experimental study Endod
Dent Traumatol 199 2 ,8 30-35
3 1. Silva A R, Francc i C , Rod rigues Filho LE , Expo sito CL,
Prado JH . Restoration of a nlerior too th fracture: Bo nding
tooth frag ment vs. co mposite resto ration [a bstract 31 4 5].
J Dent Res 2000 ;79:537.
12 6
.-
-
--
--
~
­
- - - - =- - - --­
ULTRA CO NSER VATIVE T REATMENT OPTI O NS
32 . Reis A, Fra ncci C , Log uercio AD, Carri lho MR, Rodriques
Filho LE. Re-attachment of anterior fractured teeth : Fracture
strength using d ifferent techniques. Oper Dent 200 1;26 :
287-2 9L1.
33 . Bow en RL. Denta l filling material comprising vinyl
silane- treated fused silica and a binde r consisting of a re­
action product of bisphenol and glycidylmethacrylale . US
pa tent 3,066,11 2 . 1962.
34 . Buonocore MG . A simple method of increasing the ad he­
sion of acrylic filling materials to enamel surfaces. j Dent
Res 19 5 5 ;34 :849 - 8 5 3 .
35 . Dietsch: D. Free-ha nd co mposite resin restorations: A key
to a nterior esthetics. Procl Periodo ntics Aesthet Dent
19 95;715-25.
I3
36 . Mag ne P, Haiz J. Stratification of composite restorations
Systematic and durable replication of natural aesthetics.
Pracl Periodontics Aesthet Dent 19 9 6 ;8 :61-6 8 .
37 . Vanini L. Light a nd colo r in ornerier composite restorations.
Pracl Periodontics Aesthet Dent 19 9 6 ;8 :6 7 3- 6 8 2 .
38 . Dietschi D. Free-hand bo nding in the esthetic treatment of
a nterio r teeth: Crea ting the illusion . Pract Periodontics Aes­
thet Dent 199 7 ;9 : 156-164.
39 . Dietschi D Layering concep ts in anterior co mposite res­
torations j Ad hesive Dent 200 1;3 :71-80
40 . M ag ne P, Perroud R, Hodges j S, Belser UC C linical per­
formance of novel-design porcela in veneers for the recov­
ery of coronal volume and length. Intj Periodontics Restor­
ative Dent 20 0 0 ;20 :441-457 .
127
.--=---=--==---=--~
--- ---­
-----.=~
.
-
-- - ~;:--
-=­
-
p
-
- -
•
_ _ 0
-
•••
-
--
_
------~
----======-~ --
CHAPTER
4
EVOLUTION OF INDICATIONS
FOR ANTERIOR BONDED
PORCELAIN RESTORATIONS
As explained in C hap ter 1, the g rea t po tentia l of bon ded po rcelain
resto ra tions ca n be understood w ith respect to the sc ientific a nd cl inica lly
releva nt par a meters related to biology, functio n, and mecha nics. Ceramic
veneers a lso provide the operator w ith a powerful moda lity for esthetics.
Even w hen esthetics is not the prirn c ry o b jeclive, it stili req uires specia l
conside ration . Mod ification o f form, position , a nd color o f a nterior teeth
ge nera tes sig nifican t effec ts on the sm ile, w hich in turn ca n enhance the
pati ent's personality and socia l life. Initia lly used to treat var io us kinds of
tooth d iscolo ratio n, po rcelain lamina tes have bee n increasing ly substituted
by more conserva tive therap eutic modalities such as chemica l bleachin g ,
microa brasio n, a nd mega brasio n (see Ch a pter 3 ). However, this evol ution
has not led to a decrea se o f ind icatio ns for bo nded ce ram ic restora tions,
as new o nes have be en dev eloped and are illustrated in this cha pter.
-
-
--=---=--
----------::=::--
----
-
-
-=
~
-
=
-
- - --
-
­
-
- - - --
-
- - -----------=----==
------------
4
I
E V OLUTION OF I N DI CATIONS FOR A NT ERIOR BONDE D PO RCE LAI N RESTO RAT IO N S
HI ST ORIC PERSPEC TI VE
It seems to be Dr Charles Pincus w ho first used
temporary thin veneers to enhance actors ' ap­
pearances for close-ups 'in the movie ind ustry in
the 19 30s. 1 Bo nd ed pellicul ar ce ra mic cove r­
pro ving ad hesio n) w ere car ried o ut by Horn ,
Ca la mia , C hristensen , Garber, Goldstein,
Feinma n, and Friedrnan.u 8- 13 Surprising ly, the
age of ante rior teeth was on ly described in the
early 19 80 s,2.3 integr ating the ad hesion princi­
although the pote ntia l of bo nded ce ramics is
w ell-known, due to their abi lity to fulfill the
biomimetic principle (see Ch a pter 1).
ples de veloped ear lier by Buonocore and
Bow en, but it was Rochette in France wh o , in
1975 , first proposed the use of bonded ce­
ra mic restoratio ns in the an terior dentition ." He
described a technique for making porcelain
resto rations for frac tured incisors w itho ut o pera­
live interference. The ce ramic block w as baked
in the la boratory o n a 24-karat-gold matrix
cas t. A resin w as bonded to the silane-treated
po rcela in bloc k and etched ename l. In view of
current techniq ues, it is ob vio us that Rochette's
approach w as visio nary. Porcela in veneers
bo nded to etched enamel evolved from this
techniq ue and beca me po pular in Eu ro pe
thro ugh the w o rks of Touati et 015 - 7 In North
America , essential developments (eg, for irn­
method has not evolved too much since 19 80 ,
The success of porcelain laminates is not
ac hieved through the use of so-called high ­
technology or advanced ma teria ls but simply
by assoc ia ting two trodition ol materia ls, ie,
hybrid composite resins and porcelai n.
Such accom plishment lies directly in the fac t
that o nly the specifi c adva ntages of these two
materials are used [Ta ble 4 -1 ). Their respective
d isadva ntages are avo ided by using thin layers
of composite and suffici ent thickness of por­
ce la in. O nce bonded to the tooth, porc ela in
sho uld no longer show problems related to its
inherent fragi lity.
FIGURE 4-1 : EVOLUTION OF THE CERAMIC WOR KP IECE CONFIGURATION. Due to the development of bleach­
ing and minimally invasive ope rative dentistry, origi nal indications for porcelai n laminates (type I) have decreased.
New ones, howe ver, have been ad ded [types II a nd III). They co rrespond to more compromised situa tions w ith the
possibility of extendi ng incisal edge coverage and proximal wrapping .
130
-
--- ,..
-
­
­
~ - ----------------
---
-
-
--- ---
---
. .
Table 4-1 C linica l characteristics of composite resins and porce lai n
Advantages
Composite resins
Disadvantages
• Bo nd ing
• Curi ng con tractio n
• Economy of tooth substrate
• Thermal expa nsion
• Dentinli ke stiffness
Porcelain
• Esthetics
• Brittleness
• Durability
• Wear properties
• Enamell ike stiffne ss
,,\'
SP ECTR UM
o
F I N 01 C ·.A· T I ' O· N S
. ~- -
--
--
. ..== --- - - --
-
;.
- -
-
-
.
=
-
I
4
EVOL UT IO N OF IN DI CAT ION S FOR A NTER IO R B O N D ED PO RCE LA IN R EST OR AT IO N S
Ultimately, bonded cera mics increasingly allow
more tooth substa nce to remain intact, espe­
cia lly the pa latal surface, w hich represents the
most so phistica ted element of the intact tooth
crown (see Chapter 1).
Even tho ug h Rochette4 had a lready proposed
the use of bonded ce ramics to treat fra ctured
teeth, the rea l potentia l of po rcelain la mina tes
has been underestima ted until recently. Und er­
stand ing of d ifferent co nfig ura tio n factors a nd
geometry has a llowed a revival of bo nded
porcelain restoratio ns.
The evolution
of
indications shows a trend to­
ward possible replacement of extensive amounts
of tooth substance (Fig 4-1 and Ta ble 4 -2).
Three princi pa l groups of ind ications are distin­
g uished : tooth di scolo ration resistant to bleach­
ing procedu res (type I), the need for ma jor mor­
phologic modi fication in an terior teeth (type Ill,
and extensive restora tion of co mp romised ante­
rior teeth (type III ). M a ny situations in type I and
type II indi cation s co rrespo nd to the orig ina l
spectrum a nd are the most trad itiona l ind ica ­
tio ns fo r porcela in lamina tes.2,3.8-IOSome type II
a nd type II I indi catio ns (and espec ia lly type IliA)
have been added mo re recently. 14 - 24
132
==­
--
--I
-
--
-
-
~-
-
-
- -- -
\ ,'
.'
', Table 4-2 New classification of indications for porcelain veneers
T Y PEl
TEETH
RESISTANT
TO
BLEACHING
Type IA
Tetracycline discoloration of degrees III and IV
Type IB
No response to external or internal bleaching
T Y PEl I
M AJ 0 R MORPHOLOGIC MODIFICATIONS
Type IIA
Conoid teeth
Type liB
Diastemata and interdental triangles to be closed
Type IIC
Augmentation of incisal length and prominence
T Y PEl I I
EXTENSIVE
-
-
--
RESTORATION
(ADULTS)
Type IliA
Extensive coronal fracture
Type IIIB
Extensive loss of enamel by erosion and wear
Type IIiC
Generalized congenital and acquired malformations
---
-
---- - -
- - -
-
-
-
_
.
-
- - - - - ­
-----------
--
-
4
I
EVOLUTION O F INDI CATIONS FOR A N T ERIO R BONDED P OR CEL AIN RESTORATI ON S
TYPE I: TEETH RE SI STANT TO BLEACHING
Examples of type I ind ica tio ns include heav ily
di scolored teeth d ue to tetracyclin e therapy (de­
g rees III and IV acco rdi ng to Jo rdan and Boks­
mon " : type IA) a nd ante rio r teeth that present
severely worn incisal edges that subseq uently
lead to infiltra tion o f the exposed de ntin [type
IB, Fig 4-2 ).
Type IA: Tetracycline discolorotion
sure an effec tive masking of the under ly ing d is­
co loratio n and simultan eously create the illu­
sio n of a natural intensity in tooth shad e. In
aged teeth, the incl usion of distin ct a nd c har­
acteristic features such as intense coloration ,
spots, a nd craze lines may facilit ate the final in­
tegration of the veneers, in spite of the lack o f
thickness of the restorat ive rnoleriol ." Some
aspects of the lab oratory procedures related
to the pro blem of masking are presented in
Fig 7-11.
The occurrence of type IA indi cati ons has been
reduced recently due to novel approaches in
nightguard vital bleac hing , whi ch extends the
chemical treat ment over 6-month pe riods."
These patients can even be treated by bleach­
ing beneath existing porcelain veneersY Type
I situatio ns, w hic h often requ ire minimal tooth
preparat ion, are the most d ifficult to treat in
terms of col or depth. The cera mist has to en­
Even in these di fficult cases, it is still suggested to
bleac h first to lig hten the base colo r of the tooth
a nd make the future restorations more lifelike.
Due to the ever-i mproving performan ce of dentin
odhesives, future approaches might also include
deeper preparations involving dentin, thus fac ili­
tating the w o rk of the den tal technicia n.
FIGURE 4-2 : AGED TEETH RESISTANT TO ~"GHTGUARD VITAL BLEACHING . Disco lora tio n is suppose d ly d ue to
incisa l wear and subseq uent infiltration o f exposed dentin . Severa l w eeks of nigh tg uard bleaching w ith car ba mide
peroxide had no effect o n tooth shade (4-20 ) Despite a tooth prep aratio n that w as too co nservative (4-2 bl, the two
laminates integ rate we ll with opposing teeth due to the inclusion of illusive effects such as craze lines and other in­
terna l stains (4-2c, 4 -2d) The tradit ional full-coverage crown o n the left lateral incisor was repla ced .
134
•
-
-
-
=,
-
-~~~
-
-
- - - - - --
I
---
/
---
--
-
--
-~--
.'
~
-
4
I
E V OLUTI ON O F IND ICATIONS FOR ANTERIOR BONDED PORCEL AIN R EST OR ATI O N S
Type IB: Teeth unresponsive to
external and internal bleaching
a nd cores are co mmo nly recomme nded. This,
in turn, may gene rate numerous co mplica tio ns,
such as cracks and roo t fra ctures. It is now es­
This ca teg o ry includes, fo r exa mple, teeth w ith
ta b lished that bo th the biomechanical p roper­
4-2) 'an d pulp less teeth (Fig
ties and the moisture con tent of nonvi tal teeth
exposed dentin (Fig
of
4 -3 ]. Porcela in veneering and endodontic p ro­
do not differ sig nifica ntly from those
cedu res d o not seem to be incompatible. Ve­
neered teeth are c haracterized by their " na tu­
teeth .3 1.32 The loss of to oth structure thus be­
comes the p rimar y cause o f fai lure, no t the ef­
ral " behavior ; for insta nce , veneered inci sors
feet o f p ulp removal per se.
vi tal
d emon strate a stress di stribution that ca nnot be
differentiat ed from that w ithin intact inci sors
und er loa d 28 (see Fig 1-1 1d ). This is the
of
Except in cases o f endodontica lly treated teeth
w ith seve re breakdown o f tooth substa nce ,
biorrurneticsv '-r-w hen restorati on s
there is currently no evide nce that controind i­
behave functio na lly as natural teeth regard ing
ca tes veneering nonvita l teeth; it is important to
strain and stress transfer, unlike teeth trea ted
remembe r the lollowin q :
essence
wi th extensive com pos ite restora tions . On the
other ha nd, it is gen era lly stated that po rcelai n
la minates are not indicated in p ulp less teeth
even though it is difficult to find strong eviden ce
Porcelain lamina tes may substantia lly inc rease
the mecha nica l co ronal resistance I 4 • 15 ,30 and
for such an a ssertio n. In an in vitro trial , pulp­
restore the original too th stiffness,28 especi a lly
less ve neered incisors behaved like natura l en­
w hen the ceramic is thic k enough to rep ro­
duce the o rig ina l c rown volume and length 21
d od onti cally treated
teeth
J O
When
pulples s
teeth are treated with traditional prosthodontic
[see Fig 5 -7) . It ap pears rea so na b le to as­
procedur es (instead of the more conservative
sume that a similar effec t ca n be found o n a
veneering techniques), various types of posts
pu lpless tooth ,
FIGURE 4-3 : TEETH RESISTANT TO THE WALKING BLEACH TECHNIQUE . The righ t centra l a nd lateral inci sors are
nonvital a nd do not show further response to infernal bleaching (4 -30 , 4-3b) . Deep interna l residua l d iscolora tio n be­
comes more evide nt after tooth prepara tio n (4-3c). The left central incisor is included to simulta neously a llow for re­
de finitio n of crow n shape a nd incisa l length of bo th central incisors (see a lso next sectio n related to type II indi ca­
tions). The postope ralive view s de monstrate the opt imized tooth shape , recovered shade, a nd smile line (4-3d; case
treated in co llaboratio n w ith Drs O. Duc, R. Perroud , and Prof. I. Krejci, University of Geneva ].
136
I,
I
•
.
".
-------
---
------
-
--
~
-
-
-
--------­
4
I
EVOLUTI O N O F I ND ICAT IO N S FO R A NTE RIO R B O N DED P OR C ELAIN RES TO RATI O N S
TYPE II: MAJ OR M O RPH OLO G IC MO DIFICATIO N S
This g roup of ind ica tions consists of pa tients
w ith very hig h exp ecta tio ns an d , as a co nse­
quence, developed senses for esthetics. These
cl inica l situations wou ld be difficult to co rrect
predicta bly by means of d irect adhesive co m­
posite restoratio ns. In child ren, such co nd itio ns
are best treated by the dir ect application of
co mposites as interim restorations prio r to the
definilive cerami c bond ings, w hic h are idea lly
placed in ad ulthood . There are three subcate­
gories.
Type IIA: Conoid teeth
Cono id teeth natura lly present an idea l co nfig­
ura tion for the use of po rcelain veneers (Fig 4 ­
4 ] . 16, 17,20 The requir ed tooth preparatio n is mini­
ma l; on ly a ligh t margina l c ha mfer is needed
for the de nta l technicia n to fabricate an accu­
rate ce ra mic piece. It would be theo retically
possible to proceed wi thout tooth prepara tio n.
To do so, how ever, wou ld ge nerate a de lica te
a nd frag ile feather-ed ged ce ra mic margin ,
which does not a llow adeq uate peripheral
ada ptatio n dur ing laboratory proced ures and
clin ica l placement.
A porcelain laminate wou ld not be indica ted
for a Single, isolated , ma lformed lateral inci sor
such as that presented in Fig 3- 1 1. Such a
pro blem ca n be ec silv add ressed wi th free­
han d a pplicatio n of co mposite resins provided
that the resto rative materia l is suppo rted by in­
tact unde rly ing enamel and the tooth is not sub­
jected to sig nifica nt functiona l loads.
FIGURE 4-4: TYPE IIA INDICATION-TYPICAL APPROACH FOR CONOID TEETH , The patient presents co noid lat­
era l incisors a nd the rig ht central incisor is restored w ith a resin crow n [4 -4 0 ) Too th prepara lions are con trolled w ith
two distinct silicon g Uides derived from the d iag nostic w axup (4-4b, incisal co ntrol; 4 -4c, ax ial control ]. Fina l aspect
after adhesive placement of a porcelai n-fused-to-metal crown o n the central incisor and two por celai n la minates on
the la terals (4 -4d) . (Figures 4-4 0 , 4-4 b, and 4-4 d are repr inted from Belser et 0120 wi th pe rmission .)
138
.
-
-
-
-
-~-
~---~-~
­
--------
,.,\
-
--~
--
4
I
EVO L UT IO N O F IND ICAT IO NS FOR AN T ERIOR B O N DE D P OR C ELAIN RE STO RAT IO NS
Type liB: Closure of diastemata and
interdental black triangles
As is lhe case for malfor med teeth, a sing le iso­
lated pro blem ca n be eas ily hand led w ith free­
hand applicatio n of com posite resins. How­
ever, in the case of multiple diastemata (Fig
4 -5 ), dire ct oppli co fon of co mposite is a te­
di o us proced ure a nd does not per mit adeq uate
and simultaneo us co ntrol of form , eme rge nce
profile, ce rvica l adaptatio n, a nd shade . Com­
posite add itio ns mig ht demo nstrate an ad verse
effec t o n margin al period o nta l health , w hic h
ca n co nsist o f increa sed plaque retentio n, g in­
g iva l infla mmati on , a nd pe riodontal des truc­
tio n.:" On the o ther ha nd , indirect po rcelain
laminates ca n overcome these pro blems, pro­
vided that specifi c tooth prep aration is per­
lorrned .:" Sufficient pe netratio n of the interden­
tal space and meticulous choice of the insertio n
path of the laminates are impera tive (see Fig 6 ­
20). Careful examin atio n of Fi gs 4 -2 b to 4 -2d
reveals insufficie nt interdenta l prep aration . As a
co nseq uence, the interd enta l space remains
o pen even after pla cement of the la minates.
O ne must keep in mind that interdental black
tria ngles are co mmon sequelae of o rthodontic
a lig nment of crowded incisors" o r periodon­
tal di sease.
Opened ce rvica l embrasures prese nt the same
di lemma as dia stema ta and have cap tured the
interest of numerous pe riodon tists w ho have
de velo ped var io us sop histica ted surg ica l pro­
ced ures for respective corecnons." It a ppears
that interdental bone is a prerequ isite for the
long-term success of such proced ures.
FIGURE 4-4 (CONTINUED). Tooth prepa ra lion wa s minima l fo r both the traditional coverage a nd the la minate prep a­
ration [4-4e to 4-4g). Provisio nal izati o n of lateral Inciso rs was not req uired except for diagnostic purposes. Ultraco n­
servative traditional cove rage of the rig ht central inciso r was possible because of the development of a n extended
porcelain margi n and red uced melal fra mew ork33- 30 (4-4h, right), w hich simultaneously all owe d o ptimal ligh t intercc­
tio n w ith the soft tissues (4-4i) .
140
~
--
­
. .,~-.-
..
-
\. ' . \'
n
6--2d
~
sa
::ins
-:- :: :: -
~
-.
c- --;-'
.
-....
,,~
-
.
4
I
EVOLUTI ON O F IN DI CATIONS FOR ANTERI OR B ON DED PORCELAIN RE STOR ATIONS
of a
higher chroma
Interdental blac k tria ngle s may also be co r­
to mention that a ce ra mic
rected w ith the rational , nonsurgi cal a pproach
using interd ental "mini-wings" (Fig 4 -5 j; see a lso
Fig 6-22).35 Porcela in veneers may reasonably
must be used in the interdental area (Fig 4-5m ).
co mpensa te for interde nla l defi ciencies in ~h e
soft tissues . How ever, the natural convex prox i­
ma l surface
of the tooth must be
modifi ed . To ac­
co mplish this, a slig ht interdenta l extensio n is
made, respecting the emergence profile o f the
crow n. The interdental co ntact po int becomes
a n interdental contact line [Fig 4-5 n). A specia l
master cast (ie, soft tissue cast), providi ng the ce­
ramist with the co mplete morph ology
of the gi n­
giva, is imperative (see Fig 7-6). It is important
This precaut ion is even more critical w hen de­
sign ing interdental mini-w ing s. If the colo r and
saturation of the interdental extension di ffer from
the rema inder of the crown, the fo rm of the
anato mic crown ca n be "optica lly " preserved
de spite the "excess" interdental ce ra mic . Com­
plete closure of the interdenta l spac e w o uld ide­
a lly requir e intrasulcular preparation margin s
(see Fig
6-21).
The g ing iva l fib er apparatus is
theoretically not a ffected by such mod ification of
the interdental
desiqn:" and a long-term esthelic
success can be estab lished (Figs 4 -5 r to 4 -5t).
FIGURE 4-5 : TYPE liB INDICATION-COMPREHENSIVE TREATMENT OF SEVERE SEQUELAE FOLLOWING
RAPID EVOLUTIVE PERIODONTITIS. The pa tient was referred by the periodontist [Dr Bertrand Dubrez, La usa nne,
SWitzerland ) a fter treatment for rapid evolutive periodontitis The situation w as stable, but severe loss of soft tissue,
co mbined w ith tooth migrations, diaste mata , and excessively long clinica l c row ns (unrealistic crown Width/ heig ht ra­
tios], was co mpromising the esthetic outcome [4 -5 0 , 4-5bl After adequate d iag nostic steps, includin g a n o rthodo n­
tic setup (4-5c, 4 -5d) , redi stribution of spaces was estab lished (4-5e; o rthodontic treatment by Prof Ali Darende liler,
University of Syd ney). The postor thodo ntic phase 14 -5 f) was immediately follow ed by tooth preparatio n. Maximum
penetration of the interdental spac e was required (4 -5g , 4-5h ). Fac ia l red uction must be care fully co ntrolled using a
horiz onta lly sectioned silico n index de rived fro m a waxup (4-5 i). A horizontal pa th of insertion w ith a pa latal butt mar­
gin had to be chosen to ovo id excessive loss of intact tooth substa nce a nd a llow for maximum preservatio n of enamel
(4 -5 h). The porcela in laminates present a spec ific a rchitecture co mprising interdental mini-win gs tha t co mpensate for
loss of the pa pillae (4-5 j).
FIGURE 4-5 (CONTINUED ON FOLLOWING PAGES) . Despite the excessive thickness of the remain ing incisal
edges, the incisal edge of the veneers can be kept thin a nd delicate by augmenting the facial curvature a nd slig htly
undercontourin g the pa latal margin (4-5k). Follow inq luting procedures, the excess ena mel w as removed w ith fine di­
a mond burs (4-51 ) and po lished with silicon rubber po ints; a sta biliza tion w ire was then bo nded to the palat al sur­
faces (see 4 -5 s). The immediate postoperative view still shows slight interdental op enings (4-5 ml, but they a re limited
by the long proxi mal co ntact lines 14 -5n ). N ote the sophistica led layering effects of the porcelai n, w hich reprod uce
the d ifferent shodes a nd tro nslucency of the a ntagonistic teeth (4-5 0) a nd the harmonio us relationship of inci sal edges
w ith the low er lip co ntour [4 -5 p, 4-5 q ). The o utco me is sta ble o fter 6 years o f clinica l service (4-5r 10 4 -5 t). The thin
a nd de lica te periodontium shows excellent tolera nce for the restora tions (4-51) . (Figures 4-5f a nd 4 -5m a re reprinted
from Belser et al20 wi th perrnisslo n.]
142
---=-_
c= - -..
~-=---
------------
~
__ . -
.
----
•
--
.....
t-~- - - -
==----­
-
-
-
- ~
-
­
-
~
.-
. ~-=---'
­
~
------
-
--
~
-
,
...
'.\
\ '
.
--
-- -
--
-
-~
~-
~-
-­
- -
4
I
EVOLUTI ON O F INDICATI O NS FO R ANT E RIO R B ON D ED P OR CEL AI N R ESTO RAT IO NS
Type lie: Augmentation of incisal
length and prominence
In cases w he re the e ntire smile
of
the pa tie nt is
to be reco nsid ered, the previo usly mentioned
sho rtco mings are combin ed with the di fficulty
As mentioned in C ha pter 2, a cce lerated a g ing
tends to reverse the so-cOi led cohesive fo rces
of
of
simulta neous ly ma stering both general form an d
length
of
the teeth invol ved . Conseq uently,
the smile . By this token, it is not unco mmon to
po rce la in lam inates can be pro pose d to e nsure
trea t patients w illing to recove r inciso r promi­
nence, espec ia lly those w ho are influenced by
a more p redi c ta b le result (Figs 4-6e to 4­
6 h). 18-20 24,45 The pa tient shou ld be informe d of
mod els in fashion magazines. It is easy to un­
the rea so ns for the mod e rate sac rifice
dersta nd this trend toward yo ung er a nd w hite r
too th struc ture and the cos ts invol ved . Restora­
of domi­
nan ce d escribed by lombordr" (do mina nce of
the mou th w ithin the fa ce, d om ina nce of ce ntra l
tion
smiles that log ica lly fulfills the p rinc iple
of inci sal
of sound
length an d p romine nce is not only
a n esthetic ma tter; the recovery
of
c row n stiff­
ness is a lso e nsured throu gh the restorati on
of
of
of
inciso rs with in the smile).
the initia l vo lume
To ac hieve tha t g oa l, d irec t resto rative mate ri­
o rig ina l e na me l thi c kness by the porce­
lain)2 1.23.28.46 A significant co ncern mig ht be
a ls can be app lied , b ut it is importa nt to re­
ra ised through the mar ked a nte rio r g uida nce
mem be r that composite resins tend to prese nt
that is created w he n resto ring inci sal length a nd
sig ns
of
early fatigue (w ear and c hip p ing )
the tooth [simula tio n
the
p romine nce . As there see ms to be on a sso c ia­
of anteri or
w hen used to resto re inci sa l ed g es (Figs 4 -6a
to 4- 6d) 42.43 A n esthetic result ca nnot be g uar­
(ie , o pe n bi te) a nd tem porom an di bular d isor­
an teed in the lo ng term using direct co mpos
de rs." a key element in the development
ite c d d ition s." A typi cal a ltera tio n
c rowns is a
progressive
w id th/he ig ht rati o (loss
of
of
increase
cl inica l
in the
ana to mic [or rn],
tion be tw een the absence
gUid a nce
of har­
mo nio us oc cl usio n is therefo re the inci sal gUid­
a nce,484 Q the steep ness of w hic h appears not to
be importan t for neurom usc ular horrnonv."
of
w hic h pro g ressive ly d evelo ps as a result
inc isal wear.
FIG URE 4-6: RECOVERY OF ESTHETICS AND FUNCTION II'\J ANTERIOR TEETH OF A DEMANDNG PATIENT.
The pa tient repeatedly co mplained abo ut anterior tooth shape, especially insufficient leng th (crown Wid th/ heig ht ratio
> 90%) and unstable anterior g Uida nce (4-60 to 4-6 d). Composites w ere originally used to restore the incisal edges
of the maxillary anterior teeth (4-6 c) The dia gnostic a pproach included a laboratory-made acrylic template (see Fig
5-10 ). Signifi ca nt improvements occurred offer the veneering proced ure (incisal ceramic coverage ab out 3 mm), in­
cludi ng harmony of the incisal edges with the low er lip line (4-6e), Width/height ratio of the clini cal crowns (4-6f;
now about 84%), a nd function (4-6g ). Frequently, obvious signs of improved appearance a lso include changes in
hairstyle (4-6h). The specific changes related to the incisal edge line are detail ed in 4-6i and 4-6 j. (Fig ures 4-4b , 4­
4e, 4-4i, a nd 4-4j are reprinted from Mag ne a nd Douglas20 wi th permission .)
146
I
--
." ;W_----=-
~~-
~
-~~- --~--~
~
-
---
v • -.
4 [ EVOL UTIO N OF I NDICATI O N S FO R A NTER IO R B O N D ED P O RCELAIN RE STOR ATI ON S
To minimi ze stresses durin g tooth-guided pro tru­
There is no scientific evide nce indi cating that
sive movements, some clini cians redu ce the
this ideal occlusa l status is no t a ppl icable to pre­
length of esthetica lly correct teeth . This inade­
q uate approach results in a reverse smile line
and may ag e the potient sig nifica ntly.49 As
proven c1i nica lly,24 there sho uld be no fear to re­
viously worn dentitio ns a nd pa tients wi th oc­
clusa l para functions. In fact , BPRs placed in
w o rn a nd fractured teeth in the ear ly 19 9 0 s
juvenate the patient's smile by increas ing cen­
and followed over 5 years co mpared favora bly
w ith traditiona l porcelain veneers a nd inlcvs."
tra l incisor prominence and leng th, because
This success rate is empowered by the minimally
ideal occl usion refers to bo th an esthetic a nd
physiol ogi c ideal .48.50
invasive approach, which should always be the
first choice for patients with w orn den titio ns.
Another rea son not to systema tica lly di stribute
Especially for indication types IIC and IliA [see
the anteri or g uida nce ove r a maximum number
of teeth is the favora ble mec han ica l be havior of
next section ), the comfort a nd esthetic o utco me
should be anticipa ted by a spec ially devel­
bonded porcelai n restorat io ns IBPRs).
oped d iagn ostic strategy21 (described in C ha p­
ter 5 ) to rcvcrsiblv redefine a smile line tha t a lso
In other words, the functio na l features of teeth
ma tches the unique character a nd perso na lity
of the pa tient (Fig s 4-6i a nd 4-6 jl. In most
restored by bonded po rcela in restorations ca n
be co nsidered identica l to those of intact nat­
ura l teeth. Particular empha sis must be ad­
ca ses, recovery o f a nterio r tooth prom inence
dressed, how ever, to the ma intena nce or
reesta blishment of an adequat e a nd [uncnonc l
mately repo rted by the pati ent (co mpare Fig s 4 ­
6a a nd 4-6 h).24
an terior q uido nce regard less
of w hether
has a pos itive socia l a nd personal impact, ulti­
this
g uidance involves the new restorati ons or not.
FIGURE 4-6 (CONTINUED). The low er lip line proved extremely imporlanl in gUid ing Ihe new incisal edge co nfig u­
ration (see Fig 2-12) The lower lip a nd incisal edge lines did nol co mplement eac h other, produ cing visua l tensio n
14-6i). Abo ut 2 mm had to be added to the centra l incisors to achi eve a more har mo nious situatio n [4-6 jl. In some sit­
uations, the lowe r lip has been modeled by inad equa te preexisting restorations. Under such ci rcumstances, it is highly
reco mmended to "deprog ram" Ihe lip using , for insta nce, a n ocryllc mock-up for 1 to 2 w eeks (see Fig s 5-8 k to 5­
8m)2 1
148
.
-
~
;;'
- - --
-
.
--­
-
.
..
.
'.
_
•
-
'c - -
_ -
­
\
4
I
EVOLUTI ON OF IN DI CATI O NS FO R A NTE RIO R BONDED P OR CEL AI N RE STORATIONS
of inci sal
function of
As w as said for type I indi cati on s, there are no
reason s not to veneer nonvital teeth w ith type II
There is so me evide nce that the type
ind ica tion s (Fig 4-7 ) except in case o f severe
brea kdown of too th substance . Genera lly, it is
not recommended to ovs rlc p the endodontic
the type and amount of inc isal coverage. The
pal atal mini-cha mfer, w hich is routinely used,
finish line to be recomm end ed is a
access cav ity with the veneer nor to use posts.
should occasio na lly be repl aced by a simpler
fini sh line like a butt marg in,23.sl espec ia lly on
These precautio ns al low an ea sy reentry to the
w or n incisors. These opti ons w ill be scientifi­
o rig ina l pulp cha mbe r a nd pe rmit rebleach ing
w hen required .
ca lly exp la ined in view o f functio nal stress dis­
tribution d uring protrusive movemen ts
man dible [see Fig s 6 - 1 1 to 6 - 16).
of
the
FIGURE 4-7: RECOVERY OF CENTRAL INCISOR PROMINENCE IN AN AGING SMILE . The pa tient's main com­
plaint w as the lock of volume and leng th of both central incisors (4-70 , 4-7b). The left central incisor w as nonvital and
d iscolored (4-7c). Preparatory steps included internal bleac hing of the left central incisor and replacement of preex­
isting interdental comp osites [4-7 d). The endodon tic access cavity w as par tia lly filled w ith glass ionomer, then cov­
ered w ith a layer of compo site (see Fi gs 3-7 to 3-9]. Porcelain veneering allo wed substantial recovery of the facial
coro nal vol ume and length (4-7e to 4-7g ). The low er lip has "remod eled " itself to perfectly confo rm to the newl y de­
fined incisal edges (4-7f). Intraoral view after more than 4 years of clinical service (4-7h) . Intact teeth have age d and
dar kened, but veneered teeth and related periodontium remain unchanged. Tooth prepara tion steps of this ca se are
deta iled in Fig 6-4.
150
~
-
--
-
.,
-
-.-
--
-----
,
- -
, " ,
-.
~--
-
jiiiiii
-
-- - - - - - - -
~----------~
---------------
~.
­
-
­
I
4
EVOL UTIO N O F IN DICATI ON S FO R A NTERIOR BO ND ED PO RCELA IN RE STOR AT IO N S
TYPE III : EXTE N SIVE RES TOR ATIO N IN THE ADULT
Extensive cor ona l fractures (type IliA , Fig 4-8 ),
extensive loss o f ena mel [type IIIB), a nd ma lfor­
mations (type III C ) ore ind icoti o ns fo r this type
These challengin g types of dam aged dentition
sometimes involve a maj ori ty of the coro nal vol­
ume or too th surface ,
of bo nded porcela in resto ra tio n,
4 -.30
.o:-oc
FIGURE 4-8: CONSERVATIVE TREATMENT OF SEVERE CROWN FRACTURES. Facial preopera tive view (4-80) , Due
to trauma, significa nt volume of the central incisors has been lost (4 -8 b, pala tal view) The fracture line ends parag ingi­
va lly at the mesial aspect of the rig ht central incisor, Ha rd tissue loss estimated at more tha n 5 mm in heigh t is evident
(silico n ind ex from waxup) (4 -8c ), (Figures 4-80 and 4 -8d are reprin ted from M ag ne and Magne 52 w ith permi ssion .)
152
===-­
.
•
"= - ­
--=-.
- - ­
-
,
:: -
-..:­
- ­-
-
-­
-
-­
- ­
~
-
-
.
"
.,
\
,
FIGURE 4-8 '(CONTINUED) , Final. bonded' porcelciin ve neers (4 -8d ). Details of di ag nostic steps are shown in Fig .5 -5 ,
a nd too th preparati on is presented 'in Fig 6 -3 . Restoratio nswere bonded only to enam el beca use effective dentin adhe­
sives were still under development at the time of plccement, Uncha nged situation 4 years la ter (4-8e) . Light enamel stains
ere detected on the palata l aspect, but' clinlcol morg indladaptation and sea l are n ot altered (4-8f). No porcelain fa il­
.ires are recorded in spi te of obvious functio n and marked an terior g Uida nce (4-8g). Optima l esthetic inteqrotion: smile
ine (4 -8 h) a nd pati ent's pe rsona lity ~ere respected throug h the di agnostic steps. The situation remains unchanged
7 years later (4- 8 i).
'
'
..
.
-
-
l=
.
=
-;;­
-==--~-~~
-
-
-
-
--
-
-- --
-~
4
I EVO LUT IO N OF INDICATIO NS FO R AN T ERIO R B OND ED
Type IliA: Extensive coronal fracture
Porc ela in veneers a llow the vitality of the teeth
to be ma intained despite con siderable cor onal
brea kdown . In chil dren , such co nd itio ns would
PO RCEL AI N R ESTO RATI ONS
investigati on surprising ly clai med ultimate coro­
nal streng ths of restored teeth far exceed ing
those o f intac t teeth (Fig 4 -9a) . This co nclusio n
mig ht even be stro nger today co nsidering the
prog ress of dentin ad hesives. How eve r, dentin
be prefera bly trea ted wi th d irect compos ites as
ad hesion might no t be as cri tical as initia lly
transient restorati o ns, rather tha n porcela in
resto ra tions, w hich sho uld ba sically be used in
tho ugh t for this type of indi cati on. It wa s clear ly
de mo nstrated that the potentia l o f the co ncept
lies in the desig n o f the restorati on , w hic h is ex­
adu lts. Extensive incisa l edge spa ns of ce ramic
ma teria l ha ve been investigated o nly recen tly23
plain ed through favorabl e load co nfig urat ion,
a nd subseq uently used cli nica lly w ith succe ss."
For severely fractured inciso rs (F ig 4 -8L the ex­
ge o metry, and tissue arran gement of maxillary
incisors [Figs 4 -9b a nd 4 -9c).23.46As a conse­
treme desig n of the restorati ons suggests tha t
terminol ogy may need to be chang ed : ca n we
still call these restorat ions "lamin ates" or "ve­
q uence , co rona l streng th proves to be sufficient
even w hen using BPRs wi th extensive incisal
neers"? Co nseq uently, the term "bo nde d porce­
lain restorati on s" (BPRs) has been p ropose d
instead 24
of scientific stud ies ha ve
field of indi cat ion s. Wa ll et
that up to 2 mm of inci sal
ed g e spa ns of cera mics. In a cli nica l eva lua­
tion , no probl ems w ere de tected w hen up to
5 .5 mm of avera g e freestand ing feldspathic
material was used ."
O nly a limited number
BPR-resto red c rowns wi th extensive inc isal ed ge
exp lored this new
a l45 de mon strated
spa ns
edge span o f ce ra mics co uld be crea ted o n
ma ndibu lar inci sors w itho ut a ffec ting the ulti­
ma te coron a l streng th, but An d reasen et ai lS
may have been the first authors to study the
treat ment
of crown-frac tured
inci so rs w ith la mi­
nate-type BPRs in the ear ly 19 9 0 s. Their in vitro
of
ceram ics are characterized by their
"lo w-stress" desig n and increased crow n stiff­
ness w hen co mpared to intact teeth.53 As men­
tio ned in C hapter 1, how ever, fleXi bili ty proves
to be an essential qual ity in any structure . O th­
erwi se, it woul d be unabl e to a bsorb the en­
ergy of a traumati c blow. Up to a point, the
mo re resilient a structure, the better s 3.54
FIGURE 4-9: STRENGTH OF INTACT AND FRACTURED INCISORS RESTORED WITH DIFFERENT TREATMENT
MODALITIES . The results of stud ies by Andreasen et 01 (w hite bo r!" a nd g ray bo rs" ) a nd M unksgaard et 01 (black
bo rs-"] have been com bined in this g ra ph . Ce ra mic restorati o ns co nsisted o f traditi onal facial la minates [no incisal
coverag e) except for the last g roup [fra ctured tooth plus bulk veneer}, w hich featured the hig hest average strength a nd
co rrespo nded to teeth for w hich the veneers included the missing par t of Ihe incisal edge as w ell the faci al surface .
G ro ups that w ere not statistica lly different are linked by brackets on the left (4-90). Fac ia l load ing w as a pplied {light
gray arrowheads}.
154
....-
-
--. ---- - ------_
--
--==--
-
-
---~
-
---
-
----
.-
--- '
\.
.
--
"
'
" ULTI M ATE STR ENGTH (MPo)
FIGURE 4-9 '(CO N TIN UED):' MODIFIED VON MISES STRESS .DISTRIBUTION THROUGHOUT BUCCOLINGUAL
SECTIONS OF RESTORED 'INCISORS (FI NITE ELEMENT ANALYSISj. The thick do tted orrow shows the loca tion and
di rectionol the 50-N load , The' w hite dotted line represents the luting co mposite. Despiteextreme differences in-the
design of the restoration, the tooth-restoration interface and the restoration itself ore not sub jected to elevated stresses
for both the minimum veneer \ (4~9 b ) a nd ,the veneer restoring the fra ctured tooth (4 -9 c). l n bo th cases, the interface , '
does not cross the pcila tal conca vity. Stresses in the rema ining pala tal enamel ore even higher in 4-9b compared to
stresses at the same loca tion in the concavity of the ceramic piece in 4-9c. The !wo incisors are restored w ith the sa me
feldspa thic ceramic (see also Fig 6- 1,2).
--- ~
-
--
---
-
-
-
--
-
-
-
- -- - - - --­
4
I
EVOLUTI O N O F IN DI CATION S FOR ANTE RI OR B ONDE D PO RCEL AIN RE STORATI ON S
Fu rther
research
is required
to d etermi ne
o f a por cela in veneer beca use of unifo rm ther­
w hether modu lated streng th through high er­
ma l expa nsio n a nd the absence of hygro sco pic
expa nsio n of the rebonded fragment.
compli a nce des igns mig ht be ind ica ted , ie, by
including underlyin g co mpos ite buildups. This
modali ty w as includ ed in the Ioad-to-fa ilure
study by A nd reasen et 01 15 (see Fig 4-9a ) and
yielded favo ra ble ultima te crown streng th. The
related stress dis tribution w as ca lculated in a fi­
nite element study.23 Presen ce of the co mposite
provides a sig nifica nt effec t, simultaneo usly a l­
low ing the decrease of stresses in the pa la ta l
co nca vity (stress redi stributi o n into the more flex­
ib le compos ite) and relocatin g the margin of
the veneer into the "safe" inci sal area . How­
W hen the fractured tooth fragmen t is not avail­
a ble, the simplified "ce ra mic o nly" design is rec­
o mmended (Figs 4 -8 a nd 4-1 0 ) beca use it is
straig h ~orward and fea tures optimal esthetic re­
sults . The de nta l technici an ca n use spec ific
po rcela ins to accurately reproduce the a natomy
a nd o ptical charac teristics of de ntin, ie, opa que
dentin fo r an ad eq uate translucency a nd fluo­
rescent stains for a n adeq uate luminescence
(see Figs 7 -8 and 7 -9 ). M ost composite resins
ever, unde rlying composite buildups must be
carefully considered. Fu rther scien tific investiga­
do not a llow such precise characteriza tio n.
tions are needed w ith regard to the high ther­
Fractured mandibul ar teeth ca n be treated w ith
ma l expa nsio n
of
ce rta in com posite resins.
the same approach [Fig 4-1 0) . Even though
Composi te resins prove d to have a signi fican t
influence o n the developm ent o f cera mic post­
functio nal stresses can gen erate tensile force s a t
the facial surfac e o f mand ibu lar incisors [see Fig
1-6 ), this is not a co ntraind ica tion for BPRs. Due
bo nd ing flaw s w hen a pplied too thic kly as a
luting ag ent56-58 or w hen used in the form of p re­
existing Cl ass
3 restorotio ns."
For the time being , the rebonding of the frac­
tured tooth fragment,55.60 w hen possible, is ce r­
ta inly ind ica ted beca use it has been proven to
gi ve g ood results w hen supplemented with a
veneer (see Fig 4 -9 a ).1 4 In fact, this treat ment
to the favo rable facial geometry of mandibular
incisors, the morphology of w hich dis pla ys flat
o r soft con vex contours, such facia l tensile
stresses remain mod erate. The loading confi g u­
rat ion o f mandi bular teeth (ie, facial load ) w as
reprod uced in stud ies by Wal l et a l45 and A n­
dreasen et a l 14
15
and y ielded favo ra ble results
co mpared to intact teeth.
moda lity seems appro priate prio r to place ment
FIGURE 4-10 : PREVIOUSLY FRACTURED MANDIBULAR INCISORS. This case features com bi ned ind icati ons for
BPRs: recover y of incisa l pro minence in the maxilla and de finitive restora tions of the righ t ce ntral and latera l mandibu­
lar incisors previously restored w ith co mposites (4- 100) . Detailed views of the tooth prepara tion (4- 1Obi a nd fina l ce­
ra mic restorations [4- 1Oc]. Marked anter ior gUidance ensures adequate function, and the situatio n remains stable after
3 years of cli nical service (4-1 Od; this view a lso show s porcela in laminates on the moxillo rv right central incisor to
the left ca nine). Addi tiona l views of this case , as well a s de tailed diagnostic procedures , are presented in Fig 5-8 .
156
----------
.
.
..-----------~-
~
-
-~
'
-
-~--~
.
,
"
4
I
EVOLUTION OF INDICATIONS FOR ANTERIOR BONDED PORCELAIN RESTORATIONS
Type IIIB: Extensive loss of enamel
tralizing mouth rinse leg, bicarbonate solution)
and topical application of neutral fluoridated
Extensive tooth abrasion is typically found in
gels can be recommended. Adhesive dentistry
people of older age groups; of the maxillary
teeth, the anterior teeth often exhibit the most
should be used whenever possible if restora­
tion is necessary.
wear (Fig 4-1 1). However, tooth surface loss is
a growing problem in younger individuols." Di­
Localized loss of enamel can be easily treated
etary acids are increasingly popular (especial ly
by direct application of composite resins. In
soft drinks). Bulimia, consumption of acidic
case of a more extensive wear pattern, bonded
foods, acid reflux, and chlorine consumption
porcelain restorations can be proposed and
[from swimming) are other typical etiologic fac­
may include posterior teeth. Type IIIB indications
tors in young patients.
can appear somewhat similar to type lie, but
the former features a more generalized nature
Tooth erosion, particularly in young people,
presents a considerable challenge to restora­
(often more then four teeth to treat) as compared
to the latter (which often involves only two
tive dentists. In all cases, preventive and con­
teeth). Another typical type IIIB patient is fea­
servative strategies are essential. Use of neu-
tured in Figs 8-8g to 8-8j.
FIGURE 4-11: ENAMEL EROSION OF MAXILLARY ANTERIOR TEETH. The patient presented with severe facial wear
of maxillary anterior teeth and infiltrated Class 3 composite resin restorations (4-11 a to 4-1 1c). Note definite dentin
exposures on the facial surface of the right and left central incisors (4-1 1b) Treatment planning included replacement
of preexisting restorations, and teeth were prepared according to a diagnostic template; note the proximal margins
extending within the new interdental restorations (especially between the central and lateral incisors) to minimize the
volume of remaining composite restorative material 14-11d). The final porcelain restorations feature minor changes of
tooth form and length but substantial recovery of the facial volume (4-1 1e to 4-1 '1 hi.
158
~~
-~~
­ -------------=-­
,
----
--------=_
_
-
1
= =--
-----­
-
=====
~\
,
- --
.~-;~
_--------.....:;­
_::::=-
,
- =
- -
--~--
----­
4
I EVOLUTION O F IN DICATION S FOR A NTERIOR
B OND ED P ORCELAI N R ESTOR ATION S
'lie:
Type
Generalized congenital
and acquired malformations
A number of loc a lized malfor mations of the
crown surface ca n be ~r eated by rather co nser­
va tive mea ns, includin g freeha nd composite
restorati o ns (see Fig s 3-5 and 3- 1 1) 6 263 G en­
w hic h are preferab ly used in the adu lt. Prema­
ture placement of po rcela in restora tions (before
ag e 16 or 18 ) may not be appro priate be­
cau se of the sig nifica nt chang es that still take
place w ithin the dentitio n leg , pa ssive eruptio n
a nd resid ua l a lveolar c rest growth).
era lized ena mel dysplasia (F ig 4 -1 2), how ever,
G enera lized enamel dysplasia must be d istin­
req uires a more g lob al a pproach a nd may be
trea ted successfully a nd conser va tively w ith
gu ished fro m a melogenesis imperfecta . The la t­
BPRs if the de ntinoename l junctio n has not been
al tered 2 9 As w as said for type IliA, direct co m­
posites can be used as interim restorat ions in
the child prio r to the final porcelai n bond ing s,
ter req uires particular prud ence: most freque ntly
a full-coverage prosthetic proc ed ure rema ins
the treatment o f choic e ." Further research is re­
q uired to d etermine w hether amelogenesis im­
perfecta ca n be trea ted w ith bo nded ce ramics.
FIGURE 4-1 2 : COMPREHENSIVE TREATMENT APPROACH FOR G EN ERA LI ZED ENAMEL DYSPLASIA. M axillary
teeth w ere previously trea ted wi th PFM crowns, w hich sig nifica ntly a ltered the pa tient's self-confidence: her eyes flee
the ca mera a nd her lips try to hide her teeth (4-120 , 4 -12 bj . The mand ibular teeth still exhibit the orig inal surface de­
fects (4 -12 c) The mand ibular situatio n is co mplica ted by marked crow d ing (4-12d). The preprosthetic phase included
provisio naliza tion of rnoxillo rv teeth a nd extractio n of a mandi bular incisor follow ed by orthodontic therapy (4- 12e).
[Fig ure 4 -1 2c is rep rinted from Magne and Magne 52 wi th permission.)
160
.
-
-
-
-
~ ........,..~-
------ -
--
.~
=
- -- -
­-
.
_
_
_ t. _
_
.
',
,
. ,'
.
.\
v•
', '
==
==
I~~-
=-
"=
-'-...- __
----- ..... --~ - -
I
.
,
,
\
, '
"
,
,
\:'
FIGURE 4.121CONTINUEDI . Once realigned, (4·1 2fl. mandibular incisors, canine s, and first premolars w erepre­
pared [4 ~12g),resto red with po rcelci nlcrn motes (4-12hl. and stabi HzecJ w ith a lingua!.b onded ' retainer. Definitive '
restora tions on maxillary teeth w ere then carried out in a seco nd, stage [4-12il ,' wh ich allowed [orthe exoctshcde re­
production ol .inteqroted mandibular veneers (4, 12j , 4-12 k), Significcint irnpcct .on 'the patient's confidence and .sccio!
life is expected 14: 12iiq '4 -1) m). Theserestoia tions have been in cliniccl servicelor moo
re than 9 vec rswilhout mcijor
problems, Detailed steps for the fapricatjon of mandi bular veneers'arEl shown in Fig '7· 1 1,
-
--- .
.,~=-'.-
&.,--~= ­
-----
- - -- - - - -- - - - - - - - - - - - - -- - --
- - - - - - -- - -
- - - - -- ­
-
4
I EVOLUTI ON
OF IN DICATI ON S FOR AN T ERIO R BO ND ED P ORCEL A IN R ESTORATIONS
COMBINED INDICATIONS
It is uncommon to find patients wi th o nly one
The pa tient in Fig 4-1 3 par ticular ly illustrates
rea son to justify the use o f BPRs . Most pa tients in
that fac t bec ause there we re a t least three mai n
this book present a combina tio n
of
fa ctors that
rea son s to use BPRs . The restora tio ns simultane­
finally lea d to the decisio n to use po rcela in ma­
o usly permitted solving the prob lem
of
terial in an indi rect approa ch.
stain ing of a nonvita l too th, closure
of di a stem­
a ta, and redefinit io n
of
residua l
to o th form an d length .
.....
" .• . .. . '" . •. .• •• . . . . .":: .. : . ;-.::;;' ...~.-' . 'o .. . . ; . . •.• ~ . ...."" . •. ... , . , .. '
":- 1 3 ~
FIGURE 4-13: TYPICAL PATIENT WITH COMBINED INDICATIONS FOR BPRs . Preoperative views: the patien t's re­
quest included the closing of interdental spaces betw een maxillary incisors (4 -13a ). In ad d itio n, the left centra l incisor
presented bleaching-resista nt staining , a nd analysi s of the smile revealed a sig nifica nt space betw een the low er lip
a nd maxillar y incisors (4 -13b) . Io o lh volume and leng th were redefined acco rding ly; the approxim ate curva ture of
the lip (dolled curve) served a s a reference (4-13c; unprepared teeth a nd silicon index of the waxup) , Baseline (4­
13d l, co rrespond ing views of tooth prepara tions (4- 13e , 4- 13fl, a nd final BPRs (4-13g to 4 -13i ) Cohesiveness be­
twee n the rnoxillo rv teeth a nd the low er lip ca n now be ob served (4- 13 hl, and there is a significa nt improvement in
the pa tient's denfofacial compositio n (4- 13 i) [Pa lient treated in co llaboratio n w ith Dr Va lerie Favez, University o f
C enevo .]
164
.>', '
.
,
~
..
---
~t__
-
-
-
­
-
.
­
-
-
•
­
4
I
EVOLUTI ON OF IND ICATION S FO R AN TERIOR BON DED PORC ELAIN R ESTORATIONS
BIOLOGIC CONSIDERATIONS
A co mp rehensive discuss io n
of new
indications
for BPRs must includ e biologi c co nside ratio ns.
For those pa tients showing types II an d III indi ­
ca tio ns, tradition al treatment ap proaches (full­
cove rage crown) wou ld involve the removal of
large amounts of sound too th substance, w ith
a dverse effects o n pulp, g ing ivae , a nd crown
biomechanics , not to mentio n the serio us finan­
cia l cons eq uences. The use
of
adhesive tech­
no logy instead al low s maximum preservation of
tissues (incl ud ing ma intena nce o f tooth vita lity)
a nd limits cos ts, w hich a lso contrib utes to the
sa tisfactio n
of the
pati ent.
even demonstra ted sig nifican t reduc tio ns in
Pla que Index a nd plaque bacteria vitality a fter
the placement of po rce la in ve neers. Such re­
sults ca ll into question the gene ral assumption
that so-cal led high-end adhesive restoralion s
are not indi cated fo r pa tients w ith poo r oral hy­
g iene. In fact, beca use of the ir "friend ly " be­
havior, bonded ce ra mics mig ht be the most
fo rgiv ing resto ra tio ns fo r patients strugg ling
w ith o ra l hygi ene (Fig 4-140 ). It can be anti ci­
pa ted that those pa tients' period ontium might
respond be tter to ceram ic materials, co nside r­
ing that d ental porcela in is less susceptib le to
accumu lation of bacteria l p laq ue than are
A sig nifica nt outcom e is the excel lent peri­
gold , resin, o r even minera lized tooth struc­
odontal respon se (see follow-up photog ra phs
in Figs 4-5r, 4 -7h , 4 -8e to 4- 8 i, 4-1 ad , and 4­
tures M .67 There is Virtua lly no surface degrada­
tio n of the ceramic materia l, w hich is co rro bo­
14), w hich w as first noted by Ca la mia in the
late 1980s 9 Due to thei r favo ra ble intrinsic es­
rated by the absence of plaque accumu lation
(Fig 4- 14b).24 An add itio na l a dva ntage o f BPRs
thetics in the marg ina l area, bon ded cera mic
restorations do not require penetration into the
from the periodo nta l pe rspective is the avoid­
ance of cro wn-l engthening proced ures, be­
gingiva l sulcus, which prevents po tential dam­
ag e to the periodontal tissues. Kourkouta et 0 165
cause even very short clinical crow ns can be
recovered (see Fig . 4-8 ).
FIGURE 4-14 : FOLLOW·UP VIEWS OF PERIODONTAL SO FT TISSUES AROUND BPRs AFTER 5 TO 6 YEARS OF
CLI ~"CAL SERVICE W ITHOUT SPECIFIC MAINTENANCE . Posto perative view 6 years after placement of a po rce­
lai n veneer on the lateral incisor showin g a favorable periodo ntal situa tio n despite poo r o ra l hygi ene; there has been
significa nt evolutio n of the ce rvica l lesio n on the ca nine (4-14a ), This case w as de tai led in Fig 4 -4 (baseline view o f
the lateral incisor in Fig 4 -4g) . Magnified view from another pa tient 5 years after the placement of a BPR (4-14b).
The po rcela in surface is still glossy, the margi n is invisible, and there is no plaque accumulation despite the fact thai
no specific profess ional maintenance has been car ried o ut (the sa me ca n be sa id for the pat ient in Fig 4-140).
166
-
~.---
- - - -- --
--
~-
- - -- -
~
- - --
- -
-
~-=
4
I EVOLUTI ON
OF INDI CATION S FOR A NTERIO R B ON DE D PORC ELA IN RE STO RATIO NS
Finally! optima l esthetics
of
the marginal peri­
is increased by the up per lip : the p roxi mity
of the
ll
odo ntium in the presence of BPRs is ensured
lip can genera te a n "urn brello effed (s hadow)
through the so-ca lled esthetic w id th inherent to
c haracterized by grayish margin al g ingivae and
these restorations (Fi g 4-15 ).35 With conven­
dar k interd ental
tio nal full-coverag e resto rat io ns, extend ed metal
4-15 d ; see also Fig 4-12b). BPRs, o n the other
frameworks a nd opaque a luminous ce rami c
han d , ex hib it an excellent optica l behav io r and
papillae
(Fig s 4-1 5 b a nd
of the
cores are assoc ia ted w ith unplea sant optica l ef­
promote a na tural ap peara nce
fects in the surround ing soft tissues. This pro blem
soft tissues (Fig s 4 -15c a nd 4 -15d ).
marginal
FIGURE 4-15: ESTHETIC WIDTH AND UMBRELLA EFFECT ON THE SOFT TISSUES . The restorat ions (full-coverage
ceramic crow ns on the right can ine to left canine) are too opaque and are respo nsible for gray ish papillae ob served
only in the presence of the lip (compare 4-150 and 4-15b; see 4 -15d, upper pari) . In contra st, per iodontal lissues
a round BPRs [rig ht central incisor to left canine) or jacket crowns ap pear healthy and naturally illuminated
(4-15c, 4-15d, lower pari). (Fi g ure 4 -15d is reprinted from Magne et 0 135 with permissio n.)
168
~
-
- -
=--= ­
-
-
--- - ---- -
--
-
----=------=
.
·
I
,,­
-
-
----=-
­
,.
\
4
I EV O LUT IO N OF
IND ICAT IO N S FO R AN T ERIOR B O N D ED PORCELA IN R ESTO RATIONS
PERSPECTIVES FOR OCCLU SAL VENEERS IN PO STERIOR TEETH
Patients' req uests an d cl inicians' interest in es­
thetic restora tions are not limited to an terior
teeth. As a result, posterio r tooth-colored adhe­
sive restorat ive techni ques have g row n consid­
era bly over the lost de code .
cuspa l flexure d ue to their mo rphology a nd oc­
clusion. Res torative p rocedures ca n increase
cuspal movement under occlusa l load ,68,72
w hic h in turn ma y result in a ltered streng th, fa­
tigu e fracture , a nd c rocked-too th syn­
drom es.73 - 75 Such know ledge a llowed consid­
The b io mimetic principl es that have been di s­
cussed for an te rio r teeth can be similarly ap­
plied to molars a nd premolars. The fol loWing
bio mecha nica l co nside ra tio n shou ld be re­
membered : As w as the case for crown flexure
in anterior teeth, cuspal flexure rep resents the
most importa nt biomecha nica l fea ture in pos­
terior teeth .
erab le development of methods improving
frac ture resistance of teeth76,77 throug h var io us
fo rms of full or partia l co verage 78-80 an d , mo re
recently, throug h the use
sive techni qu es.69.81,82
of
co nse rva tive ad he­
M arg ina l rid g e integ rity is o n important
a nat o mic feature limiting c uspa l flex ure,
w hic h is the most sig nifican t con tributor to
C hief adva nces have resulted from the study
a nd understandin g
of
cuspa l flexure a nd plas­
tic y ie ldi ng , w hich are key para meters in the
per forma nce of the tooth -restora tive co m­
plex .68.69 Subclinica l cuspa l mlcrodelorrnotion.
ie , be low the threshol d
of cha irside
observa ­
lion. has been id entifi ed since the early 1980s
by Do ug las68 a nd Morin et 0 1/0,7 1a nd it is now
accep ted that intact posterior teeth dem onstrate
stiffness a nd strength
of
the posterior tooth
crown. "
A s mentio ned in C hapter 3 for a nterio r teeth, a
number of posterior teeth can be treated ultra­
con servatively with freeha nd composites,84,85
especial ly if the proxima l ridges are intac t to
ensure the b io mec hanica l integ rity
crown (Fig s 4-16 and 4-17).
of
the tooth
FIGURE 4-16 : SMALL- TO MEDIUM-SIZED REPLACEMENT OF TOOTH SUBSTANCE WITH FREEHAt'-ID COM­
POSITES . Proximal ridges a re intact o n this molar, w hich presents the ideal ind ica tion for d irect co mposite restoration
(4-16 a ). C ovlty preparati o n after car ies removal (4- 16b) a nd beveling (4-16 c). Composite w as stratified using the
sa ndw ich technique;" w hich co mprises a base o f ena mellike shad es (4-16d ) tha t are characterized w ith intense stains
and covered w ith more translucent masses (4 -16 e) Each cusp and anato mic lobe ca n be cured separate ly
(4-1 6 fl, w hich a llows the elaboration of a sophistica ted morpholog y and functiona l masticatory surface (4-16g to
4 -16 i) Finishing of the restora tion is significan tly simplified ; the fina l contou rs and luster are easily obtained w ith
"home-made" notched SofLex disks (3M) (4-16 j to 4 -16 1) .
170
"
r.
,
FIGURE 4-1 SEVEN-YEAR FoLLOW-UP OF FREEHAND COMPOSITE. Preoperative view of Ol d amalgam restora­
tion (4-17 o j a nd postope rative .view . aher 7 years of cli nica l service (4-17b), Staining of the restoration closely
matches the natural occlusolsulcus.ofn eig hboring teeth. The detail view shows no alteration of margin and excellent
behavior of the motericl (4-17c). The clinical success mig ht be attributed to the limited a mount of tooth substa nce re­
.
'"
'
,.
.
.
pbced .
,=
_
L.-
­
_
J
4
I EVO L UTIO N O F IN DI CATIO N S FO R A NTERIO R B ONDED
P ORCELA IN REST ORA TI ON S
The co mparatively low elastic modu lus of most
Luting procedures for these po sterior BPRs w ill
co mposites, however, ca n never fully co mpen­
follow the sa me steps that are described in
C hapter 8 for anterior BPRs,28 ie, immed ia te
sate for the loss of strong proximal ename l
ridges , especially in large Cla ss 2 restorat ions.
In these situations, espeda lly w hen cusp cover­
appl icat ion
impre ssion
of the den tin bon d ing agen t (befo re
taking) and use of a reg ular light-cur­
age is required , indirect cera mic inlays/on lays
seem to be the best option. 84.35 Adeq ua te stiff­
ing com po site as the luting age nt; dua l-cure
co mpos ite cement ca n be o mitted in this ap­
ness of the porcelain materia l po tentia lly a llow s
for complete recovery of crow n rigi d ity. Cu rrent
co mposites suffer not o nly from low elaslic mod­
proa ch beca use BPRs seem to o ffer sufficient
tran slucency for effec tive lig ht curinq. " The rig­
ulus and limited to ug hness but a lso fro m high
therma l expansio n; in this co ntext, their use as a
restorative ma teria l fo r large oc clusa l and stress­
bear ing rehabilitation seems questionable .
o ro us a pplicat io n of this seq uence is impera tive
to avo id postoperative sensitivity.
As d iscussed for type III ind ica tions for ante­
rior BPRs, the use of posterio r BPRs in the form
of cera mic
In the ca se of tota l occl usal cov erage in vital
o nlays a nd overla ys is indeed a
[ud icio us way to avoid tradi tiona l prosthetic
teeth w ith a short clini cal crown , ind irec t ce­
procedures that would require root-cana l ther­
ramic overlays are indicated (Figs 4-18 a nd 4­
apy and surgica l crown leng thening . Maxi­
19 ).86 .85
mum tissue preservation an d biom imetics, the
dri vin g force s of modern restorati ve den tistry,
are enabled.
FIGURE 4-18 : FIVE-YEAR FOllOW-UP OF AN "OCCLUSAL VENEER" OF A VITAL TOOTH WITH A SHORT CLIN­
ICAL CROW N . Compara tive view of a PFM crow n a nd cera mic overlay (4 -180 ). The ad va ntage of the overlay for
this molar with a short clini ca l crown is ob vious: the too th is still vital and functions w itho ut prob lems after 5 years of
clin ica l service (4 -18 b, 4 -1 8c; now 8 year s of clini ca l service) N ote that no effective den tin bo nd ing age nts were
avai lab le at the time of placeme nt. Ad hesion to marg inal ename l is solely responsible for this clinical success.
FIGURE 4-1 9 : CO NSERVATIVE REPLACEMENT OF AN AM A LG AM RESTORATI ON WITH CERAMIC OVERLAY­
7-YEAR FOllOW-UP. Insufficient remaining thickness o f cusps (4-190) justified complete coverage of the too th, but it
wa s kept vital . Final view of the cera mic overlay on its sing le d ie (4-19 b) and after ad hesive luting (4-19 c). C lose-up
view af ter mo re tha n 7 yea rs o f cli nical service w ilho ut intervention (4 -19 d; now 10 years of clini cal service) Here
aga in, no effective dentin bonding agents w ere availab le a t the time of placement. Ad hesion to margina l ename l is
solely responsible for this clini ca l success.
172
~
,- -
-
-
- - - ----------==-- -
~
~
_
-
f
­
~
e--
-
-­
.
-
­
.
~ --~~-=-------.-=:::=.._­
-­
---"
-­
=
-
-
-
-
-­
-
--­
-­
-­­
--­
-­
4
I EVOL UTI ON O F INDI CATI ONS FO R A NTERIO R B ON DED
PORCEL AIN RE STOR ATI ON S
2 1. Mag ne P, Doug las W Ho Ad d itive co ntour of porcela in ve­
References
1. Pincus CR. BUild ing mouth personality. J South Ca lif Dent
Assoc 193 8;14:125-129 .
2 . Horn HR. Porcelain laminate veneers bonded to etched
enamel. Dent C lin North Am 1983 ;27 671-6 84.
3 . Ca la mia JR. Etched po rcelain facial veneers: A new treot­
ment mod a lity based on scien ific and c1 inico l evide nce.
NY J Dent 1983;53:255-259
4 . Rochette AL. A ceramic restoration bonded by etched
enamel and resin for froctured incisors. J Prosihet Dent
1975 ;33: 287- 293 .
5 . Touati B, Pissis P, Miora P. Bond ed sing le restorations ond
the co ncept of pelliculor preporotions. Cah Prothese
neers: A key element in enamel preservation, adhesio n
and esthetic for the ag ing dentition. J Adhes Dent 1999; 1:
8 1-9 1.
22. Magne P, Douglas W Ho Optimisa tion des concepts me­
caniqu e en medec ine denlaire esthetique. Inf Dent 1999 ;
81 :37 3- 38 1.
23. Magne P, Douglas W H DeSig n optimization a nd evolu­
tion of bo nded ceramics for the anterior dentition: A finile
element a nalysis. Qui ntessence Int 1999;30:66 1-672.
24 . Magne P, Perroud R, Hod ges JS, Belser UC C linica l per­
formonce o f novel-design po rcelain veneers for the recov­
ery of co ronal volume and length. Int J Periodontics Res­
torotive Dent 2000; 20 44 1-4 57
25. Jordo n RE, Boksman L. Co nservative vital bleac hing treot­
1985 ; 13 95-1 30.
6. Toual i B, Bersay L. Enameling of teeth using g lass ceromic
veneers. C ah Prothese 19 87 ; 15 167-1 89
ment o f d iscolored dentition . Compend Con tin Educ Dent
7 . Touati B, Pli ssart-Vanackere A C eramic bo nded veneers.
Toward a minimol prosthesis Reol C lin 1990 ; 1:51 - 66 .
26 . Hoyw ood VB, Leono rd RH, Dickinson G L. Efficacy of six
8 . Cai amio JR . Etched porcelai n veneers: The current state o f
the cr t. Q uintessence Int 19 85 ;16:5-1 2.
9 Ca lomia JR. C linica l eva luation o f etched po rcelain ve­
neers. AmJ Dent 1989 ;2:9-1 5
10. C ala mia JR. The current stotus of etched porcelain veneer
restora tions. J lndi ono Dent Assoc 1993 ;72: 10-1 5 .
1 1. C hristensen Gj. Veneering of teeth: Sta te of the cr t. Dent
C lin North Am 19 85 ;29:373-391 .
12. Garber AD, Goldstein RE, Feinman RA Porcelain Lami­
nate Veneers. C hicago : Q Uintessence, 1988 .
13. Friedman Mj. Aug menting resto rative dentistry wit h porce­
lain veneers. J Am Denl Assoc 1991 ; 122:29-34 .
14. Andreasen FM, Daug aard~e n s en J. Mun ksgaard EC Re­
inforcement o f bo nded crown fractured inci sors w ith po r­
celain veneers. Endod Dent Tra umatol 1991 ;7 :78- 83.
Da u ga ard~e n se n J. M unks­
gaard EC Treatment o f crow n fractured incisors w ith lam­
inate veneer restoratio ns: An experimental study. Endod
Dent Traumatol 199 2;8:30-35 .
15 And reasen FM, Flugge E,
16 . Mag ne P, Magne M , Belser U. Na tural a nd restorative
o ral esthetics. Part II: Esthetic treatment modal ities. J Esthet
Dent 1993;5: 239-246 .
] 7 . Magne P, HoIz J. Restauration des den ts o nterieures.
Principe, indic alion s el limites des techniques de traite­
rnent. Rev Mens Suisse Odontostomatol 1994; 104 :
124 7-1254.
18. W alls AW. The use o f ad hesively rela ined all-porcela in ve­
neers during the manage ment o f fractured and worn a nte­
rior teeth: Part 1. C linica l technique. Br Dent J 1995;
178:333-336.
19 . Walls AW. The use of adh esively retained all-porcelain ve­
neers d uring the manag ement of fractured and worn ante­
rior teeth: Part 2 . C linical results after 5 years o f follow-up
Br Dent J 1995 ;178:3 37-3 40.
20 . Belser UC , Mag ne P, Magne M. Ce ramic laminate ve­
neers: Continuous evolution
of indicat ions. J
1997;9 197-207.
~
-
-
-==--=- - ...,....-- -
--
months o f nightguord vital bleach ing of tetrocycli ne-stai ned
teeth J Esthel Dent 1997 ;9 .13- 19.
27 . Hoyw ood VB, Porker M H . N ig htguord vital bleaching be­
neoth existing po rcelain veneers: A case report. Qu in­
tessence Int 1999;30:743-747
28. Magne P, Doug las W H o Porcelain veneers: Dentin bo nd­
ing optimiza tion and biomimetic recovery o f the crown . Int
J Prosthod ont 1999; 12:1 1 1- 12 1.
29. M ag ne P, Douglas W H oRationaliza tion o f esthetic restora­
tive dentistry based on biomimetics. J Esthet Dent 1999 ;
11:5-1 5.
30 . Mag ne P, Dougla s W H oC umulative effects of successive
reslorative proced ures o n a nterior crown flexure: Intact ver­
sus veneered incisors. Q uintessence Int 2000;3 1:5- 18.
3 1. Sedg ley CM , M esser HH. Are endodontica lly treated
teeth more brittle? J Endod 199 2; 183 32-3 35
32 . Papa J, C a in C, Messer HH . M o isture co nlent of vita l vs
endodontica lly treated teeth. Endod Dent Traumatal
1994 ;10:91-9 3
33 . Princej, Donova n T. The esthetic metal-ceramic margi n: A
com pa rison o f techniq ues J Proslhe! Dent 1983;50:
185-192.
34 . W ohlwend A, Sirub JR, Scharer P M etal-ceramic a nd 011­
po rcelain restora tio ns: Cu rrent co nsiderations. IntJ Prostho­
dont 1989 ;2 13-26.
35 . M agne P, M agne M, Belser U. The esthetic wi d th in fixed
proslhod ontics J Prosthodont 1999;8: 106-11 8.
36 . Schoeneberg AJ. Di Felice A, Cossu M . The esthetic po­
tential of the ceramic-fused-to-metal technique . In: Fischer J
led) Esthetics a nd Prosthetics: An Interdi scipl inary Con sid­
era tion of the Sta te of the Art. C hicago : Q uintessence,
1999 :31-70 .
37 . Peumans M , Van Meerbeek B, Lambrechts P, Vanherle G,
Q Uirynen M The influence of direct composite ad ditio ns
fo r the cor rectio n o f loo th form a nd/ o r position o n peri­
od o ntal health: A retrospective study. J Periodontal 1998;
69:422-427.
174
~--
Esthet Dent
1984;5:8 0 3-80 8
---=--­
--
-
-
EVOLUTI ON O F INDI CATI ON S FOR A NTE RIO R B ON DED P OR CEL AI N RE STO RAT IO NS
38 . Burke S, Burch j G , Telz j A Incidence and size of pre­
treatment overlap and posttreatment g ingival embrasure
space belween maxillary cenlral incisors . Am j O rthod
Dentofac ial O rthop 1994 ; 105 50 6-511.
I
4
57 . M ag ne P, Kwon KR, Belser U, Dougla s W H o C rack
prop ensity of porcelain laminate veneers: A Simula ted o p­
eratory evaluation. j Prosthet Dent 1999;81 :327-33 4 .
58 . Mag ne P, Versluis A, Douglas W H o Effect of luting com­
posite shrinkage a nd thermal load s on the stress d istribu­
tion in porcelain laminate veneers. j Pro slhet Dent 19 9 9 ;
8 1:3 35- 34 4.
39. Allen EP, Koisj, Tornow D, Takei H. Progress in interdental
papilla construction. Presented at the 21 st Annua l M eeting
of the American Academy of Esthetic Dentistry, Aspen,
August 8, 19 9 6 .
59 . Mag ne P, Douglas W H o Interdental desiqn of porcela in
veneers in the presence of composite fillings: Finite ele­
ment ana lysis of composite shrinkage and therma l stresses.
Inl j Prosthod onl 20 0 0 ; 131 17- 124 .
40. Kopp FR: Esthetic principles for full crown restorali ons. Part
II: Provisionalization. j Esthet Dent 19 9 3;5258-264 .
41 . Lombardi RE. The principles o f visua l perception and their
clinical ap plica tion to denture esthetics. j Pro sthet Dent
19 73 ;29 :35 8-3 8 2 .
60 . Baratieri LN el 0 1 [eds]. Direct Adhesive Restorations on
Fractured Anterior Teeth. Sao Paulo: Q uintessence, 19 98:
135-205.
42 W alls AW, Murray jJ. M cCabe jF. Co mposite laminate
veneers: A clinical study. j O ral Reha bil 1988 ; 15 :
4 39-454 .
61 . Deery C , W agner M L, Longbottom C , Simon R, N ugent
Zj. The prevalence o f denial erosion in a United States
and a United Kingdom sample of adolescents. Pediatr
Dent 2000; 22 :505-5 10
4 3. Tyas Mj. Correlation belween fracture properties and clin­
ical performance of composite resins in C loss IV cavities.
Aust Dent j 1990 ;35 :4 6-49.
6 2. M agne P Megabrasion A conservative strategy for the
anterior dentition. Pract Periodontics Aesthet Dent 19 9 7 ;
9:389- 39 5.
44. Peumans M , Von Meer beek B, Lam brechts P, Vanh erle G.
The 5-year clinical performance of di rect co mposite add i­
tions to correcl tooth form and position. I. Esthetic q ua lities.
C lin O ral lnvesfig 19 9 7 ; 1: 12-1 8 .
63 . Dietschi D, Krejci I. Trai lements chimiques des dyschromies
dentaires. Rea l C lin 1999; 10:7-2 4 .
45. Wa ll jG, I~eis bi ck M H, john ston W M . lncisol-edqe
strength of porcelain laminate veneers restoring mandi bu­
lar incisors. Intj Prasthodont 199 2;5 :4 4 1- 4 4 6 .
64 . Bouvier D, DuprezjP, Pirel C, Vincent B Amelogenesis im­
perfecta- A prosthetic rehabilitation: A clinica l report. j
Prosthet Dent 19 9 9 ;8 2 : 130-1 3 1.
4 6 . M agne P, Versluis A, Douglas W H o Rationa lization of in­
cisor shope: Experimental-numerical analysis. j Prosthet
Dent 19 9 9; 81 34 5-35 5 .
65 . Kourkouta S, W alsh Tl. Davis LG . The effect of porcelain
laminate veneers on gi ngival health and bacterial plaque
characteristics. j C lin Periodontol 19 94;2163 8-640 .
47. O keson jP led) Ora facia l Pain. C hicago : Quintessence,
19 9 6 : 12 2-12 3 .
66 . C hon C , Weber H. Plaque retention on teeth restored w ith
full-ceramic crown s: A comparative study. j Prosthel Dent
19 86 ;56 :6 66-671 .
4 8. Ramfjord S, Ash NWI . Occlusion, ed 3. Phi ladelphia :
Sounders, 19 8 3 : 166- 168 .
6 7 . Koidis PT, Schroeder K, j ohnston W, Campagni W. Co lor
consisiency, plaque accumulation, and external marginal
surface characteristics of the collarless metal-cera mic
restoratio n j Prosthet Dent 19 9 1;6 5 :39 1-4 0 0 .
49. Daw son PE Evaluation, Diagnosis, and Treatment of O c­
clusal Problems, ed 2. St Louis: M osby, 1989:274-29 7.
5 0 Beyron H. O ptimal occl usion. Dent Clin N orth Am 19 6 9 ;
13 :5 37-35 4
68 . Douglas W H o Co nsiderations for mod eling. Dent Mater
19 9 6 ; 12: 20 3-20 7 .
5 1. Castelnuovo j, Tja n AH, Phillips K, N icholls j l, Koi s j c.
Fracture load and mode of failure of ceramic veneers w ith
different preparati on s. j Prosthet Dent 2000 ; 8 3 :
17 1-1 80
6 9 . M orin D, Delong R, Douglas WH oC usp reinforcement by
the acid-etch technique j Dent Res 19 84 ;6 3:
10 75-1 078 .
5 2 . M ag ne P, M agne M . Porcelain veneers at the turn of the
millenium: A w indow to biomimetics [in French] . Real C lin
19 9 8;9 3 29-34 3 .
70. M orin DL, Dougla s W H, C ross M , Delong R. Biophysical
stress a nalysis of restored teeth: Experimental strai n mea­
surements. Dent M ater 1988;4:41-4 8.
53. M agne P, Douglas W H o Optimization of resilien ce and
stress distribution in porcelain veneers for the treatment of
crow n-fractured incisors. Inl j Periodontics Restorative Dent
19 9 9 ; 19 :543-5 5 3 .
71 . M orin DL, Cross M , Voller VR , Douglas WH , Delong R.
BiophYSical slress ana lysis o f restored teeth: Modeling a nd
analysis. Dent M a ter 19 8 8;4 :7 7-84 .
72 . Assif D, M arshak BL, Pilo R Cuspal flexure associated w ith
amalgam resto rat ions. j Prosthet Dent 19 9 0 ;63
258- 26 2 .
54. Gordon j E Structures: W hy Things Don't Fall Down . N ew
York: Do Capo, 19 7 8 :7 0-109.
55 . Mun ksgaard EC, Ho jrved L, j orgensen EH, AndreasenjO ,
Andreasen FM . Enamel-dentin crown frac tures bonded
w ith various banding age nts. Endod Dent Traumatol
199 1;7 :7 3- 77
7 3 . Cameron CE The crocked tooth syndrome. j Am Dent
Assoc 19 64 ;6 8 :4 0 5- 4 11 .
56. Borghi N , Berry TG . Post-bonding crock formation in
po rcelain veneers. j Esthet Dent 19 9 7;9 :51-54 .
75 . Covel VVT, Kelsey W P, Blankenau RJ An in vivo study o f
cuspa l fracture. j Pro sthet Dent 19 85 ;5 3 :3 8-4 2 .
7 4 . Cameron CEo The cracked tooth synd rome: Addi tional
findings j Am Dent Assoc 197 6 ;9 3: 9 71-975.
175
.
_L~--=-~~~
=---- -
t;r
:-~-
-~~=-
~--
------
-
-
­
- - - - - - -- - -
I EVOLUTI ON
4
O F INDI CATI ON S FOR A NTERIO R B ONDED PO RCELAIN R ESTO RATI ON S
76 HoodJ M i\!\ethods to improve fracture resistance of teeth
[di scussion]. In: Vonh erle G, Smith DC (eds) . Internationol
Symposium on Posterior Composite Resin Restorative M a­
terials [sponsored by 3M]. St Poul: M innesolo Mi ning &
M anufacturing , 19 8 5:44 3- 4 50 .
7 7. Douglas W H o Met hods to improve frocture resi stonce of
teeth. In: Vanherle G , Smith DC [eds]. Internationol Sym­
posium on Posterior Composite Resin Restorative M aterials
[sponsored by 3M ]. St Pa ul: IvYnnesota Mi ning & M anu­
facturing , 19 854 3 3-44 1.
78. M olcolm PJ, HoodJ M The effect of cast restorations in re­
ducing cusp flexibility in restored teeth. J Dent Res
19 71 ;5 6 :D207 .
7 9 Reeh ES, Dougla s WH , M esser HH . Stiffness of en­
dodontically-treated teeth related to restoration technique.
J Dent Res 19 89;6 8 : 1540-1 5 44
80 lin n J, Messer HH . Effect o f restorative procedures on the
strength of endodontically treated molars J Endod 19 9 4 ;
20:479-4 85 .
81 . McCullock AJ, Smith BG. In vitro studies of cusp rein­
forcement with adhesive restorative material. Br Dent J
19 86 ; 161 :4 50-4 5 2.
82 . MacPherson LC , Smith BG . Reinforcement of weokened
cusps by od heslve restorative materials: An in-vitro study.
Br Dent J 1995 ; 17 8 :34 1- 34 4 .
83 . Reeh ES, M esser HH, Douglas W H Reduction in tooth
stiffness os a result of endodontic and restorative proce­
dures. J Endod 19 89 ; 15 :5] 2- 5 16 .
84 . M agne P, Dietschi D, Holz J Esthetic restorations for pos­
terior teeth: Proctica l ond clinical considera tions. IntJ Peri­
odontics Restorative Dent 1996 ; 161 0 5- 1 19 .
85 . Dielschi D, Sprec lico R Adhesive M etal-Free Restorations.
Berlin: Quin tessence, 1997 :60-7 7.
86 . Mag ne P, Holz J Stratification of composite reslorations:
Systematic and durable replication of natural aesthetics.
Pracl Periadonlics Aesthel Denl 19 9 6 ;8: 6 1- 6 8 .
87 . Besek M , Mormann W H, Persi C , l utz F. The curing o f
comp)osites under Cerec inlays. Schw eiz Monalsschr
Zahnmed 19 9 5 ; 105 : 112 3-11 28
176
.
-
j
=
­
-­
-----
---_._---- ­
--­
..
h.
-­
-!'
-
--­
a­
~ ~
~
-
--­
~
-
---= -
-­
-.~-~
=
7.ii""t=
-
-
-
•
-
-
·,.\
. '\
'\\
'
-
-
CHAPTER
5
INITIAL TREATMENT
PLANNING AND
DIAGNOSTIC APPROACH
Previous chapters have empha sized that (I ) esthetics and function are
equal concern s when restoring the anterior dentition a nd (2) mod ern co n­
cepts in restorative denti stry have introd uced new so lutio ns thro ug h bonded
porcelain restoration s (BPRs) that d istribute stress and involve the tooth
crown as a w hole in supporting occlu sal force and masticatory functio n.
The resulting biom imetic nature of BPRs is par ticular ly interesting w hen co n­
sidering the restoration of an aging dent ition ; both functio n and appear­
ance are affe cted by the physical chara cteristics of agi ng teeth. Erosion
and surface wear lead to prog ressive thinning of enamel , ultimately ca us­
ing increa sed crown fleXibility and high er surface stra ins. Restorati on of
tooth vol ume w ill not o nly restitute the or ig inal , yo ung er appearance of the
smile but w ill al so allow the com prehen sive biomim etic recovery of the
crown . This treatment o utco me strong ly depends o n the therapeutic ap­
proach chosen, the driving force of wh ich should be preserva tio n of the
thin remain ing enamel. W hile a number of preparation techniques w ill
lead to ma jor dentin exposur es, the princ iple
of
ena mel preservation ca n
be fulfilled by the use of a speci fic approach , This chapter describes a
treatment rationale that incor porates a d iagnostic template resulting from
the interactive relationships be twe en the cl inician , the pa tient, a nd the den­
tal laboratory. This type of w ork stra tegy, documented wi th cli nical case s,
integ rates additive w axups a nd acrylic mock-ups. The latter w ill p rovide a
sign ificant a mo unt of di ag nostic info rmation a nd eco nomy of tooth sub­
strate inval ua ble to the rea lizatio n and prognosis of the fina l restora tio n.
~
"-
k
~.
~---
-
-
-
-
-
------ -
-
-
-
- -
- ­
I
5
INIT IAL TRE AT MENT PL AN NIN G A ND DI A GN OSTIC A p PROA CH
INTE RACTIVE PATI ENT-O PERATO RY-LABO RATO RY
RELATION SHIP S
In most ca ses of esthetic rehabilitati on, the treat­
ment o b jective w ill be reached by means o f a
d iag nostic effo rt. 1
The d iag nostic stage ca n be achi eved in a two­
step approach including ( 1) the elabo ratio n of
a d iagn osti c wa xup and (2) the fabrication of
a cor responding template to be eva luated in
vivo by both clinic ian a nd pa tient. In the ca se
of BPRs, a speci fic approa ch needed to be de­
veloped . Simple but essentia l tool s w ill be pre­
sented in this cha pter: the add itive dia g nostic
w axup an d the acrylic mock-up, to be used du r­
ing d iag nostic steps a nd tooth preporotion pro­
ced ures for the o ptima l resto ra tion of the ag ing
dentition w ith BPRs. Two elements are empha­
sized : (1) the ob jectiveness and the simp licity of
the app roach and (2) the significa nt amount of
d ia g nostic informa tion a nd economy of tooth
substra te manda tory for the rea liza tion and
pro gn osis of the final restoratio n.
I
This strategy depends co mpletely o n ade­
quate patient management a nd a clo se inter­
acti ve relation ship wi th the dental lab orat o ry.
The mastering of restorativ e techniques, optim al
co ntrol of the esthetic para meters, a nd adeq ua te
thera peutic choices w ill significantly enhance the
chances of success, but the final o utco me has a
rea l impac t only if the co mmunica tio n betwee n
the clinician 's and the technician 's teams is ef­
fective. This exchange of knowl edge also in­
cludes the pat ient,2.3 w ho is eva luated by both
cli nician and technician a nd partici pates ac­
tively with them in the "triad of success" (F ig 5­
1). Patient management a nd initia l therapy w ill
therefore be discussed in the first sections of this
chapter.
I
I
FIGURE 5-1 : TRIAD OF SUCCESS AND FLOW CHART FOR SYSTEMATIC PATIENT EVALUATION AND MAN­
AGEMENT. The triad of success is defined by a har monious relationship betwee n the pa tient a nd the o peratory and
la boratory teams. The restorati ve de ntist o nly represents o ne "finger" o f the o peratory tea m's "hand" in the circle o f
this relation ship. Ot her "fingers" incl ude the pe riodon tist, orthodonti st, etc. A systematic approac h is proposed. Both
the cl inic ia n a nd the dental technician must understand the pa tient's req uest. It is therefore recommended that the pa­
tient visit the den tal lab o ratory befo re trea tment planning beg ins. The denIal techni cian develops on esthetic status in
the form of image s a nd notes. Shade ca n be documented at this stage, but it is recommended that the pa tient visit
the la boratory aga in, espec ia lly w hen blea ching a nd other preliminary proced ures are probable . In the case o f d is­
co lored teeth, ad diti onal shade do cumenta tion should be ca rried out fol lowin g too th preparatio n. Amo ng preliminary
la bo ratory proced ures, the d iag nostic waxup is o f pa ramount impo rtance for the initia l thera py. The diagn ostic phase
represents the most crea tive a nd interactive part of the treatment, and the diag nostic mock-up must a llow envisio ning
of the final o bjective. In this wa y, the crea tive effort du ring the restorati ve phase rema ins minimal and will be limited
to the reproductio n of the d iag nostic mock-u p in the form of BPRs.
180
.
-
f·
-
--~
---
r---
--
~
~
f-~_-
­
~
-
­
------=-=--=--­
-~
\'
"
, '
.. \
'
, O
P E R A
T O
LAB 0
R Y
R A 'T, 0
' R
Y'
Understa nd ing pa tient's requests
Q)
Esthetic status
~
o
-C
Shade documentation
• X-rays, slides, costs
U
C
Discussion
• Informatio n to the pat ient
• Sequential treatment plan
• Discussion
.' '>-­Q..
Orthodontics
i2
Q)
Orthognathic surgery
-£
:
Orthodontic set-up .'
":,,
Endodontics, bleaching
, .g.
,::::
c
Periodo ntal surgery ~
.
Freehand co mposites .."
:
Diagnostic
::::::::::::::"..
A
, Q)
waxup
' C/)
'0
-C
,Diagnostic
Q..
o
mock-up
"t=;
o
,C
'
\
. ..
0)
o
,
B
,
Tooth
\
"
'
\
Shode docurnentonon
,,' ,, "
.., '
preparati on ~'
Sha de documentation
and provisiona lizati on
(d iscolo red teeth )
Impression -------------:.~
Moster costs
. . . . - - - - - - - - - - C eramic elaboration
Adhesive luting
M a intena nce
.:
\'
, '
_ ~-~
-- ­ "=­ -
..
~
::
•
- - =­
= -
J -::- ~
ii
- .=:----"- ­
~
~~
~
-
~
~ --
__-_
-
5
I
INITI AL TRE ATMENT PL ANNIN G A ND DI A GN OSTIC ApPR OA CH
PATIENT MANAGEMENT BY THE OPERATORY TEAM
Appropriate management and co unseling of
patients with esthetic problems undoubtedly
represents the most c ritica l phase of the treat­
ment. The task may be parti cularl y challe ng ing
if the co nfidence of an indi vidual (wh o suffered
from a previ ous therapeuti c failure ) has to be re­
co vered . A co mbined and structured manage­
ment by the dental o pera tory and the dental
laborator y w ill provid e adequate ba ses for full
co o peratio n from a co nfident patient. During
the initial pha se, the clinician sho uld respect the
following seq uence (see Fig 5-1 ):
1. Kn ow the patient. This first step aims at un­
derstanding the patient's primary request. It is of
utmost imp ortance that the clini cian listen care­
fully to the patient's expla nal ions in o rder to de­
fine the main expectations. The patient must not
sit in the dental chair at this stage (Fig 5-2 ). Use
of models of intact dentiti ons, photographs,
and fashion magazines ca n sig nifica ntly help in
co mmunica ting w ith the patient.
I
I
3 . Inform the patient. Based o n the aforemen­
tioned documents, the clini cian explains the ex­
isting probl ems to the patient, using the radi o­
graphs, photographs, and study casts as aids.
The use of simple and comprehensible termi­
nology is essential . A patient w ho thoroughly
understands the information w ill better perce ive
possibiliti es and limita tio ns of the treatment. Fi­
nally, the maj or elements of the treatment o p­
tions ore expla ined . In that co ntext, demonstra­
tion models [Fig 5-2 ) and / or cl inic al pictures of
o ther patients ca n be helpful in expla ining the
d ifferent types of restoration s.
4. Sequential treatmen t plan. At this time , the
clini cian ela bo ra tes a sequential treatment plan
including possible alternatives. Duration and
costs are determined. The laboratory fee should
be presented separately. W hen treatment and
patient mana gement are share d eq ua lly by the
cl inici a n and techn ician , it is not unusual for
la bo rato ry and clinical fees to be similar.
2. In itial documentation . After the patient has
5 . Final phase of initial patient management.
expressed his o r her d esires, the clini cian col­
lects the ba sic elements of an inilial documen­
tation , ie, a radi ogra phi c survey and a system­
atic cl inical examination [eva lua tio n of
periodontal and end od ontic co nd itions, exist­
ing restorati ons, etc ]. Photogra phs and study
casts, possibly mounted in an articulator, com­
plete the initia l documentati on.
This stage is not clini cal but involves a di scus­
sion in w hich the cl inici a n explain s the para me­
ters of treatment (ob jective , sequence, duration ,
co sts, limitations, prog nosis, a nd alternatives) .
182
--~~.~
~
-~--
-
--- !== - -- --=--- ~
---
-~-~
~ ~-
O nce the pa tient gi ves informed co nsent, the
practica l modalities of the treatment can be
pla nned.
".
\
\\
"I.'
,
\"
'
\
,
'
"
\'
FIGURE 5-2: FIRST CONTACT WITH,THE PATIENT. Patients often feel dominated and restroined if they.sit in the'den­
tal chair. Cornrminicotion can be op timized by "same-level" seating (middle), Useol photoqrcphs. a rid fashion mag­
az ines helps.the clinlcionu ndersto nd lheIndlviduc ls lifestyle a nd tcistes(top)" Simulation model sqndexamples of
restora tio ns cn d.lntc ct-dentltions he lp op timizethe patient's informatio n (bottom) ,
,
..
--­
-
- ­
,
-
~
-
-=;;;--;­
-
--­­
=
-­
-
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ­
- - - - - ­
5
I
INITI AL TRE AT MENT PL A NI\JIN G AN D D IA GNO STI C A p PROAC H
PATIENT MA NAGEMENT BY THE LABORATOR Y TEAM
The development of sophistica ted techniq ues for
esthetic restorations increas ing ly involves close
The first co nta ct between the pati ent a nd the
den ta l labo ra to ry is o f primary impo rtance . Un­
cooperatio n with the denta l laborat o ry. The pa ­
tient should visit the cera mist as ear ly as possi­
fortunately, in da ily practice , such an approach
is frequently negl ected . Undou btedly, man y cl i­
nician s hesitate to send their pati ents to a den­
ble durin g the initial stages of pa tient manage­
ment (see Fig 5- 1). The first visit to the dental
la bo ra to ry is essential for tw o reason s: (1) hav­
ta l la borator y, perha ps because they fear inad­
eq uate reception a nd lack of hyg iene. Fo r tha t
rea son , den ta l tech nicia ns must be ed ucated
ing so me know ledge a bo ut the technica l as­
pects , the individ ual wi ll better understand the
treatment that has been pro posed, and (2) it of­
o n how to a pproach the pa tient. A dental la b­
o ra to ry should have a special area for pa tient
fers the cera mist the opportunity to complete an
initial documentation , w hich rep resents the ba sis
co nsulta tio ns that includ es basic items, such as
a co mfortabl e chai r, sink w ith a hand-di sinfect­
for the w o rking pla n. Pa tient man agement by
the labo ratory is q uite similar to that by the o p­
ing device, exa minatio n gloves, a nd a protec­
tive napkin (Fig 5-3 ).
erato ry. The cera mist's documentatio n co mprises
a photog raphic status and shad e selection.
FIGURE 5-3 : RECOMMENDED LABORATORY ENVIRONMENT. This co mmercia l la boratory (O ral Desiq n C enter,
M o ntreux, Sw itzerla nd) integrates a specia l area fo r the pa tient (5-30 ) The dental technicia n should never touc h the
pati ent's face o r mouth w ithout wea ring examinati on g loves. A "touch-free" d isinfeclio n device (5-3b , ar row) a lso ai ds
in manipula ting shad e ta bs and other ob jects w ithout co nta minatio n. Seeing the ceramist's la boratory w ith its multi­
tude of ceramic powders and sta ins 15-3c, 5 -3d ) helps the pati ent understand the fa brica tion process a nd price of
these unique cera mic pieces. The patient 's ac ceptance of future treatment is sig nificantly enhanced by this visit to the
la bo rato ry.
184
~_
- -
-
-
, _ - -r- r
-_ ­
- - -- -
-~-~
­
-
----
'-
··
~
- .-.­
)
---
­
-
_
_ ...a..
~~
~
---------
.-----
-:J
. -
--
---~~~-----~------_.
- _. . .
_------------------­
-
­
5
I
I NITI AL T REAT M ENT PL A NNI N G A ND D IA GNO ST IC A pP RO A CH
TREATMENT PLA NNIN G A N D INITIAL THERAPY
Treatment planni ng co nsists of determining the
sequence o f treat ment and coo rd ina ting cli nica l
and tech nica l interventio ns. The clini cian de­
of
fines the number
cl inica l sessio ns corre­
sponding to the sequence o f trea tment. On this
basi s, the la bo rato ry is infor med about the ini­
tial treatment pla n an d the da tes of the princ i­
pa l restorat ive phases: w ax up, fina l impres­
in the next sec tio ns ca n sig nifica ntly influence
this phase . The follo w ing interventions ore most
freq uently underta ken w hen esthetics plays a
key rol e : mucog ingi va l surgery, bleac hing , o r­
thodo ntics, an d di rect compos ite restorati ons.
Mucogingival surgery
sion s, cl inica l trial s, and fina l placement.
The initial phase o f trea tment typica lly com­
prises preventive, pe riodontal, a nd opera tive
asp ects, w hich ore too o ften neg lected . They
repr esent essentia l "touch-ups," so metimes o nly
minor correctio ns that w ill have a sig nifica nt ef­
Adeq ua te health and mo rphology of the peri­
o don tium or e responsible for 50% of the final
esthetic o utco me. Eve n the best restorati on w ill
not be a ble to com pe nsate for pe riodontc l de­
fects. In some situa tio ns, g ra ft-type interventi o ns
(Fig 5 -4 ] o r mino r remod eling of gi ng iva l con ­
fect on the ~i n al outcome . The d ia g nostic
to urs (see Fig 5-6 ) can ensure the final o utco me
waxup a nd cor respondin g moc k-up descr ibed
of the
resto ro tions.
FIGURE 5-4: CONNE CTIVE TISSUE GRAFT TO IMPROVE GINGIVAL CONTOUR BEFORE REALIZATION OF BPRs.
There is sig nifica nt tooth agi ng and ena mel thinning of the right a nd leN central inciso rs a nd the left laleral inci sor, plus
on unsig htly block triang le between the central inc iso rs (5-4 0 , 5 -4 b) Progressing recession around the left central a nd
latera l incisors is responsible for asymmetric g ing iva l contours (5-4b ) A co nnective tissue graft from the pal ate w as
first placed using the "envelo pe" techniqu e4 5 (clin ician , Dr Jea n-Pierre Ebner, University of G eneva). Und ermining par­
tial-thic kness inc isions create Ihe envelope . Vertica l releasing inci sio ns a re not necessary [5 -4 c). The co mbined ep­
ithelia l a nd connective tissue g raft is plac ed over the de nuded areas, and the fla p is sutured w ith 7-0 po lypropylene
sutures, the graft being secured w ith two add itio nal sutu res (5-4 d ) O ne-w eek posto perative view (5-4e ). C o mpariso n
of preope rative (5-4f) a nd 3-mo nth postoperative view s (5 -4 g ) show s co nside ra ble enhancement of g ing iva l contours.
The preexisting Clo ss 5 co mposite w as removed except for the most co ronal part , w hich temporar ily suppo rted and
maintained the gi ngiva l profile. A specific di agnostic phase was then carried out, follow ed by preparatio n of the in­
volved teeth fo r laminates, some aspec ts of whic h are deta iled in Fig 6-22 . Maximum interdental preparatio n a llowe d
the ce ramic to be extended w ith "mini-w ings" to close the interdental bloc k triangl e (5-4 h; see a lso Figs 6-20 a nd
6-2 1).
186
~
- - - --- - --
-
~7
--
-= - -
--
~
"
~
...
~~
T'.-
.\
....;:::-.­
-~-
.~.
----------------------
- -
~
5
I
INI TIAL T REATM ENT P LANN ING AND DI AG NOSTIC A p PROAC H
Bleaching
5 ). In some rare cases, orthog nat hic surgery
might be indica ted in conjun ction w ith o r-
The o ptica l co nd itio ns o f und erly ing d enta l tissues can have a negative influence o n the
fina l esthetics; blea ching proc edures a llow
thodontics, w hich requ ires specia l treatment
planning (see Fig 5 -1 2) .
reesta b lishment o f a tooth color that will facil itate integra tion of the BPRs [see Fig 4-7), The
treat ment of non vi ta l di scol o red teeth to be resto red with BPRs is recomm end ed exa ctly as
described in Chapter 3 , The restora tive phas e
must be delayed for 2 to
end
of
b lea ching be cause
4 w eeks after the
of
the ln hibi linq ef-
fect o f oxygen resid ues on the bo nd streng th
o f co mpos ites. The sa me protocol is followed
for vita l ble a ching ,
Direct composites
Min o r modi fica tions o f neig hboring teeth are
o ften nece ssary before pla cin g venee rs. A typical situatio n is the o ptimiza tio n of latera l inciso r shape and vol ume before veneering central inci sors (Figs 5-5 and 5 -6 ). Lateral incisor s
are ideal targets fo r freehand applica tion of
co mposites. C o rrectio n of sha pe and position
ca n be easily add ressed w ith direct co mposites
Orthodontics and orthognathic surgery
Realignmen t
of
teeth to be veneered is g ener-
a lly undertaken be fo re the restorative phase .
However, the provisional crow ns [see Fig 4- 12)
w hen the resto rative material is fully supported
by intact underlying enam el, and lateral inciso rs are norma lly not sub jected to sig nifica nt
functio na l loads.
o r "touch-up" composites may improve crown
The wa xup and cor responding acryl ic mock-
sha pe a nd faci litate the fine position ing of eac h
tooth by the o rthodontist; the latter must, in turn,
up help sig nifica ntly in detecting a nd correc ting minor problems of crown shape and
length in neig hboring teeth (Figs 5-5 and 5 -6).
be g Uided by the o rthod o ntic setup (see Fig 4-
FIGURE 5-5 : FREEHA ND CO M POS ITE TO ENHAN CE CRO WN SHA PE OF NEIGHBORI NG TOOTH PRIO R TO
PLACING VENEERS . Preliminary mod els (5-5a , 5 -5b; orig inal situation and dia gnostic w axup, respecfively) show the
recovery of crow n length o f both central incisors. This situation is tested in vivo using a removable ac rylic mock-up derived from the waxup (5-5c to 5-5 elltechnique described in sections that follow) . The length of the central incisors is
adeq uate in relation to low er lip co ntour, but the mock-up reveals insufficient length o f the left lateral inciso r (5-5e),
the clinical crown of wh ich also presents an inad equate Wid th/heig ht ratio (5-5f). A silicon index of the w axup reveals the missing tooth substance (5 -5g ). After ena mel etching and bonding , a smal l a mount of den tinlike co mposite
is placed and cured (5-5h ), then covered by translucent enamel and incisal shades using the silicon index as a mold
to be pressed onto the incisa l edge [5 -5 i, 5-5 jl. C rown shape is sig nificantly enhanced by this procedure (5 -5k) Such
detail is essential to the outcome of porcela in veneers on neig hboring central incisors and show s harmony wi th the
lowe r lip 15-51) Other aspects and fol low-up of this case are presented in Figs 4-8 and 6-3.
188
-
-----
---=---=
-
----- -
- -
,--
- --=.:.....---
--=----
~ =-----
--
--
-
--
--
-.
"
,\'.
\.
..
, ..
'
.
,'\,'
'
I
I,
"
"
.
.,..
,..
.,
...
FIGURE 5-6: MINOR,DEFECTS AN81RREGULARITIESOF NEIGHBORING TEETH AND GINGIVAL CONTOUR REVEALED BY THE MOCK-UP. Preoperative cliri'ical view (5,60) . The patient has requested redefinitiOn olvolurn e and
length o f the central incisors arid closure of the dids tema. Ad ia g n o~tic waxup [detcll ed in Figs 5:7e to5'7 ~) and the
co rresponding mock-up (detai led in Figs 5-71to 5-7t)were ca rried out a nd reveal that the la teral .incisors must be modified (5-6b ,' white arrowheadsJ:. the g ingival scollopo round the left centra l incisor must' a lso be increased (5,6 b, black
arrowhead) . Freehand co mposites on the lelf and rig ht lateral incisors as ':;'811 os dging ivectomy croundlhe left central inci spr were perfo rmed qurin g the same elinical session (seenext pages) and follow ed by two other sessions for
realiza tion ofp o rcelain veneers on b oth centroI incisors,. Final postoperative view (5:6c).
,
' .
.
.
,,',
,
',
C . , '\
~
--=---
=~--
-~
~ -
- -- - - - -
-
-
-
-
'
\
'.
'
------=-...
'.
"
, ',
'.
'\
\ '.
...
"
~
=-cc-;.
y;~
------
----
--
-
~
- -
-
-
FIGURE 5-6 (CONTINUED) : DETAILED ,STEPS. Preliminary procedures (first clinica l session) are described in Figs 56d to 5-6m. Articulating paper has bee n rubbed on the surface of the right lateral incisor to hig hlig ht the missi ng
mesial crow n volume and co rresponding transition line ang le (5'6d) . Freehand bonding was carried out a fter place'
ment of a deflection cord and enamel etching (5-6el .The tooth ca n be slightly enlarged by the add ition of enamel. like and incisa l co mposites (5-6f). The modi fied too th shape shows adequa te mesial crest qnd mesio l volu.me(5-6g ).
Second , the left la teral incisor is too short (5-6h) a nd must be modified wi tH the same technique as described in 'Fig
5-5, using the silicon index of thew axup (5-6 i). Immedi a tely postoperative, the tooth is still dehydrated (5-6jl but dis.plays a form that is now compatible wi th the planned increase of the central incisor length. Fina lly, the g ingivOi contour around the left central.incisor is too flat (5-6k). A minor gin g ivectomy w as necessary (5'61). Two w eeks. later (5o rn ], the pa tient is ready for tooth p repara tions. Step-by-step tooth prepara tions for this par ticular case ca n be found
in Fig 6-10 and 'the fab rica tianof m~ster costs and ceramic layering in, Figs 7-4 to 7-8 .
"
•
,\
v,
\.
FIGU~E,5-6(CONTINUED). Final
intrc orcl -view s show a harmonious
, r~lotio ns h ip'belV'Veen teeth a nd soft
tissue's (5~6n ; 5-6 0). .Preoperative
face and smile (5-6p ; 5-6q) for direct comparison with the new situ, alion .(5-6r, 5-6s).'
..
,,:
.\
-
-
--
-
-
- - -- - - - - - - = =- - - =-=~
---
-
----
.
.
\\'
v•
--
-
-
-
-
-
1==-=
~
-
--
- -=---
t=-
z-z:
~
-
- . ---
~
--
~ "'"
------
-
-
.
5
I
IN IT IA L TREATMENT PL A NNING AN D D IAGN OST IC ApPR OA CH
DIAGN O ST IC WA XUP
General considerations
dure , a uniform tooth reduction of a t least 0. 5
mm is per formed using d ia mo nd burs wi th
Ena mel is a high ly spec ia lize d tissue . It has
been particularl y va luable to the cl inicia n since
cal ibra ted ring s. A nother cla ssic preparation
method , using the preexisting tooth surface as
19 5 5 , w hen Buonoco re proved it to be a n es-
a gUide , co nsists of takin g silicon index es o f the
sential substra te fo r bondinq ." Today, the predi c table va lue of ena mel bonding is wi tnessed
in the mediu m- to lon g-term clini cal success of
porce la in veneers.7- 10
labi al surface of the unprepared tooth. Significa nt den tin exp osures are to be exp ec ted wh en
such freehand proced ures are used o n inta ct
Ena mel is a brittle substra te, and its integ rity is
dependent o n the crac k-arresting ca pac ity of
the thick lon gitud ina lly o riented col lagen fib ers
of the den tinoename l [unctio n J 1 (DEj) (see Figs
1-8a to 1-8c). Therefo re, both enam el a nd the
central inci sors, as demonstrated by Nattress et
ol ." The situation is most cri tica l w hen treating
ag ing denlili o ns w ith thin residual ena mel.
Accord ing ly, a key element fo r ena mel preserva tion d uring tooth prepara tio n is prio r delinilion of the final tooth vo lume .
DEj must be car efully preserved d uring tooth
prep arat io n.
W hen a sig nifica nt thickness of ena mel
It is extremely importa nt to identify the ena mel
tially missing beca use o f w ear o r erosion (Fig
5 -7d l, the future restora tio n should a im to resti-
IS III 1-
faci al wear pattern of teeth to be restored [Figs
5-7a to 5-7 d ). W hen the residual enamel is
tute the or igina l vo lume of the tooth that has
thin, as is the case w ith aged or wo rn inc isors,
approp riate tooth pro minence and biomi metic
prepara tio n methods using the preexisting tooth
surface as a reference fo r enamel red uction are
absolutely co ntra indi ca ted . The "simplified lam-
behavior of the crown" : a bo ve al l, it w ill a llow
sig nifica nt preserva tio n of ena mel substrate a nd
inate prepara tio n, " w hich uses specific cutting
tools to avo id so-cal led freeha nd prepara tion, 12
Therefore, a silico n index of a n add itive wa xup
is a lso contra indica ted . In the pro posed proce-
(see Fig s 6 -2 to 6 -5 ).
been lost over time. This in turn w ill restore an
suppo rting
DEj d uring
is essentia l as a refe rence for tooth reductio n
196
.
J-
-
--
-
~-
-
-
-
tooth preparati o n. 15
-
M IN 0
R
W E A R
FIGURE 5-7: TYPICAL ENAMEL
AGING ·' AND'EFFECT ON
CROWN ARCHITECTURE . Schema"
S E .V E RE
W EA R
fie incisal ,view showmq th ~ volume
loss and "rounding" o f facial crow n,
architecture (5-7a), Central incisors.
originally present strong ena mel
rid ges and 'marked transition line an, gles(5-7b , tangential fad 01 v iew),
Examples of teeth exhibi ting different.
..wear ' patterns: little facial w ear w ith '.
a textured surface (5-7c) or severefacial wear wi th a soh g lo~sy surface
. (5-7d), Thin enamel requires special
, preparation methods .using an cddi- '
tive w axup, ,
I
-
1=
~
~-
1""'_-
_;=
-
~
I
-
-
-
-
=---
~
- -
•
~
- _. _ - -
5
I
INITIAL TREATMENT PLANI\)ING AND DIAGNOSTIC ApPROACH
Esserl'~ials for the cdditive waxup
surfaces. Because
of
their prominence, these
ridges are the first to wear off and therefore
In this first stage
of
the diagnostic approach, in-
should be the first element to be restored by the
of the
addition of wax on the preliminary model (Fig
5-7g).
tuition, sensitivity, and a good perception
patient's personality should allow the dental
technician to define a preliminary restorative
of
goal, As previously described for the aging
The position and arrangement
dentition, this is mostly obtained by the oddition
will influence the tooth form. The differential
of wax onto the preliminary model
(Figs 5-7e to
placement and contouring of the transition line
5-7k), This procedure requires precise knowl-
angles can easily generate the illusion of a
edge
of
the strategic elements
of
these lobes
tooth anat-
shorter or wider tooth. A special section related
omy, which can be learned through systematic
to these effects is included in Chapter 7 [Fig 7-
observation
of
natural teeth (see Figs 5-7b and
10).
5-7c; see also Chapter 2).
A secondary step of the waxup procedure is to
The basic tooth shapes are defined by the ver-
recreate the superficial developmental lobes
tical proximal crests. They represent transition
and horizontal components
line angles between the facial and proximal
phy resulting from the line
of surface
of growth.
topogra-
FIGURE 5-7 (CONTINUED): "FINGERTIP-ASSISTED" ADDITIVE WAXUP (SAME PATIENT AS II'\J FIG 5-6). Original
models showing insufficient facial volume and length (5-7e, 5-7f; see also Figs 5-60 and 5-6q). The additive waxup
can be easily carried out with an electric spatula, starting with the redefinition of proximal crests and transition line
angles (5-7g). The thumb is pressed onto the palatal surface and used as a quide to elongate the crests and build
the missing part of the incisal edge 15-7h, 5-7i) Final views show volumes and shapes [5-7j, 5-7k). Compare with
baseline views (5-7e, 5-7f) Although the main diagnostic effort was focused on the central incisors, the shape of the
lateral incisors was also optimized by augmentation of the mesial crest of the right lateral incisor and slight lengthening of the left lateral incisor (5-7jl.
""="" =
-~--
t:==
-
-
---
~
;:==-
-----
------------
- - --
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
5
I
INIT IA L T REAT ME NT P LANN ING AND DI AGN OSTI C A pPROAC H
DIAG N OST IC M O CK -U P
Predicting the treatment outcome is essential
when planning a substan tial esthetic reha bilitalion .' The diagnostic cno lysis is the founda tio n
of the
future thera py. N evertheless this should
remain a simp le and rationa l proced ure. If subl
tle chan ges are con sidered , it is advisable to
co mmunica te with the pa tient using most co ncre te de vices to avo id even the slighte st misun-
Beca use of the reduced thickness of the laminate and the intrinsica lly conse rva tive approoc h. the tooth pre parahon itself is inlimately
rela ted to the final vol ume of the restoration .
The in vivo eva lua tio n a nd full approva l of the
template by the patient should therefore precede tooth preparation procedures.
The simplest method involves fabrica tio n
derstand ing .
of an
acry lic template directly in the po tient's mouth
At this stage of the diag nostic op prooch, the
new vo lume of teeth must be ap proved by the
po tient, resulting in tota l ag reement o n the definitio n of tooth shope, size, a nd length . In trcdilio ne l prosthodontics (full-cove rage cro wn], preliminary tooth preparat ion usually precedes
fa brication of the d iag nostic tern plo te . wh ic h is
used as the prov isio na l restorati on itself . I ,2, i 6, 17
Such treatment plann ing is not possib le w ith
BPRs.
(or o n an intact study model) using self-curing
resin mold ed o n the unprepared tooth surfaces
w ith a silicon matrix of the wa xup (Figs 5 -7 1to
5-7t) . Subseq uenllv, the pa tient ca n easi ly appreciate this removable mask, A hig hly accurate silicon ind ex ca n be fabrica ted by firmly
applying the materia l onto the model. then immedi ately sub jecting it to approxima tely 4 atm
o f press ure durin g setting (Fig 5 -7 m). In this
waYI the silicon matrix will also present an increa sed stiffness, w hich facil itates handlin g a nd
repositio ning (w hich, in turn, should genera te
o nly minor excess resin).
FIGURE 5-7 (CONTINUED) : DIRECT ACRYLIC MOCK-UP (SAME PATIENT AS IN FIG 5-6) . A stiff a nd accurate silico n index mus t first be ob tained by ada pting the putty o nto the w axup (5-7 1) and immediate ly applying a pressure
over 4 atm wi th a hydrauli c press, a com pactor (5-7m), or a press ure pot The silico n must ove rlap at least one tooth
o n each side of the mod ified segment, but the pa lata l surfaces must remain accessible to al low premature elimi nation
of pa latal excess resin (5-7n ). A thick layer of Vaseline must be applied to the teeth and surroundi ng soft tissues to prevent adherence of the acrylic resin to preexisting restora tions a nd g ingiva (5-70), pa latal a nd interdental undercuts
being blocked o ut w ith sticky wax. The silico n matrix is then filled par tia lly w ith liquid resin (eg New O utline, Anaxdent), a nd the resin surface is allowed to become d ull in appeara nce (5-7p) . The index is then applied to the teefh
and mainta ined in positio n (5-7q) until the resin is compl etely cured (the mock-up is usually thin and would be deformed by prema ture removal ), the oper ato ry field being cooled w ith abun da nt rinsing.
l
200
-
__-
--
~
-
-;;.,-:....
-~-
- - r ------
--
~-----,.-
-
-
~"
_
--
- 4(;;;;;; --
~
---
-
------
-
.-0-=
- - - - - --
..
~
----
-
....
-----------------
-----------
5
I
INITI AL TRE ATMENT P LA NNI NG A ND DI AGNOSTI C A p PROAC H
A common situa tion must be po inted out. W hen
lookin g at the template for the first time, the patient is likely to compla in about the excessive
tooth volume . This reacl'ion is norma l a nd understand a ble . The process leading to wear a nd
erosio n is slow a nd extends over year s;
cha nges in tooth leng th and sha pe take place
progressively, w itho ut genera ting sudde n mod ification s in the patient's smile . When this long
degenera tive pro cess is coun teracted by an insta nt restorati ve procedure (the mock-up) invol ving rnojor changes in the smile desig n, the pa tient can be surprised . The indi vid ua l must
therefore be info rmed that an objective esthetic
eval ua tion req uires a cl inica l tria l of severa l
days. Accordi ng ly, the unchanged mock-up is
g iven to the pa tient for assess ment for 1 to 2
weeks . Hand ling of the thin acrylic template requ ires specific instructions [see Figs 5 -9k an d 59 1). The templ ate ca n al so be temp orarily
bonded by enamel spot etching if necessary. At
the next a ppo intment, the patient ge nera lly
feels mor e co mfo rta b le and will di scuss
cha nges w ith enhanced objectivity.
Rem odeling o f the lip by the mock-up has
been o bserved in some cases (Fig 5- 8) ,
w hich ern phcs ize the imp ortan ce of this subtle c hro no logy.
Since the method is not time-consuming , modifications of the initia l di agn ostic study ca n be
carried out and integ rated into a new template .
Ph otographi c prints of the mock-up can be presented to the pa tient for di scussion (Fig s 5-8 n
a nd 5-80). The actual tooth preparation s wi ll
be pe rfo rmed o nly after the pa tient's formal approva l.
The moc k-up can a lso be prepared indirectly in
the denta l laboratory, w hich all ow s for more sophisticated resu lts an d characteriza tio ns (see
Fig 5- 10 ).
For bo th d irec t and indirect techniq ues, it is
recomm end ed that simple acryl ic resins be
used instead of com posite materials or stiffer
resins that w ould be too brittle. Self-curing
resins have optima l pro perties for a mock-up
because of their e lasticity a nd favora ble handling properties.
FIGURE 5-7 (CONTINUED) . The resin template cov ers the fo ur inc iso rs (5 -7 r to 5 -7t; a preo perative view is inset for
compar iso n). It ca n be eosilv unlocked a nd removed by inserting a sca ler interproxima lly. The removable acrylic mockup is g iven to the pa tient fo r a prolonged trial. It ca n a lso be bo nded by enamel spo t etching , w hich reduces the tria l
pe riod to a few days . In co mbi na tio n w ith the patient's input at the end of the trial , the mock-up helps to detect defects in the g ing iva and neigh bo ring teeth a nd gUide opti mizat io n of the enviro nment (see Fig 5-6) for the future BPRs .
Details of tooth prepara tio n procedures for this case are presented in Fig 6-1 0 , a nd fabricati on of master ca sts and
cera mic stratification in Figs 7-4 to 7-8.
202
.
__
-
-
-
I
--
.' .
.
',
MOe K _··U· .P ·
-
-
- -
-~~- -=-~~-- - -
-
------
~~----
5
I
INIT IA L T REATM ENT PL AN NI NG AND D IAGNOS TIC ApPROACH
PECULIAR CA SE S
Retracnon/displacement of coronal
volumes
Und er some spec ific circumstances aim ed at retracti ng o r d isplacing the o rig ina l tooth vol ume
(eg, correction of tooth position), the prev iously
desc ribed a pproach is not applica ble . Such exceptional situations will requ ire pre liminary co rrectio ns of the crown shape to create the nec-
essary space for the mock-up, w hich w ill a lso
act a s a provisiona l restoratio n (Fig 5 -8) secured by ena mel spot etching and light-cured
unfilled resin (spot etch ing is d escribe d in Figs
6-25g to 6-25 i).
Only after the pa tient's app rova l or o b jective
modi fica tion of the mock-up con fig uration can
the tooth preparations be final ized .
FIGURE 5-8 : CORRECTIONS OF CROWN SHAPE BEFORE MOCK-UP. Initial clinica l view s showing combined ind icati ons for porce lain veneers: restitution of incisa l prominence and restoration of previously fractured crow ns (5-8a
to 5-8c l. Composite restorations o n Ihe facial a nd incisal po rtio ns of the maxillary righl central inciso r to left ca nine
and the ma nd ibular rig ht central and lateral inciso rs are w o rn. Note the tilting of the maxillar y central incisors (5-8b) .
The treatment ob jective w as de fined by a n add itive w ax up proced ure. The cor responding sectio ned silico n indexes
are placed intraorally (5-8d , 5 -8e). N ote the repositioning and shift of the midline (interincisalline) and Ihe insufficient
space left for the mock-up (arrows), especia lly a t Ihe level of the left cenlra l and laleral inciso rs. These areas are
mar ked , and corrections of preexisting com posites are carried out (5 -8f) to create adequa te space for the d irect acr ylic
mock-up (5 -8g ]. This thin removab le mask (5 -8 h, 5 -8;) is g iven to the pa tient for a we ek. If necessar y, the mock-up
can be sta bilized wi th unfilled resin and ena mel spot etching. Significan t improvements w ere o bta ined w ith this simple technique, which allowed eslablishmenl of co rrect too th length a nd smile line 15-8 i, 5-8jl.
204
-
-----
~----------_._-
-
-
-~~~
~ ~~--=====-
-
--=-
-
-
------~ ~
-
. -
',' v,
',.'
\".
..
, \
\ '
:
\'.
,
'
':
, \
' .,
\
v •
\
'
,, ' \
'FIGURE 5-8 (CONTINUED): MODELING OF THE LOWER LIP BY THE MOCK:UP. Rest~rati on of incise]. prornjnence
generated by the mock-up is ,often .occornported by rernodelinglnatural reconJouring)of ,the k)~e rli p; cor(lpore flot lip
at baseline (S-Sk)with contoured lip -ol "mock~u p dayn (S-S I ) , a nd more contouredl ip 1 week later IS-Sm). M odifications
Of the final objective can,be easilya nd:'o ~ jec t ,ve ly discussectusing '~ bebre : cmda fte r"' , photoqroph«;prini~ olthe .rncckup, w hich qre presentedjothe patient (S-S n,'S:Sq). ln the present case; th is'approach revealed th ai the pati ~ntexpeded
softer, more rounded shapes. Toothpreparations were gU ided by the silicon indexes. The left central incisor hod to be
prepared more extensiv:ely because Of its rnore facial position (5-8p). Tooth reduction .wos minimal on other teeth , Immediqtefinal views end srn ile ()-8q to ~'S s) ,show the,objective modifications cornporedio the diagnostiC mcck-up..Correspondinq-snuotion after 3yeorsof clinicolservice (5-Si) : N ote the'stability and health of the soft tissue. SCltisfac;tion and
absolute integration of the, res'tora t ion~ are evident in the patient's smileand face ' (S~S r) ", ," , '
'
.'
"
-
;;;;;;--..-
--=- =-- -
~
"
----=~~~
-=
~-~---~
"
~
-
--
~
-
-
\
~
.
"
'
,
'.'
"
'\
,
-
------====- - - ------ - - - - - -- -
--- - - -
-
"':- - --
~
- - - - - - -- - -- -
-r-=
~~
~
~
-
- ~~-----~
--------~
~--
.
~
5
I
I NITIAL T REAT M ENT PL A N N ING AN D D IA GN OST IC ApPROACH
Mock-up for demanding patients
sta ins to characterize the interdenta l area a nd
The mock-up methods presented in Figs 5 -7
a nd 5-8 are very simple and time efficient.
a liqui d g laz ing resin to soften the surface [Fig s
5 -9f to 5-9i ). The brown interdenta l staining increases tooth indi vidua lity ("separati on " effec t) ,
Some elementar y steps, however, can
be
a nd the soft g lossy surface of the g laze im-
added to this bas ic technique to improve the
pa tient's co mfo rt and help him o r her envisio n
the fina l g oa l. Figure 5 -9 first seems to describe
a trad itiona l di rect mock-up (Figs 5 -9a to 5 -ge),
but it co uld be eas ily enha nced w ith lig ht-curing
proves the surface reflect ivity and patient's comfo rt. The same "tricks" ca n be appli ed to fabricate highl y attractive pro visional resto ratio ns
(see Fig 6-26) .
..,,-
1
r
FIGURE 5-9: ENHANCED DIRECT MOCK-UP. Four BPRs have been plann ed fo r the maxillary incisors of this patient
The regular moc k-up protocol is applied first: block-out of pal atal undercuts and interdental spaces with sticky wa x,
insulatio n o f teeth and soft tissues w ith a ge nerous layer of Vaseline (5 -9a ), load ing of acr ylic resin into the silicon
inde x (5-9b), a nd place ment over the teeth w ith finger pressure until curing is co mplete (5-9c). The mock-up is left in
place and the thin laye r of excess resin is removed with a sca lpel by incising the g ingival sulcus (5-9 d , 5-ge). The
mock-up IS first characterized by infiltrating the con nectio n area w ith brow n lig ht-curing stains [Kolor Plus, Kerr) to provid e the effect of indiv idual teeth (5-9f) Followinq curing of the interd ental sta ining , the mock-up is gla zed w ith a low viscosily resin (Skin G laze , A naxd ent) a nd lig ht-cured . Complementary curing through a layer of glycerin jelly (5-9 g )
is required to o btain a pe rfect g loss (5-9 h). The moc k-up ca n be retrieved only at this stag e; ge ntle use of a sca ler releases the acrylic resin (5-9i) , The mock-up is thin and delicate a nd can be g iven to the pat ienl in a film bo x [5-9 il.
208
-
-
--
--
---
.
~-=~~~.
'----
-
-~
-
-
--
~
~
-
. ~ ".
..
' S lA IN
"
""
"' , '
.'
,
,
BA S EL I N , E
M O C K -U ,P
,
FiGURE 5-9 (CONT(NuEDj. The' pa tient h;'s bee ~ instructed to insert and remove the template using herJingernai ls
" t5-9k~ 5,91) , The' mcc k-iiphcs.helped to define ,new forms: symmetry cind de creosedcrownwld thz'heiqh t r,0tios (com,pare 5~9rri end 5 -9n); as we ll as improved relationship wit h lhelips (co mpare 5-90 and ,S-9p ) and f ace and personality of the pa tient (compare 5 -9q and 5 -9r) , The patient is satisfied , but some c h anges ~ere' discussed and transferred to the final BPRs . Several, prints of the mock-up were presented' to the pa tient and used.to specify these changes
, ,(5 -9 s), Cor responding final clinicc l view wit h the defin itive BPRs(5;9t). Ot her views of this ca se can be found in Fig s
'6-18 and 8-10:
" "
..
.
B A S E L
Moe K .: U P
N E
'; l t~L t=rUi5
I',V 1 ~S5
' V··Sr.,fff)
----
,
--
~
- --
---
~~
-
-------------------------------
----~~---- -------~ ---
f":=:::"=~~
. .'
--
-
....
-
-
-
------------
-
_ _~
5
I
II\JITIAL T REAT ME NT PL A N N ING A N D DIAGNOSTIC ApPRO A CH
Extremely dema ndi ng pa tients can be co nfused
by the insufficient esthetic qua lity of the trad itio nal mock-up , even in its enha nced form. They
are una ble to o b jectively eva luate the template
unless more tran slucent, slrotilied acry lics are
high probabi lity of reestabl ishing the patient's
co nfidence. This aspect of ~he relatio nship is
used . Here, preliminary tooth preparations and
impressio ns are best ind icated for the fabr ication of an elabo rate template using, fo r instance, a sandwich techniq ue (Fig 5-10).118
Such diagnostic co mmitment may seem exaggerated ; how ever, it offers maxi mum predictab ility of the treatment outcome, resulting in a
muc h mo re costly to miss the esthetic target and
have to do the final ce ramic w o rk over agai n.
Instead , the addi tiona l effo rt gi ven to the d iagnosti c template provides pred ictability and assura nce to the dental technic ia n w hen fa bricat-
price less w hen co mpared to the possib le conseq uences o f inad eq ua tely defined treat ment
ob jectives. As a ma tter of fact, it w o uld be
ing the final ce ra mic pieces.
FIGURE 5-10 : INDIRECT DIAGNOSTIC TEMPLATE FOR AI"-J EXTREMELY DEMANDING PATIENT. Recovery o f esthetics and function of a nterior teeth was the driving force for placing BPRs in this pa tient (5-1Oa; see also Fig 4 -6).
Because the co nventional di rect mock-up did not satisfy the pa tient, prelimina ry tooth preparations and impressions
(5-10 b; clini cal situatio n just befo re takin g final impressio ns) were carried out to fab rica te an indirect template reprod ucing the exact shape of the diagnos tic w axup (5 -1Oc] Ac rylic ma teria ls w ith d ifferent translucency (ena mellike an d
denlinlike] w ere used in a sandw ich technique (5 -1Od) i .1 8 Due to incompa tib le insertio n axe s, the template w as d ivid ed into Ihree seg ments (5-1Oe) These provisio nal restoration s w ere pla ced two -by-two using a clear provisiona l luting cement (see Fig 6 -28 ). The three ac rylic paris w ere Ihen co nnected a nd locked into position by adding liq uid
resin in the pa latal embrasures. (Fig ures 5- 1Oa and 5- 1Ob are repri nted fro m Mag ne a nd Douglas19 wi th permi ssio n.)
212
I N D I R E C T
D I · A G N O S TI C
T E M P LA T E.. '
--~------
- -~
~
- ---~~--
,
.~- a--==-~ (~::~~ ~--
-
-;;;;;
-----
- -
-
- -
-
- --
- -
-
- --
--~----==---=-~ . . . ----
- -
-~
,
DIAGNOS T IC
FIGURE5-10 (CONTINUED). The pa tient's satisfaction and confidence were established through this indi rect diagnostic template, as seen in the 'patient's smile (5- 1Of, 5 -.10g; compare '5- 1Of wi th the baseline photograph overlay)
and face (5- 1Oh] . Because tooth prepa rations did not require modi fications, the fina l po rcelain restorations could be
fabricated w ithout additional cli nica l steps, and the intact origi nal Single dies w ere used (5 -lOi; see Fig s 7 -] to 7-7
for fab rication of master models). Final view s follovJing def initive insertion of BPRs( 5: 1O] to 5 -1 0 1) . O ther views of this
case are presented in Fig 4-6. (Fi gure 5-1 OJ is reprinted from Magne and Douqlcs " wi th permission.)
----- ---_._---~
-
--~
---- -
.
-
- - - - --
- -
-----=
D E F J N .1 T I V · E
-- --...........--
-----
=
~
- -- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ---------~- --
-~
,
~===~
~-
--------------------
-
-
.
.
5
I
INI TI AL T REATM ENT P LANN ING A ND D IAGNOSTI C A p PROAC H
BPRs combined with traditional
full-coverage crowns
ra mic restorati ons are produced first, de fini-
It is not uncommon to encou nter situatio ns in
w hich preexisting full-coverage crowns must be
tively bo nded , and combined with acry lic provisio na ls o n teeth requiring full cove rage (Figs
5 -11 k to 5 -1 10).
p laced in combina tio n w ith BPRs o n nei gh bo ring [o r a ntag o nistic) teeth. Figure 5- 1 1 depicts
3. Restorative phose II. About 2 to 4 w eeks
a d ifficult case requiring a tradit io nal po rcela infused-to-metal (PFM) cro wn on one ce ntra l incisor an d a porcela in veneer on the other. It
w o uld be diffi cu lt for the de ntal techn ician to
fabricate these different type s of restoration simulta neo usly. The c ha lleng e lies in the fact that
the esthetic integ ratio n of a BPR is high ly related
to the underlying substrate, ad hesive cementatio n, a nd hydra tion condi tio ns. O n the o ther
hand , the final esthetic o utco me o f a PFM
2 . Restorative phose I. Definitive ad hesive ce-
later (the estimated time required for sta bilization of color/ hyd ra tio n of teeth w ith bonde d
restora tio ns), a separa te imp ress io n is ta ken for
replacement of the rema ining acrylic crowns by
defini tive trad itiona l cro wn s (either PFM o r a llcera mic). Shad e selection an d pho togr ap hs
should be repeated at this stage. In this way,
the ce ram ist ca n accurately reprod uce the a lread y "integ ra ted " adh esive restora tio ns [Fig s
5 -1 1p a nd 5 -1 1q ).
crown (or o ther kind of o paq ue, metal-free cemented crown ) is o nly minima lly influenced by
the tooth, the under lying cement, o r hyd ra tio n
co nd itio ns. A spec ia l seq uence must be
adopted to facilitate the ce ra mist's work.
For the case in Fig 5- 1 1, inversion o r simplifica tio n o f this seq uence [ie, by proceed ing to a
sing le imp ress io n a nd simultaneous fa brication
of definitive restoratio ns on bo th ce ntral incisors) would have resulted in a n unpred icta ble
1 . Diagnostic phose. Ina ppro priate crowns are
elimina ted and repla ced wi th direct pro visio n-
esthetic o utco me due to the d iffere nt integration
modes o f PFM crowns and BPRs.
a ls (Fig 5 -1 1c) using , fo r insta nce, prefa brica ted resin shells; the trad itional acrylic mockup is then carried o ut o ve r preexi sting
restorati o ns a nd teeth (Fig s 5- 1 1d to 5- 1 1 j).
FIG URE 5-11 : COMBINED PFM CROWN AND BPR s. This pa tient (5-1 1aJ presents w ith a n ope n gol d crow n on the
rig ht la teral inciso r a nd a n o ld resin crow n on the left centra l incisor (5-1 1b). A fter remova l of the latter, a di rect provisio na l acrylic was placed ; removal o f Ihe open crown did not req uire provisio na lizal ion [5-1 1c). Two po rcela in veneers w ere planned fo r the right centra l a nd lateral inciso rs, a nd a PFM crow n for the left central inciso r. N ew vo lumes, includin g longer central inciso rs, w ere caref ully designed by the wax up (5 -1 1d ). The final trea tment ob jective
w as tested in vivo by the fa brication of a tradi tional mock-up (5-1 1e to 5- 1 1j; sa me techniq ue as in Figs 5-7 a nd 58) A thick layer of Vaseline was p reviously a pplied to the teeth to avoi d ad hesio n betwee n the acrylic mock-up a nd
the preexisting oc rvlic resto ration (5-1 1e)
216
-
-----
--= -
---
""";,\"
.~
...
.. ::~"-~fQ;-J'~5-
- --.,-
-.~
-
,""
--f"-.
-
-~
~
~- - - ~
-
~~-~..:-~
-
-
~-
~.
.' ..
\
.\
\.
'
FIGURE 5-11 (CONTINUED), Fo llowing th~ pa tient's approval of the mock-up (5-11 i, 5-11, j), the rig ht central a nd
latera l incisors w ere p rep o redfo r BPRs, (5- 1 1k), im med ia tely folJ()wed by fina l impressio \ls, The ceram ist fa bri cate d
the two fina l,BPRs a long w ith a "sandwich" acrylic prov isional for the leficen tral incisor (5, 1,111"T he nex t -sessio n co nsisted.o] the try-in a nd fincil od heslveploceinentol the cera mic restor a tions a nd provisiona l cernenro tlo n o f the a crylic
c rown; note the interd enta l' b lock trian gl e between the ce niraliricisors (5- 1 1m). Tw owee ks lorer, the soft tissues have
matured (5' 11 n; no te perfect closing oli nterdentc l space), a nd the n ew ly design ed smile a lrea dy b lend s wi th the pa tient's face (5- 11 0 ), The PFM .crown o n the left ce ntral incisor w a s fa br ica ted o nly a t thi s fina l stage (5-1 1 p]. fo llow ' ing a seco nd impression , Wi th this pa rticular seq uence , the dental technic io nwos o ble.to fa bri ca te '0 PFM that closely
resemb les the pree xisting BPRs (5 - 1 1q) , '
----_.
- - - - - - - - - - - - -
-
~
-----
=
·-~~-----------.-.
_
_
_
L
_
~
~___
•
r,
-
.
-
-
-
---- -
- - - - - --
II
I.
5
I
INITIAL TREATMENT PLANNING AND DIAGNOSTIC ApPROACH
Special considerations related
to orthodontic therapy
depicts a case
of
severe Class II division 1
malocclusion (dental and skeletal) treated by
combined
orthodontic/orthognathic
surgery
Incisal edge wear develops in a specific pat-
(Figs 5-12b and 5-12cl. In the presurgical
tern related to the tooth position and long axis.
stage, space analysis required extraction
of
of a
When BPRs are planned subsequently to ortho-
mandibular incisor and stripping
dontic movements, the orthodontist should po-
maxillary teeth. The patient was referred only
sition teeth ideally, according to their main axis
at the end
(see Fig 2-2cL crown emergence, and gingi-
12d to 5-12f). Crown shape and length still
val contour. Preexisting wear facets and incisal
appeared inappropriate, as illustrated by the
edge configuration must be ignored at this
inverted incisal line (Figs 5-1 2g to 5-1 2iL but
stage.
this problem is easily corrected with the future
of this
extensive treatment (Figs 5-
restorations. Most important, tooth
of
anterior
positions
this approach, the dental com-
and gingival contours were favorable and al-
position may appear esthetically displeasing
lowed a traditional additive diagnostic proce-
(immediately following orthodontic treatment)
dure. Two consecutive mock-ups were required
because incisal edges no longer conform to
to reach a satisfactory situation (Figs 5-1 2j to
the newly designed occlusal plane and smile.
5-1 2ql, which was subsequently reproduced in
This is normal and will be resolved subse-
the form
As a result
of four
BPRs (Figs 5-1 2r to 5-1 2y).
quently by restorative procedures. Figure 5-1 2
FIGURE 5-12: APPLICATION OF BPRs FOLLOWING COMBII"lED ORTHODONTICjORTHOGNATHIC SURGERY.
The patient originally presented with a Class II division 1 malocclusion, clearly apparent in her face and smile (512a). The extraction of a mandibular incisor and stripping of maxillary anterior teeth preceded orthognathic surgery.
The releradiograph clearly demonstrates the presurgical skeletal defect and marked overjet (5-1 2b) Adequate skeletal and dental relationships were obtained lollowinq a bilateral sagittal split osteotomy (5-12c). Intraoral views taken
after removal of the orthodontic appliance reveal adequate tooth position and favorable periodontal architecture;
tooth forms, however, suffer from the stripping of proximal surfaces [5-1 2d to 5- 12f) The configuration of incisal edges
was inadequate (reversed) as compared to the lip line and smile (5-12g to 5-1 2i) A first waxup and its corresponding mock-up were carried out to restore a cohesive incisal edge line (5-1 2j to 5-121) The patient was pleased but
still requested longer incisors (5-1 2m, 5-12n). A new template was fabricated and resulted in a harmonious relationship between the lower lip and incisal edges (5-120, 5-12p); the patient was completely satisfied. The final incisal
edge elongation was approximately 3 mm; this objective is now well defined (5-12q, bottoml; compare to the first
waxup (5-12q, center) and initial situation (5-12q, top) (Figures 5-12h, 5-12j, 5-121, 5-120, and 5-12q are reprinted
from Belser et al 20 with permission)
220
.. ....
.
_
-===--_- i==.--
t:::-""""""I::
-=r-=
-
-.
.
~~
_
~~-~.
..
-:-
.
I
-
~~-,
..L~"~~~
--'-
-
-
~-=---
~
c
..
--
FIGURE 5-12 (CONTINUED). Tooth .preporotions iu~tbeforetaki~g final impressions (5-12r). Firialintraoral.views of
BPRs demonstrate the -restored coronolvolume and length (5-1 2s to 5-12u) that exccilvreproduce the diagnostic template. Therefore, the patient w as not surprised to feel the comfortable harmony of the new ly designed incisal edges ~ '
w ith her lower lip (5-12v, 5- 12w).As often.seen in such cases, tra nsformation Of the smile also results in significant '
changes in hairslyle(5-12 x, 5-12y) . The before/after bloc k-ond-whne reproductions help to understand the cohesive
force of t he incisa l edge and lower lip conformiiy ' ( 5~ 1 2 z , 5-12()a). O ther aspects of .this case m e found in Figs '
6-25 a nd,Fig 7-10 . (F igure 5-12w is repri nted from Belser et al 2C w ith permission.)
."
.' '.
'.
--
--~
-
---
--~
--- .
~= ~--=--==~
-~-
-
-
,,:.'
,
.
- - - - - " - - -~~ - '
-
-
~
---
-
!---
-
---------- .----=---=----------_._---------------~--
-
•
-
-
----
5
I
INITIAL TREATMENT PLAI\INING AND DIAGNOSTIC ApPROACH
SUMMARY OF DIAGNOSTIC APPROACHES
In all cases, the first stage involves redefinition
envisioned therapeutic objective only after pre-
of the desired tooth morphology (waxup) and
liminary preparation of the teeth. The subse-
of the
surrounding soft tissues on the
quent mock-up will act as a provisional. If the
study cast. In a second phase, the diagnostic
first preparations were only preliminary (as in
effort is evaluated in vivo. Three clinical situa-
Fig 5-81, they must be corrected before the final
eventually
tions can be distinguished (Fig
5-13):
impression (Fig
5-13, middle column, dotted
frame).
1. The tooth volume has to be redefined via
augmentation (see Figs 5-7 and 5-9). This situation is the most frequent and provides the op-
3. The patient requests a more sophisticated
template (Fig 5-10). In these complex preoper-
tion to fabricate a diagnostic acrylic template
ative situations, it appears justified to fabricate
directly in the potienl's mouth [onto unpreoored
transient restorations in the dental laboratory
teeth) using self-curing acrylic resin applied in a
after obtaining a precise impression. If the
silicon matrix.
preparations prove adequate, the same impression can subsequently be used for the pro-
of
2. The tooth volume has to be redefined via
reduction/displacement (see Fig 5-8). This situ-
duction
ation is rather exceptional and offers the possi-
and a new impression taken (Fig
bility
224
of
a diagnostic in vivo evaluation of the
the master casts. If the first prepara-
tions were preliminary, they must be corrected
column, dotted frames).
5-13, right
.'
Aug ment
Fina l·Volume
Reduce
Fina l Volume
Fabricate
Ind irect Template
Waxup
Waxup
Waxup
Intra o ra l mock-up
Preliminary too th
' .prepara tio
Preliminary tooth
preparatio
..
. . ...
..
..
..
..
_
Final tooth
prepara tion"
..
. Impression
Intraoral mock-up
(= provlsio nols] .
.
Fi~OI impression
(+, di rect provisio nols
..
..
:.,' .. :
Final tooth
preparation
.
Final restoration
(+ di rect provislo nols)
~
..
~ Fina l impressio n ~
····..........
~
FIGURE 5-13: SUMMARYOF POSSIBLE TREATMENT SEQUENCES. .
\ .v.
.
------- - - - - -
"
\
, :
~.~L~_,.--
---
..
....
Fina l restoration #.
"
.
:
·;::::::::: ~':::: ::": :: ~:.
Final restorat ion
,"
..
:
Fina l tooth
preparation
(+ direct provisionol s]
.
p rovisionals
Final impressio n
\
".
loborc tory
::
• ~ .
:: :#.
\
:
"
.
-
•
5
I
INITI AL TREATMENT P LAN NING AN D DI AGN OST IC A p PROA CH
C LINIC A L PHOTOGRAPHY
O nly a limited number
of
the a fo rementio ned
ob jec tives would be possible wi thout the use of
adequa te clin ical pho tog ra phy equ ipmen t. As
the say ing goes, "A picture pain ts a thousand
words," a nd that powerful princip le must be
used to optimize co mmunicatio n. A n idea l situa tion is crea ted w hen bo th the o pera tory and
the la boratory are using similar equi p ment, es-
The most important feat ure of the bod y,
w hether tra d itional o r numeric , is the a bility to
read flash on the film/ sensor pla ne of the
ca mera and to set the pro per fla sh intensity for
co rrect ex posure . This essential feature is
ca lled "thro ug h the lens" (Til ).
pecia lly in the case of so-ca lled telede ntistry, ie,
w hen the la bora tory is located in a nather bui ld-
The lens
ing , c ity, o r sta te . In this situa tion , photogra phic
An adeq uate focal length fo r clin ica l dentistry
slides, w hen taken appro priately, w ill save the
pa tient a number of visits to the laboratory.
C a mera bod y, lens, and flash system are criti-
seems to be 105 mm, w hic h a llow s for an o ptimal working distan ce and minima l image disto rtio n. The lens must o ffe r a 1: 1 magnification
ca l eleme nts to be cons idered (Fig 5 - 14 ).
ra tio , w hich ca n be ea sily inc reased to 1: 1.5
w ith an add itio na l close-up lens. M ax imum
focus depth is o bta ined by selec ting a mini-
The camera
body
mum aperture o f f2 2 to f3 2 . A 2 x teleconverter can be a ttached to o bta in a 1:3 repro-
The bod y mig ht be the least sig nifica nt part of
the system. Sing le-lens reflex ca meras (SLR) can
duction ratio . In this case, the aperture must be
be either nume ric (SLR di gi ta l) o r lrc d itio no l
(SLR 35 mm). M odern 35-mm ca meras feature
focus dep th is expected . SO lTl e 105-mm lenses
ca n be used a lone lie . w ithout additiona l
a built-in motor d rive (auto ma tic odvon co] . au-
lenses) for pa tient port ra its. Fo r this spec ific sit-
tom at ic film loadin g , a nd a uto ma tic ASA setring , w hich elimina tes ma ny erro rs usua lly
ua tio n, f2 .8 a perture is selected , g iving a soft
a mb ience (thro ug h the reduced focus depth)
made by the novic e. In ei ther d igital o r con-
a nd ena bling the use
ventional SLR camera s, it is recomme nded to
of the
inc reased (eg, to f 16 L and a red uctio n in
of the
po int ligh t in spite
increased working d istan ce .
use a mode of exposure w ith p rior ity to the
a pe rture (d ia p hra g m). This w ill ena ble manual
selec tio n o f different f-sto ps to gene ra te d ifferent focus de pth.
FIGURE 5-14: STANDARD PHOTOGRAPHIC EQUIPMENT RECOMME NDED FOR ESTHETIC DE NTISTRY. The system consists of a traditional body [SLR 35 mm ), a dual-point light [TILcompliant), and a 105-mm macrolens (5-14a).
This SLR digital body (5-14b; FinePix S1Pro, Fuji) can be used with th e same lens and fl ash system illustrated in 514a. II is equipped with a 6-million-pixe!-capable charge-coupled device and includes a regular viewfinder (arrowhead) and [iquid crystal display screen. Reg ular film is replaced by memory cards, which provide immediate data access (5-14c).
226
--- -
-- - - - -
~
.
,--
------
-..
------
---~~
--
~
-
-
- -
----- ------
.
-
-
~.'
"
.
~
-
--
-
5
I
The
INITI AL T REATM ENT PL ANN ING A ND DI A GN OSTI C A p PROAC H
flash system
two different purposes. The following general
principles must be known (Fig 5-14e) :
Dua l-po int light systems (see Fig 5-1 4 a ) represent an idea l co mpromise to simultaneou sly pro-
• Th e poi nt light is a three-dimensional light that
generates shadows, optim ally revealing texture, sha pe, and con tour; it is best used for a n-
vide adequate di stributio n of light , yet a llow
fine three-dim ensional reproductio n of tooth vol-
terior intraora l views, smile, face , and casts (in-
ume (Fig 5- 14d) .
clud ing laboratory w o rks).
The flash must be compliant w ith the TIL ca m-
• The ring lig ht generates a d iffuse a nd shad owless light that hides no part of the sub ject
(Fig 5-14e); it is best used for surgery, po ste-
era, wh ich co ntrols exp osu re. Typical lig hting
for macrophotogra phy includes either point
lig ht or ring light. These two lig ht so urces present fundamental d ifferences a nd are used for
rior intrao ral mirror pictures, and pa thology
photography.
D U AL -P OI NT
"'.
L I G H T
':
'.
.....
.......
5-14d
FIGURE 5-14 (CONTINUED) : IDEAL LIGHT SOURCE-RING LIGHT VERSUS DUAL-POINT LIGHT. This view results
from the co mbination of a vertical dual-point light, a 10 5-mm lens, a nd an additional close-up lens, provid ing a 1: 1.5
magnification ratio 15-14d ); flash reflections enhance the three-di mensional nature of the tooth by outlining the mesial
transition line angles (dotted areas), yet providinq adequate perception of surface texture (circled). Compara tive views
(5- 14 e): note the flatness of image s produced with ring light as compared to that generated by dual-point light.
228
.
------------ - - - - -- -- -
- -
- --
~
,
"
,
'
'.
D U A L '~ p' 0 I. N T , LI G H T
RI N G
LI G H T
,
,
,
,
,
:,
.
.. ,"-=--~
-
-
-
-
. ----
~
~
~
'-
- - - - - - - - - ------ - - -
~
-
_-
-r- -- _
-
•
-
- - - - - - - - --
.'.
---
5
I
INITI AL TRE ATMENT PL ANNING AND DIAGNOSTIC ApPRO A CH
SHADE DOCUMENTATION
It is not the a im of this section to cover the extensive top ic of color in dentistry but simply to
provide the reade r w ith some principles that
may generate significan t improvements.
pies w ill remain unchan ged . These principles
are di scussed in a rational approach using currently ava ilab le tools, ie, d igital photographs,
shade ta bs, a nd a shade -map pi ng sheet.
First, al l dental la borato ries should includ e a
w o rkplace that ca n be used for the documentation of shade (Fig 5 -15) . A lthoug h it seems
Principle 1: Use multiple light sources
primari ly necessary for the denta l laboratory
[see Fi g 5- 1b }, some cases ca n be solved
w hen adeq uate shade documentation is performed by the dentist a lone, espec ia lly w hen
the denta l la boratory is in a nother city o r state.
As discussed in Chapter 2 , colo r is not the
ma jor element of esthetic success in a resto ratio n. For decades, choosing co lor has remain ed a sub jective process. The future surely
lies in the automation of shade selection
through multifunctional innovative tools, including di gital ca meras and color data recording.
W hile the tools may evolve, some basic princi-
For each pati ent, the o pe rator (either the de ntist o r technician ) should try to understan d a nd
document color (tooth-light inleroctions], rather
than select the shade . This ideally impli es
using var io us lightin g co nd itio ns (Fig 5-16L
eg , dayligh t, art ificial light , and flash from
digita l cameras.
It is important to take into account the lig hting
in the pa tient's daily env ironment. Shade selection should a lso be made under the same
type of ligh t source. This a pp roac h may aid in
avoid ing effec ts of metame rism.
FIGURE 5-15 : SHADE DOCUMENTATION WORKPLACE IN A DENTAL LABORATORY. Th is "patient's place" includes a d isinfecting device, co mmercial shade gUide , selection sheet, custom shade tabs, an artificia l ring light, a nd
examina tion g loves (O ral DeSi gn Ce nter, Montreux, SWitzerland).
FIGURE 5-16: FIRST PRINCIPLE FOR SHADE DOCUMENTATION. Metamerism implies that ceramics a nd teeth ca n
match under one light condition but not under other light sources. By this token, de tailed understandin g of shade must
be accomplished wi th more than one lig ht source. Na tural da ylight seems idea l but varies according to atmospheric
conditions.
230
.
- -- - - - ,- - - --- -
~ - - - - ­
- -I
-
-
- -- -
- -
-
].
·
,
"'.'
.
"'.
,'.'
U N D ' E R 5 T:A N DI N :'C;
......
• N atural daylight
• Artificia l lig ht
• Camera flash
......
Portable ring light
Extremely variable
Stable and constant
......
~
,------=--...-,,--
------
-
~
__
L I G H'T · 5 0 U R C E 5 .
III
-- --~
~
II
Ideal - 6500K '
I
O F5 H AD E
......
S E V 'E R A L
~
.
-
-
---
--
--
-
-
..
--
--------_.
-
-
5
I
INITIAL TREATMENT PLANNING AND DIAGNOSTIC ApPROACH
Principle 2: Acquire experience with
a given shade-guide and porcelain
system
Principle 3: Use a reference tooth
and generate functional shade
documents accordingly
The shade-guide system might be the least im-
Shade documents must not only provide gen-
portant element in shade selection. Interestingly,
eral data on the basic tooth shade (eg, data
the Vita Lumin Vacuum shade guide (Vita],
from the shade guide] but also more detailed
which is still universally recognized and has
information that shows individual characteristics
been faithfu lly and successfully referred to by
of
most porcelain brands, seems to present major
tralateral or antagonistic tooth (Figs 5-17a to 5-
defects. For instance, within the same hue (A
17c].
8,
C
an intact reference tooth, usually the con-
or DL there is a simultaneous and nonlin-
ear variation
of the
two other color dimensions
(chroma and value]. As for many other choices
Skilled operators can routinely gather this informalion by:
in high-end dental technology, the following reality must be emphasized:
1 . Taking
photographs while selected
tabs
from the commercial shade gUide are held
The experience acquired with a given porcelain system and its corresponding shade
gUide is more important than the real choice
and characteristics
of the
system itself.
edge to edge with reference teeth (Figs 517d to 5-17g].
2. Completing a shade-mapping sheet with
reference to custom shade tabs for specific
porcelain masses (Figs 5-17h to 5-17jl.
Digild imaging can facilitate these steps.
FIGURE 5-17: SHADE DOCUMENTS AND POSITION OF SHADE TABS. General and detailed shade information
can be recorded with photographs [slides or digital files) 15-17a to 5-17i) This patient requires a porcelain veneer
on the right central incisor (5-17a). The logical reference tooth is the intact left central incisor, which displays numerous characteristics (5-17b, 5-17c] Intraoral phototographs of shade tabs must include general views (5-17d] and
closer shots (5-17e, 5-17f) Above all, shade tabs must be positioned to receive the same amount of light as reference teeth during the photograph. By this token, shade tabs should not be placed side by side with natural teeth (because of the frontal shift between teeth and shade gUide); only the edge-to-edge position is recommended because
teeth and shade tabs are on the same plane, parallel to the plane of the camera body and film, and at the same distance from the camera flash system (5-17g) The cervical parts of shade tabs are often more saturated and must be
omitted; they should never be juxtaposed against the incisal edge of the reference tooth.
232
-- -
~
-
-
-" _ _ =
~
.
--
JJII
S HAbE TAB S , A N D TEE TH
ED GE - T 0 - E D G E
.
J ~~- ~-=-
.
~-
~
:~
5
I
INIT IA L T REATM ENT PLA NNING A ND D IAGNO STI C A p PROA CH
of
A bove a ll, sha d e documen ts must conform to
order to place the correct amount
the stratification technique and porcelain sys-
shade in the ceramic buildup (see Fig 7 -1 1).
masking
tem used so that they can be continuously referred to during the ceram ic w o rk. The same
Shade documentati on should not be done at the
d oc umenta tio n must be ' repeated at the try-in
end
stag e w hen ad justments are required . When
dration commonly occurs during de ntal treat-
of
a regular clinical session. Tooth de hy-
bonded ce ram ic restora tions wi ll be p laced o n
ments and will generate brighter shades. By the
stained teeth, it is reco mmend ed that shade
same token, during shade documentation itself,
documentati on fol low tooth prepara tion; the
photographs must be taken intermittently to
stained to oth substrate must be id entified in
a llow rehydratio n of teeth by the patient 's sa liva.
FIGURE 5-1 7 (CONTINUED) . The ca mera was tilted cervica lly to prevent flash reflectio ns at the level o f the incisal
edge (5- 17 h). The resulting high-mag nification view of the reference tooth constitutes a map for the a pplica tio n of specific porce lain masses such as opa lescent enamels, incisals, and stains; this picture is w or th a thousand words (517 i). A print of this image (instant digi tal shot] ca n be used to generate a shade-mapping sheet that specifies the co rrespondin g porce lain masses (5-1 7jl .
234
;
--
_:-
.
•
-
~
-
---
~
r
5 I
INITI AL TRE ATMENT PL ANNIN G A N D DI A GNO STI C ApPR O ACH
References
1. Magne P, M ogne M , Belser U The dio gnostic template
A key element to the comprehensive esthetic treatment
concept Int J Periodonlics Restorotive Dent 19 9 6 · 16:
560-5 69.
'
2 . Rieder C E The role of operatory a nd la bora tory personnel in pa lient esthetic consultations. Dent C lin North Am
19 89 ;33275-284
3 . M ag ne P, Magne M, Belser U. Restoura tion des dents anterieures. Rev Mens Suisse O do ntoslornclol 19 9 3 · 10 3 :
'
31 8-3 24.
4 . Raetzke PB. Co vering localiz ed areas of rool exposure
employing the "envelope" technique. J Periodontol 19 85 ;
56 39 7-40 2 .
5 . Bruno JF. Co nnective tissue graft techniq ue assuring w ide
root coverage . Int J Periodontics Restorative Dent 1994 ·
141 2 7-13 7 .
'
6 . Buonocore MG. A simple method of increasing the adhesion of acrylic filling ma terials to enamel surfaces. J Dent
Res 19 55;3 4 :84 9-8 5 3 .
7 . Fradeani M . Six-year follow-up w ith Empress veneers. Int J
Periodontics Restorative Dent 19 9 8; 18 :2 16-225 .
8. Peumans M, Va n Meerbeek B, Lambrechts P, VuylstekeWau ters M , Vanherle G . Five-year clinica l performance of
porcelain veneers. Q uintessence Int 19 9 8;2 9 :2 1 1- 2 2 1.
9 . Friedman MJ A 15-year review of porcelai n veneer failure-A clinician's observations. Co mpend Co nlin Educ
Dent 19 9 8 ; 19 :6 25-6 36 .
10 . Dumfahrt H. Porcelain laminate veneers. A retrospective
evaluation after 1 to 10 years of service: Pa rt II-Cl inical
results. IntJ Pro sthodont 20 00 ; 13 :9-1 8 .
1 1. Li n CP, Douglas W H o Structure-property relations and
crock resistonce at the bovine dentin-enomel junction. J
Dent Res 19 94;73 : 10 72 - 10 78.
12 . Garber D. Porcelain laminate veneers: Ten years later. Part
I: Tooth preporotion. J Esthet Dent 19 9 3;5 :56-62 .
13 . N attress BR, Youngson CC , Potterson Cj, M ortin DM,
Rolph JP. An in vilro ossessment of tooth prepara lion for
porcelain veneer restora lions. J Dent 19 9 5 ;2 3 : 16 5- 170 .
14 M agne M , Douglas W H oPorcelain veneers Dentin bonding optimization and biomimetic recovery o f the crow n J
Prosthodont 19 9 9 ; 12 : 11 1-1 21.
15 Magne P, Douglas W H oAdditive conlour of porcela in veneers: A key element in enamel preservalion , ad hesion
a nd esthetic for the ag ing dentition. J Adhesive Dent
19 9 9 ; 1.81 -9 1.
16. M agne P, M agne M , Belser U. Natural a nd restorative
ora l esthetics. Part I: Rationale and basic strategies for successful esthelic rehabilitations. J Esthet Dent 19 9 3 -5:
161 -173
'
17. Rieder C EoUse of provisional restorations 10 develop a nd
achieve esthetic expectations. IntJ Period ontics Restorative
Dent 1989 ;9 : 122-1 39 .
18. M agne M , Magne P. Schlusselelemente eines umfassenden asthetischen Behand lungskonzeptes Dent Labor
19 9 9;47 5 45-55 5.
19 . Magne P, Douglas W H oRationaliz a tion of esthestic restorative dentistry based on biomimetics. J Esthet Dent 19 9 9 ·
11 :5- 15
'
20 . Belser U, Magne P, Magne M . Ce ramic laminate veneers:
Co ntinuous evolution of indications. J Esthet Dent 19 9 7 ·9 :
'
19 7-207.
,
236
•
CHAPTER
6
TOOTH PREPARATION,
IMPRESSION, AND
PROVI S10 NALI ZATI 0 N
W ith the understa nding
of
too th crow n bio mec hanics a nd the prog ress
of
dentin ad hesives, bonded ce ra mic restorati ons present an extended spectrum of indi cati o ns for an terior teeth. To prevent short-term fail ures, the new
g enera tio ns
of
" porcela in veneers" require accurate knowled ge o f the
stress dis tribu tion w ithin the too th-resto ration compl ex . The optima l pre paratio n de sign an d finish line ca n vary accordin g to the initia l cl inica l situa tio n, shape, and arran gement of intact hardlissues. Becau se tooth preparatio n/ impression , and provisio naliza tio n usually occur du ring the sa me
cl inica l session, final imp ressions a nd fa brica tion of provisio nals are discussed in this chapter as we ll.
6
I TOOTH
PREPA RATI ON , IMP RESSI O N , AND P ROVI SI ONALIZATION
GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS
When adequate di c q nosfic steps have been
strictly applied , practica l restoro tive procedures
can beg in w ith maximum confidence and
pred ictability. The fina l ob jective be ing w elldefined, the active thera peutic effo rt ca n now
This leads to maximum preserva tion of remaining sound, mineralized t is ~ ue d uring tooth prepara tio n a nd, co nsequently, to a very co nservative a pproac h (Fig 6- 1).
foc us o n the techn ical procedures for tooth
preparation.
A minimum a mount o f prepara tio n geometry,
The prepara tio n design for bo nded porcelain
restorations (BPRs) should Simultaneously allow
optima l margina l ad a ptati o n of the final restoration and reflect an utm ost respect fo r the hard
tissue morphology.
ing the fina l bondi ng procedure . The lo ng-term
preservat io n of the integri ty of ~h e tooth-resto ration co mplex also implies the need for a sufficient and homogeneous cerami c thickness to
provide the restoration with some intrinsic mecha nica l resistance.
BPRs must be differentiated from traditi onal cemented crowns, especially regardi ng retention and resistance fo rm.
The ad hesive proper ties and physicochem ica l
characteristics of the luting composites al low the
tooth-restoration interface to be sub jected to
substantia l stresses . From this view po int, the geo metric a nd mechan ical parame ters o f the tooth
prep aration are o f secondary impo rta nce .
how ever, is still requi red to facilita te pla cemen t
a nd positioning of the cerami c workpiece dur-
This c ha pter wi ll systema tically review tissue reduc tion, margin co nfig ura tio n and local izatio n,
and fundame ntal aspects related to w ra pping
and incisa l overlapping , a nd w ill add ress peculiar situatio ns such as thin versus thick teeth,
preexisting restorations, d iastemata, etc.
FIGURE 6-1: BPRs FOLLOWING 5 YEARS OF SUCCESSFUL CLINICAL SERVICE. Initial view of previo usly crownfractured incisors (6-1a) Only a pellicle o f ename l wa s removed (6-1 b, 6- 1c). Period ontal surgery was not required
despite severe hard tissue breakdown and very sho rt clini ca l crow ns. Detai led view s of the master cast (6-1d to 61f) Co rrespo nd ing cerami c restoratio ns fabricated w ith a co mbinatio n o f feldspa thic porcelain , hydrotherma l low-fusing g loss, a nd a refractory d ie techniq ue (6-1 g to 6-1 il. The inci sal ed ge extends more than 5 mm o n fhe left ce ntra l
inciso r. There is very little prima ry sta bi lity of the restoration s; the long-term success essentia lly relies o n ad hesio n. C linical results mo re than 5 years o tter placeme nt (6-1i, 6- 1k]. The ac id-etch technique w as used w ith a n enamel ad hesive a nd a photopo ly merizi ng restorative co mpo site (minipar ticle hybrid ] as the luting agent [resto ra tio ns w ere bond ed
o nly to enamel beca use no effic ient de ntin ad hesives w ere avai lable a t the time o f place ment). The restorations a re
suppo rting sig nifica nt protrusive g Uida nce . The 5-yea r fol low -up revea ls a favorabl e soft tissue respon se (6-11) . The
restorati ons show exce llent margin al ada ptatio n a nd sea l, colo r sta bility, a nd smoo th surfaces. There is no recurrent
ca ries o r cera mic crock s (6-1 m]. (F ig ure 6 -1a is reprin ted from M ag ne et a ll w ith pe rmission)
240
_....;.~---------!y :i----------==-~
r
~
6 I
T OOTH P REPARATI ON , I MP RESSI ON , A ND PROVISI ONALI ZATI O N
TISSUE REDUCTION
Basic principles
Early tooth preparation fechniques fo r BPRs unfortunately did not pro mote op lima l preservatio n of enamel . Reduction burs w ith ca lib rated
d iamond rings w ere proposed to cut ena mel,
a nd de pth co ntrol was based o n the preexisting tooth surface (Fig 6-2) . Whe n the initia l
ena mel w as a lready thin, redu ction based o n
such depth cuts led to ma jor dent in exp osures.
As expl a ined in C hap ter 5 , the veneer sho uld
a im to resto re the o rig inal vol ume of the tooth,2.3
especia lly in cases of thin initia l ename l.
Therefor e, a diagn ostic wa xup restoring the
o rig inal vol ume of the tooth sho uld be used as
a reference for tooth redu ction [Fig 6-3). This
ba sic pri nciple will save a sig nificant amoun t of
so und tissue, not on ly ena mel, but al so the critical dentinoenamel junction .
The simp lest and most important tool for
ena mel reduction is a w ell-ada pted, horizon tally sectione d silicon inde x fro m the w ax up
(Fig 6-3).
FIGURE 6-2 : BURS FOR INITIAL FACIAL REDUCTION . Schema tic d raw ing o f the incisa l view o f hori zonta l cross-sections of central incisors (P = pa latal , F = facia l). (Top) Ca librat ion burs w ith d iamond rings are not recommended beca use they cut accord ing to preexisting tooth surface a nd vo lume Excessive a mount of enamel is red uced (red dotfed line), risking dentin expo sure (white arrowheads), especially at the level of the transitio n line a ng les of age d teeth.
(Bottom) Use of trad itional burs (slig htly ta pered , round-ended ) in co njunction w ith silicon indexes of the additive
w axup w ill a llow econom ic reduction of ename l and minimize de ntin exposure beca use cutting (red dotted line) is
made according to aug mented tra nsition line ang les (white arrowhea ds) and expanded crown volume.
FIGURE 6-3 : MAXIMUM CONSERVATION OF THIN FACIAL ENAMEL. Initial view s show short central inciso rs with
preexisting co mposites a nd thin ena mel (6-30 10 6-3 c). Sig nifica nt spac e is initia lly present fo r the future restoration
[6 -3 b, as indica ted by the horizo ntal ly sectioned silico n index from the additive wa xup) and wi ll allo w extremely co nservative too th preparation . The prepar ation technique includes the reali zation of interdental a nd facial gro oves (63d , 6 -3e) fo llowed by facial red uctio n (6-3f). Final BPRs di splay marked transition line a ng les and uniform thickness
[6-3g 10 6 -3;). C linica l service is now more than 7 years, as illustrated in Fig 4 -8 . The d iag nostic approach is presented in Fig 5-5 and cera mic stratificat ion in Fig 7-9. (Figure 6-3i is reprinted from M ag ne" w ith permission)
242
.-r,.; ,
.-;==:.-j
t-. .-
6 I
TOOTH PREP AR ATION, I M PRESS IO N, AND PR O VISIONALIZ ATI ON
Recommended sequential procedure
The step-by-step preparation is shown in Fig 6 4 . As is the case for realization of the mock-up,
a rig id an d accura te matrix must be obtained
by sub jec ting the silicon materia l to press ure
during setting (see Fig s 5-71and 5 -7m ).
1. Initial control with the silicon index. Before
reducing the ena mel, placement of the facial
index reveals areas of the tooth surface that w ill
req uire o nly minimum prepara tio n (typica lly the
proximal crests and transition lines) [Fig 6 -40) .
2 . Axial reduction I: Interdental preparation.
Ax ia l reduction necessitates the use of three d ifferent d iameters of ta pered , round-ended burs
c .cssico llv des iq ned fo r traditi on al fixed
prosthodon tics. Recommended burs are 85 6 L0 14, 856L-O 16 , a nd 856 L-020 [Bra sseler) o r
D6 , 235, a nd 237 (Intensiv). The smallestdiam eter bur is used first to cut the proximal red uction grooves (Figs 6-4 b a nd 6-4c) . This step
can be significantly enhanced by the use of osci llating instruments (see Fig 6-9).
3 . Placement of a deflection cord. The aim of
slig htly defl ecting the gin gi va is not to produc e
an introsulcular margin but to improve ViSibility
d uring prepara tio n of the parag ing iva l margin .
A special low-trauma techn ique is used for
placement (6-4d). Additi onal d eta ils reg ard ing
interde nta l and cerv ica l preparalio n are giv en
in the next sectio n ("Marg in co nfiguratio n and
loca lization ").
4 . Axial reduction II: Facial grooves. The
med ium-diame ter bur is used to crea te facial reduc tion g rooves [Fig s 6-4e a nd 6-4f). Three vertical grooves are recom mended o n central incisors and ca nines, tw o grooves on la tera l
incisors. The depth of each groove is individ ua lly con trolled using the silicon qu ide (Fig 6 4g) . The preexisting surface of the tooth must
be ignored; o nly the surface of the silico n index
should be used to check the depth cuts .
FIGURE 6-4 : RATIONAL TOOTH PREPARATION PROCEDURE . The initial control w ith the silico n index shows a lready
ava ila ble space for the future restoration (6-4 a) . Tooth preparation starts with part ia l interdental penetration (6-4b,
6-4cJ, follow ed by placement of a deflection co rd. The bima nual insertion technique is used to avo id trauma to the
so ft tissues: the co rd is stabil ized w ith a periodontal probe on the site of insertion, whi le a spatula is used to posi tio n
the co rd in the sulcus [6-4d) . Facial dep th cuts a re then prepa red w ith a larger bur [6 -4 e). They a re bare ly visible beca use of the minimum sacrif ice of sound tissues (6-4f). Each g roove is ind ivid ually co ntro lled w ith the silico n matrix (64g) . So me aspec ts of the preexisting surface w ill be almo st untouched , eg, the facioprox imal transition line ang les a t
the d ista l surface of the right central incisor. The larg est bur is used for axi al reduction (6-4h l, w hich prevents the formation of w avy surfaces resulting from repenetratio n into the depth cuts. The con trol of axia l reductio n reveals that
proximal crests a re al most untouched, a llow ing maximum preserva tion o f ena mel (6-4i). The incisa l-edge clearance is
co ntro lled w ith a pa latal index [6-4 j], follow ed by de finitio n of the pa latal finish line lie, a sligh tly concave butt margin) wi th a large round d ia mo nd bur (ie, 801 -016 or 801-02 3 , Brasseler) (6-4 k). It is extrernelv impor tant to round
off al l sharp edges, which ca n be ac complished using soft flexib le dis ks (6-41 ]. Final view of the prepara tions af ter remova l of the de flection cord shows clea n paraging iva l marg ins (6-4 m) M eSially, margin s remai n within preexisting
co mposites, w hereas d istally, the marg in has to be extended more palatally due to enamel deminera lization . Preparatory steps a nd po stope rative view s of this case ca n be found in Fig 4-7 .
244
6
I T O OTH
P REPA RATI ON , I M PRESSIO N , A ND PR OV ISI O NA LIZ AT IO N
5 . Axial reduction 11/: Gross preparation . The
g ross
wi th a
tration
wavy
space
axial reduc tio n is p refera bly realized
larger bur (Fig 6-4h ) to prevent repeneinto the g roo ves. In this simple w ay,
surfaces ca n be avoided . A unifo rm
of 0. 5 to 0 .7 mm should be ge nerated
by this method (Fig 6-4i L ultimately p rod ucing
the same thickness o f ce ramic a t the p rox imal
a nd axial levels.
6 . Control of incisal reduction. The pal atal half
o f the silico n index is final ly used to check the
incisa l clear ance [Fig 6-4 j). A t lea st 1.5 mm is
cie nt clearance for the ce ramic, smoo th co nto urs, absence of undercut) an d the final impressio ns will sig nifica ntly facilitate the w o rk of
the dental ceram ist, lead ing to minimal use of
d ie spacer a nd thus red ucin q the risk o f postbo nd ing cracks. 1.5.6
It is impo rtant to co ntrol the space avai lable at
different horizontal levels of the preparation
(from cer vical to incisal); this ca n be easily acco mp lished by sectioning the silic on ind ex acco rd ing to the "notebook method " (Fig 6-5 1,
w hic h c reates a bound multilayer index .
requ ired.
7 . Palatal wrap and incisal preparation. Establishment of the pala ta l fini sh line is usua lly the
last step of tooth preparat ion (Fig 6 -4 k). Ad d itio nal detail s regard ing incisal and pa lata l
prepara tio n are g iven in the section "W ra pping a nd overlapping."
8 . Finishing. It is essentia l to p rod uce prepara,.'
tions w itho ut sharp a ng les, cons ide ring that the
improved qua lity of both the preparat ions [suffi-
The basic elements of tooth preparati on are
presented in Fig 6-6. A last co ntrol of the
preparati on must incl ud e care ful exa mina tio n
of the insertio n path of the future restora tio n
a nd verifi cati on of the abse nce of undercuts,
especi a lly in cas es w here the p roximal margin s extend further pa latally (see Fig 6-20).
Speci fic situations reg ard ing margin local izalion and confi guralion are d iscussed in the follow ing section .
FIGURE 6-5: THE NOTEBOOK FACIAL SILICON INDEX . The tradit ional silico n index is cured under 4 a tm in a pressure po t, then sectio ned horizo ntally. The differenl loyers ore still bound on one side of the index (right) . The matrix
can be open ed like a book to visualize the entire aspect of the reduction , from the inci sal edg e to the most cervica l
part (left]
FIGURE 6-6 : BASIC ELEMENTS OF TOOTH PREPARATION . This sc hematic view shows that axial reduction ca n vary
betwee n more tha n 0 .7 mm incisally (see Fig 6-4 i) a nd a bout 0.5 mm cer vical ly. Incisal clea ra nce must be at leasl
1.5 mm bUI can extend up 10 5 10 7 mm in fraclured teeth (see C ha pter 4 , type IliA ).
FIGURE 6-7 : ZENITH OF THE GINGIVAL MARGIN . Placement of the marg in d uring too th prepara tion must take into
ac count the most apica l po int of the gi ng iva l co ntour, w hich lies di stal to the main tooth axis (leftj.8 Symmetric scallop ing does not appear nalura l (righ t]
246
:.. .--.. . . -------.. .
------- ------------------./:4!;"!:i~'··-··=::..~
i/!~ ."
(
6
I
TOOTH PREPARATI ON , I M PRESS IO N , Ai\JD PR OV IS IO NALIZAT IO N
M AR G IN C O NFI G URATION AND LOCALI ZATI ON
Cervical and proximal margins
In the ce rvica l a nd proxima l areas, the crea tio n
o f a lig ht cha mfer w ithout internal line angles is
universally acce pted .
Such a finish line w ill a llow a maxim um
p reserva tio n of enam el a nd w ill therefo re a lso
prevent marginal rn'crolc o kc q e ." Fo r optima l
esthelic results, it is recomm ended tha t the sca llo ped co ntour of the g ingi va be respec ted (Fig
6-7; see also 6-4 m). Insertio n of a thin de flection cord (Gi ng ibra id Oa o r 1a , Va nR) facil itates this task by underlining the ind ividual g ing ival perimeter [see Fig 6-4 d ). The dep th cuts
ar e kep t a t a consistent d istance to the co rd ,
opproximo telv 0. 5 mm, lead ing to a para gin gi va l mar gin . Intra sulcu lar margi ns ar e reco mmended only w hen clos ing a diastema or interdental tria ng le to al low the den ta l tech nicia n
to crea te a progressive emergen ce profi le (see
Fig 6 -2 1 ).9
The a mount of interdenta l penetra tio n depend s
o n the type of interdenta l co ntact [Fig 6-8 ).
Lig ht contacts ca n be removed by co nservative ly extend ing the prepara tion limit (Fig 6- 8 ,
left]. With a larg e contact surfac e, how ever, it
is recommended that the surfac e be stripped to
create accessib le margi ns wi thout excessive
penetration (Fi g 6-8, right) . Except fo r two peculiar situ o tio ns that requ ire extensive interdental penet ration (w ra pp ing of o ld C lass 3
restora tio ns a nd reduction of d iastemata / interd enta l triangl es; see Fig 6 -20), it is best to
avo id useless sac rifice of proxima l tooth substa nce.
Sig nifica nt prog ress for interde ntal pre para tion w as made w ith the inrro d uction of so nic
oscillating preparatio n techniqu es (So nicflex/
Sonicsys, KaVo) (Fig 6 -9).
FIGURE 6-8 : DEFINITION OF IN TERDENTA L PENETR ATIO N. The interdenta l marg in (red arrowheads) can extend
beyond a ligh l con tact poin l w ithoul sig nifica nt sac rifice o f tooth subsla nce (left). On Ihe o ther hand , it is recom mend ed
tha t the prepara tio n not be extended beyond a large proxima l co ntact surface (center) beca use of the sign ifica nt
amo unt o f enamel Ihat must be cut and the associa led risks o f den lin exposure (white arrowheads). Instead , marg in
loca tio n can be kept con serva tive, provided that the co ntac t surface is stripped (right), facilila ting accurate reprodu clio n du ring impression taking. In a ll ca ses, a "ce ramic-to-cera mic" contact poinl will be recovered w hen the restore tions are placed.
FIGURE 6-9: OSCILLATING INSTRUMENTS AND THEIR ADVANTAGES OVER ROTARY INSTRUMENTS. Os cilla ting inslruments include an a ir-driven so nic ha nd piece (top) an d va rious tips w ith a "half-bur" sha pe featuring a flat nonworking surface (6 -90 ) Ty pica l instruments are the to rpedo-sha ped (left) a nd hemispheric (right) tips.
248
6
I T OOTH
P REPARATI ON , IMP RESSION, A ND PROVISION ALI ZATION
Due to their nonrotar y action and half-bur
sha pe (Figs 6 -9 a nd 6 - 10L osedla ting tips
al low rap id a nd minima lly invasive prep aration. M arg in definiti on is significa ntly enha nced
and poses no risk to intact neigh boring tooth
surfac es. Such tools are very useful in cases of
excessive crowd ing. Especia lly w hen used o n
large interdental contact surfaces a nd ove rlap-
p ing teeth, sonic tips allow a more conservative
proxima l prepa ration as co mpared to burs (Fi g s
6 -9 b).
Another indi cation for osci llatin g preparati on is
the need for subg ing iva l marg ins, w hich ca n
be finished precisely w ithout da mag ing the soft
tissues.
FIGURE 6-9 [CONTINUED) . A sig nifica nt amount of tissue ca n be saved wh en the interdental prepar atio n is achieved
w ith the to rpedo-sha ped tip because its cross sectio n conforms exactly to the desig n of the marg in (6-9 b , left). Even
w hen the thinnest traditi on al cylind rica l bur is used instead (6-9 b , right). there is a high risk of overpreparat io n and
den tin exposure (while arrowheods), in add itio n to the risk o f da mag ing the neighborin g tooth (block arrowheads).
FIGURE 6-10 : PREPARATION WITH OSCILLATING INSTRUMENTS IN A STANDARD CASE. The righ~ central inciso r had been frac tured , a nd both central incisors w ill be veneered (see prepa ratory and dia g nostic steps of this case
in Fig s 5 -6 a nd 5 -7). Extremely thin trad itiona l burs ca n be used to begin the interde ntal prep arati o n; special care
must be taken reg , use of a metalli c matrix) to protect the neigh borin g tooth (6 -1 0 0). Final de finitio n of the marg in is
ac hieved w ith a n oscillating torped o-sha ped instru ment (6- 1Obi. In this spec ific situatio n, the task was facilitated by
a comp osite restoration o n the lateral inciso r that co uld be strip ped at the mesia l aspect (6- 1Oc; co mposite restoration detail ed in Fig 5-6) The proxima l margi n is sharp and accessib le (6- 1Od ). Following placement of a def lection
cord and the realization of dep th g rooves d riven by the silicon index (6- 1Oe], axia l preparati o n is achieved wi th trad itional burs (6-1Of) to ge nerate a uniform space o f about 0 .7 to 0. 8 mm (6-1Og). Sonic tips w ere used agai n after
the incisal reduc tion: the hemispheric tip is idea l to round a nd so ften the conto ur o f the marg in a t the tra nsition between the ax iop roximal w a ll a nd pa latoincisal edg e (6-1Oh; 6- 10 j, arrowhead] . All prepared surfaces feature soft
co ntours a nd w ere kept wi thin ena mel excep t for the fractured area of the rig ht ce ntra l inciso r (6-1Oi, 6-1Oil. There
seems to be a reduced space for the restoration o n the right centra l incisor in Figs 6-1Og a nd 6 -10 i due to the more
cervical cross-sectio n plan a nd different viewin g a ng le
250
6
I T O OTH
PREP AR ATION , I MPRE SSI ON , A N D PR OVI SIONALI ZATION
Wrapping and overlapping
As early as the late
19 8 0 s, a p hotoelostic
study by H ighton et a lii revealed the imporThe systematic c rea tion of an inci sal and inter-
tance of an inc isa l/i nterd ental ove rla p tha t ap-
pr o ximal w ra p aro und is appli ed in pr a cti c e by
peared to pr o vide the cera m ic w ith a sup e rior
the majority o f cl inic ia ns and ha s been rec e ntly
intrinsic resistan ce due to be tter stress d istribu-
of
the b iom echanica l inte-
tio n in the restoratio n itse lf. A d d itiona l sc ientific
g ra tio n o f ve ne e rs. The ex ten t of w ra p p ing is
ev idence suggests that the typ e of incisal fini sh
d epend en t o n the init ial situa tion (eg , preexi st-
line to be used is a func tio n
ing c ro wn fracture) and the pr osthetic o b jec tive
of incisal overlop." :"
o p tim iz ed in v iew
(eg , if ma jor modifi cation of fo rm o r cl o sure
dia stema ta
is planned,
a
ma ximum
of
wrap-
of typ e
Sinc e the indicati on s for
BPRs ha ve been suc cessfully ex te nd ed to the
treatment
of c rown -frac tured
incisors and worn
anterior den titions (se e Chapter
around is imperative).
and amount
4),31 0.14 - 18
new
issues have ari sen co nc e rning the design o f
Practi cally speaking, the establi shment of in-
such restorati on s. The exte nt o f to oth sub sta nc e
terpro x imal
o ffe rs
los s must be c on sidered becau se it w ill sig nifi-
od vontoqes": it faci litates the esthe tic
ca ntly infl ue nc e the lo c atio n of the pa la ta l fini sh
many
of
and
incisa l w ra p around
the BPR in the inc isa l zone, it e n-
line (Fig 6- 1 1). Differen t pa ttern s o f stress ore
ha nc es the liber ty o f the den ta l c e ra mist w ith
e xpected o n the p a latal margi n o f the ve ne e r
respect to form and emergen ce profile o f the
depending o n the or ig ina l leve l
restoratio n, and , most important, it faci lita tes
line (eg , moderate fracture through the palatal
the pl acement of the fina l restorati on (eg , sta -
co nc a v ity versus exten sive fracture thro ug h the
bilizati on o f the BPRs and easy access to a ll
tubercule
d ef inition
of the
of
the fra cture
cingu lum) .
marg ins du ring bonding).
FIGU RE 6-11 : DIFFERENTIAL MARGIN LOCATIO N FORMODERATE OR SEVERE PREEXISTING CO RONAL FRACTURE S. Possible locations of the palatal fracture line (arrowheads): in the area of th e palatal concavity for th e moderate fracture (left), and in the area of th e tubercule convexity for the severe fracture (right). Stress distribution in the future restoration margin may differ depending on the area of fracture
FIG URE 6-1 20: TANG EN TI AL TE N SILE STRESSES ON THE PALATAL CERAM IC MARGIN (M AXILLARY INCISO RS) .
Orig inal contours and finite element mesh developed for the optimization of BPRs itoo}." The position of the palatal
margin is indicated for different initial situations: 11 to 14 (minimum loss of incisal structure), F1 and F2 (moderate loss
consequent to fracture or wear), and F3 and F4 (severe loss consequent 10 fracture). The facial aspect of the veneer
is the same for all d esiqn s . The location of the palatal margin is the same for 14 and F2 . The horizontal and vertica l
displacements are fixed a t the cut plane of the root (mesh dia gram, arrows). The incisal load (50 N ) is located approxima tely 1.5 mm below the incisal edge . G enercilly speaking, elevated tensile stresses are found at margins located near the palatal fossa (more explanations in 6-1 2b )
252
Mode rate preexisting
fracture
J.
'
Severe preexisti ng
fracture
6
I
TOOTH PREPARATION, IMPRESSION, AND PROVISIONALIZATION
Considering the high tensile stresses that may
concavity is not recommended because it cre-
be generated in the palatal concavity during
ates a thin extension
funclional loading (Fig 6-12; see also Fig 1-
maximum tensile stresses.
5L
19
of ceramic
in an area
of
one must question whether the palatal
of
"mini-chamfer," which is frequently prepared,20
Extension
should not be replaced occasionally by a sim-
concavity often results from an extended proxi-
pler finish line, such as a butt margin. The use
mal preparation, which tends to give the lami-
of a
nate veneer a design close to that
butt margin actually provides the margin
of
palatal margins too far into the
of a
three-
of porcelain,
marginal extension of
quarter crown (Fig 6-13, left] 21 For this reason,
ceramic (as with a palatal chamfer). Figure 6-
a mini-chamfer or a butt margin is recom-
12b shows how changes in the palatal margin
mended in order to avoid the palatal concavity
the restoration with a strong bulk
instead
of creating
a thin
design as well as the extension
of
bonded
ce-
in the case
of extensive
interdental preparation,
(Fig 6-1 3, right).
ramic restorations influence the stress distribution during extreme functional loading. The
restoration
of moderately fractured
and severely
2. For moderate crown fractures (incisal one
third) or severe wear, the palatal finish line is
of maximum
fractured incisors is considered. These results
often localized in the zone
can be summarized as follows:
stresses (Fig 6-12b, F1 and F2). In these situations, a butt margin limits the extension
1.
For maximum remaining tooth substance, the
stress pattern along the palatal surface is barely
influenced by the finish line
of the
ceramic, thus reducing the amount
tensile
of the
of stress at
the restoration interface.
BPRs (Fig 6-
12b, left column). Considerable differences are
Worn teeth present the same dilemma os teeth
detected, however, when comparing stresses at
with moderate fracture: the incisal line crosses
the level
of
the restoration margin. Limited in-
the crilical zone
of the
palatal concavity. Here
cisal overlaps (butt margin or mini-chamfer) pro-
again, a butt margin IF1) permits minimum ex-
tected the restoration margin from harmful ten-
tension
sile stresses in the palatal concavity. The use
of
a long chamfer that extends into the palatal
of
the preparation into the concavity,
while the mini-chamfer (F2) places the restora-
lion rnorqin in an area
of higher
stress.
FIGURE 6-1 2b: MODIFIED VON MISES STRESS DISTRIBUTION THROUGHOUT THE BUCCOLINGUAL SECTION
OF RESTORED INCISORS. The thick dotted arrows show the location and direction of load. The thin white arrows
show the margin location 1m) (Left column, 11 to 14) Margin location is very favorable for 11 and 12, less favorable
for 13, and detrimental for 14. Stresses in the palatal concavity are well above 100 MPa only for 14 [see 6-120). [Right
column, F1 to F4) Margin location is not ideal but acceptable for F1 and detrimental for F2. Stresses in the palatal
concavity are well above 100 MPa for F2 (see 6-120) Margin location and overall design of F3 and F4 are very
favorable; the tooth-restoration interface and the restoration itself are not subjected to elevated stresses (see 6-120).
254
Equiva lent mod ified Von Mises (M Pal
.,'
, ,.
6
I
TOOTH PREPARATION, IMPRESSION, AND PROVISIONALIZATION
One should exercise caution when designing
an enamel butt margin. This situation may present longitudinally sectioned enamel rods,
which may have a negative effect on the subsequent adhesion to enamel. 22 The orientation
of enamel
prisms is illustrated in Fig 6-14. The
situation appears most critical in the incisal
Andreasen et al 16 and yielded great ultimate
crown strength. The finite element mesh was
used to reproduce this situation and calculate
the stress distribution (Fig 6-15). The composite
provides a favorable effect, simultaneously allowing the decrease of stresses in the palatal
concavity (stress redistribution into the more flexible composite] and relocating the margin of
the veneer into the "safe" incisal area. How-
area, where enamel prisms are sectioned at a
low angle of 30 degrees. A mini-chamfer (intermediate between 12 and 13) can be recom-
ever, such buildups must be carefully consid-
mended in this situation, because it will section
ered because thick layers
enamel rods at an angle close to 90 degrees
been proven to induce the development of
postbonding flaws. 1 5 .6 Rebonding of the frac-
and stay reasonably distant from the concavity.
For fractured teeth, a horizontal butt margin is
adequate because a horizontal finish line will
generally section the enamel prisms obliquely
of
composite have
tured tooth fragment, when possible, is certainly indicated since it has been proven to
at an angle greater than 50 degrees.
give good results when supplemented with a
veneer. 15 In fact, this treatment modality seems
Another way to avoid the palatal concavity in
appropriate prior to placement of a laminate
veneer because of uniform thermal expansion
fractured teeth would be to make a composite
buildup designed as a "stress breaker." This
modality was studied in a load-to-failuretest by
and the absence of hygroscopic expansion in
the rebonded tooth fragment.
FIGURE 6-13: DILEMMA OF EXTENSIVE INTERDENTAL PREPARATIOI"JS. (Left) Maximum penetration of the interdental space often leads the clinician to extend the incisal overlap during tooth preparation. The resulting veneer unfavorably involves the palatal concavity. (Middle) Clinical photograph of veneers featuring the problematic design illustrated on the left. The accelerated degradation of the margins and short-term fai lure of the ceramics appeared at
the level of the long palatal chamfer on the left central incisor. (Right) Maximum interdental preparation is compatible
with the avoidance of the palatal concavity and the realization of a butt incisal overlap. Such a design is especially
recommended for closure of interdental spaces due to gingival recession as well as for the total wrapping of preexisting Class 3 composites when indicated (see Figs 6-19 and 6-20).10
FIGURE 6-14: ORIENTATION OF ENAMEL PRISMS AS DETERMII'.IED ON AN INTACT TOOTH SECTION. Prism
orientation is indicated (in degrees) based on measurements made at the possible locations of the morqin."
FIGURE 6-15: STRESS DISTRIBUTION THROUGHOUT A FRACTURED INCISOR RESTORED WITH A VENEER ON
TOP OF A COMPOSITE BUILDUP (F 1cp]. The thick dotted arrow shows the location and direction of load. The thin
white arrows show the margin location. The stresses in the palatal concavity are redistributed into the more flexible
composite The margin of the veneer (m1) is relocated in the "safe" incisal area.
256
6
I T OOT H PR EPARATIO N,
I MPR ESSI ON, A ND PROV ISIO NA LI ZAT ION
3 . For severe crown fracture (incisa l two thirds),
the pa la ta l margins are sub jec ted to low tensile
fo rces beca use they are located in the low
stress area of the c ingu lum [see Fig 6 -12b, F3
a nd F4) . The la tter, w ith its smooth convexity,
ca n be co mb ined either wi th a butt marg in or
a mini-chamfer w ithou t ge nera ting harmful
stresses .
po rcela in. Interesting ly, the to oth-resto ratio n interface is not sub jected to stresses more har mful
than those fou nd in other resto ra tive de sig ns.
COincidenta lly, for pa tients w ith crow n fra ctures
in w ho m BPRs w ere p laced o n both cen tra l inciso rs (Fig s 6 -1, 6-3 , and 6-10), the pa latal
marg in on one inci sor w as pla ced be low the
pa la ta l co ncavity a nd the o ther w a s p laced
Surp riSing ly, severe fra ctures IF3 to F4 ) p resent
above it (Fig 6 -16) . This d esign , resulting from
c hara cteristics less com plex than those fo und in
the differential preexi sting loss
moderate fra ctures. The restoratio n itself shows
vo ra b le in view of scientific d a ta d isc ussed
lowered stresses in the pa latal conca vity be-
w ithin this sectio n.
ca use
of stress
red istribut ion in the b ulk
of
tissue, is fa-
of the
FIGURE 6-16 : IDEAL LE VEL OF PALATAL MARGINS . View s o f pre pared ce ntral inci sors (top, patient from Fig 6-10)
a nd BPRs o n master cast (bottom). The left ce ntral inci so r is an F3-lype BPR . The BPR on the rig ht centra l incisor has
a n intermed ia te de sig n betwee n 12 and 13 . The marg in o f bo th BPRs (arrow s) cou ld be placed outside the fossa (red
translucent ova!). Note that the "cera mic-to-cera mic" interdenta l cont ac t poin t has been resto red .
258
---------~,..::/
'.
.-_---_....
_------ ~~
6 I
TOOTH PRE PARATI O N , IMPRESSI O N , A N D PR OVI SI ONALIZATI ON
PECUL IAR SITUAT IO NS
Thin versus thick teeth
tomi c features
of teeth
to be restored (thic k ve r-
sus thin, flat versus co ncave) is imp erati ve to the
Teeth restored with por celain ve neers are ab le
to mimic the beha vior
of
d esign optimizati on
of BPRs.
inta c t teeth w ith simi-
lar stress dis trib utio n pa tterns. Fro m the p rev ious sec tio n, it is und erstood that stresses are
Existing Class 4 defects
hig hly cor re lat ed to shape (co nvex ve rsus conca ve) a nd com pos itio n (eg , e na mel-de ntin dis tribution
and restorati ve materia l thickness).
of
Extensive loss
of tooth
structure (lar g e C lass 4
defects] can be restored by mea ns
of the
lam i-
surface , it is not surpri sing that the stress at the
nate ve nee r a lo ne (Fi g 6-18 , simpl ified a pproach) .3.1o.J2,i6 A p re p ros the tic co mp o site
pa la ta l ce ra mic mar gi n is correla ted w ith the
buildup resto ratio n w ill not co ntribute to an in-
Due to the co ntra sting a na to my
stress
of ~ h e
the palat al
intact inc iso r at the correspo nd ing
crease in the ullirn o te streng th
of
the tooth
loca tio n lie . high in the pala ta l conc av ity and
resto ra tion comp lex" but could be considered
low at the tube rcl e).
a positive resilient compo nent."
In this ap-
proach, a preexisting Class 4 restorat ion a nThese anatomi c fact or s ca n vary from tooth to
chored by a para pulpal p in or intrar a dicul ar
tooth and patient to patient, and it con be an -
screw can be used as a sup p lementar y pre-
ticipated that extremely thin teeth w ill be sub-
p ros thetic resto ratio n.
[ectcd to more ben d ing stresses com pa red to
thic k teeth. Tw o anato mic types are re p rese nted
Ho w ever, lar g e bul ks
of composite
under po r-
6-17: a thin flat tooth, w hic h obviou sly
ce lai n venee r restora tio ns sho uld be avoided
requires a substa ntia l incisa l clearance to gen-
because the re is still significa nt con c ern about
in Fig
era te a certa in bulk
of
inc isa l po rcelain, an d a
thick cur ved incisor that requires only minimum
inci sa l red uctio n. Careful observa tio n
of a na-
the ad d itive effec ts of the c uring con trac lion
and high therma l ex pa nsio n
pos ite resins.1,5,6
of
cer tai n com-
FIGURE 6-17 : VARIABLE INCISAL CLEARANCE ACCORDING TO ANATOMIC TYPE . To create an o ptima l thickness of inci sal po rcelain (line o f asterisks), the inci sa l edge of a thin fla t tooth must be reduced more than 1 5 mm.
The intrinsic resistance of the laminate w ill be enha nced w ithout sub jecting the pa lata l margi n to detrimental stresses
(slig ht palatal co ncavity) In a thick curved tooth, a similar bulk o f incisa l po rcelai n is often compa tible w ith less tha n
1.5 mm of incisal clearan ce . Extensive incisal reductio n a nd cha mfering are not reco mmended o n such a tooth beca use it would pla ce the pa latal marg ins a t the level of high tensile stresses from the deep fossa .
260
,
Thin flat tooth
:
\
"
Thick curved tooth
.
.....
. . ...... ..::.\
\,
\
\
FIGURE 6-18 : LARGE PREEXISTING CLASS 4 COMPOSITES . Both central incisors present large C loss.4 co rnpos- . '
}tes (6-18a) that wereremoved immediately prior to tooth preparation (6-1'8b). The li nol prepara tions show the extent
of themesial interdentOi defects; dotted areas delineate exposed dentin thatwas sealedwithadentin bondi ng agen t
prior to linol impressions (6-1 8c, solidrnostercostl. The correspondi ng porcelain restora tions present a bulky mesial
asped but do not involve the remaining palatal surface (6-1 Sd]. Postoperative view r()lIowi ngi n~er tjo n of BPRs.on the
four
incisors (6- 18e), O ther views of this case can be round in Fig 8 ~ 10.
,
. -
'\
'
6
I T OOTH PR EPA RATIO N,
I M PRESSIO N, A ND PRO VISION ALIZ ATI ON
Existing Class 3 restorations
the luting composite a nd the extremes o f therma l c ha nges. Pro blems related to thermal
Veneering teeth w ith preex isting Closs 3 composi te restoration s addresses again the problem of interdental penet ration and positioning
of the marg ins. The safety of interdental wrap-
stresses ca n ge t worse in the presence
3 composites (Fig 6 -19).
ping ca n be cla imed beca use the most important mecha nical eve nts in incisors appear
w ithin the bucco lingual pla ne .24 .25
of
Class
A numeric study determ ined that partial or total
wrapping of preexisting co mposite restoratio ns
is ind icated to minimize thermal stresses. 26
Stresses and stra ins within the crown seem to
In medium and lo ng interdenta l wraparounds,
part of the pree xisting com posite bulk is re-
be minimally affected by interdental preparation s. Ho w ever, mechani cal loadin g is no t the
placed by the extension of the ceramic , w hich
red uce s the influence of the nearby expa nd-
o nly source o f stress. Add itio na l factors must be
considered, suc h as the curing contractio n of
ing/ co ntracting composite restoration [Fig 619 c).
FIGURE 6- 19 : TWO·DIMENSIONAL FINITE ELEMENT A NALYSIS O F THERMAL STRESSES IN THE PRESENCE OF
CLASS 3 COMPOSITES . The numeric model w a s ge nerated from a horizon tal section at mid-height of the crown (619 a , Jeft). Due to symmetry, o nly the mesial hal f o f the sectio n w as used. Tw o-d imensio na l FE model (6 - 19 0, center;
M enta t software, MSC Software). The margin loca tio n of eac h veneer (short [S], med ium [M], lo ng [L]) is indi ca ted
o n the model [6 -19 a , right). First principa l stresses (ps 1) in the med ium-wr a p veneer sub jected to thermal cha nges
alo ne (6- 19 b). The w hite area represents the o rig ina l sha pe at 3rC (ba seline). Defo rmatio n due to tempera ture
changes (6 0 °C a nd 5 °C) w as magnified by a facto r of 500 . N egative va lues of stress appear in dark g ray a nd delineate the area of comp ressive stresses. Lig ht gra y area s ind ica te tensile stresses. A "bend ing effect" ca n be o bserved
(dotted arrows indicate relative di splacement of the restorati ve margin) : a g iven thermal load shows o pposite effects
on the restoration surface and the interface, creati ng pure co mpressive stresses on one side of the restoration w hile
generati ng pure tensile stresses on the other side. Simulatio n of nega tive thermal stress (SOC ) for the short-wrap and
long-wr a p veneers (6-19c) . Deforma tio n of the tooth-resto ratio n co mplex is magnified by a factor of 400 . The light
gra y surface a nd dotted lines show the original shape of the too th-restoration co mplex at 3r C Deformati on is less
uniform w ith the sho rt-w ra p veneer: the bulk of the composite restoratio n crea tes a contracting pole (arrows) and induces bend ing of the venee r. Deformation is more uniform (few er bending moments) in the long-w rap veneer becau se
of the sma ller vol ume of con tracting composite. Scanning electron microscope (SEM) view of a hori zo ntal tooth sectio n at the junction between the facial cerami c venee r and a C lass 3 co mposite 16-19d) 25 A temperature-ind uced
ceram ic crac k is found at the restoration margi n in a situatio n simila r to the short-w ra p veneer, whi ch correlated wi th
the locat ion of maximum stresses found in the FE mode l ab ove . (Figures 6-19a to 6- 19d are repri nted fro m Magne
and Dougla s26 w ith permission )
262
, Thelmal stress a lo ne (medium wrap!
.'
',
'
.
Thermal stress alone (Y Cj
6
I
TOOTH PREPAR ATI O N , IM PRE SSI O N , A ND PR OV IS IO NA LI ZAT IO N
Overall perform a nces of different de grees of
interdenta l w raparound de sig ns can be evaluated in light of pra ctical and cl inical par am eters. The short-w rap veneer co rresponds to a
trad itio na l a nd co nserva tive p roximal ve neer
prep ara tion that stays fa c ia l to the co ntact.
This often precl udes the need for provisio na lizati on , but ultimately leaves the tooth-restoratio n interface visible. La tely, p repara tio ns extended into the co ntac t area have become
popular-they hide the marg in and provid e a
posit ive seat for preci se insertion Y In lig ht of
these clinica l ad va nta ges and know ing the
negative influence of the intact bulk of preexisling interdental com posites on thermal stress
distribution [Fig 6-1 9 d J, avoidance of shortwra p veneer s is recommended . Practiti oners
and dental tec hnic ia ns, however, should know
that long-wra p veneers ar e d ifficult to fabri cate
and man ipulate, as a result of the extensio n of
cera mic, de lica te insertio n axis, a nd mar gin
definitio n. C linica lly, a typ ica l error in extending proxi mal prepara tio ns is use o f a deep
c ha mfer (Fig 6- 1ge, far right ). A mini-cha mfer
o r butt inc isa l covera g e is recommended instea d . A safe method for interdental and in-
c isal tooth preparation is to kee p the main axi s
of the bur (o r osc illating tip) o bliq ue o r ho rizontal (Fig 6-19f). W rong preparatio n desig n
often results from a sing le ve rtica l instrument
axis (6 -1 9 g) . M aximum w ra paro und is absolutely indi ca ted w hen maj or c ha nges of fo rm
o r closures of d iastema ta (or interd enta l triang les) are planned , provid ing that an ad equate
margin (marked interdental cha mfer) and ceramic thickness are ac hieved .
In other situati on s, a partia l w raparo und
(medium wrap) may be the best comprom ise
between stress di suibutio n, esthetics, and clinica l practicality w hen placing porcelain veneers
o n teeth restored w ith Cla ss 3 co mposi tes. In
this situation , preexisting restorations must be
carefull y exam ined for their qua lity and eve ntual ly be replaced .
Replacement of C lass 3 co mposites is possible w ithout a ffecting the facial a spect of a
preexisting BPR . A pa latal a ccess cavity must
be used and co mb ined wi th adequate bonding to the ceramic (see Fig 9-6) .25
FIGURE 6-19 (CONTINUED) : O PTIM IZATI ON O F WRAPAROUND DESIGN IN THE PR ES EN CE OF A PREEXISTING C LASS 3 COMPOSITE . White dashed arrows show the level of incisal prepara tion . Gray dashed arrows show
the level of interdental prepara tion. A bsence of interdental penetration (6- 1ge , for le ft) is not recommended due to
limited esthetics a nd negafive thermal eHects o f intact remainin g co mposite (see Fig 6-19d)26 Partia l w ra pping (61g e, left center) seems to oHer a favora ble co mpromise for both esthetics a nd thermal stresses. Total w rapping (61g e, right center) might be indica ted a nd is advantageo us w hen combined w ith a butt incisal margin . Extensive chamfering into the pa la tal co ncavity [6 -1g e, for right) must be avo ided due to functional stresses [see also Fig 6-13 , center)
and beca use it o ften genera tes on acute incisal edge (black arrowhead). Even thoug h facial axial preparati on ca n
be ac hieved w ith the bur ali gned pa rallel to the tooth long axis, adequate interdental and incisal cutting is ac hieved
w ith a horizontal stroke (6-1 9f) . W hen this technique is omilted and a only vertical axis is used, risks of chamfering
and overprepar ing the palatal surface are obvious [6-19g)
264
No wrapp ing
Partial w rapping
Tota l wrapping w ith "butt"
Total w rapping with chamfer
6 I T O OT H P REPA RATI O N , I M PRESS IO N, A N D PR O V ISIO NA LI ZAT IO N
Preparations for closure or reduction
of diastemata or interdental black
triangles
req uire meticulo us study o f the inser tio n ax is
of
the future lam ina te venee r. It is therefore recommend ed tha t d iag nostic prepara tio ns be carried o ut o n the initia l models.
Cas es in w hich d iastemata or interdenta l blo ck
tria ng les are to be close d req uire on extend ed
In the case of a red uced periodontium, a hor-
interp roxima l prepara tio n, w hich, in turn, al-
izonta l path of insertion is requ ired to preserve
the co ronal tooth structure despite a red uced
d ia meter of the tooth in the ce rvica l ar ea (Figs
6-20c to 6-20e).10
lows the ceramist to pro d uce a progressive
emerg ence of the interdental extensio n [Figs 6 2 0 0 a nd 6-20b). These very speci fic situations
FIGURE 6-2 0 : TOOTH PREPARATION FOR DIA STEMA CLO SURE . C losures of interdental triang les o r d iastemata are
ra re situations in w hich maximum pe netratio n of the proximal surface is req uired to a llow the de ntal technicia n to ge nerate interdenta l mini-w ings wi th a prog ressive pro file that co mpensates for the loss of soft tissue or abnormal tooth
positio n (6-20a) . Typical aspec t o f the co rrespond ing BPR; the mini-w ings, w hich form a prec ise line ang le (marked
in red), are made w ith a po rcelai n of a hig her chro ma to prevent the illusion of a bulky tooth (6-20 b). Teeth a re o ften
larger in the incisal area (6-20 c, I) co mpared to the ce rvica l area (C). Maximum proximal penetra tio n must be co mbined w ith a palatal butt margi n beca use it w ill allo w a horizonta l insertion pa th o f the veneer (6-2 0 c). The na tura l
di vergence of axia l wa lls ca n be ma intai ned , which logica lly leads to maxi mum preservatio n of enamel (6-2 0 d; addi tiona l views of this case ca n be found in Fig 4 -5). When maximum proxima l penetratio n is combined w ith a pa lata l
chamfer, it w ill o nly a llow a n ob liq ue insertion pa th of the veneer (6-20e) The natural div ergence of axial w a lls cannot be maintain ed , w hich logically leads to more invasive tooth prepara tion a nd increased risk of ax ial dentin exposure co mpared to 6-20c (Figure 6-2 0 b is repr inted from Belser et a l l o wi th permission .)
266
- - - - - - - c - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -- - - - -
Horizontal insertion path
Oblique insertio n path
Compa tible wit h divergence
Co nvergence re,quired
-
6 I
T O OT H PREPARAT ION, IMPRESSION, AND P ROVI SI O NALIZAT ION
of interdental triangl es
loss of pap illae) requir es the
Clos ure
(subseq uent to
same princip le
the
as discussed for di astemata . Fig ure 6 -21
shows a n additional requi rement for the subtle
complex case, closure of the space w as first visualized w ith the diagnostic mock-up and then
follo wed by a ppropriate tooth prepara tion .
Due to the o rig ina l prominence of these teeth,
clos ing o f a ny kind of interdentol space : to prod uce a g rad ua lly progressive emergence pro-
extensive dentin ex pos ures co uld no t be
a vo ided , w hich required the use of an immedi-
file, the g ing iva l marg in must be placed into the
ate dentin bo ndi ng technique , desc ribed on fol-
ging ival sulcus. Such an approach w as a pp lied in the case shown in Fi g 6 -22 . Fo r this
lowi ng pages .
FIGURE 6-21 : INTRASULCULAR MARGIN FOR OPTIMAL INTERDENTAL CLOSURE. Intrasulcular margin s (center)
not only a llow for op tima l interdental closure bul a lso for an improved emergence profil e co mpared 10 suprag ingiva l
margi ns (right) . The gingival fiber apparatus is not affected by such modification of the interdental design w hen a n intrasulcular margin is used,28 and long-term esthetic success ca n be established,
FIGURE 6-2 2 : COMBINED INDICATIONS FOR BPRs-CLOSURE OF INTERDENTAL TRIANGLE. Initial treatment of
this ca se included graft-type interventions (detailed in Fig 5-4) follo wed by fab rica tion of study ca sts (6-22a) . Porcelain veneers w ere proposed to the pat ient to compe nsate for tooth agi ng, cracking, chipping, a nd thinning of enamel,
as w ell as to reduce the interdenta l black triangle between the centra l incisors. Because of the o rig inal pro minence
of bo th incisors, it w as not possible to proceed to an add itive w ax up, a nd a very limited amo unt of w ax w as added
to the mode l to recreate adequate crown co nto urs (6-22 b). A simple acrylic mock-up was ac hieved (6 -22c to 6 -2 2 e)
to al low the pa tient to envisio n the trea tment o b jective. Comparative views before and after appli cation of the mockup w ere shown and exp lained to the patie nt (6-22f, 6 -22g), w ho immedia tely accepted the treatment proposal, It
w as decided to mai nta in the preexisting metal-ceramic crow n on the right latera l incisor, Tradit io na l tooth prepara tio n
procedures included the realization of dep th grooves (6-22 h) followed by facial axial red uction, w hich was care fully
con trolled using a notebook-type silicon index (6-22i , 6 -22 jl .
268
. ,'
..
6
I
T O OT H PR EPAR ATI O N , IMPRE SSI ON , AN D PRO VI SIONALIZAT I ON
IM ME DIATE DENTIN BO NDI N G
Despite a ma jor effo rt to confine the preparation to the e na mel shell, pecu liar situa tio ns
such as initial ly prom inent o r ma lal ign ed teeth
[Fig 6-22 ) may still involve dee per pre paratio ns reaching dentin. W henever a substa ntia l
a mo unt of dentin has been exposed by the
preparati o n, loca l applicati o n of a dentin
bo ndi ng ag ent (DBA ) is reco mmended. C linica lly, two method s may be a ppl ied to pro mote
de ntin ad hesio n w hen ploci nq indi rec t bonded
restorati ons. The first a nd co nventio na l approa ch consis ts of delay ing ap plicat ion of the
DBA (eg , acid etching fol lowed by the app lication of the primer liquid a nd the bonding
resin) until the la st treatment stage, w he n proc eed ing to luting the veneer. To avo id incomplete sea ting of the restorati on , it is usua lly reco mmended that the adhesive resin be kep t
uncured w hen p lac ing the veneer. It is assumed that the pressure of the luting co mpo site
durinq sea ting of the vene er may c rea te a col -
la pse of deminerali zed den tin (col lag en fibers)
and subseq uently a ffect the adhesive interface
co hesive ness 2 4 ,29,3o More recen tly, an o rigi na l
approa c h w as proposed to o p timize DBA a polica tio n . 24.3 1-33
I
Beca use the DBA appears to have a superior
po tentia l for adhesion wh en applied to freshly
prepared denti n, its app lica tio n is recommended immed iately after the co mpletion of
tooth prepara tio n, before the final impressio n.
A cli nica l ad vantage is that this precautio nary
measure seals and protects the pulp-dentin
o rga n and, by the sa me token, prevents sensitivity and bacterial leakage duri ng the prov isional pha se. The use of a filled adhesive resin
[eg , Optibo nd FL, Kerr) mig ht facilitate this procedure , w hic h w ill be expla ined in C ha pter 8
(see Figs 8-1 1 a nd 8-12 ).
FIGURE 6-22 (CONTINUED) : IMMEDIATE DENTIN BONDING PRECED ING FINAL IM PRESSIO N S. Because of the
proximity of the preexisting metal-ceramic crow n, safe finishing of tooth prepar a tio ns ca n o nly be ac hieved w ith oscil lating di a mo nd tips, w hich a re a lso useful to generate smooth a nd low-trauma intrasulcular marg ins (6-2 2k). Extended den tin exposures result from the nonadd itive w axup; immedi ate de ntin bo nd ing must be carried o ut, starting
w ith etching o f the sclerotic ce rvical de ntin (35% phosphoric ac id), w hich req uires an extended etching time of 30
seconds (6-2 21 ). The remaining dentin is etched for only 15 seco nds [6-2 2 m) After rinsing a nd evacua tio n of excess
water, a hyd ro philic monomer (primer) is a pplied with a gentle brushing motion [6 -2 2n) followed by suctio n of the excess solvent (6 -2 20; note the resin-saturated dentin with g lossy appeara nce). Fin ally, a thin coat of filled ad hesive resin
(O ptibo nd FL) is applied and cured . Use of a periodo ntal probe a llows accurate and ca reful placement 16-2 2p). Excess ad hesive resin must be removed from the dentin a nd ena mel margin s w ith fine-grai n diamond burs (cervica lly) o r
oscillating tips linterdenta lly) a t low speed 16 -2 2q ; see 6 -22 z). To avo id interaction w ith the impression ma terial, the
surface of the c d hesive layer must be devo id of the oxyg en inhibition layer; add itional curing af ter covering the adhesive w ith g lycerin jelly is recommended . N ew def lectio n cord s have been placed fo r the fina l impressio n; note the
intrasulcular margin at the mesial aspect of bo th centra l inciso rs (6-2 2 r)
270
,\ , '
v, "
'\,'
6
I
T O O T H PR EPARA TION , I M PRESSI O N, A ND PROV ISIO NA L IZAT IO N
Addi tio nal curing of the DBA through a layer
of glyce rin jelly is recommended to remove
the oxyge n inhibiti on layer and prevent interac tio n of the dentin adh esive wi th the impression materia l (especiall y polyethers ).
W hen gingival margin s are in dent in, a marked
chamfer is recommended to provide adeq uate
marg in definition a nd enough spac e for the
ad hesive and overly ing restorati on (Fig 6-
2 2 z ). Magn ifica tio n gla sses help to accurately
place the ad hesive an d remove exce ss resin
from the marg in .
Furth er ad hesio n of the luting agen t to the preexisting ad hesive layer must be promoted by
surface roug hening with a bur or microsandblasting plus dry ing wi th alcoh ol just before luting [see Figs 8-6b and 8- 12b).24
FIGURE 6-22 (CONTIN UED). The intrasulcular margin s al lowed the use of interdental mini-wi ngs to close the interdenta l black triangle 16-2 2s, 6 -22 t) . Ceramic o f a hig her chroma wa s used in the interdental and cervica l area (622u, 6-22v) Simulation of the root por tion is a lso possible wi th porce lain venee rs and was essential to the esthetic
outcome of this case (6-22 w) . The befo re/ after views emphasize the esthetic a nd functional rejuvena tion of the smile
thro ugh restora tio n of the enamellike shell, w hich enhance s color, crow n shope, and length (6 -22 x, 6 -22y).
272
DE N TI N
MARG IN
FIGURE 6-22 (CONTINUED): CONDITIONING OF DENTIN MARGINS. Schem¢tiC cross-sectional views of g ing ival dentin marg ins (D) wi thd~ flecti o n cord in place (ye l lo~A/ ). IE) Residual ena mel. Immedi ate d entin bondi ng is not
possible in the presence of a traditional light chamfer (6-22 z, left center) beca use the adhesive .Iayer (Adh) tends to
pull over the marg in, creating a feather-edg e finish line and insu fficient. marg in definition. Immedi ate dentin bonding
ca n be easily carried out in the presence of a marked chamfer (6-22z, right centerlbecause ap plication of the ad hesive ca n be confined to the prepared surface and leaves sufficient space for the restora tion. For optimal margin definitian, the resin can be removed about 0.5 mm from the dentin perimeter w ith fine-groin d iamonds (6-2 2z, for right;
see 6-22q) . In this lost case, the dentin bondi ng age nt must be rea pplied to the prepa ration margi n w ithout preliminary curing [ust before the final placement of the restoralion.
6
I
T OOTH PRE PARATION, IMPRES SI ON , AND PR OVI SIONALIZ ATION
DEFINITIVE IMPRES SION S
Becau se o f the accessib le margins [usua lly fa-
Accura te re productio n of the surround ing sof t tis-
vora ble for BPRs), final impressio ns do not p re-
sues in the final imp ressio ns is impera tive, a s it
sent a maj or c ha lleng e . Preci se to o th p repara-
w ill help the ce ra mist to optimize tooth sha pe
tio ns and
g ing iva l
a nd contours. A s is the case w hen placi ng
tissues, in co mb ina tion w ith a "o ne-ste p, double-mix" impre ssion techni que 34-36 (Fig 6 -2 3 1,
finish lines, a low -traum a ging ival deflection
method is essentia I.36.38 The use of deflection
w ill p rovid e appropriate re production o f the
co rds ldevo id of ad rena lin impreg na tio n) in-
p reparatio ns a nd surro unding tissues.
duc es the least cl inica l damag e to the per i-
adeq ua tely cond itio ned
odo nta l tissues compared to other
rnelhods."
A d d itio n silico ne material s (polyvi ny l siloxo nes]
The p reexisting cord (used d uring tooth prepa-
are reco mmend ed due to thei r bro ad ly recog-
ratio n) is removed and repla ced w ith a new
nized ela stici ty and resista nce to teari ng ; they
an d d efi nitive pa c king (Fi g s 6 -2 3 b to 6 -2 3 h). A
a lso p rovide a ccuracy for multiple po urs, w hic h
syste ma tic approa c h using two co rds is recomrnendec ."?
will be essentia l in the fabr icati on of a d eq ua te
master ca sts (see Fig s 7 -3 to 7 -6 ].9,3537
,
:; -2 ~::J
r
.
FIGURE 6-23: CONDITIONING OF THE GINGIVA FOR THE ONE-STEP, DOUBLE-MIX IMPRESSION TECHNIQUE .
C linica l view lo llowin q de finitive tooth prepa rations: crevicular fluid co nta mina tes the prep arati on margi ns (6-230 , arrowheads). High-qua lity impressio ns are possib le w hen a co mpressio n co rd [here, surgica l suture 2-0) is placed to
seal the bottom of the sulcus. Individ ual co mpression cords a re placed , one per tooth from the mesial to the distal aspect (6-2 3b to 6-2 3e). The second co rd is placed over the co mpressio n co rd ; it is larger but a lso more superficia l
(here, G ingibra id Oa , Va n R). Use o f two instruments (bimanua l techniq ue w ith a periodonta l probe and a spa tula) facil itates the insertion w ith low forces (6-23f) . The packing must rema in in place a nd be a llow ed to absorb moi sture
fo r a bout 5 minutes to generale some expa nsion of the superficial cord (6-23 g) Excess mo isture is eliminated jusl prio r
to ta king the impression. The deflection co rd can be placed co ntinuously on several teelh (6-2 3 h).
274
:. .' .
. C OM P R ES S I ON .. C .O R·· D S
.
.. ,.
'
.. '
,
-,
",
"'
:L
o
,
,,"
,
\
',
N '· C .O R.' D
.
,
',.'
'
\
.',
\
\;
'
6
I
TO OTH PREPAR ATION, I MPRESSI O N, A N D P ROVI SIONALIZ ATION
Gingival deflection
One-step, double-mix impression
A co mpression co rd of sma ll di a meter [surg ica l
suture 2-0 or Ging ibrai d Oa, Va nR) is first
plac ed in the bottom of the sulcus. This cord
w ill remain in plac e dur ing impression ta king,
thus "sea ling" the sulcus a nd limiting the flow o f
In the o ne-step , double-mix imp ression tech­
nique , the defl ectio n co rd is removed , immedi­
crevic ular fluid .
A more supe rfici a l deflec tio n co rd (G ing ib ra id
Oa or 1a, Va nR) is then inserted in the entra nce
of the sulcus w ith the bi man ual tech nique (Fig 6­
23 f). A sing le co rd ca n be used for multiple
prepara tio ns (Fig 6-2 3 h). When immedi ate
denl in bo nd ing has been app lied , the inhib i­
tion layer must be removed from the surface of
the adh esive layer to avo id interaction wi th the
imp ressio n ma teria l; gentle rub b ing w ith
pumice o r add itio na l lig ht curing after co vering
the adh esive w ith glycerin jelly (air blocking)
mig ht be requ ired .
ately follow ed by in jection o f a light-body im­
pressio n ma teria l into the sulcus a nd insertio n of
the tray loaded w ith a more visco us materia l
(Figs 6 -23 i to 6 -23 q ). Due to the visco elastic
behav io r of gin gi va l tissues, they rema in de­
flected a fter removal o f the co rd (Fig 6 -23 rL
w hich al lows pe netration of the ligh t-bod y im­
pression material into the sulcus, slightly be­
yo nd the prepara tio n margin s (Fig s 6 -23s to 6 ­
2 3 u). Either comme rcial o r ind ividua l trays can
be ada pted to the tech nique. Indi vidual trays,
how ever, offer more accurate intrao ral posi­
tionin g , require less heavy-bo dy material , and
fac ilitate fabricat ion of the master cast in the
la bo ra to ry.
G ing iva l defl ection must be car ried o ut at
least 5 to 10 minutes prio r to impression ta k­
ing to a llow the de flection cord to expa nd by
w a ter sorptio n.
FIGURE 6-23 (CONTINUED) : ONE-STEP, DOUBLE-MIX IMPRESSION TECHNIQUE. Schema tic view of the clinica l
situa tio n w ith do uble co rd pa cking [6 -2 3 i). During impress io n taking , seq uences 1, 2 , and 3 (Fig 6 -2 3i l are carried
o ut rapidly. The def lectio n co rd is removed , and a fluid impression material (blue) is immed iately injected into the sul­
cus. The entire prepara tio n is covered w ith the lig ht-body ma teria l a nd d irectly fo llowed by the insertion of the tray,
w hic h has been loaded w ith a more viscous material (purple). The co rrespond ing "dy na mic" clinical seq uence is de­
scribed in Figs 6 -2 3 k to 6-2 3q . The sa me operato r ca n simulta neously remove the deflectio n co rd and inject the light­
body materia l (6-2 3 k to 6-2 3 n). Insertion of the tray is precede d by gentle a ir blow inq of the low-viscosity materia l
(6 -23 0) . The entire proce d ure is carried o ut w ith lip retractors in plac e (6 -2 3 p , 6 -23 q ). The purpose of this technique
a nd the viscoelasticity of the soft tissu es are illustrated by the clinica l view iust fo llowin g retrieva l o f the tray : the g in­
g iva is still w ell deflected and the co mpression co rd maintai ns a dry sulcus (6-2 3 r) . The impression demo nstrates ac­
curale reproduction o f prepa rations, ma rg ins, a nd a bsence of blood (6 -23s, 6 -2 3 t). M agn ified view of the impres­
sio n cross sectio n aro und the left central inciso r (6 -2 3 u) Provisional restorations o f this case ca n be seen in Fig 6 -28 .
(Pa tient treated in co lla bo ration w ith Dr N . Pera kis, University o f G eneva )
276
",',
"
\,
6
I T O OT H
PREPA RAT IO N, IM PRESSI O N , AND PR OVISION ALI ZATI ON
DIRECT PROVISIONALS AND PROVISIONAL BONDING
Fabrication techniques
Provisional venee rs ca n be fabri cat ed in the
sa me w ay as the di agnostic mock-up, ie, using
a rigid silico ne matrix loaded with self-curing
acrylic resin and a pplied to the prep aratio ns
until curing is co mplete.
Use of co mposi te material s or stiff resins is not
recommended beca use they are too brittle.
Sta ndard self-curing acrylics , w ith their elas­
tic ity and favora ble ha nd ling pro perties, are
optimal materials to be used as provisional s.
There are variou s ways to make provisiona l ve­
neers that involve different fabri cation times
a nd esthetic outcomes . The more sophisticated
methods require the co mbined use of dentinlike
a nd ena mellike acr ylic resins (Fig 6 -24) . The
Widely recogni zed Vita shade gUide ca n be
used to seled the righ t dentin core materia l (eg ,
N ew Outline, dentin, Anaxd ent). Enamellike
acrylics must not have specifi c shade s; glassy
tran spar ent (eg, New Outline, Tra nspa Clear )
and milky translucent resins (eg, N ew O utline,
Med ium Va lue) can be co mbine d to ac hieve dif­
ferent incisal effeds. Whatever technique is
used, it always star ts with abund ant a pplicatio n
of Vaseline onto the prepara tions, neig hbo ring
teeth, and g ing iva . Three a pplica lion modes of
the resin w ill be exp lained: o ne step , single mix
(o ne sing le resin); o ne step, double mix (tra ns­
par ent + dentin) ; two steps, do uble mix (dentin
corel cut back + translucent).
FIGURE 6-24: BASIC ACRYLIC MATERIALS REQUIRED FOR ESTHETIC PROVISIONAL RESTORATIONS . Highly es­
thetic provisio na l restorations can be achieved using den tinlike core material (left) and incisa l resins (center, right) (New
O utline). Various aspecls of the inci sal edge are obtain ed by mixing different rati os of transpar ent a nd translucent in­
cisal materials: 50% :50% for an average tooth, 70%: 30 % for a young tra nsparent incisal edge. The dentinlike resin
co re features standardi zed colo rs based on the Vita shade guide.
FIGURE 6-25: MULTIPLE PROVISIONAL VENEERS FABRICATED WITH A ONE-STEP, DOUBLE-MIX TECHNIQUE .
C linica l view immed iately folloWing preparation a nd final impression of the fo ur moxillcr y inciso rs [6-25a) A very
light layer of self-curing translucen t/tra nsparent mixture is a pplied to the silicon index (6-25b) . The uncured resin is
then cove red with dentinlike material (6-25 c). and the ind ex is immediately press ed over the preparatio ns; the ope r­
atory field is then coo led by rinsing. Because thin veneers ca n be def ormed by premature elimina tio n of the silico n
ind ex, the index is removed o nly a fter curing is co mplete (6-25d ). The splinted restoration s a re easi ly unlocked w ith
a sca ler inserted at the proximo ] surface. Final view of the provisio nal a fter g ross excess removal a nd g laZing (6-25e,
6-25f).
280
Core resin
Transparent
Tra nsluce nt
(Vita shades)
(glassy)
(milky)
ONE
S T E P
f
DO U BLE
M ,I' X,
6
I
T O OT H P REPAR ATION , I MP RESSIO N , AND PROV ISIONA L IZAT ION
One step, single mix. This is the trad itiona l and
One step, double mix (Fi g 6 -25 ). A sma ll
shortest method . A sing le amo unt of co re acrylic
am oun t o f a tro nsluce nt/ fro r- spcre n' mixture is
resin is mixed , loaded to the silico n index, and
pressed ove r the teeth. The powder co ntent can
co nsist o f 10 0 % d entinlike resin (for d iscolored
first po ured into the inci sal edge of the silicon
index. It is immedi ately completed with a sec­
ond mixture o f dentinlike materia l a nd pressed
teeth] o r includ e 10 % o f tran sparent resin for a
over the teeth . This o ne-step method is simple
a nd not time-co nsuming a nd ca n crea te provi­
more natura l o utcome. This method a lw ays re­
sults in a resto ration w ith uniform shade and
opacity. How ever, minor touch-ups such as ad­
d itional stai ning a nd glazing ca n produ ce a fa­
vo ra ble esthetic o utco me (see Fig 6 -28 ).
siona ls w ith a tra nslucency that g rad ua lly in­
c reases toward the inc isal edge .
FIGURE 6-25 (CONTINUED): SPOT-ETCH PROVISIONAL BOI'IDING. Each abutment loo th is subjected to ena mel
spo t etching [6 -2 5 g ), then rinsed a nd d ried . The prepara tio ns are then coa ted w ith photopo lymerizing unfilled resin
(6-25 hl, w hich is cured on ly a fter the sea ting o f the provisio nal (6 -2 5 il. The final situa tion shows exce llent primary sta­
bility due to com bined splinting a nd bo nd ing (6-25 jl. These provisio na ls reprod uce the add itive w axup w ith high fi­
delity; tooth shop e and incisa l co ntours co nform much better to the so il tissues a nd lip line (6-25kl than at the beg in­
ning of treatment (inset) Final views a nd other aspects of this case are found in Fig s 5-12 a nd Fig 7-10 .
282
6 I
T O OTH P REPARATION, IMPRESSION, AND PROVIS ION ALI ZAT ION
Two steps, double mix (Figs 6-26 and 6-27).
A uniform mixture of de ntin is app lied to the sil­
icon ind ex, wh ic h is pressed over the prepa­
ratio ns until curing is compl ete . The inc isal
edge is then cut back to reprod uce the natural
morph ology of den tin. Photopo lymerizing co l­
ora nts ca n be applied to the d entin co re to
simulate incisa l c harac teristics (cra ze lines,
w hite spo ts, etc). The silicon ind ex is then
load ed aga in, this time w ith a translucent/
tra nsparent mixture, a nd p ressed over the char­
ac terized dentin co re. This techni que co rre­
spo nds to the intra oral applica tio n of a la bo­
ratory sa ndwich techniq ue4 1.42 a nd ca n result
in highly soph istica ted p rovisio na ls.
Glazing
Due to their extreme frag ility, p rovisio na l ve­
neers should not be mechan ica lly pol ished . A
light-curing g lazi ng resin ca n be used instead
[Skin Gla ze, Ana xde nt) . For multip le co n­
nected restoratio ns, the g lazing resin ca n be
mixed wi th brow n co lorants to infiltrate the
co nnectio n areas (proximal and inc isal embra ­
sures; Figs 6 -26m a nd 6 -26 nl, opticall y sepa­
ra ting the co nnected restorat ions a nd enhanc­
ing the esthetic outcome .
Most g lazi ng resins have a darkening effect
that must be a nticipa ted at the time of shad e
selectio n. For insta nce, a dentin shade A 2
w ill bec ome A3 after g laz ing .
FIGURE 6 -26 : PROVISIONAL VENEERS M ADE WITH A SANDWICH TECHN IQUE . Tooth preparations, neighb or­
ing teeth, a nd soft tissues have been iso lated w ith Vaseline (6 -26 a). The silico n ind ex is first load ed w ith d entin resin
based o n Vita shade-g uide selectio n (6-26b, 6-26c ) a nd pressed over the prepa rations until curing is co mplete (6 ­
26d) . A reas that w ill be cut back are marked w ith a penc il (6-26e). A d ia mond bur is used at low speed (w ithout
w ater spray ) to sha pe the incisal edge into a n a natomic dentin co re (6 -26 f). Incisal embrasures ca n be acc urately
co nto ured w ith a brasive d isks (6-26 g ) and a sca lpel. W hite spots a nd craze lines ca n be pa inted o nto this dentin
co re using photopolymerizing stains [not show n). A fter the surface of the cut-back resin is w et w ith liqui d monomer,
the silico n index is loaded w ith a tra nsparent/tra nslucent mixture (6-26h, 6-26i ) a nd pressed over the preexisting
de ntin co re until curing is co mplete (6-26il Both veneers a re kept co nnected 10 enhance primary stabi lity. A fter g ross
excess remova l, the connection area can be sculpted w ith a sca lpel to create a thin sulcus (6-26 k). The restora tion is
finally retrieved for finishing (6 -26 11
284
- - - - - - - - , . , - - - - - - , , - - - - - - - , . , - - - - - - - --
-
TWO
-
-
-
-
- -------- -------,.,-----,.,-----,.,-----,.,--­-
S T E PS,
-
-
-
DOUBL 'E
M IX
' Tra nslucent ,.
.
\'"
STAINING
GLAZING
FIGURE 6-26"(CONTINUED): FINISHING. A mixture of g laZing resin and brown stains is used to slightly infiltrate the
'connectio n sulcus (6-26m, 6-26n j. After po lymerization, the outer surface is coated wi th .pure glazing resin (Skin
Glaze) and cured (6-26 0 to 6-26q). A last curing must be car ried out throug h a layer of glycerin jelly (6-26r) to pre­
vent formation of an inhibit ion layer and ensure perfect curing of the glazed surface. Final integ ratio n of the provi­
siona l veneers is shown in 6-26s to 6-26v. Note how the brown interdental colorants mask the connect ion area and
provide the illusion of ind ivid ua l teeth (6-26t). The sandwich acrylic prov isionals integrate well w ith the gingiva and
lips (6-26u, 6~26vL w hich wi ll ensure a co mfortable tra nsitio n for the pa tient.
FIGURE 6-27: INCISAL CHARACTERISTICS OF SANDWICH PROVISIONALS. The veneers on the central incisors
have been fabricated in a two-step, double-mix sandwich techniq ue. Interarch relationships allowed the prov isional
to be extended above the pala tal prepara tion rnorqi n' (arrowhead), which enha nced the primary stability and locking
of the restorations (6-27 0 , provisional sectioned to show pa latal margins) . Distinct effects have been obtained (6-27 b,
627c) as a result of the con trast of opacity be tween the dentin and incisal shades (see Fig 2-8) but a lso because of
the marked ana tomy of the underlying simulated de ntin core that shows several individual lobes. No photopolymer­
izing stains were used in this case.
.
6
I T OOT H PREP A RATI ON,
I M PRESSIO N, A ND PRO VISION ALIZ ATION
Provisional bonding and locking
After spo t etching of the ena mel, the prov isio na l
luting is car ried out w ith unfilled adhes ive resin
tha t is light cured throug h the restorations (see
Figs 6-25g to 6 -25i ).
Spot-etch bonding, how ever, must be avoi ded
when extensive dent in exposures have al­
ready been coa ted with a den tin bonding
agent, due to the possib le interac tions be­
Additiona l stab ility and definitive locking can
be obtained by adding excess liqu id resin to
the pa lata l surfaces (see Fig 6 -2 7 a ) and pa latal
emb rasures. Splinting multiple restora tions can
significantly enhance the primary stability of the
provisiona l restorat io n.
Optimal stability and locking can be obtained
w hen the provisi o na l is left in the mouth during
a ll sta g es of fabri cati o n (no retrieva l) and
fini shing.
twee n the den tin bondi ng agen t and the pro­
visio na l bond ing resin. In these cases, the
resto rat io n can be secured first w ith clear
provisio na l ceme nt [TempBond Clear, Kerr)
(Fig 6 -28 ).
6·28b
FIGURE 6-28 : PROVISIONAL BONDING WITH CLEAR LIGHT-CURING CEMENT. TempBond C lear is a two-co m­
po nent, slig htly tooth-colo red, tra nslucent cement (6-28a , 6 -2 8 b] It is self-cure cap a ble but can al so be light-cured,
w hich should improve hardness and retention. Clini cal view of provi siona l veneers just before elimination of excess
cement (6 -28 c). This provisio nal was fab rica ted w ith a one-step , single -m ix technique a nd characteri zed by sta ining
the embrasures and g laZing (see Figs 6 -261to 6 -26 r). The tra nslucent provisio nal cement ca n ensure a favorable es­
thetic o utco me despite the minimal thickness and relative tra nslucency of the provisional veneers (6-2 8d , 6 -2 8e). Too th
prepar ations and final impressio n of this case ca n be found in Fig 6 -23 .
288
6
I
TO OTH PREP ARATION , IMPRE SSION, AN D PR OVI SION ALI ZATION
17 Wa lls AW . The use of c d hesivelv retained all-porcelain ve­
References
1. Magne P, Kwon KR, Belser U, Hodges JS, Douglas W H
C rack prope nsity of porcela in lamina te veneers: A simu­
lated o pera tory evaluation. J Prosthet Dent 1999;8 1:
327-334.
2. M ag ne P, Doug las W H. Add itive contour o f porcelain ve­
neers: A key element in enamel preservation, ad hesion
and esthetic for the ag ing dentition. J Ad hesive Dent
1999; 1:81-91 .
3. Mag ne P, Perroud R, Hodges JS, Belser UC Cl inica l per­
forma nce of novel-design porcelai n veneers for the recov­
ery o f co ronal volume a nd length . Inl J Periodon tics Resto r­
ative Dent 2000;20:441 -457.
4 . M agne P. Mega brasion: A conservative strategy for the
a nterior de ntition. Pract Period ontics Aesthet Dent
199 7;
9: 389-395 .
5. Barghi N , Berry TG. Post-bonding crack formation in po r­
cela in veneers. J Esthet Dent
1997;9 :51-54 .
6. Magne P, Versluis A, Douglas W H . Effect of luting com­
posite shrinkage and thermal loads on the stress di stribu­
tion in parcela in lamina te veneers. J Prosthet Dent 1999 ;
81 :335-344.
7. Lacy AM, W oda C , Du W , W a ta na be L In vitro mi­
croleakage at the g ingival margin of po rcelain and resin
veneers. J Prosthet Dent 1992; 67 :7-10.
neers during the management of fractured and worn ante­
rior teeth: Part 1. C linica l technique Br Dent J 1995 ; 17 8:
333 - 336 .
18 W a lls AVV. The use of odhesivelv retained all-po rcelain ve­
neers during the manage ment o f fractured and wo rn ante­
rio r teeth Part 2 C linica l results after 5 years of follow-up
Br DentJ 1995;178 :337-340
19. Mag ne P, Versluis A, Douglas WH. Rationa lization o f in­
cisor sha pe: Experimental-numerical a nalysis. J Prosthet
Dent 1999 ;81 :34 5-355 .
20. Garber DA Porcela in laminate veneers: Ten years later.
Part I Tooth prepara tion. J Esthet Dent 1993 ;5:57-61 .
2 1. EI-Sherif M , Jaco b R. The cera mic reverse three-quarter
crown for a nterior teeth: Preparat ion desiq n. J Prosthet
Dent 1989 ;61 :4-6 .
22 . M unechika T, Suzuki K, Nishiya ma M , O hashi M , Horie
K. A com parison o f the tensile bond streng ths o f co mpos­
ite resins to longi tudinal and transverse sectio ns o f ena mel
prisms in human teeth. J Dent Res 19 84 ;6 3: 10 79-1 0 82.
23. Mag ne P, Douglas W H . Optimiza tion of resilience and
stress d istribution in porc ela in veneers for the treatment o f
crown fractured incisors. Int J Period ontics Restorative Dent
1999; 19 :54 3-553 .
24 . Magne P, Doug las W H Porcelain veneers: Dentin bond­
ing optimiza tion and biomimetic recovery
J Prosthodont 1999;12 111- 12 1
of the crown. Int
8. Stein RS, Kuwa ta M. A de ntist a nd a de ntal technologi st
25. M ag ne P, Doug las W H. Cumulative effects of successive
analyze current cera mo-meta l procedu res. Dent C lin North
Am 1977;21 :72 9- 749 .
restorative procedures on a nterior crow n flexure: Intact ver­
sus veneered incisors. Quint essence Int 2000;3 1:5- 18.
9 . M agne P, M og ne M , Belser UC The esthetic w id th in
fixed prosthodon tics J Prosthodont 1999;8:106- 118.
10. Belser UC, Magne P, Mag ne M . Ceramic laminate ve­
neers: Co ntinuous evolution o f indications. J Esthet Dent
1997 ;9 :197- 207 .
1 1. Highton R, Ca puto AA , Matyas J. A photoelastic study of
stress o n porceloin laminate prepa rotions. J Prosthet Dent
1987;58: 157-161.
12. M og ne P, Douglas W H. Design optimiza tion a nd evolu­
tion o f bonded ceramics for the an terior dentition : A finite­
element anal ysis. Quint essence Int 1999 ;30661-672.
13. Ca stelnuovo J, Tjan AH, Phillips K, Nicholls JI, Kois JC
Fracture load and mode of fail ure of ceramic veneers wi th
different preparations J Prosthet Dent 2000;83:171-1 80
14. M ag ne P, M agne M, Belser U. N atura l a nd restorative
ora l esthetics. Part \I: EsthetiC treatment moda lities. J Esthet
Dent 1993; 5 :239-246 .
15 . Andreasen FM, Daugaardj ensen J, M unksgaard EC Re­
inforcement o f bo nded crow n froctured incisors w ith po r­
celain veneers. Endod Dent Traumatol 1991 ;7:78- 83.
16. A ndreasen FM , Flugge E, Daugaar djensen J, M unks­
ga ard EC Treatment o f crow n fractured incisors w ith lam­
inate veneer restorations: An experi mental study. Endod
Dent Traumatol 1992;8:30-35 .
290
26 . M ag ne P, Douglas W H Interdentol design of porce lain
veneers in the presence of co mposite fillings: Finite ele­
ment anal ysis of co mposite shrinkage and thermal stress.
Int J Prosthodon t 2000;13: 117-124.
27. RouseJS. Full veneer versus trad itional veneer preparation :
A d iscussion of interproxima l extensio n. J Prosthet Dent
1997;78 :545-549 .
28 . Kop p FR. Esthetic princi ples for full crown restoratio ns. Part
II: Provisionalizati on . J Esthet Dent 1993;5 25 8-264 .
29 . Dietschi D, M ag ne P, Holz j. Bonded to tooth ceramic
restorations: In vitro evaluation of the efficiency and fa ilure
mode of !wo modern adh esives. Rev Mens Suisse O do n­
toslomatol 1995 ;105:299-305 .
30 . Dietschi D, Herzfeld D. In-vitro evaluation o f marginal and
internal ada pta tion of class II resin co mposite restorations
oher thermal a nd occlusal stressinq , Eur J O ral Sci 199 8;
106 :1033-1042.
31 . Berlschinger C , Paul Sj, LUlhy H, Scharer P Dual ap plica­
tion o f dentin bondi ng agents: Its effect on the bo nd
streng th. Am J Dent 1996 ;9 :115-11 9 .
32 . Paul SJ, Scha rer P. The dual bond ing technique A modi­
fied method to improve od hesive luting procedures. Inl J
Periodo nlics Restorative Dent 1997;17:5 36- 545.
3 3 . Pa ul Sj. Adhesive Luting Procedures. Berlin: Qu intessence,
1997: 89- 9 8.
TOOTH PREPARATION, IMPRESSION, AND PROVISIONALIZATION
34. Johnson GH, Craig RG. Accuracy of addition silicones as
a function of technique. J Prosthet Dent 1986;55:
197-203.
35 Tian AH, Whang SB, Tian AH, Sarkissian R. Clinically ori­
I
6
39 Azzi R, Tsao TF, Carranza FA, Kenney EB. Comparative
study of gingival retraction methods. J Prosthet Dent 1983;
50:561-565.
40. Nemetz H, Donovan T, Landesman H. Exposing the gin­
ented evaluation of the accuracy of commonly used im­
pression materials J Prosthel Denl 1986;56:4-8
gival margin: A systematic approach for the cantral of
hemorrhage. J Prosthet Dent 1984;51647-651.
36. Magne P, Magne M, Belser U. Impressio ns and esthetic
41 Magne P, Magne M, Belser U. The diagnostic template:
rehabilitation: The preparatory work, clinical procedures
and materials Schweiz Monatsschr Za hnmed 1995;
A key element to the comprehensive esthetic treatment con­
cept. Int J Periodontics Restorative Dent 1996; 16:
105.1302-1316.
37 Tuit CM, Rosen M, Cohen J. Becker PJ Effect of impres­
560-569.
42 Magne M, Magne P Schlusselelemente eines um fas­
sion technique and multiple pours on accuracy af stone
models. J Dent Assoc South Afr 1991 ;46 5 15-5 18.
senden asthetischen Behandlungskonzeptes
Dent Labor
1999;47:545-555
38 l.oe HL, SilnessJS Tissue reactions to string packs used in
fixed restorations J Prosthet Dent 1963; 13:318-323
291
"',
'. v ,
CHAPTER
7
LABORATORY PROCEDURES
A plethora of method s have been proposed fo r fab rica ting bonded porce­
la in restorat ions. This cha pter add resses fabricati on of the ma ster casts, a s
well as the cor respo nd ing choice
of restorati ve
materia ls a nd techni q ue .
During this final treatment pha se , effo rt essentially focuses o n the rep ro­
d uction of a de sig n tha t has been a lready tested a nd approved by the pa­
tient du ring the di a gnostic pha se . Patient, clin ician , and ceramist w ill in­
tera ct for a last clin ica l trial o f the de finitive restorations befo re procee d ing
to the final luting proced ure, w hich ellen completes this clin ica l sessio n.
7 1 L AB ORATO RY PRO CEDUR ES
CH OICE OF RESTORATIVE MATERIAL AND TECHNIQUE
Composite versus ceramic
Ceramics: Which one?
A numbe r of systems using so-ca lled revolutio n­
The d iscuss io n a bove is ba sed on the use
ary com po site technolo gies have been mar­
di tiona l feldspathi c
keted in a n a ttempt to red uce la borato ry ex­
penses. However, the use of cera mics, instead
toughe r but a lso more so phistica ted ce ram ics,
such as In-Cera m Spine l! [Vita ]' Procera [N o bel
o f compos ite resins, has proved its efficiency in
the way patients ca n pe rce ive a nterior restora­
Biocare), or Em press (Ivoclarl, is questionable.
In a cl inica l trial about lo ng-spa n incisa l edg e
tions, as demonstrated in a clini cal study by
M eijering et ol. ' C eramic is a lso the most bio­
reconstruction using feldspathi c BPRs,8 the w o rst
failur e was an ac cidental chi ppin g that oc­
mimetic materia l w hen it comes to replacemen t
o f signi fican t a mo unts of tooth substance, pro b­
curred during a traumati c bite after 1 yea r o f
clini cal service . The veneer w as poli shed a nd
a bly because of its abi lity to simulate and re­
store cro wn rig id ity.v Due to their high thermal
no further complications occurred (the veneer
has been in cli nical service more than 9 years ).
expa nsio n a nd elasticity, co mpo site veneers are
In the same study, 12% of teeth dis played crack­
not able to achieve this goal 4 a nd seem to yield
unfavorabl e esthetic s, unstab le marg ina l in­
tegri ty, a nd decreased survival rate .5 - 7 O n the
ing , w hich could justify the use
o ther hand , even tradit ional po rcela ins such as
bas ic feldspa thic materia ls are able to co mpen­
sate for structura l tooth w ea kness. W hen used in
the fo rm of bo nded veneers, they can contribute
to the recovery of crow n bio mecha nics, even fo r
nonvital inc lsors. :'
of tra­
porce la in . The use o f
of
toug her ce­
ramics. The possible o rig ins of these po stbon d­
ing cracks , how ever, can be identified (eg,
error in tooth prepara tio n, as in Fig 7 - 1, o r in­
sufficient cleanin g of the inner po rcela in surface
after hyd rofluo ric acid etch ing , as explain ed in
Fig 8-3d ) and mig ht not be related to the inher­
ent toug hness of the materi a l. In a ny case , it
must be de termined to w ha t extent cracking
should be considered a fa ilure (Fig 7-1 ).
C racking is a n unavoida ble phenome non in
the agi ng o f brittle layered material s. In
enamel, crack ing is a natural protective pro­
cess ag ain st tensile stresses.9 •10 Most intact
teeth d isplay numero us enam el cracks.
FIGURE 7-1: THREE-YEAR FOLLOW-UP OF PALATALLY CRACKED VENEER. Baseline facial view of po rcelain ve­
neers (7- 1o }. Pa la tal cracki ng oc curred 2 w eeks after placement [7 -1b) d ue to a n erro r in toot h preparation (see Fig
6-13, ce nter) N o crack evol utio n is de tected after more than 3 years [7-1c). The restoration is still in clinic a l service
more than 7 years la ter.
294
7
I
LABORAT ORY PROCEDURES
of
The crucia l rol e is playe d by the dentinoenam el
W ea r prope rties
[unctio n acting as a "c rack stopper" d ue to its
spec ific architecture and co llagen fiber ar­
ronqernent. '? The sa me can be sa id about
most co ntesta ble ospect.":" Adeq uately fired
feld spath ic po rcela ins, however, con show sig­
cracked feldspath ic BPRs: as lo ng as the bond
between too th and restoration ca n survive, the
de ntal cera mics are the ir
nificantly less abrasio n com pared to aluminou s
porce la in and noncrysta lline low-fusing g lass. 19
for six c racked teeth in the a fo rementio ned
In addition , porcelain veneers might no t be the
so urce of sig nifica nt ena mel w ear problem s be­
ca use of the co nserva tive nature of the trea t­
studv." Fig ure 7-1 suppo rts
ment: the palatal and functiona l side o f the
restorat ion w ill be preserved , as w as the case
this point, showing
a n ear ly failur e of a veneer that cracke d on a
pa la ta l surface a fter 2 weeks of cl inica l ser­
vice. This problem did not prevent the too th­
restorati on co mplex from co ntinuing to serve
optima lly more than 5 years later. A basic mis­
take in tooth preparation (excess ive invasio n of
the palata l surface w ith a long cha mfer) proved
to be the cau se of this relativ e fai lure. II
tooth is o ften preserved and left intact. This as­
sumptio n is consi stent w ith the fact that most
clinica l eva luations on porcela in venee rs and
BPRs7.8,2o-24 ha ve not revea led sig nifica nt w ear
problems.
Choice of fabrication technique
C rack propensity ca n be minimized by ( I)
Ceramic fired over refractor y die is the oldest"
"soft" preparations (no shar p an gl es), (2) suf­
ficie nt thickness of the ce ra mic material ,12.13
a nd most Wides pread method for fabricatin g a
(3) adeq uate wrap ping an d de sign of the
restoration ,11,14.15 a nd (4) thoro ugh cleaning of
the inner porcela in surface follow ing hydroflu­
or ic acid etching (see Fig 8-3 ).
porc elain piece . The main adva ntages
techniq ue are as follow s:
of
this
• No specia l equipmen t is required .
• Extremely sophi sticated effects of color and
tran slucency ca n be o bta ined thro ugh a full­
thickness layering technique [Fig 7-1a ).
It is important to remember that ultima te tensile
streng th o f ceramics used in the porcelai n-fused­
• Tradi tiona l feldspathic porcelains ca n be used;
to-metal (PFM) technique is 2 to 3 limes higher
co mpared to that of natural enamel (see Table
w hen combin ed w ith hyd rofluoric acid etching
a nd silaniz a tio n, they show extremely reliable
1-1) .
bonding to resins."
FIGURE 7-2: FELDSPATHIC PORCELAIN VENEERS FIRED OVER REFRACTORY DIES. These veneers are fabricated
by layering leldspcthic porcelain over an improved refractory material. M arginal fidelity can be excellent, as illus­
trated by th e repositioning of the restoration on its original intact stone die.
296
7
I L AB OR AT OR Y PR O CE DUR ES
These advanta ges are also found in the plat­
inum foil technique , wh ich is the closes t al ter­
nat ive to the refra ctor y d ie techni que but re­
q uires less effo rt in cos t ma king . In add itio n,
da ta from the early 1990S 27-29 repeatedly
showed the superio r marginal fid el ity of plat­
inum foil veneers. These results have lost their
releva nce since the introduc tion of improved
refractor y material s leg , Ducera-Lay, Ducera )
and use of smaller indi vidua l dies .30.3J M i­
crosa ndb lasting wi th 25- to 50-~ m g loss pear ls
is now used to remove the investm ent material
from the completed vene ers, which also al­
low ed sig nifica nt improvements in margin al
closure of refra ctor y-derived restorat io ns that
can easily a pp roa ch 20 to 4 0 ~m (Fig 7-2) .32
The platinum foil technique suffers from the fact
tha t cos ts must be prepared by trimming of the
gingiva l part of the stone model . Newer meth­
ods w ith refractory d ies a llow the g ing iva l
stone to be maintained [see section on "M os­
ter cos ts in the refrac tory di e techniqu e" ),
w hic h is a maj o r element to qui d e the stra tifi­
ca tion a nd elabora tion of fine ceramic co n­
to urs a nd emergence profile. O ther techni qu es
that have been proposed for fa bricati on of
BPRs are di scussed below.
Cast glass-ceramic restorations (Dicor, C a ulk/
Dentsply) w ere first introduced for all-ceramic
crow ns. The materia l exhib its interesting physi­
ca l and chemica l properties." but the high fab­
ricotion costs and restricted esthetics have lim­
ited further develo pment of this system.
298
Pressed cetamic" leg Authenti c , Ce ramay;
Empress, Ivoclar ) offers tw o elabo rat io n modal­
ities: the reinfo rced pressed porcelain is used to
fabricate ei ther o n entire restoration o r o nly a
core . This latter option a llows esthetic improve­
men ts and ch ar a cterization by addit ion a l
cera mic firing. Esth etic characterizat ion , how­
ever, remains very limited co mpared to the full­
thickness laye ring that ca n be app lied w ith
the refractory d ie techni que.
Slip costuiq" (In-C era m Spinell , Vito Zahnfab­
rikl ca n generate restora tio ns wi~h high er intrin­
sic streng th compared to other systems . The
basic method w as o rig inally marketed for full
crowns and la ter adopted to BPRs w ith the use
of spi nel [M gA IP 4) instead of a lumino. Due to
the high crystallin e co ntent of this materia l, tra­
ditiona l hyd rofluoric acid etchi ng is not effec­
tive . Resin bond ing to In-C eram alumino , for in­
stance, requir es tribochemical silica coa ting o r
use of a special resin monome r."
Machined ceramics (Cerec, Sirona ; C elay,
Mikronal, even tho ug h original ly designed for
chairside use, have become popular for la bo­
ratory use a lso. BPRs mode from machin ed ce­
ramic suffer fro m shad e uniform ity and rather
simp listic anatomy, unless additi onal porce lain
firings are carried out.
I
LABORATORY PROCEDU RES
7
MAS TER CAS TS IN THE REFRACTORY DIE TEC HN IQ UE
Add ition silico ne impression materia ls are ideal
for the refracto ry di e technique : they are elastic,
resistant to tearing , and , above a ll, they al low
accurate multiple po urs, w hich is essentia l to the
fabricati on of master costs .":" A sequence fo r
fabri catio n of master casts is exp lained in Fig 7­
3. This techniq ue is a var iatio n of other proto­
cols pro posed by Sheets a nd Taniguchi 30 and
C hiche and Pinault .3 1
The prod uction of qual ity refractor y BPRs can
be rela ted to the use of multiple cas ts resulting
fro m three co nsec utive po urs of the sa me fina l
impressio n, ea c h cast being used for on ly o ne
preci se purpose (Fig 7- 3 ). M ultipurpose casts
a re not indi cated beca use each use w o uld re­
sult in prog ressive d eterio rat ion .
First pour: Single dies
A very accura te produ ction seq uence must be
respected and is summar ized in Fig 7-4 .
they must be care fully han dled becau se they
are the most accurate reproduction of the
prepara tio n. M arg ins are immedi ately trimmed ,
marked w ith a red penc il, a nd co ated w ith
cy a noac ryla te hardener (M ar g id ur, Benzer
Dental ). Further trimming must be per formed to
repr odu ce a root form w ith tw o ant irotat ion
groove s (Figs 7 -4a a nd 7-4b).
These o rig ina l d ies must be kept unto uched be­
ca use they w ill be used to verify the fina l fit of
the restoratio ns (co ntro l di es).
Refractory dies. The co ntrol d ies are immed i­
ately duplica ted using high-quali ty la borato ry
silicones (eg, Deg ufo rm, Deg ussa) (Fig 7-4a ).
Tw o sets of rep licas are po ured in stone . O ne
set is co ated w ith die spa cer 1 mm short of the
margin and then duplicated to generate a set
of refractory di es (eg , Ducera-Lay, Ducera ). The
other set of replicated stone dies w ill be used in
the fa bricat ion of the soft tissue model . The re­
fractory d ies w ill also integrate the soft tissue
cast but need additiona l preparato ry steps.
Stone dies. Sing le di es a re made of vacuum­
mixed improved stone (eg, w hite Fujirock. G C) ;
299
', ' \
.\.
"
MA S T. E R
1st pour
2 nd pour
3rd pour
Indi vidual ' d ies
Sol id model
Soft tissue model
,
Trimmed to simulate root
w ith a ntirotation g roo~es
,
Mul tiple sets
, Orig inal (stone)
. • Stone replica :
.• .Retractory replica .~
..
Final control of seating and
mar'gi nal fit (original die) '
l
Mounted in articulator
w ith antago nist
.
:....
; :
:
...
.
..
Occlusal a nd proximal .
adj ustments
Die stone replica .'
repositioned into
impression
, Hard stone gingiva
:+- rem ovable and .
inferchcn q eoble d ies
(stone refractory)
..
...•~ Ce ramic layering .
. and finishing
\.
,I
FIGURE 7 -3: SUMMARY OF SEQUE~CEFORTHE: FABRICATION OF CASJS-C0f'.l?E.CUTIVEPO~RS OF THE
FINAL IMPRESSION.. One set of casts is used for a single purpose; as ind icated a t the .bottom{blacko rrows}: Stone
and refractory replicas of individuoldles are required to generate the soft tissue mode l {dotted arrows).Details o f the
fa brication of each cast are presented in' follOWi ng fig ures .
FIGURE 7-4 : SEQUENCE FOR SiNGLE DIE FABRiCATION AND DUPLICATION. Desiqn.o nd configu ration of the
original hard stone die include a conical root shape,a ndtw o latera l slots. .I hellrst step is to produce a hi gh-precision
. silicon mold of this die (d uplicating impression 1): A r eplica is poured using the same hard stone (stone replica 1L
and die space r is ap plied 1. mm short of the marg in {red area}; a h i gh~preci si on silicon mold of lhestonereplico w ith
the die space r is prod uced (duplicating impressi on 2 ). Two sets of di e~ are ultimately genef()ted : one set in rehoctorv
material poured in d uplicating irn pressjon 2 · end ' bne set in' hard stone '(stone replica 2) 'pbured i.n duplic ating im­
pression 1 (7-4a). The second stone replica d oes not include the die spacer and will be. repositioned . into -theorlq i­
na l impression for fab rication of the soH'tissue model (see Fig 7 -6a):
'
.
.
.
M U L TID I, E
T Ee H ' N
QU
E'
7
I LA BORATORY PR OCEDU RES
Refrac to ry di es must underg o the followi ng
Second pour: Solid cast
prepara tory steps:
1. M argi ns are marked w ith a specia l pe ncil
that is resistant to firing.
2 . A dehyd ra tion firing is car ried o ut (1 , 1OO°C
fo r 5 minutes) .
3. A co ating of fine-gra in po rcela in pa ste (con­
necting layer) is applied 1 mm apica l to the
margi ns an d fired (9 7 0 °C fo r 1 minute).
Step 3 ca n be repeated until a smoo th, even
surface is ach ieved . The fine-g rain co nnecting
po rcela in leg , C o nnector Ducera -La y, Ducera )
is an essentia l ing red ient for the fina l fit of the
restorations; it ac ts bo th as a sea ler o f the re­
fractory surfac e a nd as a n adhesive (ancho red
to the di e) tow ard whi ch the firing shrinkag e
sho uld occur. For larg e teeth, the root po rtio n o f
refracto ry dies can be shortened slig htly, be­
ca use experience has indi cated that the smal ler
the di e, the better the marg inal fit.
I'
Tedi o us trimming is avo id ed beca use al l sets
of d ies (includ ing refracto ries) have an identi­
ca l root portion , w hic h co nstitutes the exact
replica of the o rig ina l sing le di es.
The same extra-hard sto ne is used for the pou r­
ing of a full arch. This cast must be trimmed a nd
mounted in an art iculator (Fig 7 -5).
Beca use the sol id cast represents a g ood ref­
erence for interdenta l relationships, it w ill be
used for the fina l check o f the oc clusio n (intra­
and interarch co ntac t po ints).
The use of a mounting ta ble a llow ing arb itrar y
hinge axis tra nsfer on a semiad justa ble ar ticula­
tor (eg , Pa lla dent) is reco rrrnended. '? Follo w ing
this method , accurate stab iliza tion can be ex­
pected . Numero us errors ca n be genera ted dur­
ing the mounting of maxillary casts with a face­
bow " : as a result, the face-bow yie lds no
profitable improvement of occlusa l accura cy.
Posterior teeth must have adequate occl usa l re­
lationships, a llowing the mandi bular cast to be
positio ned in max imum intercuspation w ithout
regi stration material . A soft silico n bite sho uld
be used on ly in case of unstab le positio n; it is
important to real ize, however, that vertica l erro r
at the oc clusal p la ne and at the co ndy le of an
ar ticulator ca n be generated w hen recording
ma teria l is present.
FIGURE 7-4 (CONTINUED). Example of precision silicon mold in a plastic ring (inset). Tw o diffe rent molds have been
used to ge nera te stone replicas o f the orig ina l d ies {left} a nd a refractory set {right}. Marg ins of the refractory dies
have been ma rked w ith a refractory pencil, followed by a dehyd ration firing at 1, 1OO°C. A connecting porcela in
paste has been applied over the entire preparation plus 1 mm ap ica l to the margi ns {arrowheads}; it produces a glossy
surfac e followin g firing at 9 7 0°C. Each set of dies features the same config uratio n and desig n (root form wit h an­
tirotation g rooves) (7-4 b).
302
,
I N
,
'
'.,
,
,
D I V I D U A L'
DI E S
"
'",
7
I L A BO RATO RY P ROC EDU RES
Third pour: Soft tissue cast
To generate this cast, stone rep licas of or igina l
individ ual di es are carefully repositioned into
the impression , sta b ilized [Fig 7-6a L a nd iso­
lated . Stone is po ured arou nd the dies , result­
ing in a ca st ba se w ith a ccura te g ing iva l co n­
tours and artificia l a lveoli conforming to the
o rig inal shape of the dies (Fig 7-6b). The
mo jo r ad vantage of this cast is tha t stone dies
an d refractor y di es can be inserted a nd inter-
SO L I D
cha nged , due to the identica l design of their
root portions , w hich have the same an tirotati on
grooves [Fig 7-6c) . This cast is mai nly used
d uring the ceramic layerin g proce ss and ca n
be mounted in an ar tic ula tor as a g ross g uid e
for occl usio n. The soft tissue cast should not be
considered p recise and , therefore , sho uld not
be used for fine occlusa l cdjustrnents . Fo r fab­
rica tio n of multip le veneers , sto ne d ies rep li­
ca ting the w ax up can be inserted to qu ide the
a p plica tio n of po rce lain [Fig 7-7 ).
C A S T
FIGURE 7-5: SOLID CAST. This o ne-piece ca st is the o nly o ne thot must be mounted in the ar ticulator (7-50, 7 -5b) .
The sto ne g ing iva ca n be trimmed a round the a butment teeth to ensure the seating of the final restorations [not illus­
trated) .
FIGURE 7-6 : FABRICATION OF THE SOFT TISSUE CAST. Sto ne die s are repositioned in the impression, stabilized
w ith pi ns and sticky w ax (7-60), and finally isolated and sealed wi th a thin layer of wa x (using a hot electric spatula ,
not shown]. The first a mount of stone is poured arou nd the die s, the cast ba se be ing poured in a seco nd step afte r
removal of the pins. The soft tissue cast includes standardized alveolar sockets (7-6b]. The antirotation grooves of in­
dividual dies are reprodu ced and a llow fine positioning of either stone di es (0), refractory di es (b), or di es reprod uc­
ing the w ax up (e) (7-6 c).
FIGURE 7-7: ADVANTAGE OF INTERCHANGEABLE DIES FOR FABRICATI ON OF MULTIPLE VENEERS. A silico n
matrix is used to rep roduce the d iag nostic w axup o n the stone d ies of the soft tissue cast (7-70 , 7-7b) . The sa me cast
ca n be load ed w ith the refractory dies (7-7c). Wa xed d ies can be inserted selectively during ceramic stratifica tion to
g Uide elaboration of pro xima l surfaces and to respect the particu lar dime nsions of ea ch tooth .
304
S 0
F T
T I S S UE
CA S T
7
I
LABOR ATOR Y P ROC ED U RES
CERAMIC LAYERING AND FINISHING
Ela borate stratifica tion methods have been pro­
posed by the most di stingui shed ce ra mists
aro und the world . Fo r cli nicia ns, under standing
the principles of ceram ic layer ing wil l result in
an improved eva luatio n and app recia tion of
the ce ramic w o rkpiece. Una ttainable goa ls
The method presented here is a rational and di­
dacti c adaptati on of the dentino enam el laye r­
ing fou nd in na ture; it is based o n the use of a
feldspathi c por celain (Creation , Klema) and
can be used ei ther for veneering metal-cerami c
core s o r for direct appl icati o n on refract ory di es
a nd unrealistic co rrectio ns a re often reque sted
by cl inicia ns w ith insuffici ent dental techn ique
aw aren ess. O n the other hand , those w ho
have developed the ir co mprehension of ce­
ramic stratificati on w ill directly benefit from this
know ledge by (l ) improving the w ay they han­
dle the ce ra mic pi eces and (2) strengthening
their ow n intraoral layering techni ques w hile
using freehan d co mpo site restoration s.
[veneers, inlays, and on lays). It Simply consists
of two to three co nsecutive firings follow ed by
g laZing (F ig 7-8 ): (1 ) the opa que de ntin firing
(o ptio na l, on ly for staine d o r fractured teeth);
(2) the dentino enamel core firing; and (3) the
"ena mel skin" firing. Finishing and mechani cal
poli shing w ill also be d iscussed . A typi ca l firing
sched ule is g iven in Ta ble 7 -1 (loca ted a t the
end of this sectio n).
FIGURE 7-8: STEP-BY-STEP CERAMIC STRATIFICATION . Preop erative a nd immedia te postoperative views (7-8a,
7-8b) o f a pa tient w ith mixed indica tio ns for BPRs (types liB, IIC, a nd IliA). The first ba ke wi ll ge nera te an op aq ue
dentin co re o n the fractured tooth (7-8c to 7-8e ) It is foll ow ed by the applica tion of a core of regular dentins (7-8f)
and more translucent incisal enamels (7-8g) . Modified dentins are infiltrated to simulate inner charac teristics of the in­
cisal edge (7 -8 h). A n inner translucent enamel skin cov ers this buildup (7-8 i, 7-8il , a nd then the seco nd bake ca n be
carri ed out (7-8 k; note the shrinkage of crown volu me).
306
BASELINE
OPAQUE DENTIN
DENTIN BUILDUP
INCISAL WALL
INNER ENAMEL SKIN
,----'-----~--'----'--------=------'-=-'____,
r'---=--------'--'-'------~~-~___,
BAKE
INTERNAL STAINING
BAKE 2
,--~'------~--=---=----'----~___,
r:
C UT BACK . OF , BA KE 2
BAK E 3 ·
ENAMEL STAINS / BAKE .2 '
OUTER EN AM EL SK IN
G LAZE A ND POLISH .
SAN D BLASTED DI E ,
(
.' ,
FIGURE 7-8 (CONTINUED) . A slig ht cu tback (7-81) should 'a llow a pplication of superficial ena mel sta ins followed by
low-tern perc ture .(80 0 °C) fixation bake (7-8m) . The final volume of .the .resforotioncon be ac curately obtained
throug h the opplicc tion of a t hin enamel skin V8n) and its subsequent firing(7-80), Glozing and mecha nical polish­
ing o re comb inedto ob tain. the final surface texture and gloss (7-8pl : The refractory mote rio l is removed by mi­
, croso ndblosnnq only-otter completion of' surfac e finishirigprocedures .!7-8q). ,N ofe the we l,l -define~ vertica l lobes
(7-$r, 7-8s), nafura l emergence, architecture, and g loss of the fac ial ·surfac e ,(7:8t). Because of the rationa l dentin
buildup (opaque plu s regular dentins), no transiti.on ca n be seen betWeen the tooth-suppor ted part of the restoration
a nd the freestanding porcelain .inciso l edge (7-8u). The ultimate esthetic inteqrc tiono! the BPR is possible only in the
presence of adeq uate g ingivol contour (note perfeCt distal gi ng ival seam)'and favorable periodo ntal response (7-8vl.
Diagnostic and preparato ry steps of this case are' illustrated in Figs 5-6 a nd 5-7,' tooth preparation a ~d provisional­
iz()tion in Fi gs 6-10 and 6-26 .
'
Cl
.v..
7
I L AB O RATO RY
P ROC ED U R ES
Fi gures 7 -9 a to
7-9c show the postopera tive
a nd tooth prep arati on views, respectively, of a
case developed with the stratifica tio n principles
deta iled in the follow ing para gra phs.
Unless a special preliminary opaque build up is
req uired (as mention ed a bove), stratifica tion
Opaque dentin buildup
ca n normall y start w ith the a pplicatio n of den tin
pow d ers using the base shade d entin (usually
several shades wi th hig her chroma in the ce rvi­
Tw o typical situalions require the use of modifi ed
o paq ue dentin : stained teeth (see section o n
"Masking effects") a nd fractured incisa l edges.
In the la tter, the lack of sufficient supporting nat­
ural dentin must be co mpe nsated by a speci a l
build up of opaq ue dentin that reprodu ces a sim­
ilar outline for a ll preparati ons (Figs 7-9d to 7­
9 f). The abse nce of opaq ue dentin w ould result
in increased lig ht ab sorpti on at the level of the
miss ing natural dentin. Similarly, w ith stained
tooth preparations, the absence of a thin, modi­
fied opaque dentin liner w o uld result in insuffi­
cien t masking a bility of the veneers . High er­
va lue dentin can be used fo r this purpose:
I '
Dentin buildup
ca l area a nd high er va lue in the inci sal area ].
A full-size tooth is built in dentin using the
palatal silico n ind ex of the w axup as a mold
(Figs 7 -9 g a nd 7-9 h).
Cutback
This basic form is then redu ced , especi al ly a t
the incisal and proxim oinci sal level, to g ener­
a te space fo r other po w ders (Fig 7 -9 i). The cut­
ba ck dentin should reprodu ce the incisal dentin
co re described in Fig 1-2 . For ce ntral incisors,
this architecture typica lly include s three basi c
vertica l lobes, o r mamelons. The w ax up is co n­
sta ntly used as a reference (in the form of a
pa latal silicon index) for the placement of the
different masses.
FIGURE 7·9: STEP-BY-STEP CERAMIC LAYERING. * Final view of the case that will be deve loped and the initial tooth
prepara tions (7-9a to 7-9 c; the black-and-w hite a nalog piclure is presented to a llow a better percep tion of the final
brightness a nd va lue) All of the layering w ill be performed on the soft tissue ca sl; refraclory dies have a lready been
dehyd rated, coated with the connecting porcelain , and fired (7-9 d ). In fractured teeth, the first increments are made
w ith opaque dentin pow de rs to restore the missing dentin (7-ge ); they are immedi ately fired (7-9 f). The tooth is then
fully built w ith dentin powders (7-9 g , 7-9h ) The volume is reduced incisally and proximally by crea ting co ncave sur­
faces (7-9i ). Both views in 7-ge a nd 7 -9i are d irected dow n to the incisal edge to improve perception of the rela­
tio nship be tween the build up and the silico n index. (Figure 7-9 a is reprinted from Magne 4 2 w ith permissio n.)
* Some ceramic powd ers hove been artificia lly sto ined 10 allow beHer perception of the buildup technique. Pink
enamels; yellow = modified dentins; unstained = shaded ena mels and enamel skin.
31 0
= regular
denlins; blue
= incisal
\.'
,
\
\ .",
,
\
"",'
BAsEL! N E
OPAQUE DE ~rfIN
BAKE
".' .
D.ENTIN BUILDUP
r--"--'-'---'----'----'----'-----'-~-----'--__.r-----'----
----'-----'--'-'--___,
, C UTBACK
7
I L AB OR AT ORY
PR OCE D URE S
Enamel incisal wall
Two d istinct "ho rns " of pure enam el are placed
a t the mesia l and di stal aspects of the inci sal
edge (Figs 7-9 j an d 7-9k). Their exact loca tio n
o us interna l effects w ithin the inci sal edg e are
c rea ted by the ba la nced a pplica tion o f fluores­
cent and nonfluorescent stains (Fi gs 7-9 p to 7­
9 r). Fluorescent sta ins w ill ge nera te high-val ue
area s leg, ide al for highli ghting dentin mamel­
oris], w hereas nonfluorescent stains tend to re­
d uce va lue [Fig 7-9 r). These distinct internal
a nd length are gUide d by the palatal silicon
index (Fig 7-91 ). These mesial a nd d istal inci sal
horns define the pal atal inci sal w a ll resulting
from the pla cement of o ther vertica l enamel in­
crements (Figs 7-9m and 7-9n). The lifelike ap­
pearan ce o f this w a ll is achi eved by al ternating
enam el powders with var ious translucencies
and chroma . Fully tra nsparent inc isal ce ra mic
ca n be mixed wi th the or ig inal ename l pow­
ders to g enerate a wi de rang e of va lues.
Shaded ena mel pow ders ca n a lso be used .
The incisal w a ll must be slightly oversized (ap­
Th e characterized d entin wal l is still thin (Fig s 7­
9 s a nd 7 -9t). The next step is the a pp lica tion of
proximately 0 .5 mm longer and w ider than the
silico n ind ex] to anticipate the firing shrinkage.
a n inner ename l shell; the entire faci al surface
is cov ered with a co mbin ation of other tra nslu­
Dentin characterization
The inci sa l w a ll is used as a substrate fo r the in­
filtration of de ntin powd ers that have bee n
modi fied wi th intensive stains (F ig 7-9 0 ). Vari-
characteristics and effeds must be defined ac­
curately using a sl ide of a n intact reference
tooth . The sa me procedure is a pplied to the
pal ata l surface .
Enamel covering and first bake
ce nt and o pa lescent pow ders specia lly de ­
signed to simulate shaded ena mel. The cervical
third , midd le third, and incisa l third of the facia l
surface are covered separately. Special cervi­
ca l tra nsparent ena mels are applied first (Fig 7­
9 u), followed by the definitio n of a central
" belt" covering the mid d le third (Fig 7 -9v).
FIGURE 7-9 (CONTINUED) . The inci sa l w a ll is de fined first by the placement of mesial and di stal increments or in­
c isa l horns (7-9 j, 7-9 k). Their initial leng th co nforms to the silicon index (7-9 1) Vertical increments of ename l w ith var­
ious translucencies and chro ma are used to build the rest of the w a ll, the final length of wh ich should be a pproxi­
mately 0 .5 mm oversized (7-9m, 7-9n). The w a ll is then infiltrated w ith tinted dentins (yellow ish area in 7-9 0) to
prod uce special internal effects of the incisal edg e (dentin mamelons) These dentins are modified w ith fluorescent reg,
In N ova , C reation) a nd nonfluorescenf stains leg , Ma ke Up, C reatio n); both types of sta in have a w ide range of col ­
o rs (7-9p) Blac k light emphasizes the d ifferent behavior of each type (7-9q) . Even dar k In N ova co lors ca n feature
a go od suppo rt of brig htness by fluorescence, w hile brig ht Make Up stains ca n a ppea r black under luminescent con­
d itio ns (7-9 r). The charac terized incisal laminate must be kept thin (7-9s) The same steps are app lied to the pa latal
surface (7-9t). A preliminary enamel covering (inner skin) is app lied using shaded enamels (7-9 u to 7-9 w ) The tooth
must be oversized to compe nsate fo r subsequent firing shrinkage .
312
IN CI SA,L WA LL
,., ....
I'N TE RNA LS TAIN IN G .
.. \.
J
, INN ER EN A'MEL' SK·IN
'
,',
.
"
.
\,
.
.
7
I L A BO RAT O RY
PROC EDUR ES
Different combina tio ns of shaded ena mels are
used accord ing to the type of tooth (dar k vers us
brig ht), but they are a lw ays applied a lternately
in tiny vertica l increments (Fig 7-9 v). Specia l
blue translucent enamel pow ders ca n be a pplied a t the proximo incisa l level w hen req uired .
Fina lly, the remain ing incisa l wi ndow is covered w ith enamel pow ders that ca n integrate
some o pa lescence (Fi g 7 -9w ).
The subseq uent fil-in g (seco nd ba ke in the fabricati on o f fractured teeth) is ca rried o ut a nd
should reveal three chara cteristic area s wi th
w ell-defined va lues: hig h-va lue midd le third,
ave rage-va lue ce rvica l third , a nd low -va lue incisa l third [Figs 7 -9 x a nd 7-9 y). This d istrlbution of va lues is found in 60% to 7 0 % of natural teeth (see Figs 2- 1Oc to 2- 1Oe).
Characterized enamel skin and firing
At this sta ge, vo lumes 'sho uld be slig htly underbuilt [Fig 7 -9x ). It mig ht be necessary to cut
ba ck the surface slig htly to leave a thin and
unifo rm space fo r the a pplicatio n of the outer
enamel skin (F ig 7-9z ). The appli ca tio n of this
lost layer is usually prece ded by the introd uc-
tion of ename l characteristics, eg, in the form
of white spots and craze lines (Fig 7 -9aa ). A
low-temperature firing (800°C) all ow s the fixatio n of these stai ns before the fina l covering
w ith the outer tra nslucent enamel skin. Here
a ga in, d ifferent po wders must be used alternately in vertica l inc rements (F igs 7 -9 b b a nd
7 -9 cc). Translu cent/tran sparent o pa lescent
enamels are indi cated a t this stage . Because
this layer is thin, o nly minor firing shrinkag e
w ill oc cur, al lowin g fine co ntrol of the ultimate
shope a nd vol ume. The la st firing revea ls the
interna l staining a nd structure of the buildup
(F igs 7 -9dd and 7 -gee).
Contouring
Beca use most spec ia l effec ts leg , stained
de ntin, ena mel characteristics) have been embedd ed w ithin the previous layers, surface
g rinding can be perfo rmed w ithout a lteratio n of
these essentia l characteristics. The fina l co ntouring is fac ilita ted w hen the landmarks of
c rown shope are mar ked w ith a pencil (Figs 79 ff and 7 -9 g g ). Cre sts and transitio n line a ng les ca n be either softened o r accentuated wi th
d ia mond burs.
FI GURE 7-9 (CONTINUED) . The bake sho uld gene ra te a tooth w ith reduced vol ume, featuring a ll internal effects a nd
dentin charac teristics (7-9 x). The palatal view revea ls the low-va lue incisal edge and the uniform opaque dentins underneath (7 -9 y). The first enamel skin must be slig htly undersized (7 -9z) to allow fo r its characteriza tion and subseq uent coverage . G rind ing is often necessar y to increa se space at the proximoincisa l level (7-9 z, arrowheads) . Tiny
w hite spots a nd craze lines can be pa inted o n the red uced surface [7-9 00 ). N ote these effects especia lly a t the d istal incisal edge of the left central incisor (7 -9 aa , arrowhead) After a low -temperature firing, these stains are fina lly
covered w ith the outer ename l skin (7-9 bb) The fina l sha pe of the tooth must be a lta ined (7-9cc) Following the last
firing , the main tooth shape should be al most de finitive (7-9dd , 7-gee).
314
' \
., - ----'----'----'--'-'-'----'-- - - '---'--
---'--
-
';'
, ,
BAKE
2
----,
(
,
SLiG HT CUTBACK OF BAKE 2
-,
ENAMEL 'STAIN S/B AKE 2'
, o'UTER ,ENAMEL SKIN
.------------'----~
(
"
r - - - ' - -- --
(
BAKE 3 '
---'----------,
7
I LA BORATORY PROC EDURES
Adequate surface mo rpho logy must be
ac hieved, espec ia lly vertical develo pmenta l
lobes , before elaboration of the surface texture.
Tiny horizontal develop mental g rooves should
be prod uced (when required) on ly at the last
stag e, someli mes even a fter g laz ing . Any type
o f co ntouring should be car ried o ut w ith relatively new diamond instruments. Ceramists must
be aware of the possible pro blems related to
the use of old burs: diamond particles being
sheared off not o nly ca use premature w ear of
the bur but may also increase smear ing of the
meta llic binde r onto the po rcela in surface . The
smear ing o f nickel o n ce ramic substra tes has
been dernonslroted ." As a consequence , new
d ia mo nd burs characterized by a pure d iamo nd cutting surface w itho ut metallic binder between crystals have been propo sed but are still
under development ."
intraora l pol ishing of po rcelain ca n eq ual o r
su rpass the smoothness of glazed porcela in.
Today, it is recog nized that improved esthelic results are o bta ined by po llshinq ." However, the
deg ree of success of any polishing technique is
still dependent upon a wel l-condensed po rcelain a nd adeq uate firing conditions, because
poros ity in the porcelain is not co mpletely eliminated by pol ishing as it is in natural glaze firing .53 Therefo re, the combined use of g lazi ng
a nd pol ishing ca n be ad vocated to improve
bo th esthetic and surface characteristics.
Mecha nica l pol ishing usually beg ins w ith d iamond-si licon w heels (Figs 7-9hh and 7-9ii), fol-
pared to the gold standard gi ven by the orig ina l
glaze . Some authors initia lly demonstrated the
superio r smoothness of g lazed porcela in.44.45
lowed by ove rg lazing (w i ~ h ad d ition of gl az ing
liquid) or autog lazing, knowing that overglazing usually softens the surface texture . Hig hly reflective surface s are finally achieved w ith
pum ic e and cal ci um carbona te (Sig ol in ,
Thom pson Siegel). Ca lcium carbo na te is a
common abrasive materia l used in dentifrice. It
is softer and finer tha n pumice a nd allow s exce llent finishing of the porcelain surface . It is
used w ith brushes a nd felt tips [Fig 7-9 iil a t d ifferent rotating speeds : long-ha ir brushes used at
relatively high speeds are ide al to finish smooth
surfaces a nd co nvexi ties, w hereas short-hair
O thers, however, favo r mecha nica l polish ing 4&-49 Haywood et a 150 .5 1 even co ncluded that
brush es used at low speed are best to fin ish
wavy surface s an d co ncavities.
Glazing and surface finishing
A number of mechani cal pol ishing techniq ues
are descr ibed in the literature and w ere com-
316
,
\ "
,
G LAZ E AND PO LISH
~-----=- ---'"
\
'""
.
"
,-- -~-- ---------- -.,
,
,
,"\
FIGURE 7-9 (CONTlNl:JED) . Tra nsition li nea ng l~~, lobes, a nd ' s u pe r fic i~ f g' roo~es ~ re marked w ith; pencil to assist
the optimization of surloce ~orpho logy and contours ( 7~9ff; inset, black-and-white ana log), .I heporcelo jri restorations
must remain on the refrac tory dies durlnqmechomcol contouring and finishing (7-9gg) , Silicon-d iamond wheels, felt
tips, a nd diam ond paste ca n be used for preliminary finishing (7-9 hhj, Fociol.view of the veneers before g lazing (7 9i i), AMer glazing , a compact peor-s haped.felt tip and pumice can be used (7-9jj ), The final gloss (7-9 kk, 7-9 11 ) is obtained w ith brushes a nd calcium carbonate 'a brasive,
7
I
LA BORATORY PROCEDURES
At this stag e of the procedure , the restorati on is
stili attached to the refracto ry d ie (Figs 7 -9 kk
and 7-911 ]. The di e should be removed by sa ndbla sting (w ith 50-~ m g loss beads) on ly a fter
co mpletion of surface finishing procedure s. M echa nica l polis hing requires the physica l suppo rt
of the underly ing investment material , a nd premature removal w ould result in high risks for
fracture w hile handli ng the ce ramic piece . The
sa nd blasted porcelain w o rkpieces (Fig 7-9mm)
ca n be repositioned o n the stone d ies (Fig 79 nnl, but fina l control of proximal co ntacts is
ide a lly achieved with the solid cost.
The clin ical try-in sho uld not revea l need for
major co rrectio ns, especi a lly w hen ap pro priate
diagnostic steps have been acco mplished . Because at this stag e the restoratio n is no longer
physicall y suppo rted by the di e, any corr ectio n
firing s must be carried o ut o nly w ith low -fusing
ceram ics (eg, Duceram-LFC, Ducera) . N o correction s were required for the case in Fig 7 -9 .
Final views show adequate o pacity of the ceramic core due to the use of o paq ue dentin
(Fig s 7-9 00 a nd 7-9 pp). The righ t a mo unt of luminescence wa s obtained as we ll (Fig 7-9qq )
beca use fluorescent stains were adequa tely integ rated into the buildup . The final touch is
gi ven by the characteristics a nd interna l sta ining of the ena mel skin, w hich simulates the
o pa lescence and na tura l imper fec tion s of
ena mel (Fi g 7-9 rr) .
Table 7-1 Exa mple of firing schedu le
Idle'
1°C)
Heat rate
1°C/min]
Hi-temp
(0C)
Dry
(min)
Hi-temp
hold (min)
Die dehydration
Connecto r peste
575
300
55
55
1,100
970
9
4
5
1
620
969
Denlin
Colora nt fixation
Enamel skin
300
403
300
130
80
130
960
800
950
9
2
3
0
0
0
620
620
620
959
800
949
C lozlnq, wi lh vacuum
G lozing, no vacuum
300
300
55
130
950
930
1
9
0
0
620
949
Corrections, low fusing
G la·z ing, low fusing
300
300
55
55
660
645
3
3
0.5
0.5
380
Vacuum start
(0C)
-
-
Vacuum stop
(0C)
-
-
659
-
FIGURE 7-9 (CONTINUED). Final view of the restorations oher removal o f the refractory material (7-9 mm). Because
the soft tissue cost is not acc urate for oc clusa l relatio nships, reposition ing of the veneers on to the original stone dies
might not be possi ble (7-9nn, arrowhead show inq inco mplete seating o f the restorati on ). The solid cast must be used
instead . Both direct lig ht a nd tra nsillumination (7-900, 7-9pp) show the successful wo rk of the ceramist: the full incisal
bulk of the po rcelain does not di ffer from the tooth-supported cervica l pa rt of the restoration, and it is impossible to
di stingu ish these two areas de spite the very different underlying substrate (note view of tooth prepara tio n inset at
7-9 00 ). (Fig ures 7-900 to 7-9 qq are reprinted fro m M ag ne a nd M ag ne 54 w ith permissio n.)
318
DIE 'SAN DBLASTED'
'"
,
.,'.,
FIGURE 7-9 (CONTINUED) . A black 'light used to evaluate the lluorescence reveals 0 balanc ed use of the various
', pigments (7-9qq).Use of lipstick can rncketeeth appear brighter a nd emphasizes enamel chara cteristics V9 rr). Fina l
' genera l views s ho~ satisfactory' integration w ith mand ibular teeth (7 9 5S to 7-9 uu).'Deta iled views ofdiag nostic steps
for this case can be found in Fig, 5-5, tooth prepara tion in. Fig 6-3, a nd follow'up view s in Fig 4-8.
7
I LAB ORATORY PROCEDURES
SPECIAL EFFECTS
Shape effects
As mention ed in C ha pter 5 (und er "D iagnosti c
w c xup" ], spec ia l features of the facial surface
arc hitecture ca n be used to create the illusion of
a shorter tooth or a wide r tooth. These effects
must be integ ra ted into the initial d iagnostic
wa xup . Figure 7 -10 depicts a case in whi ch
crow n length had to be substa ntia lly increa sed
to conform to the lower lip co nto ur and restore
the co hesio n of the smile . Hor izontal segmentation of the facial surface a nd externa l posi-
tion ing of the mesial a nd di stal transition line
a ng les w ere used to ma ke the teeth a ppear
sho rter than they rea lly are. The o pposite effect
[to make the tooth a ppear longer) w o uld have
been obtained by flattenin g the faci a l surface
and bring ing the tran sitio n line a ng les closer to
the cen ter of the tooth. Schematic illustration of
the po ssib le o ptical a lteratio ns of tooth shape is
g iven in Fig s 7 - 1Og to 7 - 1Oi. O ther useful tricks
for spec ia l effec ts can be found in cla ssic wo rks
published by lombcrd r" and Golostein.:"
FIGURE 7- 10 : SPECIAL EFFECTS COMPENSATING FOR TOOTH LENGTH AND WIDTH . The pa tient presented
after co mbined orthognath ic/orth odont ic treatment (see Fig 5- 12) . The initia l situation reveals worn incisors and an
inverted smile line (7-100]. Sig nifica nt increase of inci sor leng th was planned , c llowinq the recovery of a po sitive incisal curve co nformi ng to the lip co ntour (7-1 Ob) To compen sate for the exce ssive length of the central inciso rs, the
fac ia l surface of the po rcelai n restorati on w as d ivided into severa l horizontal seg ments representing different planes
(7- 10c) . Postopera tive intrao ra l views (7- 1Od to 7- 1Of). The light from the ca mera flash system ca n reflect only one
segment at a time 17-1 Oe, lines and arrows indi cate a t least three seg ments), gi ving the illusion of a sho rter tooth . The
theo retic exp lanatio n of such a n illusion is g iven in 7-1 Og . [Figu res 7- 1Od a nd 7 - 1Oe are reprinted from Belser el al 55
w ith permission .)
322
\
..
x.
" T ,O ,O
LARGE "
" TOO
LON · G "
FIGURE7-10(CONTINUEDj . I, II, a nd 111 ,represent the different ho rizo nta l segments
~f
the facial surface (7- 1Og ).
l
A tooth that a ppear s "too larg e ! (or'~too short") can be corrected by .bri nging the transition line a ng les cioser to the
.. center of the tooth a nd f lattening the f acia l surface to ob tai n a la rge cenlrol.seqrnent (7- 10 g , left). A tooth that a ppears "too long " (or "too narrow ") is c orrected by bringing the transition line a ngle s closer to the prox irnc l-surfoceond
d ivid ing the facia l surface into a t least three d istinct segme nts (7 -10 g , right). The ceritrol inciso rs in 7 -1Oh (top) are
the same wi dth. The image w as d ig itally mod ified by slig htly.moving the mesia l crests, d ista lly fo r ther ig ht centra l inci sor and mesia lly for the left centra l incisor; as a result, the left central incisor now appears w ider and closer (7- 1Oh,
botlom) .When the transitio n line a ngles are ma inta ined , va ria tio ns in the proxima l shape are not likely to generate
majo r cha nges in the ap pare nt wi dth of the crow n (7-1Oil ; this principle is 'used fo r the clo sure of di astemata and ca n ' .
becorribined w ith other effeCts, the interdental extension of po rcelai n be ill g made of a more satura ted rootlike po rce" lo in (7-1Oi, redd ish o reos] (see a lso Fig 4 -5):
.
DIASTEMA
C LOS U R E
7
I LABORATORY
PROCEDUR ES
Masking effects
proach is recom mended : the d iscolored substra te is mainta ined , and masking is o btained
Selective intrinsic masking. Followi ng tooth
by integ rating a certai n degree of o pacity into
the ceramic w orkpiece . The refractory di e technique offers the possib ility of incorpo ratin g a
thin an d loca lized layer of opaque cera mic
w ithin the first laye r of the restoration . Ceramics
prepara tion,
residua l
b leaching-res istan t
discol oration of enam el and dentin may
impair the final optica l integra tio n of the cerami c w o rkpiece . Different method s have bee n
pro posed to mask discolored ar ea s of the tooth
substrate d uring the proce ss of veneering . Supe rficia l a nd loca lized de fects (eg , white
enamel spo ts ) ca n be removed mechani ca lly
du ring tooth p repar a tion. Undercuts a nd de ntin
exposures related to the mechanica l eradication of the sta ined area can be immediately
treated with a bon d ing agent (and app lication
o f composite) to reestab lish a n adequa te contour of the pre parati on. This a pproa ch, how ever, remain s restrictive d ue to the limited masking ab ility of current co mposites. Furth ermore,
thick layers of bo nding agent o r co mposite
sho uld not be app lied [see next section o n
"C o nfig ura tio n of the cera mic w o rkpiece" ). In
these cases, a s wel l as for extensive discol o ration (Fig 7-11), another conse rvative ap-
have a grea ter ab ility to mask than do resins.
As illustrated in Fig 7- 1 1c, the ceram ist proceed s to selective ap plicatio n of a n o paque cera mic liner; it sho uld never cover the entire prepared su rface unless req uired by the extent of
d iscoloration. It is particularly important to limit
the ar ea of opaq ue line r w hen the tooth presents unstained cervic a l and margina l surfac es;
intraora l views (Fig 7-1 1b) are used as to pog raphi c maps to localize the stained area s. In
this w ay, the final veneers (Fig 7- 1 1e) w ill behave op tically like reg ular veneers, especia lly
in their relatio nship w ith the margin a l g ing iva
(o ptima l lig ht red istrib utio n, no o paque "wh ite
lines"), and simulta neo usly feature localized
o paque zone s masking on ly the sta ined are a s
of the teeth.
FIGURE 7- 11: SELECTIVE INTRINS IC MAS KING. The patient o rig ina lly presented w ith a genera lized dyspla sia of
enamel and preexisting full-coverage crown s o n maxillar y anterior teeth. Follow ing a co mp lex preparatory phase (see
Fig 4- 12 ), seco nd-ge neration provisional crowns w ere placed on the moxillorv teeth, a nd mandibular incisors a nd
pre molars were prepared for bo nded cera mics (7-1 1a J Severa l intraora l view s of the prepared surfaces w ere taken,
including photog rap hs w ith a custom shade gUide corresponding to the resid ual sta ining (7 -1 1b). These slides w ere
used by the cera mist as to pogr a phic maps to place d istinct patches of o paque liner onto the refracto ry dies (7-1 1c).
Translucent pow ders w ere used ce rvica lly a nd incisally because these area s w ere not sign ificantly stained (7-1 1d).
The inner surface of the fina l veneers d isplays a limited and intrinsic opaque zone (7-1 1e, arrowheads). C linica l situation just before try-in (7-1 1fl. Veneers w ere tried in alternately to control the masking effect (7-1 1g, 7-11 h); a neutra l, translucent g lycerin ielly ca n be used as a try-in paste.
326
.v ,
, v':
'.\'
7
I LA BO RAT O RY
PR OC ED URES
W hen the selective intrinsic masking concept is
fol low ed, the porc elain restorat io n inherently
masks the discoloration, w hich is noticea ble a t
the try-in stag e (Fig 7 -1 1h). The ma in advantage is that regular tran slucent co mposites ca n
be used for luting (there is no need fo r opaq ue
or nontran sparent luting agents).
Selective intrinsic masking con trasts w ith other
techniqu es used to hide discoloration . O ne
common method ignores the discoloration until
the final luting of the restoratio n; the ceramic
being devoid of marked opa city, a n opaque
liqui d resin must be pa inted at the inner surface
of the cera mic wo rkpiec e . The result is unpred ictable beca use these orga nic o paq ue liners
ca nnot be cured before the restoration is seated
[preliminary curing w ould risk a ltering the fit of
the restora tio n). As a result, the final thickness
and extent of the pa inted resin is too var ia ble .
W hen required, the porcela in should 'integ rate a n intrinsic opaque liner to co mpe nsate
for residua l di scoloration of the tooth, a nd the
use o f opaq ue luting resins shou ld be
avoide d . Use of opa q ue luting ag ents co uld
be responsib le for w hite lines a t the restora-
When trealing teeth for unsu ccessful p reliminary bleachin g, any bon ding procedures must
be delayed for a t least 2 to 4 w eeks after the
end of bleac hing because oxygen remnants
ca n inhibit the bo nd strength. N igh tguard vital
bleac hing beneath existing porcela in restorations is a lways po ssib le a nd vo luo ble-": it mig ht
not c hange the col or of the po rcelain, but it ca n
enha nce the apparent col or of the teeth in the
event of recurrent disco lorati on.
Preventive masking of nonvital teeth. N o nvital teeth are characterized by their unstab le
color. How ever, because BPRs can be placed
w ithout inva di ng the pa lata l surface (see Fig
4-7), interna l bleaching is possib le on pulpless
teeth w ith existing po rcela in veneers. A preventive approac h a nticipa tes the po tentia l relaps e by ap p lying a uniform and mode rate
o pa q ue liner to the ce ramic workpiece a t the
time of fa bricat io n.
To obta in uniform results when Sim ultaneously
veneering vita l and nonvital teeth, the same
stratifica tion technique (includ ing the opa que
liner) should be ap plied to a ll teeth.
tion marg ins, unnecessary uniform op acity of
the ce ra mic w orkp iece, and unfavora ble light
d istribution with the surrounding soft tissues .
FIGURE 7- 1 1 (CONTINUED). Ma nd ibular restorations are bo nded, but the ac rylic provisionals are still in place on
the moxlllo rv a nterior teeth [7-1 1 i); a separate impression w ill be made to fabri cate the final rnoxil lorv crow ns. Desp ite the underlyin g residual discoloration on the mand ibular teeth, the resto ratio ns were bo nded w ith a reg ular tra nslucent compo site. The cera mic integ rates w ell because o f the selective intrinsic masking . No opaq ue liner w as req uired
a t the ce rvica l level, o ptimiZing op tica l interactio n wi th the surro und ing tissues (7-1 1 j), Add itiona l view s of this case
ca n be found in Fig 4- 12 .
328
7
I LA B O RAT OR Y PR O CE DURE S
CONFIGURATION OF THE CERAMIC WORKP IECE
The structura l performan ce of brittle dental ma-
most unc racked spe c imens ha d a fa ci al rati o
terials ca nnot be d irectly correla ted to their
greater tha n this va lue . The C ER/C PR ra tio ap-
streng th volues."? Standard ceram ic p roperties
pears to have a relevant influence o n the stress
[flexura l streng th, fra cture to ugh ness) are not suf-
d istributi on in po rcela in la minates du e to bo th
fic ient to accoun t for the flaws in a clinica l situ-
the curing co ntrac tio n of the luting co mpos ite
a tio n. Configu ration fa cto rs of the restora tion
and the thermal expa nsio n coeffic ient mismatch
a lso p lay a key role, a nd thic kness might be the
of the two restorati ve material s invol ved.
most relevan t beca use it can be ob jective lv
con trolled by the operator (either the dental
These importa nt findin g s are summari ze d in Fig
techn ic ia n or cl inic ia n). As a matter o f fa ct, it is
7-12, w hic h a lso helps in und erstand ing w hic h
ofte n asked w hether there are rational gu ide-
elements can directly affect the CER/ C PR rat io
lines d efining the minimum possi b le thic kness of
an d therefore the crack p ropensity, ie, a luting
an a nterior BPR . At presen t, there are no ma g ic
numbers fixing the limit a t w hich the ceramic
200 ~m) and a
ce ramic veneer that is too thin [< 600 prn l.
workpiece becomes intrinsicall y too wea k. The
Their co mb ina tion logi cally lead s to the highest
structura l integr ity of
risk of fa ilure (F ig 7-12, D). Direct imp licati on s
the resto ra tio n results
mostly from its bond ing to the tooth substrate.
co mpo site that is too thick (>
ar ise for both the ceramis t and the cl inic ia n:
The theoret ic risk of fa ilure must therefo re include a ll elements of the tooth-restorat ion com p lex, including the luting composi te. The' term
of
• W hen the por celain is meant to reproduce the
preex isting con tour of the tooth (with out odd i-
spec ific material
live co ntour), the ceramic must be thinned a nd
p roper ties, ha s been pro po sed to c haracterize
the C ER/CPR ratio is compromised. In this sit-
the structural per forma nce of the g loba l resto ra-
uation , on ly a ve ry p rec ise internal fit of the
tive system.
restoration [< 100 ~ m ) w ill p revent the C ER/
crack pro pensity, instead
CPR ratio from dro p ping below the reco mExpe rimental-numeric tria ls have demo nstrated
mende d va lue of 3.0 (Fig 7-12, B). The im-
that the cra ck propensity of porcelain cou ld be
portance of a controlled an d uniform tooth
related to the respective thickness of luting co mpos ite (CPR) a nd cera mics (CER).12,i3
reduc tion must be po inted o ut because a minimal and homog eneous thickness of ceram ic
w ill provide the restoration w ith a favorable
Measuremen ts of ceramic s a nd luting co mpos-
co nfiguration [hig h C ER/C PR ratio). In the
ites were taken at d iffe rent locat io ns o f the
case of w o rn enamel surfa ces, it is essential to
restora tion (fa c ia l, inc isal, proxima l). W hen the
reestabli sh the o rig inal vol ume of the tooth . The
ratio of these va lues [C ER/ C PR) for eac h loca-
use of an addi tive d ia g nostic w axup a nd the
tion was consi dered, sig nifican t di fferences
corre spond ing silico n ma trices is imperol ive in
were obs erved : most crac ked porcela in ve-
this regar d because it increases the po tential
neers exhi bited a faci a l rotio be low 3 .0, wh ile
thickness of ceramic (Fig 7-1 2, A a nd C) .
330
LA BORATORY PROCEDURES
of
I
7
the
composite thic kness a t this lc ccti on.f The im-
restoration , espe cia lly at the facioa xia l level
• It is essential to o bta in a preci se fit
the preparati o n, w hic h often p resents the
proved quality o f bo th the prepara tion s
(smooth cont ours, absence of under cuts) and
lowest cerami c thic kness. During la bo ratory
the final imp ressio ns w ill sig nifica ntly faci litate
procedures, the di e spac er should be care-
the work of the ce ra mist, lea d ing to a mini mal
fully app lied to avoi d a n excessive luting
use
of
F A CI AL
of
die space r.
C ER /C P R
RA T I 0
FIGURE 7-12: POSSIBLE RANGE O F RE STORATIVE MATERIAL THICKNESS AND CORRESPONDII\,JG CRACK
PROPENSITY. Th e thickn ess of ceramic (C ER ) and composite (CPR) was varied to simulate four clinically relevant cases
[A to D). The CER/ CPR ratio [R) is given, alo ng w ith the average thickness of restorati ve materials in parenthesis (in
microns). The four tooth preparations are identical, Ve neers A and C are th icker to simulate an add itive contour,
whereas veneers Band D we re kept th in to reproduce th e original contour of th e tooth, Lu ting composite th ickness is
100 ~m for A and B, 20 0 ~ m for C and D. Minimu m risks of failure are found for thick veneers (> 6 0 0 ~m ) w ith thin
luting composites « 20 0 prn ], a configuration th at maintains a high C ER/C PR ratio (> 3 .0 )
33 1
7
I LAB ORATORY P ROCEDU RES
References
18 . Krejci I, Lutz F, Reimer M . M arg inal adaptation and fit of
adhesive cera mic inlays J Dent 19 9 3; 2 139- 46 .
1. M eijering AC, Roeters FJ, M ulder J, C reugers N H . Patients' sa tisfaction w ith di fferent types of veneer restorations. J Denl 19 9 7 ;25 :4 9 3-49 7 .
19 . Mag ne P, O h W S, Pintado MR, Delong R. Wear of
ena mel a nd veneering ceramics c lter la bora tory and
cha irside finishing procedures. J Prosthet Dent 19 9 9 ;8 2 :
669-679 .
2. M agne P, Douglas W H o Porcelain veneers: Dentin bonding oplimiza lion a nd biomimelic recovery o f Ihe crow n. Int
J Prosthodonl 19 9 9 ; 12 : 11 1-12 1.
20 . Ca lamia JR. C linica l eval ua tion of etched porcelain veneers. Am J Denl 19 89 ;2 :9-1 5.
3. Mag ne P, Doug las W H o C umula live effect of successive
restorative proced ures on anterior crow n flexure: Inlact versus veneered incisors. Q uintessence Int 2000;315-1 8.
4. Reeh ES, Ross GK . Tooth stiffness w ith composile veneers
A strain gaug e and finite element evaluation Dent Mater
1994; 10 :2 47-2 5 2 .
5. Lacy AM , W ad a C, Du W, Wa tana be L. In vitro rnicroleakoge o t the gingiva l marg in of po rcela in and resin
veneers. J Prosthet Denl 19 9 2 ;6 7 :7- 10
6 . Kreulen CM, C reugers N H, Mei jering AC. M eto-analysis
o f o nterior veneer reslora tions in clinica l stud ies. J Dent
19 9 8 ;26 :3 4 5- 35 3 .
7 . Meijering AC, C reugers N H, Roeters FJ, M ulderJ Survivol
of three types of veneer restorations in 0 clinica l trial: A
2 .5 -year interim eva luation. J Dent 19 9 8 ;26 :5 6 3-5 6 8.
8. M agne P, Perroud R, Hodges JS, Belser Uc. C linical performo nce o f novel-design po rcelain veneers for the recovery o f co ronal volume and length. Inl J Periodonlics Restoralive Dent 2000 ;20 :4 4 1- 45 7.
2 1. Peumans M , Va n Meerbeek B, lornbrechts P, VuylstekeWo uters M , Vanherle G. Five-year clinica l performance o f
porcela in veneers. Q uintessence Int 19 9 8 ;29 :2 1 1- 2 21 .
22. Fradea ni M . Six-year follow-up with Empress veneers. Inl J
Periodontics Restoralive Dent 1998; 18 21 6 - 2 25 .
2 3 . Friedman MJ A 15-year review of porcelain veneer fa ilure: A clin ician 's observatio ns. Compend C onlin Educ
Dent 19 9 8 ; 19 :6 25-636.
24 . Dumfahrt H . Porcela in laminole veneers. A retrospective
evalua tion oher 1 to 10 yeo rs of service : Pari II- Cli nical
results. Inl J Prosthodont 2000 ; 139-1 8 .
25 . Bruce GA. The Herbst method
Rec 189 ] ; 1 ] :47-48.
of filling
w ith gloss. Dent
26 . Roulel JF, Soderhol m KJ, Longma te J Effecls of trea tment
a nd storoge cond itions on cera mic/composite bond
strength. J Denl Res 19 9 5; 74 :3 8 1- 3 8 7.
27 . Sorensen JA, Strutz JM , Avero Sp' M aterdo mini D. M arg inol fide lity and microleakage of porcelain veneers mode
by two techniq ues. J Prosthei Dent 19 9 2 ;6 7 : 16-2 2 .
9. M ogn e P, versluls A, Doug las W H o Rationa liza lion o f incisor shope: Experimentol-numerical ana lysis J Prosthet
Denl 199 9 ;81 :345-35 5 .
28 . Wall JG , Reisbick M H, Espeleta KG . Ceme nt luting thickness beneath porcelain veneers made on plalinum foil. J
Proslhel Dent 19 9 2 ;6 8 448-450.
10. Lin CP, Doug las W H o Structure-property relations and
crock resistance a t Ihe bovine dentin-enamel junction. J
Dent Res 19 9 4 ;7 3 : 1072- 1078.
29 . Sim C, Ibbelson R. C ompo rison of fil of porcelai n veneers
fa bricaled using different lechniques. Int J Prosthodonl
19 9 3 ;6 :36-4 2
1 1. M agn e P, Doug las W H o Desig n optimiza tion and evolu-
30. Sheets CG, Ton iguchi T A rnullidie technique for the fabrication o f po rcelain la mina te veneers. J Prosthet Dent
19 9 3 ;7 0 :29 1- 29 5
tion o f bonded ceramics for the anterior dentition: A finite
element a nalysis. Q uinlessence Int 19 9 9 ;30 :66 1- 672 .
12. Magne P, Kwo n KR, Belser UC , HodgesJS, Doug las W H o
C rac k p ro pensity o f porcelain lami nale veneers: A simulated operalory eva luation. J Prosthet Denl 19 9 9 ;81 :
327-33 4 .
13 . M ag ne P, Versluis A, Doug las W H o Effect o f luting co mposile shrinkage a nd therrnol loads on the stress di stribution in porcela in la minale veneers. J Proslhel Dent 19 9 9 ;
8 1.335-344.
14 . Highton R, C ap ulo AA, Matyas J A photoelastic study o f
stress on porcelain la mina te preparations. J Prosthet Dent
1987 ;5 8 : 15 7-1 6 1.
15. Mogne P, Douglas W Ho Interdental design of porcelain
veneers in the presence of co mposiles fillings: Finite element a nalysis of co mposite shrinkoge and thermal stress.
IntJ Prosthodonl 2000; 13 : 117 -1 24.
16. De Long R, Sc sik C, Pintado M R, Douglas WHo The wear
of enamel w hen opposed by ceramic systems. Dent M ater
19 89 ;5 :266-271.
17 . Seg hi RR, Rosenstiel SF, Bouer P. Ab rasion of human
enamel by d ifferenl denial ceramics in vilro. J Dent Res
19 9 1;70: 2 2 1- 2 25 .
332
31 . C hiche GJ, Pi nault A. Esthetics o f A nterior Fixed Prosthodo ntics. C hicago : Qu intessence, 19 94 : 16 9-1 70 .
32 . Scha fer F, [ o rschke I, Meyer G . Marg inal adapta tion o f
Ducera m-LFC O D-inlays. In: Komma 0 led). Hydro thermal
Dental Ceramic Systems: A N ew C loss o f M a terials.
Hana u-W olfgang , Germa ny : Ducera , 19 9 3: 26 .
33 . Adai r PG , G rossman DG. The casta ble cera mic crow n. Inl
J Periodontics Restoralive Dent. 1984 ;4 :32-46 .
3 4 . Beham G . IPS-E mpress: Eine neue Keramik-Technolog ie.
Ivoclar-Vivadenl Repo rt 1990 ;6: 3-14 .
35 . Sado un M, Deg ra nge M, Heim N. Les ce rorn iq ues dentai res. 2 erne par tie: Les nouvelles cerorn iq ues. J Biomater
Dent 1987;3:6 1- 6 9 .
36. Kern M , Strub JR. Bonding to olumina ceramic in restorative denlistry: C linical results over up to 5 years. J Denl
19 9 8 ;26 :24 5-249
37 . Tja n A H, W hang SB, Tjan AH, Sarkissi an R. C linically oriented evaluation of the accuracy o f commonly used impression rncteriols. J Prosthet Dent 19 86 ;5 6 :4 - 8 .
LABORATORY PROCE DURES
38 Tu il CM , Rosen M , Co hen J. Becker Pj. Effect of impression technique a nd multiple pours on acc uracy of slone
models J Dent Assoc South Air 1991 ;46: 5 15- 5 18.
~ M ag ne M, Belser uc. The esthetic w idth in
fixed prosthodo ntics. J Prosthod ont 1999;8: 106- 118
39 . M ag ne
40 . Lavigne J, Lucchini JP, Spirg i M . Use of a mounting ta ble
for arb itrary hinge transfer on a n articulator. Schweiz
M onatsschr Za hnheilkd 1979; 89 :125 1- 1256.
41 Bowley JF, Michaels GC, La i TW, Lin PP Relia bility of a
facebow Iransfer procedure. J Prosthet Dent 1992;67 :
491 - 49 8.
42 Magne P. M egabrasion: A conservative slralegy for Ihe
anterior dentition. Pracl Periodontics Aesthel Dent 1997;
9389- 395 .
43 Borges C FM , Mag ne P, pfender E, He berlein J Diamond
burs mad e w ith a new technology. J Prosthet Dent 1999 ;
82:73-79 .
44 PaHerso n CJ. M cLundie AC , Stirrups DR, Taylor W G Efficacy of a po rcelain refinishing syslem in resloring surface
finish o lter g rinding w ith fine a nd extra-fine d iamond burs.
J Prosthet Dent 1992 ;68 :402 - 406
45 . C ampbell SD. Evaluation of surface roughness a nd polishing techniques for new cera mic materials. J Prosthet
Dent 19 89;6 1:56 3- 56 8.
46 G rieve AR, Jeffrey IW , Sharma S]. An evaluation of three
methods of polishing po rcela in by co mparison of surface
topogra phy w ith the orig inal g loze . Restorative Dent
199 1;7:34- 36 .
47. Sulik W D, Plekavich Ej. Surface finishing of dental porcelain. J Prosthet Dent 19 8 1;46 :2 17-22 1.
48 Klausner LH , C artwright C B, C harbenea u GT Polished
versus autoglazed porcelain surfaces. J Prosthet Dent
1982;47: 157-1 6 2.
I 7
49 . Scurria M S, Pow ers JM. Surface roughness of two polished cera mic materia ls. J Prosthet Denl 1994;7 1:
174- 177.
50. Haywood VB, Heymann HO , Kusy RP, W hiiley JQ , And reaus SB. Polishing porcela in veneers: An SEM a nd
specula r reflectance a nalysis. Dent M a ter 19 88;4 :
116- 12l.
5 1. Haywood VB, Heymann HO , Scurria MS . Effects of
wafer, speed , and experimenta l instrumentation o n finishing and po lishing porcelain inlra-ora lly. Dent Mater 19 89 ;
5: 185-1 88.
52 . Brew er JD, G arlapo DA, Chipps EA, Tedesco LA. C linica l
d iscrimination between autoglazed and polished porcela in surfaces. J Prosthet Dent 1990;64 6 31- 6 34 .
53 . Sulik W D, Plekavich Ej. Surface finishing of denta l porcela in. J Proslhel Dent 1981 ;46217-221 .
54 . Mag ne P, Mag ne M. Porcelain veneers at the turn of the
millenium: A w indow to biomimetics [ in French]. Real C lin
199 8;9 :329-34 3.
55 . Belser U, Magne P, M agne M . Cerami c laminale veneers:
Continuous evolution of indica tions J Esthet Dent 1997;9:
197-207.
56 . Lombardi RE . The principles of visua l perception a nd Iheir
cli nical a pplica tion 10 denture esthetics. J Prosthet Dent
1973;29 :358- 382
57. G oldstein RE. Esthetics in Dentistry. Philadelphia : li ppincott, 1976:425-455 .
58 . Haywood VB, Parker M H . N ightguard vita l bleaching beneath existing porcelain veneers: A case repor t. Q uintessence Int 1999; 30 :74 3- 747 .
59 . Kelly JR. Perspective on slrength. Dent Mater 1995 ;11:
10 3-11 0.
60 . Barghi N , Berry TG . Post-bonding crock formalion in porcelain veneers. J Esthet Dent 1997;9:51-54.
333
-
.
,'.
"",
\
CHAPTER
8
TRY-I N AN D ADH ESIVE
LUTING PROCEDURES
The structural integr ity of the intact tooth ha s been expla ined in por t by the
structure/ pro perty rela tio nship at the d entinoenam el junction [DEJ). Ena mel
and dentin a lone do not have outstan d ing mechan ica l properties. Nevertheless, w hen assembled at the DEJ , they ha ve a unique structure that can
ensu re optima l functio n and stress tran sfer for a lifetime . The same statement can be cla imed for bo nded porcelain restorat ions, and the DEJ sets
the reference for the ce ramic-composite-too th restora tive co mplex . Successful bond ing
of the
ce ramic w o rkpiece ca n be obta ined by the rigor-
o us a pplicatio n o f seq uentia l procedu res including specific cond itioning
of
the surface s involved , ie, the ce ramic surface (etching a nd sila ne a pplica tio n) and the minera lized dental tissues (etching o f the ename l, cond itio ning
of
the den tin). This cha pter addresses in de tail eac h step
of
the luting
pro ced ures. A dd itio no l considerali o ns incl ude the specia l a pproa ch to
denti n bo nd ing, the possible effects o f co mpos ite shrinkage, and the cra ck
propensity
of po rcela in.
8
I
T RY- IN A N D A D H ESIV E L UT ING P RO C ED U RES
CHOICE OF LUTING C OMPO SITE RESIN
As far as the success of final bo nd ing is concerned , it relies on the adeq ua te prepara tio n
and co ndi tion ing of the surfaces involved . This
to 90 seconds per surface is sufficient for a nterio r BPRs, whi ch are much thinner than inlays
and o nlay s. In co nclusio n:
co nd itio ning should ultimately provide a d urab le
bo nd betvveen the substrate (tooth or po rcelain)
and the luting composite . The cho ice of the lat-
1. A nterio r BPRs ca n be luted using a reg ular
light-cu ring restorati ve composi te provided
ter raises a critica l prob lem: due to their a bility
to flow a nd self-po lymerize , d ual-cure material s
that an extended curing mode is ap plied .
Traditional light-curing resins offer co nsider-
are mista kenly preferred over the solely lig ht-curing a nd more viscous com posites. No scientific
a ble adva ntages d ue to their ease of manipula tion (unlimited w o rking time, ideal
studies have differentia ted the clin ica l pe rfo rmance of these materials. How ever, none will
co nsistency),2 favo ra ble physicomecha nica I
pro perties (hig her filler co ntent), and color
stabi lity.4
d isag ree o n the fact that a suffic ient w o rking
time is essentia l to the co rrect positio ning of the
restoratio n and car eful elimina tion of excess
resin. In this regard, d ual-cure cements are subject to con troversy: their self-curing ability is in-
O ne sho uld select a rather neutral com posite (Fig 8-1) permitting lig ht redistri butio n
and dee p curing (ie, inc isal-type translu-
versely related to thei r w o rking time a nd their
flowa bility renders excess resin removal extremely d ifficult. A nother d ilemma of dual -cure
ce nt), com pa tible w ith the inheren t luminosity of the restorati o n itself (ie, slig htly fluo-
com posites is the co mpro mise betvveen their de-
viscosity o f co mposite resins is inversely re-
gre e
of convers io n a nd
their color instability due
to a mine deqrodo tion .'
rescent ). It is impo rta nt to re membe r that the
lated to the ternpero ture." Fine hybrid s ca n
become very thick w hen handled in cool
ai r-cond itioned
For these
co mb ined
reaso ns,
lig ht-c uring
o pera tory
room s. In this
restorat ive co mposites (fine hybrid s) have been
case , placi ng the composite syring e in a resea la ble bag in a lukewar m w a ter bath w ill
proposed as luting agents even for ce ram ic in-
reduce film thickness.
lays. It w as demo nstrated that d ua l-cure resins
had
no advantag es ove r solel y light-curing
products w ith respect to po lvrnerizoti on rete,
provided that ea ch proxirno l resto red surface is
cured for a t least 120 seco nds (regu lar curing
mode]." This luting protocol has been used suc-
2 . In most cl inica l situation s, d ua l-cure luting cements ca n be o mitted because
of
their d iffi-
cult ha ndli ng a nd uncerta in chemi ca l stability [a mine degrada tion ). Indicati o ns for
d ual-cure prod ucts remai n limited to ce ra mic
cessfully for mo re than 8 years even in cases of
anteri or bo nded po rcelain restoration s (BPRs)
w ith extensive incisal edge span s of cera mic. 3
w o rkpieces of extreme fac ia l thickness (> 2
mm) o r to situa tio ns in w hic h the venee rs
Using higher intensity modes (eg , 800 to
severe residua l di scol orat io n).
1,0 0 0 mW / ern "], reduced curing times o f 60
336
have been rendered high ly o paq ue (as for
BLACK LIGHT
DIRECT LIGHT
INDIRECT LIGHT
...
FIGURE 8-1: CURED SAMPLES OF INCISAL COMPOSITES. Beca use of their neutral and tra nslucent nature, incisa l
shades of regular ligh t-curing restorative materials can be used as luting agents for anterior BPRs (8- 1o ]. Esthetic properties of the selected materia l ca n be evaluated under black lig ht (8-1 b, featuring two inci sal shades, the o ne on the
right be ing insufficiently lurnmescent]. Direct (8- 1c) or transmitted (8-1d) light should also revea l a certain de gree of
opalescence . Some ba tches may present numerous a ir vo ids (visible in 8-1c a nd 8- 1d), whic h must be detected beforehan d by pressing a sample of the material between two glass slides (8-1e). A word of caution : So me incisa l
shades do not have enough radi opacity, w hich limits the effectiveness of radiogra phs du ring the final check a nd
further follOw-up of restored teeth.
8
I
T RY- IN AND ADHESI VE LU T ING PROC EDUR ES
TRY-IN AND PREPARATOR Y STEPS
Final insertion of the ceramic piece must be preceded by a meticulous try-in (Fig 8-2) . Follow -
fication of esthetic a ttri butes and to make sure
that the d iagnostic template has bee n re-
ing remova l o f the prov isio nal, a soft silico n cu p
(Haw e-N eos) an d a light abras ive pa ste are
spected . At no moment should the pat ient be
allowed to totally clo se the bite. This co uld
used to clea n the prepared surface s. W hen
ca use fracture.
pro visiona ls have been secured by spot etch ing
(see Figs 6 -25 g to 6 -25 iL a sca ler or abrasive
disks (at low speed ) must be used to remove the
Lengthy try-in time must be avo ided bec a use de-
ad hesive resin from the spo t-etched area o f the
tooth. The followi ng try-in seq uence is recom-
eva luatio n. N o try-in pa ste is required co nsidering that the po rcelain w o rkpiece sho uld feature
mended :
sufficient intrinsic optica l pro perties (see Fig 71 1). Porcelain surfaces co nta mina ted wi th try-in
1. The restorations must first be checked o n their
origin al sto ne di e (sea ting a nd marg inal fit).
pro ducts must be car efully clea nsed w ith resin
solvents [aceto ne, etha nol , methanol, o r methylene chloride) .6,7
2 . Each restoration is then individua lly placed in
hydr a tion of reference teeth can a lter the colo r
situ to check the adaptatio n w ith a probe .
Note that incom plete seating is rarely due to
internal fit pro blems but typica lly results from
excess provisiona l luting resin th at has acc umulated o n interdental surfaces
ing teeth.
.
of
neighbor-
3 . A ll restorations are then placed in ad jace nt
groups to verify proximal relationships.
4. Once fitted together in situ, the restorations
are shown to the patient wi th a mirror for veri-
W hen a refract o ry d ie techniq ue is used , the
resto ration sho uld be finished as much as possible before the first try-in because o nly low -fusing cera mics can be used once the refractory
die material has been removed . In most cases,
the try-in procedure should only co nfirm the di ag nostic templ ate a nd be immed ia tely follow ed by the final luting.
FIGURE 8-2 : TRY-IN. Removal of the pro visional s (8-2a ) reveals unfilled resin co vering the internal surfac e of the veneer except for the spot-etched area (8-2b, arrowhead); the unfilled resin must be removed at the correspo nd ing loca tio n on the tooth surface using a sca ler o r abra sive di sks at low speed (8-2c) Tooth prepara tions are then clea ned
w ith a soft a brasive paste a nd a rubber cup (8-2d ). The restorati ons must be checked on the stone ca sts, first indlvid uo llv, then in od jocent groups (8-2e to 8-2g) . The same proce d ure is ca rried out in the mouth (8-2h, 8-2 i).
338
8
I TRY-IN AN D A DHESIVE L UTING PROCEDURES
Try-in alw ays results in some kind
of
chemi cal
be carr ied out under rubber dam . Ad d itional in-
the surfac es to be bonded
for mation for final sea ting ca n be found la ter in
an d , thus, a potent ia l red uction of the future
bon di ng . C o nsequently, ce ra mic an d enamel
surfaces sho uld be systema tica lly condi tio ned
a fter try-in. not before .g
this c hapter unde r "Interdenta l adj ustments d uring luting procedu res." The entire bo nd ing process is then pe rformed a fter seg ments of trans-
contaminatio n
of
As fo r a ll ad hesive techni q ues, the definit ive insertio n of the restoration s has to be preceded
by o ptima l isola tio n o f the w o rking field w ith
rubber dam , o r at least wi th a deflectio n cor d
if a pplication of ru bber da m proves extremely
di fficult. A last try-in of the la mina te veneer must
parent matrice s and interdental w edges ha ve
been pla ced . The latter prec au tio n pro tects
neig hbor ing teeth from the etcha nt, facilita tes
insertio n of the la mina te veneer to its final position , and ultimately prevents ac cumu lation of
excess luting compos ite in the interproxi ma l
area .
FIGURE 8-2 [CO N TIN UED): Sea ting of BPRs must be eva luated by try ing the restorations in od joce nt g roups (8-2 j,
8-2 k). Final ad justments, how ever, must be carri ed out a fter placement of rubber dam . The latter is placed over the
teeth to be bo nded includ ing o ne add itional tooth o n each side of the co ncerned segmen t; luting of four incisors implies plac ing rubber dam from can ine to ca nine a nd cla mp ing the first premolar (8-2 1). A n o ptimal ope ratory field ca n
be obtai ned by placin g one add itio na l cla mp (Ivory #9 o r #2 12) on the first too th to be bonded (8-2 m, solid rectangle; 8-2n); the clam p is moved to the next tooth as cementatio n proceeds (8-2m , dotted rectangles). Each time, the
restora tio n is tried aga in for the fina l ad justments (8-20); w ooden w edges a nd a matrix a re then inserted to protect
neig hbor ing teeth from cont a mination by chemica ls a nd luting agents [8-2 p). (Patient treated in co llabo ratio n w ith Dr
N . Pera kis, University of G eneva ]
340
8
I T RY-IN AN D ADH ESIV E LU TIN G PRO CED U RES
CONDITIONING OF THE CERAMIC SURFACE
It is wid ely recogni zed and ba sed o n scientific
evidence that a co mb ination of microme chan ico l interlocking (hyd rof luo ric etching ) a nd chem-
Micromechanical interlocking:
Hydrofluoric etching
ica l co upling (sila nizatio n) is requir ed to ob tai n
the most effective bo nding of feldspathic po rcela ins.9 , I O
A co mmon protocol is to a pply 10% hydroflu oric (HF) acid for 90 seconds (eg, Biod ent InlayKera mik, Dentsply / DeTrey) to the inner surface
of the resto ration (Fig 8-3b) . This procedure has
to be pe rfor med under strict protective measures co mprising rubber gloves, mask, and protective g losses.
.
C areful handling of the restoratio n is req uired
duri ng the co nd itio ning step s. Soft sticky w ax
can be used to hold the ceram ic workpiece at
the tip of a flat instrument (Fig 8-30 1, eg, on old
large a malga m co ndenser.
A fter rinsing (Fig 8-3cl, the cera mic resid ue
a nd reminera lized salts (Figs 8-3d and 8-3e)11
must be eli minated by pla ci ng the restoration
in di stilled w ater, 9 5% a lco ho l, o r aceto ne in
o n ultrasonic both fo r 4 to 5 minutes (Figs 83f a nd 8-3g ].
FIGURE 8-3: ETCHING AND CLEANING OF THE CERAMIC WORKPIECE . The cera mic wo rkpiece ca n be easily
handled using a flat-ended instrument (eg, Acc u Placer, Hu-Friedy, o r a Iorge a malga m co ndenser) an d sticky wax (83a ) The internal surface of the cera mic is etched w ith 10% hyd rofluo ric ac id for 90 seco nds [8-3 b) a nd rinsed (83c) Even abundant rinsing proves insufficient to clea n the po rcela in, which is offen co nta minated by a w hite residue
or de posit (8-3d ; 8-3e , scan ning electron microg ra ph, o rigi nal magnification x l ,200 ) The latter ore selectively removed by plac ing the restorations in a n ultraso nic ba th (in 95% a lco hol, ace tone, o r d istilled wa ter) for 4 to 5 minutes 18-3f , 8-3g ). White resid ues that ore resista nt 10 this proced ure ca n be removed w ith a brush and a lco hol.
342
,
\'\'
'
\,\
C A UTION !
RE SIDUES TO BE
RE M O VED
,
[I
,\
.,.
\
'.
8
I
TR Y-I N AN D A DHE SI VE LU TING PR O CED URE S
Due to the abund ant glassy matrix surro und ing
the c rystalline phose . feldspa thic po rcelai ns
offe r an ide a l substrate for hyd rof luoric ac id
co nd ition ing : di ssol ution of the g lassy matrix ultimately leaves retentive holes a nd tunnels betwe en the acid -resista nt crysta ls (Fig 8-4) . Ultrasonic cleani ng is essen tia l to enlarge and
enhance access to these undercuts." Energy
d ispersive spectrosco py ana lyses have shown
that the crystalline precipitates o n the etched
surfaces, w hich are not read ily solub le in w a ter,
are the reaction prod ucts of sod ium, pota ssium,
cc lciurn. and a luminum. The precipitates remain on the surface after acid a pplica tio n; they
can be removed on ly by ultrasonic clea ning ,
not by rinsinq . "
Practitioners must be extremely prude nt when
co nd itioning other types of ce ramics. They must
be aware that the tensile fracture resistance of
the co mposite-ceramic ad hesion zones is co ntrolled primarily by ceramic microstructure and
cera mic surface treatment. For insta nce :
• HF co nd itioning is una ble to generate a retentive surface on highly crystalline ceramics with
poor g lassy co ntent (eg , In-C eram [Vita] o r Procera [N obel Biocare] co re materials) o r pure
noncrystalline ceramics (eg Ducera LFC hyl
drothermal g loss [Ducera] ). Add itional steps
ore required for some of these products to
generate a positive mechanical interlockinq .
eg , through the sintering of silica peri cles."
• Lithiu m-based hot-pressed ceramics can be efficiently conditioned by both HF conditioning
a nd silo nization, wh ereas the bo nd ing of leucite-based hot-pressed ce ramics is dominated
by chemica l cou pling alo ne (sila ne) and ca n
be Significantly w eakened by acid applicalion ."
Chemical coupling: Silanization
To avoid conlo rninotio n. the fina l try-in of the
restora tio n (Fig 8-5 b) must always precede hydrofluoric etching (Fi g 8-5c ) and sila niza tio n.
Because of the silica co ntent of feldspa thic
po rceloin. a c hemical bond ca n be po tentia lly
ach ieved between the porcelain and the luting
resin. This bond req uires co upling molecules,
ie, ym ethacryl oxypropyl trimethoxysilan e, a lso
cal led o rga nofunctio nal silanes. They ore typica lly used as adhes ion promoters between
ino rganic substrates a nd org an ic poly mers.
Silane-treated porcelain o ffers improved w ettability and methacry late g roups that can form a
bond with the methacr ylate groups in the resin.
FIGURE 8-4 : SCANNING ELECTRON MICROPHOTOGRAPHS OF FELDSPATHIC PORCELAIN . (Top) High-mag nifica tion view of the po rcela in [C rec tio n, Klema) surface after simula ted removal of investment ma teria l by microsa ndblasting wi th 5 0- ~m g lass beads. The retentive charac ter of this surface is insufficient; no deep undercuts are observed.
Origi na l mag nifica tio n x l ,20 0. (Middle) G enera l view of ceramic sa mple for co mparison between microsa ndbla sted and microsandb lasted /etched surfaces. O rig ina l mag nification x 30 0. (Bottom) Po rcelai n surface after etching with 10% hydrof luo ric acid for 90 seconds [Refentionsgel, Biodent ) and ultrasonic cleaning . The surface is highly
retentive and show s co nnections ("tunnels") betw een micro porosities (arrowheads) Ori g inal mag nification X 1, 200 .
344
8
I T RY-I N AN D ADHES IVE LU TING
Silani zatio n
of
PROC EDURES
po rcela in is a rather de licate
and sensitive proced ure and must be performed in acco rda nce with scientific a nd established gUidelines l 6 :
• Silanes should be p urchased in a nonactive
state because in an aqueous environment, activated silanes w ill react w ith themselves and
precip itate out of solution. For this reason,
dual-co mpo nent sila nes (two-bottle systems,
eg , Silicoup, Heraeus Kulzer; Fig 8-5a) are
preferred over o ne-bottle produc ts .
• Silane solutions co ntain a high volume of solvents (eg, 90% ethyl acetate in Silicoup Bottle
Al; inadeq uately sea led or opened conta iners
will allow ra pid evaporalion a nd affect the effici ency of the sila ne. In two-bo ttle prod ucts,
one bottle con tains an acid (eg, approximately 5% acetic acid in Silico up Bottle A)
a nd the other nonhydrolyzed silane [Bottle B)
to be activated [hyd rolyzed via the acid). Such
a prod uct can be used for 4 weeks following
activati on . After drying, the etched ceramic
surface is covered w ith 2 to 3 coa ts of the active silane solution (Figs 8-5d and 8-5e). The
solvent should be a llowed to eva po rate betwee n layers.
• Heat treatment wil l significantly enhance the
promoting effect of the silane 8, 17 by conden sing the coup ling molecules o nto the cerami c
surface. This step ca n be achieved in 1 minute
by placi ng the restoration in a d ry furnace at
10 0 °C [Fig 8-5 f) o r in 2 minutes w ith a hair
346
dryer. It is believed to eliminate w ater and
other co nlc rn ino nts."
Chemica l co upling to highly cry sta lline ceram ics w ith poor silica content leg , In-Ceram, Proce ra) req uires the assistance o f tribochem ical
silica coa ting (Co jet, 3M Espe) to crea te bi nding sites for the silane molecules .
Application of adhesive resin
and luting composite
Lig ht-curing resins must be prepared in ad vance
on a mixing pad and p rotected with a light
shield (Fig 8-5g; Viva pad , Vivadent]. The fina l
preparat ion of the ceramic surface is obtained
by applying o ne coat of adhesive resin to the
inner surface of the ce ramic (Figs 8-5 h a nd 85 il, fol lowed by gen tle thinning w ith a ir. A homogeneous bulk of an incisal-type fine hybrid
co mposite is then app lied to the ceram ic surface (Figs 8-5j and 8-5k ). Particular attention
should be taken to avoid the incorpo ratio n of
a ir bubbles between co mpos ite and ceramic.
This w o uld create areas of ligh t absorptio n
(gray spots), w hich can be visible after ce menta tio n. Use of composites co nd itioned in compules (Fig 8-5j l can prevent these prob lems.
The ve neer, loaded wi th the composite, is then
stored under the light shield (Fig 8-5 1) while the
operator prepares the tooth surface .
,
, ', '
.v
,\
APPLIC ATION O F C O !VIP0 SITER ESIN
~ ~~EI"------=liJ
"
".....,....------ -~-
\
FIGURE S-5: STEP-BY-STEP CONDITIONING OFTHEC'ERAMICSURFACE. Duel-component silane solutions must be "
oc tivo tedtr rsttcoufion: some products m,ayreq u i(~ an octivotion delay) and stored in a closed flask'(8-5a).A final
, check of the res toration's seating is 'car ried out under rubber dam (8-5 bL which 'must precede surface cond itio ning .
' S~ r face condi tioning includes 90-secondetching w ith hydrofluoric acid (8-5 c) followed by abundan t rinsing and ultrasonic cleaning . The etched ' porcelo tnsurloce rnusl.be dried (facilitated by ap plication df 95% alcohol'follpwed by
air drying) before the silanei s applied. Several layers of silane can b e app lied by olter ~ a te ly coa t i ng and a ir drying ,
the porcelain 18-5d " 8-5el . Comp lete evaporat ion of the solvent and other contaminants is obtained by heat treating
0
the porcelai n workp iece .ot 100
for at least 1 minute, using a hair dryeror a .srno ll portable furnace'(S-5 f; eg, "
Coitene DI500) . Fu rth er stepsabsolutelyrequire a mixing pod wi th alightshield (S-5g). The etched' and silcne-treoted
porcela in can then be coated with ad hesive resin (8-5h , S-5i1;the excess ad hesive resin ca n be suctioned but not
cured . It is immed iately followed by loodinq of the compositer esin (S-5i, s-5 k). T he lood edporceloin 'workpiece ca n
be safely stored under the light,shield (S-51) w hile the operator proceeds to co nditioning of the tool hsurlo ce . (Patien t
"
'
'
.
'
treated in collaboration with Dr N. Perokis, University of G eneva :) ,
e
8
I TRY-IN A ND AD HESIVE L UTING PROCEDURES
CO",IDITIONING OF THE TOOTH SURFACE
Differen t cl ini ca l situatio ns must be distin gUished .
situation , var ious extrinsic co ntamina nts ca n
a lter further adhesion to den tin. As a lready mentioned in C ha pter 6 (unde r "Immed ia te dentin
bon d ing"L such a situatio n must be anticipated
Enamel only
a nd solved at the time of tooth preparatio n because al l afo rementio ned pro blems ca n be pre-
W hen 80% to 9 0 % of the prepared surface is
located w ithin ena mel, surfac e co nd itio ning is
limited to 30-second etching w ith 37% phospho ric ac id (eg, Ultratech , Ultrad entL foll ow ed
by rinsing and d ryi ng . O ptima l d ry ing ca n be
o bta ined by a ppl y ing o ne d rop of a lco ho l
(Without rubbing ) an d a ir d ryi ng the surface .
vented by the immedi ate a pplicat ion and curing
of the dentin cdhesive. prio r to ta king the final
irn pression. "'? ' This preca ution not only enha nces bo nd ing a nd protection of the pulpdentin com plex but a lso prevents tooth sensitivity during the provisiona l phase. A t the time o f
fina l bondi ng of the restoratio n, the surface of
the ad hesive must be meticulously clea nsed w ith
pumice . Filled ad hesives (eg , O ptibo nd FL,
Kerr) ca n be efficien tly "reactivated" by ro ugheni ng wi th a larg e-grain d iamond bur a t low
speed'? o r by microsand blasting w ith the finest
sa nd (eg , 30-~m COjet sa nd, 3M Espe; Figs 86 a to 8-6c) . The bo nding procedure itself Will,
therefore, be limited to ename l co nd itio ning , ie,
phospho ric acid etching (F igs 8-6d to 8-6f) and
rinsing (Fig 8-6 g L followed by alcohol drying
(Figs 8-6 h and 8-6 i) and a pplicatio n of the adhesive resin (Figs 8-6 j to 8-6 1).
Significant dentin exposure
If a considerab le area of dentin has been ex·
posed du ring tooth preparation, it is suggested
that a den tin ad hesive be applied immediately
and strictly acco rd ing to the- manufacturer's instructions. A sig nifica nt problem arises when exposed dentin has not been protected and
sea led d uring the provisio na l stage, between
prepara tio n and fina l insertion of the BPR . In this
348
- - - - - , , . . . . - - - - - - - - - - - - - -- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - --
, - - ----r:;;;;i!illIiii;SwrU-R-FA_C
,E R0 UGH EN IN G (M IC R0 SAN D BLA STI N G I
,...,.--"r---.--=--=..,
RINSING AND A LCOHO L DRY ING
A PPLI CATI O N OF ADHESIV E RE SI N
~'~H£-
r--~..........---=-----........-__
FIGURE 8-6: STEP-BY-STEP CONDITIONING OF THE TOOTH SURFACE. This tooth revea led extensive dentin exposures at the time of preparat ion; the entire dentin surface had been sealed immediately before ta king the final impression . As a result, the adhesive layer (Op tibond FLJ, whic h covers an extensive pa rt of the preparation (8-6a, dotted oreal, must be reactivated by surface roughening (8-6b, 8-6c ; microsand blasting w ith Co jet sand a nd M icroetcher
[Danville]). The tooth surface ca n be etched w ith phosphoric ac id [8-6d to 8-6f) for 30 seconds to clea nse the adhesive surface and co ndi tion the enamel. The etchanf is elimina ted by abu nda nt rinsing (8-6g); a dry surface can be
ob tai ned by applying alcohol via a colton pellet (8-6h; no scrubbing) and allow ing the prepa ration to air d ry (8-6i).
The prepara tion is then coa ted wi th ad hesive resin (8-6 j to 8-61). The excess ad hesive resin can be suctioned but not
cured . It is immediately followed by insertion of the load ed ceramic w orkpiece (see Fig 8-7).
8
I T RY-I N AN D A DHESIVE LU TING
PR OCEDURE S
PLA C EMEN T O F THE CE RAM IC RES TO RATIO N
The first step in the final placement of the resto ra-
floss ing must be avo ided a t this unpol ymerized
stag e becau se it co uld either crock, d isplac e,
tion is to apply one coo t o f adhesive resin to the
tooth (see Figs 8-6 i to 8-6 1), follow ed by gen tle
a ir thinni ng. From that moment o n, the w or king
o r de tac h the porcelai n w o rkp iece from the
tooth ; excess composite can be easily chipped
field must be free from intense light (cha irside
o ff w ith a sca lpel fol lowing pol y meriza tion.
la mp o r o thers); prema ture curing o f this coa ting
must be prevented , as it w ould precl ude the perfect sea ting of the restora tio n.
The light curing star ts at the pa lata l aspect for
The restora tion is slowl y sea ted wi th gentle finger pressure a lo ng the insertio n ax is (Fi g 8-70) .
Gross excess o f composite is eli mina ted w ith
the tip o f an explo rer previously loa ded w ith unfilled adh esive resin (Figs 8-7 b and 8-7 c). The
9 0 seco nds (Fig 8-7 jl at g reater tha n 8 5 0
mW / cm2 (eg , O p tilux 501 , Kerr/ Demetron,
Crnode w ith 8-mm Turbo+ tip). Intermittent curing must be a pplied to ovo id hea ting of the soft
tissues; in this respect, a protective bar rier (eg ,
O po ldo rn. Ultradent) ca n be placed between
instrument is g Uided in a cutting motion parallel
the rubber da m and the ging iva . Polymerization of the bucca l aspect fol low s for 6 0 sec-
of co mposite
o nds/ intermittently/ a t each interproxima l area .
to the margin to ovoid extrac tio n
of
the marg inal area must be
from the margin al jo int. Digital pressure and excess eliminot ion are a Iterna tely repea ted . Inter-
Polymeri zat ion
denta l w edges a nd matrices are then removed
[Figs 8-7d and 8-7 e) to a llow the co mplete a nd
layer of g lycerin ge l (Fig 8-7k; K-YJelly, Joh nson
& Joh nso n). Due to oxyg en inhibitio n d uring
pa ss ive sea ting
of
the restorati on. This stage
per fo rmed a fter covering the co mposite w ith a
ca n be obj ec tively ac hieved w hen the finger
pressure does not provoke a ny further protru-
poly meriza tion, marg ins poly merized w itho ut
g lyce rin gel show a ra pid degradati on co mpared to ai r-blocked rnorqins." G lyc erin is
sio n of co mposite ceme nt at the marg in (Fig 87 f). A clean brush is used to elimina te the lost
w a ter sol uble an d ca n be ea sily rinsed o ff (Fig
8-7 1).
excess
350
of
resin (F igs 8-7g to 8-7 i). Interdental
,
.
'.,',
'\
\
\
I N ITIA L I N SERTI O N AN D GROSS EXCE SS REMOVA L
" REMOVAL O F MATRIC ES AND FINAL INSERTION
FINE EXCE SS REMOVA L
FIGURE 8-7: STEP-BY-STEP INSERTION OF THE'CERAMIC RESTORATION. The resiora tioncan be initially inserted
wh ile wedg es andmatrices are in place (to preventlarge 'occumulo fion ol co mposite in the interdental area) a nd be
slowly sea ted w ith dig ita l pressure (8-70). Gross excess is removed using o n explore r in a ,<:: utting motion,. parallel to
the ma rg in (8-7b, 8-7c).,Wooden wedges and matrices should be removed bslore the final seating' (8-7d ); the restoration must be ma inta ined
position whi le the motrlces are pulled bucco lly in a rotorvrnotion against the tooth (8-7el .
'Final seating is obtai ned wi th digita l pressure (8-7f).·As a result, srnollo rnounts of composite w ill protrude from the
, marg ins (8-79); t,hese minor excesses are easily removed wi th a clean b rus h. Here aga in>'a cutting moti ~ n is used
paral lel to the margi n (8~7h " 8-7;). Polymerizo tioQstarts at the pa latal surface for 90 seconds (8-7 i), followed by 60
secondsmesloloc.olly a nd 60' seconds d istofocially (dotted arrows). All marg ins a re then covered with glyce rin gel
a nd cured for 30 seconds ( 8~7 k) ; the g lycerin ca n be easily rinsed off ( 8~7 1) before proceeding io finishing (see 8-7m
and 8-7ri ). . "
" .
.,
.." , "
' .
". '
"
v:
, '"
,
in
,
, '
8
I T RY- IN A N D ADH ESIV E L UT ING PR O CEDUR ES
Excess adh esive resin and co mposite is best
removed unde r rubber dam w ith hand instruments (surgica l blade and sca ler; Figs 8-7 m
a nd 8-7n). Rotar y instru ments are not recommende d for this purpose beca use they co uld
dam ag e the ce ramic margin .
W hen multiple restoration s are to be placed , a
serial approa c h accord ing to the aforementioned sequence is ad vocated, repeating the
process for eac h tooth (try-in/condition ing of
the cera mic/prepara tion of the tooth surface/
insertion of the lamin ate veneer]. It is not recommended to pe rfo rm paral lel bo ndi ng proced ures Simulta neously on severa l teeth.
Var ious factors ca n be responsible for the inco mplete seating of a restoration : premature
curing of the ad hesive, a cured fragm ent w ithin
the luting comp osite, etc. W hen ligh t-curing
composites are used , a ll these problems are reversible as long as the light has not been applied; the restoration can be immedi ately removed , dipped in aceto ne, and meticulously
cleaned . Resin residues are eliminated from the
tooth surface by rubbing wi th a co tton pe llet
soa ked in a lco hol . En amel must be reconditioned by etching , wh ereas the ceramic only req uires reappl ication of the sila ne be fore proceedi ng aga in to cernentotion ."
HAND-I N STRUME NT FINI SHING
OCCL USAL ADJUS TM EN TS
FIGURE 8-7 [CONTINUED). W ith the rubber dam stili in place to protect the soft tissu es, excess comp osite and adhesive resin can be eosily chipped off wi th a N o . 12 surgica l blade (8-7m, 8-7n). Final occl usa l adj ustments can be
ca rried out w ith fine d iamonds (8-7 0) and silico n points (8-7 p). N ote the fine pa latal surface finish a nd invisible toothrestoration interface (8-7 q).
352
T RY-IN AND ADHE SIV E L UT ING PRO CEDU RES
I
8
FINAL ADJUSTMENTS AND OCCLUSAL CONTROL
Under no circumstances should this step be carried o ut before the fina l bond ing o f the porcela in workpiec es, due to a high risk of fra cture.
On ce rubbe r dam has bee n removed , the occlusion is immedi ately adjusted , beg inning w ith
centric occl usio n [maximal intercuspati on) . Co rrection s are mad e w ith fine-grain d ia mond burs
a nd silico n po ints [Figs 8-70 to 8-7q ). A variety
o f co mmerc ial kits [ma inly dia mo nd-silico n
points) ca n then be used to improve the intrao ral surface fini shing o f th e cera mic .23- 26 It is
often specula ted that the roug her surfaces produced by intrao ral pol ishing (compared to intact glazed ce ramic) will generate increased
enam el wear ; it appears that dental porc ela ins
of
w hic h is no t relevant for neuromuscular herrn onv." BPR-restored central inci sors w ith in-
c reased pro minence a nd incisal leng th therefore co ntribute to the defini tion o f the idea l
occlu sion , w hic h refers to bot h esthetic a nd physiologic ideal s.3o.32
In o ther wo rds, particular emphasis must be
add ressed to the ma intenance o r reestabl ishment o f an adeq uate a nd functional a nterio r
q uido nce du ring ma ndibular excursio ns (Fig
8-8) reg ardl ess of w hether this q uido nce involves the new lam inate veneer restoro tions.:'
There is no scientific basis indi cati ng th at an
ideal occlusion ca nnot be obta ined in previ-
ge nerate an abra sive type of w ear, the am o unt
of w hich is not related to the type of surface finish (eg , g lazed versus intraorally poli shed )Y-29
ously worn dentitio ns a nd in pat ients w ith oc clusal paraf unctions. W a lls33 demo nstrated tha t
C rea tio n feldspathi c po rce lai n [Klema) p roved
ear ly 199 0 s, a nd fo llowed for mo re than 5
to be less ab rasive and mo re resistant to w ear
years, co mpared favo rably with tra d itio nal po r-
than alu mina porc ela in or hydrothermal g lass,
either intraorall y pol ished or with the intact or iginal gl aze .29
celain ve nee rs a nd inlays. This good succe ss
rate is empow ered by the minimal ly invasive
BPRs p laced in worn a nd fractured teeth in the
approach, wh ich is a lways comm endabl e in
this type o f pati ent.
The functio nal features o f teeth restored w ith
BPRs are co nsidered to be identical to those o f
intact natural teeth, keepin g in mind that a key
element in the developmen t of har mon io us occlusion is the inci sal gUida nce,3o.3 i the stee pness
A summary
of seq uentia l proce d ures for
the lut-
ing o f BPRs is presented in Fig 8-9 a nd can be
used as a che cklist.
FIGURE 8-8 (NEXT PAGE): ULTIMATE ESTHETIC AND PHYSIOLOGIC IDEA L. Typica l indica tio n for BPRs , ie, type
IIIB, erosio n a nd wea r. Preop era tive (8-8a) a nd immedi a te posto pera tive (8-8 b to 8-8f) views Functional fea tures of
resto red teeth follow those of intact natural teeth. Baseline views before treatment (8-8 g , 8-8 h) a nd after placem ent of
BPRs cani ne to ca nine (8-8 i, 8-8 jl The success of this reha bilitation lies in the d iagnostic approach and subseq uent
esthetic and functional recovery of anterior teeth. (So me patient as in Figs 8-5 to 8-7 . Patient treated in coll a bora tio n
with Dr N . Perakis, Unive rsity of Geneva)
353
--_.
-
~
.
"
\
\
, '.
,'-,
,
.
"'\ - ,
'
"
'
,.
T 0
..
\
.'
0
. P.. 0
T H
R e
E L A
• Try restoration on intact origi nal single d ie
• Try adjacent restorations on solid model
• Remove provisionals (sca lerl
• C lean prepared surface (cup and ab rasive)
• Remove resin from spo t-etched area
(scaler or flexible disk)
• Fit restoratio ns tnd ividuo lly in mouth (sea ting)
,, ~ F i t restorations in adjacen t g roups (proximal relc tionships}':
• Show the pa tient
• Place rubber dam ; fina l check for fit
1. Hydrofluoric acid etching
1. Roughen adhesive
0)
c
c
o
• Profect neighboring teeth wit h interdental
matrices a nd w edges
• G loves, mask, glo sses
• Microsandb lasl o r use large groin
d iamo nd bur at low speed
(filled ad hesive only)*
• Apply 10% HF for 90 seco nds
• Rinse inner surface a nd d ry wi th alcohol
• Rinse copiously
• Ultraso nic ba th for 4 m inutes
(in 95% a lcohol or d istilled wa ter)
-0
c
o
u
([)
u
--.g
::>
</)
.\
2. Phosphoric acid etChing
• Air dry a nd conf irm absence
residuest
• App ly 35% to 37% H3PO. for 30 seco nds
• Rinse (wate r w ithout spray)
of white
2. Silanization
• Air dry and alcohol dry
• Activate silane solution vvhen required
• Apply silane and air dry; repeat 2 to 3 times
• Apply last coa t and dry 1 minute in 100' C
oven (or with hair dryer)
• Apply one coo t of adhe sive resin
• Apply one coo t of ad hesive resin
• Gen tly suction excess
• Gently suction excess
• Load wit h uniform bulk of com posl te l
c
o
~
([)
<.I)
c
• 1) SlOwly'seat with gentle finger pressure; 2) wi pe off gross excess
. • Rem;ve 0edges and matrices; repea t 1) and 2) until sealing is complete
• Cure 60 to'90 seco nds per surface (start polotoll'': a ir block margins(g lycerinj arid cure again
. 'C hip off excess adhesive resin a nd comp osite (scal pel and scaler)
'.
"
'
.'
\
.
\\
'.
FIGURE 8-9: SUMMARY OF SEqUENTIAL.PROCEDURES..
N.iCrosa ndblaSfirig torou gh~n
[before the final i m p r~ssion) ,
a d h~Si ve resin mu;t be con~ ide red
, "
.
"
.,.
','
only if
:
. . ..
;mmed ia i~ dentin bondin qhos been carried out wi ;h a"filled adhe sive
. , .. .
... ..
.
.'
'White residues thai ore .resistont 'to this procedure can,be removed wi th a brush and alcohol.
'F ilm thickness ol Ilne h ybrids conbe reduced beforehand by 'placing t~e composite syringe ino resealoble bag in a lokeworrn water both. ',
. ' li ght curing must·be intermittent to ovoid
----. ~-----_._-
h e~tin g :
-----~.
'
- ----------------------~~
~--~--
~-
-
~
8
I
TRY-IN AND ADHE SIV E LUTING PR O CEDURES
SPECIAL CONS IDERATIO N S
Interdental adjustments during luting
procedures
Because o f the preci se fit, each ce ramic wo rkpiece in a g roup of restora tions must be tried
again under rubber dam as ce mentation proceeds. A passive fit must be o bta ined !
Slight movement of adj a cent teeth and presence of the newl y cemented neighboring
restoration ca n a lter the seating of the restoratio n, especia lly in cases o f extensive w rap p ing
a nd lo ng interdenta l con tact s (Fig 8- 10) . Use
o f ar ticula ting pa pe r a nd abrasive di sks ca n
be a lternated to check a nd so ften the interdental are a.
FIGURE 8-10: FINAL TRY-IN A t'-ID PROXIMAL ADJUSTMENT S. The right central inc isor and left lateral inciso r are
nonvita l, and al l four incisors have existing Closs 3 and C lass 4 co mposites, w hich call for a marked interdenta l w ra pping (8-100) . The porcela in restorations on both centra l incisors have a lo ng interdental co ntact (8- 1Ob). Fo llow ing
luting of the left lateral and central incisors, respectively, the restora tio n o n the right centra l incisor co uld not be sea ted
(8-10c , arro wheads show marginal o pening ) Excessive pressu re at the interdental contact is identified using articulating paper [8-1Od, 8-10e) and released using a brasive disks a t low speed (8-1Ofl The procedure is repeated (810 g ) until co mplete and pa ssive sea ting of the resto ration is ob tained (8-10 h, arrowhead shows marg inal closure].
C linica l situa tio n just prio r to fina l insertio n (8- 10 i). Compara tive preop erative [8-10 il a nd posto perative (8-10 k)
views. There w ere multiple indi cations for veneering these teeth, such as the o ld extended co mposite resto rations a nd
the a ltered crown biomecha nics of endo dontica lly treated teeth. The procedure a lso a llow ed recovery of inci sal prominence and co ronal vo lume a nd length. O ther views of this case ca n be found in Fig 6-18 .
356
vv ,
,, \ ,
8
I
T RY- IN A N D ADHE SIVE LU TIN G PR O CED URE S
Dentin bonding
tio n
As previo usly mentio ned in Chapter 6 , a t leas t
the tw o methods lies in the c hro no logy and cur-
two methods ha ve been p resented to p romote
ing mod e
dentin a d hesio n when plocinq BPRs [Fig 8-11l.
lig ht curing (new method ) ve rsus d elayed curing
In the class ic a p p roa c h, dentin exposures ar e
thro ug h the po rce lain
initia lly d isregard ed , a nd the d entin bond ing
seated (classic method ). The latte r appro ach
ag e nt (DBA ) is appl ied o nly a t the last trea tment
a lso ra ises the q uestio n os to w hethe r a dua l-
sta g e when proceed ing to luting the veneer. In
c ure adh esive woul d be requir ed . W hen tested
of tooth
p repara tio ns, before the final im-
p ressio n is ta ken. The ma in di ffe rence be twe en
of
the DBA: d irec t a nd immed ia te
restorat io n after
it is
this case , the DBA [thick ness > 80 ~ m ) must be
in vi tro, no mea surable microleakag e co uld be
initiall y left uncu red to a llow com p lete sea ting
detected in the interfa ce
of the resto ration. It has be e n pro posed to thin
ei ther the classic o r new method. " It appears
the adhesive layer to less tha n
40 ~m to a llow
that bot h DBA appl icat io n mod es ca n g ene rate
of
the restorati on ;
a w ell-o rg a nized hy b rid layer
its c uring be fore insertion
of samp les bonded
3
to
4
by
~ m thick
how ever, beca use methacr yl ate resins show a n
a nd resin tag s, the den tin being sea led by this
40 prn w he n they ar e
interdiffu sio n zo ne . How ever, the d entin-resin in-
lig ht-cu red ,34 excess ive thinnin g ca n prevent the
terfa ce ca n show notable differences w hen ob-
inhibiti o n layer up to
cu ring
of lig ht-a ctivated
DBAs.
The cla ssic techniq ue co ntrasts w ith the new ap-
served under sca nning electron microsco py (Fig
8-11)21 In this con text, three impo rta nt observations sho uld be mentio ned:
proa ch , w hic h w a s proposed to o ptimize DBA
a pp lica tio n. 1s' 2o Wi th the new method , den tin
1. In the cla ssic method it is not uncommo n to
exposures are seal ed immed iate ly, and the DBA
o bse rve a par tia l d isruptio n between the hy-
is a p plied a nd cured immed ia tely a fter comp le-
brid layer an d the ove rlying resin [Fig 8-11a ).
FI GU RE 8-1 1: DENT IN BOND IN G M O DES AN D RELATED SEM VIEW S. Chro nologi e description of the two possible applicatio n mode s of the sa me dentin bond ing agent (fop). 8- 1 1a to 8- 1 1c: Typica l SEMs o f a deminera lized
sample seclio n replica for the classic a pplico tion . Luting co mposite (CPR ) is w ell connec ted to the ce ramic ICER), but
a ga p is detected between the co mposite an d the dentin (D) . Higher mag nificati o n (8- 1 1b, 8-1 1c) revea ls the acidresistant composi te and hyb rid layer (HL). Some resin tags (rt) are protrud ing beca use of de ntin de minera liza tio n. Highest magnifi cat io n (8- 1 1c) shows the co ntinuity between the hyb rid layer (HL) a nd de ntin (D), a nd the gap a t the top
of the hy brid layer 8- 1 1d a nd 8-11 e : Ty pica l SEM s of deminera lized sa mple section replica fo r the new method of
de ntin bonding . The junction between the luting co mposite (CPR) a nd the precured ad hesive (ADH) is bar ely visible
{arrowheads}, and no gap can be de tected between the ad hesive and the denti n (D). High er mag nificati on (8- 1 1e)
shows the acid-resistan t adhes ive (ADH) a nd hybrid layers (HL) tig htly related to each o ther a nd revea ls long resin tags
(rt) in dentin [D). [Fig ure 8- 1 1 is reprinted from M ag ne a nd Do ug las2 1 w ith pe rmissio n.)
358
\
,
\
,.
,,'
CLASSIC METHOD
NEW METH OD
Delayed dentin bonding
Immediate dentin bonding
Tooth prepara tion
Tooth prepar atio n
(dentin exposure).
(dentin exposure]
I m p~an d .·
· · · · ·. D~;~t;~·~· · · · ·,.
veneer fabrication
:
~~.~ ~.~~ iate l y ..~~ ~.~ ~:!..
·DB~1;t;~ ; 1 v~~~~~~i~n
+
Luting
:
~ ~ ~~.~ ~~ ~ ~~~.~l.:. . ~ ~.~~~ ! :~
Lu ting
.
(condition enamel only)
~
"
8
I
TRY-IN AND AD HESIVE LUTING P ROCEDURES
It is not know n w hether the microm echa nical
hybrid layer in the classic applithe DBA can a lter the clinica l be hav-
• Due to the immed iate curing mod e, lig ht-activa ted DBAs ca n be used . As a result, the pheno mena of hybrid layer col la pse a nd dilution
the restorati on . This gap [Fig 8-1 1c) has
of the DBA by the outward flow of den tin fluid
been explain ed by the collapse of the uncured
de ntin-resin hybrid layer cau sed by pressure
failur e
cation
.'.''"
io r
of
of the
of
the restora-
ca n be avoided . The new technique is associa ted with improved bond streng th in
vitro ,18.19.39 w hich can po tentially better w ith-
tio n" The hybrid layer may be w ea kened supe rficia lly as a consequence of the lower resin
stand long-term exposure to thermal a nd functional loads com par ed to the same ad hesive
co ntent of the com pacted colla gen fibers. This
hypothesis is suppo rted by the fact that structural defects and an intrinsic weakness of the
in the classic method .
that resulted from the seating
of
• The new method of DBA applicati on may prevent development of bacterial lea kag e and
hybri d layer ha ve bee n show n to be assoc iated w ith handling co ndi tio ns o f the DBA. 36
den tin sensitivity during the provisio nal phase .
of
Figure 8-12 depicts an enlig htening case in
whic h the sa me too th wa s accid ental ly sub-
Because the d entin remains sea led in areas
de bo nd ing, microl eakage is not de tected in
vitro . In vivo, the situa tio n is compli cat ed by an
add itio na l cha llenge : dur ing the time from
w hen the DBA is applied to the etched dentin
surface until the resto ra tio n is seated , seeping
dent in fluid might d isturb the bo ndi ng pro-
cess ." :" especi ally resin tag formati on.
2 . In the new method, long er resin tags are
found , and there is no d iscontinuity in the
dentin-resin interface o r between the precured
adhes ive and the luting composite (Fig 8-1 1d ).
jected to both bonding methods: a ma jor area
of exposed dentin at the mesial aspec t of the
right late ra l inci sor was sea led before impressio n (F ig 8- 12a]; exposed dentin a t the dis tal
surface o f the same tooth w ent undetected a nd
was sea led only a t the time of insertion via the
classic approa ch . As a possible co nseq uence,
the d ista l half o f the restoration fractured a fter almost 5 years o f clinica l service (Fig 8-12d). This
fracture is in accorda nce w ith clin ical da ta published by Dumfahr j40 show ing that veneers partially bo nded to dentin acco rding to the classic
C linica l use of this o ptimized technique is favora ble for a t least two reaso ns:
a pproach have an increased risk of fai lure.
FIGURE 8-12 : DENTIN EXPOSURES GENERATED BY PREEXISTING CLASS 3 AND 4 RESTORATIONS. This clini ca l situation is id eal for immediate de ntin bo nd ing (new approac h) beca use sig nifica nt space is left fo r the ad hesive
resin. The dentin exposures are immed iately lined wi th a filled DBA (etchant/ primer/ad hesive) prior to la king the impression (8-12a). Later, wh en proce ed ing to luting the restoratio ns, the preexi sting adhesive resin is roughened wi th
a co arse dia mo nd bur a t low speed (8-1 2 bl, followed by a lco hol drying, to promote adhesion to the luting composite. The tooth surface is now ready fo r subseq uent luting proc ed ures (8-1 2c; see Fig 8-9).
360
\' .v
,
----
-
\
-
-
-
,
8
I T RY-IN A ND A DHESIV E LUT IN G PR OCEDU RES
3. In the classic method , most of the luting
spac e is occupi ed by the luting composite
(a pproximately 12 5 prn ], a nd the uncured
den tin ad hesive is thinned o ut by the more visco us co mposite during insertion of the restoration . In the new a pproac h, the luting space is
thicker (a pproximately 200 prn] because it is
co mposed of two di stinct layers: the precured
ad hesive (a pproximately 80 ~m for a filled
ad hesive) a nd the luting co mposi te (approxi mately 120 ~m) . 2 :
This fact has clini cal relevance, as both the clinicia n and denta l technic ia n are continuou sly
challeng ed by the problem of tooth red uctio n
a nd restorative materia l bulk. A confined and
supe rficia l dentin exposure provides limited
space for the restorative ma teria ls, includin g the
bo nd ing agent. A pplica tio n a nd curing of the
DBA would significantly reduce the space remaining for the ce ramic buildup . Con sidering
that a low ratio of ce ramic to luting ogent thickness ca n negatively i nfluence the stress d istribution w ithin the po rcela in,t. 142 the new DBA applica tion method is not indica ted for superfici al
dentin exposure. On the other hand , deeper
prepara tio n surfaces [ie, Cl ass 3 o r 4; see Fi g
8- 12a) ca n be ea sily lined w ith the DBA before
impressio n taking because sufficient space w ill
be left for the restorative material to maintain a
reasonabl e ratio of thicknesses betw een th e ceramic and the luting agent. In both the classic
and new app roac hes, the absolute luting co mposite thickness [not total luting space) is similar,
w hic h co rrespo nds to the traditional luting
space generated by laboratory procedures (a pproximately 120 pm . depend ing o n the d ie
spacer application) .
Ad hesion between the precured bond ing agen t
a nd the newly app lied luting agen t does not
appear to be an issue because this interface
can bare ly be differentiated under SEM exa mination (see Fig 8-1 1d ). Ro ug hening of the adhesive leg , w ith a coarse d ia mond bur at low
speed) just be fore luting a nd subsequently d rying the surface w ith a lco hol is therefore recommended . Note that these reco mmend ations are
ba sed on the use of a filled ad hesive such as
Optibond FL. Unfilled DBA can al so be used
wi th the new method; how ever, it is important
to remembe r that the reacti vat io n and roughening proced ures could easily destroy the hybrid
layer and reexpose den tin because of the red uced thickness and stiffness of the adhes ive
(related to the abse nce of filler).
FIGURE 8-12 (CO N TIN UED): FIVE-YEAR FOLLOW-UP. The d istal half of the restora tion on the right lateral incisor
fractured after 5 years of cli nica l service; the mesial aspect of the restoration, w hich w as origi nally bo nded according to the new approach (see 8- 12bl, is still w ell-bonded (8-12d). The luting composite (C PR) is a ttached to the ceramic frag ment (8-12e). C loser analysis of the tooth surface reveals a large area of expo sed de ntin (8-12f; 8- 12g,
doffed area ). Th is area had been sealed by the tradition al method at the time of cementa tion. Dentin hybridization
and resin tags are visible (8-12h) but failed to bond to the overlying composite (see Fig 8-11c).
362
..
-
._-----------~-
~~--
~~--
-
---
-
8
I TRY-IN AN D A DHESIVE LUTIN G PROCEDURES
Shrinkage of luting composite
13b and 8-13 c) . Shrinkage forc es mig ht even
be bene ficial to coun terac t the ex pa nd ing
Ceramic restorations bo nd ed to to oth structure
und erg o va rio us types
of
forces ge nerated a t high ternperolures."
mechan ical stress.
C uring contractio n of the luting compos ite a nd
sig nifica nt thermal c ha nges in the o ra l environ-
of the
ment must be co nsid ered in addition to func-
only temporary because a ll resin-based materi-
tiona l loa ds. The quest ion has been rai sed
al s show signifi cant wa ter uptoke." Over time,
w hether shrinka g e
of
Water sorption. Stresses crea ted by shrinkage
luting compos ite can be expected to be
al on e ca n initiate cracks within the restorati on.
this phenomenon ca n co mpe nsa te for the initial
shrinkage of the materia l,46.47 leading to the
Interestingly, in a simulated operat ory study o n
complete relief
the luting co mpos ite
the para meters related to cra ck pro pensity
of
of shrinkage stresses."
In other
word s:
porcelain veneers. " cerami c c racks were not
found aher a 21-day storage in saline, but o nly
after thermocyclin g an d solely in ve neers w ith
• The luting composite shrinkag e ge nera tes a
temporary preco mpressed sta te of the ce-
of
rami c w o rkp iece (Fig 8-13a). This initial ly
thicknesses [see Fig 7 - 12). A t lea st two rea son s
"pro tects" the restoration from the tensile
might theoretical ly explain the low impact of
stresses gen erated by expa nsion
resin shrinkage on cera mic cracking.
co mposite at high temperatures (Fig 8-1 3b).
unfavora b le cera mic/ luting co mposite ratio
of the
luting
• The use of an "ide a l nonshr.n kinq" composite
Compressive Forces. Stresses c rea ted by
shrinkage
of
the luting composite ore mai nly
would not solve the p rob lem
of
stress con-
of such a
the level of ena mel
centra tio ns. If the thermal expansion
co mpre ssive a t bo th the surfa ce and the interfa ce of the restora tion (Fig 8-1 3a).42,43 Ceramic
a nd de ntin, stress d istribution w ithin the ce-
is a bri ttle materia l w ith a high er strength in
ramic w ill still be impaired by the harmful ten-
comp ressio n than in tension . In the o ral envi-
sile stresses genera ted during thermal loa d s.
ronm ent, shrinkage forces are comb ined w ith
sig nifica nt thermal lood s.:" The different temperatures
of inges ted
food and d rinks can eas-
ily genera te tensile stresses with in the resto ra-
of the
of the
luting composite alone does not seem capable
of ca using
the development
of flaw s,
but
its co mbina tion with repeated thermal load s
of the
may playa key role, co nside ring that feldspa thic porcelains demonstrate cumula tive
da mag e w ith cycli c mechanical fa tig ue .49
o f po rcela in, these tensile forces can be more
de trime ntal tha n the shrinka g e forces (Figs 8-
364
• The static stress produced by shrinkage
brittle nature
tion , due to the high thermal expansi on
luting co mposite." Because
ma teria l is not lowered to
.,,-
\
Ic nqentlolsiress (MPo)
mVM stress (MPo)
~~!!!!!!
.,
., ..
FIGURE ~h 13: 'STRESSES IN PORCELAIN VENEERS ,W ITH THICK'U NDERLYING LUTING COMPOSITE (FINITE HE,
MENTMODEL) .42 Tangentia l' (8-13a) cnd-rnodilied Von Mises stresses (8 cT3b, fa ilure' criteria) at the po rcelai n surface at five test condi tions: 5°C, 20°C; and 50 °C ired-ciuves] and w ith an ideal no"nshrinking luting composite (white
curves). The path plot in,8- 13b proc eeds alo ng the restorotionsurloce from the palatal margi n (left) to the facia l mar.q in (rig ht; asterisk indicoles' the incisal edg'e curvature). Stresses(in MPa) wi thin the same porce lai n veneer at 50°C
w ith preexisting shrinkage of the luting co mposite (8- 13c, l eft) and wit h an ideal nonshrinking luting composi te (8-13c,
right) . ,
-.
-
'
,
.
------~~-~----
--- -
-
8
I
TRY-IN AND ADHESIVE LUTING PROCEDURES
Prebonding cracks
still invisible after more than 5 years of clinical
service (Fig 8-15c). The phenomenon might be
Until it is bonded to the tooth, a porcelain
attributed to the efficient sealing of the flaw by
workpiece
Microscopic
the adhesive resin, the walls of the defect being
flaws can form before cementation, either dur-
enlarged and adequately conditioned during
ing processing or at the try-in stage. Even
hydrofluoric acid etching. Silanization also helps
though bonding an already-cracked porcelain
in wetting the microscopic space.
remains
delicate.
workpiece is generally nor recommended, clinicians should be aware that a prebonding flaw
Prebonding flaws initiating from the outer sur-
that initiates from the inner surface of the
face of the restoration (easily detectable with
restoration (Fig 8-14) is likely to become invisi-
tangential light) are not likely to be sealed by
ble after cementation.
this phenomenon.
This fact is illustrated in Fig 8-15. The vertical
Careful examination of each BPR to be bonded
crack was clearly visible on the master model
is recommended. Use of an optic fiber and
(Fig 8-15a) and completely disappeared after
transillumination is imperative.
bonding to the tooth (Fig 8-15b). The crack was
8 -1~~
FIGURE 8-14: I~ITERNAL FLAW. This porcelain workpiece cracked during transport from the laboratory to the operatory. The horizontal flaw is visible from the facial surface (8-14a, arrowhead) Closer examination revealed that the
crack initiated at the inner surface (8-14b, arrowhead) Final placement of such a restoration can be recommended.
FIGURE 8-15: DISAPPEARANCE OF PREBONDING FLAW AS A RESULT OF ADHESIVE LUTING. An internal prebonding crack is clearly detected before cementation (8-15a) but is no longer visible after definitive insertion of the
BPR (8-15b) The defect is still invisible after more than 5 years of clinical service [8-15c)
366
- 1
"
",,'
------
---------------
---
8
I
TRY-IN AND ADHESIVE LUTING PROCEDURES
References
1. Darr AH, Jacobsen PH. Conversion of dual cure lUling cements. J Oral Rehobil 1995,2243-47
2. Besek M, Mormann WH, Persi C, lutz F The curing of
composites under Cerec inlays Schweiz Monatsschr
Zahnmed 1995,105.1123- 1128
3. Mogne P, Perroud R, Hodges JS, Belser U. Cl inical performance of novel-design porcelain veneers for the recovery of coronol volume and length. IntJ Periodontics Reslorative Dent 2000; 20441-457.
4. Peumans M, Von Meerbeek B, lambrechts P, Vanherle G.
The 5-year clinical performance of direct composite oddilions to correct tooth form and position. I. Esthetic qualities.
Clin Oral Investig 1997; 1.1 2-1 8
5. Van Meerbeek B, Inokoshi S, Davidson Cl, et 01. Dual
cure lUling composiles-Part II. Clinically related properlies. J Oral Rehabil 1994,2157-66.
6. Della Bona A, Northeast SE Shear bond strenqth of resin
bonded ceramic after different try-in procedures J Dent
1994;22103-107.
19 Paul Sj, Scharer P The dual bonding lechnique A modified method to improve adhesive luting procedures. Int J
Periodonlics Restorative Denl 1997; 17536-545.
20. Paul Sj. Adhesive LUling Procedures. Berlin. Quintessence,
1997.89-98.
21. Magne P, Douglas WH. Porcelain veneers. Dentin bonding optimization and biomimetic recovery of the crown. Int
J Prosthodont 1999; 121 1 1-121.
22 Bergmann P, Noock MJ, Roulet JF. Morginal adaptotion
with glass-ceramic inlays adhesively luted wilh glycerine
gel. Quintessence Int 1991 ;22739-744
23
Potterson CJ, McLundie AC, Stirrups DR, Taylor WG. Refinishing of porcelain by using a refinishing kit. J Proslhel
Dent 1991 ;65383-388
24. Grieve AR, Jeffrey IW, Sharma Sj. An evaluation of Ihree
methods of polishing porcelain by comparison of surface
topography with the original glaze. Restorative Dent
1991 ;7 34-36.
25 Patterson Cj, McLundie AC, Stirrups DR, Taylor WG. Efficacy of a porcelain refinishing syslem in restoring surface
finish oher grinding with fine and extra-fine diamond burs
J Proslhel Denl 1992;68402-406
7. Barghi I"J, Chung K, Farshchian F, Berry T Effecls of Ihe
solvents on bond strength of resin bonded porcelain. J
Oral Rehabil 1999;26853-857
26. Hullerslrom AK, Bergman M. Polishing systems for dental
ceramics. Acla Odonlol Scand 1993;51229-234.
8. Roulet JF, Soderholm Kj, long mate j. Effects of trealment
and storage conditions on ceramic/composite bond
strength.J Dent Res 1995;74381-387.
27 Jagger DC, Harrison A. An in vitro invesligalion inlo Ihe
wear effects of unglazed, glazed, and polished porcelain
on human enamel. J Prosthel Dent 1994;72.320-323.
9. Jardel V, Degrange M, Picard B, Derrien G Correlation of
lopography to bond strength of etched ceramic. IntJ ProsIhodont 1999; 1259-64.
28 AI-Hiyasal AS, Saunders WP, Sharkey SW, Smith GM,
Gilmour WH. The abrasive effect of glazed, unglazed,
and polished porcelain on the wear of human enamel,
and the influence of carbonated soft drinks on the rate of
wear. Inl J Proslhodonl 1997; 10269-282
10 Jardel V, Degrange M, Picard B, Derrien G. Surface energy
of etched ceramic. IntJ Prosthodont 1999; 12.415-418.
1 1. Jones GE, Baksman l, McConel1 Rl. Effect of etching technique on the clinical performance of porcelain veneers
Quinlessence Dent Technol 1989; 10.635-637.
12. Peumans M, Van Meerbeek B, Yoshida Y, lambrechts P,
Vanherle G. Porcelain veneers bonded to looth slruclure:
An ultra-morphological FE-SEM examinalion of Ihe adhesive interface. Dent Mater 1999; 15.1 05-1 19.
13. Canoy S, Hersek N, Erion A. Effect of different acid Irealments on a porcelain surface J Oral Rehabil 2001; 28
95-101.
14. Sadoun M, Asmussen E. Bonding of resin cements to an
aluminous ceramic: A new surface treatment. Dent Mater
1994;10185-189
15. Della Bona A, Anusavice KL Shen C Micratensile strength
of composite bonded to hal-pressed ceramics. J Adhesive
Dent 2000;2 305-313
16 Barghi N To silanate or not to silcncte: Making a clinical
decision. Com pend Contin Educ Dent 2000;21.
659-662, 664.
17. Barghi N, Berry T, Chung K. Effects of liming and heat
Irea Iment of silanaled parcelain an Ihe bond slrenglh. J
Oral Rehabil 2000;27407-412.
18 Berlschinger C, Paul Sj, Luthy H, Schaerer P Dual opplicalion of dentin bonding agents. Its effect on Ihe bond
strength. Am J Dent 1996;9 1 15-1 19.
368
29. Magne P, Oh WS, Pinlado MR, Delong R Wear of
enamel and veneering ceramics aher laboratory and
chairside finishing procedures. J Proslhel Dent 1999;
82669-679.
30. Ramfjord S, Ash /V\/IA. Occlusion, ed 3. Philadelphia
Saunders, 1983166-168.
31. Dawson PE. Evaluation, Diagnosis, and Treatment of Occlusal Problems, ed 2. St Louis Mosby, 1989 274-297.
32 Beyron H. Optimal occlusion. Dent Clin Narth Am 1969;
13537-354.
33 Walls AW. The use of adhesively retained all-porcelain veneers during the management of fraclured and worn anterior teeth' Pari 2 Clinical results aher 5 years of follow-up.
Br DentJ 1995; 178337-340
34. Rueggeberg FA, Margeson DH. The effecl of oxygen inhibition on an unfilled/filled composite system. J Dent Res
1990;691652-1658
35. Dietschi D, Magne P, Halz J Bonded to tooth ceramic
restorations. In vitro evaluation of the efficiency and failure
mode of two modern adhesives. Schweiz Manatsschr
Zahnmed 1995; 105299-305
36. Toy FR, Gwinnett Aj, Pang KM, Wei SH. Variability in microleakage observed in a tolal-etch wei-bonding technique under different handling condilions. J Dent Res
1995;741168-1178.
TRY-IN AND ADHESIVE LUTING PROCEDURES
37. Paul Sj, Scharer P. Factors in dentin bonding. Part II· A review of the morphology and physiology of human denlin.
J Esthel Dent 1993;551-54.
38. Paul Sj, Scharer P. Intrapulpal pressure and thermal cycling: effect on shear bond strength of eleven modern
dentin bonding agents. J Esthet Dent 1993;5179-185.
39. Paul Sj, Scharer P. Effed of provisional cements on the
bond strength of various adhesive bonding systems on
dentine. J Oral Rehabil 1997;248-14.
40. Dumfahrt H. Porcelain laminate veneers. A retrospective
evalualion oller 1 10 10 years of service: Pari II-Clinical
results. Inl J Proslhodont 2000; 139-18.
41. Magne P, Kwon KR, Belser UC, HodgesJS, Douglas WHo
I
8
43. Magne P, Douglas WHo Interdental design of porcelain
veneers in the presence of composite fillings: Finite element analysis of composile shrinkage and thermal stress.
Inl J Proslhodont 2000; 13117-124.
44. Palmer DS, Barco MT, Billy EG. Temperature extremes produced orally by hoi and cold liquids. J Prosthet Denl
1992;67325-327.
45. Misra DN, Bowen RL Sorption of water by filled-resin
composiles. J Denl Res 1977;56603-612.
46. Hansen EK, Asmussen E. Marginal adaptation of posterior
resins: Effect of dentin-bonding agent and hygroscopic
expansion. Dent Maler 1989;5: 122-126.
47. Koike T, Hasegawa T, Manabe A, lloh K, Wakumoto S.
Crack propensity of porcelain laminate veneers: A simulated operatory evaluation. J Prosthet Dent 1999;81:
Effect of waler sorption and Ihermal stress on cavity adaptation of dental composites Dent Mater 1990;6:
327-334.
42. Magne P, Versluis A, Douglas WHo Effect of luting com-
178-180
48. Feilzer Aj, De Gee Aj, Davidson CL. Relaxation of poly-
posite shrinkage and thermal loads on the slress distribution in porcelain laminate veneers. J Proslhet Dent 1999;
merization contraction shear slress by hygroscopic expansion J Dent Res 1990;6936-39.
81335-344.
49. White SN, Zhao Xy Zhaokun Y, Li ZC Cyclic mechanical fatigue of a feldspathic dental porcelain. In! J Proslhodoni 1995,8:413-420.
369
~.
--------~------------------------- -----~-
-
~-
"
'\
CHAPTER
9
MAINTENANCE AND REPAIRS
Bonded po rce la in restoratio ns (BPRs) have proved to be a very stro ng co mplex both in vitro and, in vivo . Med ium- to lo ng-term cli nica l investigat io ns
have demo nstrated excell ent main tenan ce of esthetics, hig h patient sa tisfacti o n, a nd a bsence of ad verse effects o n g ing iva l hea lth. As a result, the
mai ntena nce protocol bare ly d iffers fro m that applied to intact natural teeth.
This cha pter describes some specific main tenance proced ures, as w ell as
how to add ress minor pro blems that ca n be encountered w ith BPRs.
9
I
MA IN TENANC E AND REPA IRS
MA XIMUM PERFORMANCE , REDUCED MAI",ITENANCE
Clin ica l trials have demon strated that retention
enam el and den tin, which results in the mimick-
and fracture rates of anteri or BPRs are not likely
to raise spec ific concerns. 1- 4 A t least two cli nica l
ing of intact tooth bio mechanics, and (2) the
max imum respect of pe riodo ntal tissues . This
last element is streng thened by the fact that den-
studies have de monstrated a 10 0 % surviva l rate
over 5 years, 24 a nd two other long-term stud ies
reveal ed a 9 0 % surviva l rate a nd a 93% success rate over 10 and 15 years, respectively.56
One of these tric ls" even include d cases of extreme incisa l edge spans , w hich is the end of
the ind icati o n spectrum for BPRs. These results
are part icular ly enco urag ing co nside ring tha t
most of these BPRs (Fig 9 -1 ; see al so Figs 4 -8
and 6 -1) have been bond ed solely to ena mel
(Fig s 9- 1band 9- 1c) and di d not address
dentin expos ure beca use no efficient dentin adhesives w ere avai labl e at the time
tal po rcelai n is less susceptib le to accumu lation
of bacteri al plaq ue in co mpar ison to gol d ,
resin, o r even hard tooth structures. 13. 14 It is
therefore not surprising that sig nifica nt redu ctions in Plaque Index and plaq ue bacte ria can
be o bserved a fter the plac ement of po rcela in
veneers. 15 Accord ing to a 5 -year fol low-up by
W a lls,16 even w hen the g lazed po rcela in surface wa s removed duri ng finishing procedures
a t the g ing iva l margi ns, no chang es were observed in either pla que o r gi ng iva l indi ces.
of placement.
For these var io us reasons, BPRs might be the
BPRs demonstrate exce llent patient satisfac tion
a nd minor prob lems com pare d to resin venee rs, w hich tend to show unfavo rable esthet-
most fo rgi ving type o f resto rat io n for patients
strugg ling w ith o ra l hyg iene.
of
ics, unsta ble marg ina l integri ty, deleterio us ef-
The exc ellent clinical results
fect o n g ingi va l health , and
surviva l rate over time .7- 2
improve, consid ering the co ntinuous improvements o f ce ramic ma terials and luting agents
decreased
BP Rs can o nly
(hig hly filled com posites with low er therma l exThe cli nica l success of BPRs is undo ubtedly
linked w ith (1) the ma ximum preservat ion of
pa nsio n, filled adhesive resin, etc).
FIGURE 9-1: FIRST BPRs PLACED BY THE AUTHOR (PM) IN 1992 WITH FOLLOW·UP AT 1 AND 7 YEARS. The
pati ent's anterior teeth initially presented defective co mposite restora tions (9-1a ) Insertion of the BPRs was carried out
only w ith enamel and cerami c bond ing despite locali zed expos ed dentin surfaces (9-1 b; right cenlral incisor a fter
phospho ric ac id etc hing) and substantia l hard tissue breakdown, espec ial ly on the left centra l incisor (9- 1c] Incisa l
edge spa n o f ce ramic is 3 105 mm (9- 1d) One-year posto pera tive cli nica l view (9-1e). Patient satisfactio n at the 7year follow-up is 100% (9- 1f, 9 -1g), a nd no al terations are detecte d on the radiograph [9 -1h) These BPRs are still in
din icial service a fter 11 year s.
372
9
I M A IN TEN AN CE A N D R EPAIR S
ROUT INE PROFES SIONAL HYGIENE
There ar e no spec ific instruction s regarding
personal hyg iene aroun d BP Rs. As far as brushing a nd flossing are concerned , the sa me car e
the g ing iva l contour (Fig 9- 1kl, and root-to-
a nd techniques used for natural teeth ca n be
crown movements (Fig 9 - 11) sho uld be absolutely a vo ided , beca use they co uld easily chip
the marg in o r dit ch the interface .
a pplied to BPR-resto red teeth. The cl inic ia n o r
the denta l hygien ist, how ever, must fol low
The fol loWing devices should never be used :
some specifi c g Uidelines dur ing profes sio na l
hygien e . 17
Routine scaling
• So nic or ultrasonic sca lers can signifi cant ly
damage the cera mic (chipping , cra cki ng ).
• A ir-abrasive pol ishing systems harm the
g laze, ca use pitting a nd sta ining , a nd remove the luster.
No mechan ica l intervention (scali ng o r polishing) should be car ried out in the a bsence of
These instruments al so crea te adverse effects o n
gingiva l inflammatio n and plaq ue .
intac t ena mel and should not be used for rou-
Hand-h eld instruments (cure tte o r sca ler) should
be used in a gentle tactile movement o nly
w hen req uired leg , if g ingi vitis o r sus pec ted excess of co mpos ite or cal culus is .detected}
tine too th clea ning . They should be reserved fo r
remo val of hardened , stubborn cal culus o n intact teeth. 18 Direct contact between oscil la ting
tips a nd too th-restoratio n surfaces should be prevented a t a ll times. "
Careful movements should be ma de parallel to
FIGURE 9-1 (CO N TIN UED): FOLLOW-UP AT 7 AND 8 YEARS . Deta iled view s of the left centra l incisor show o ptimal soft tissue a nd abso lute stabi lity of surface texture and g loss (9-1i] com pared to the intact la teral incisor (9-1i)
Proxima l enamel is visible a nd stained , w hich suppo rts the idea that more extensive interdental penetration would be
indi cated today (9-1 j). M ai ntena nce protoco l w as simulated a t the 8-yeor recall visit (9-1k to 9-10). A n expl orer or
scaler co n be used to check the marg ins a nd remove hard deposits. It is essentia l to use a ge ntle movement pa ra llel
to the gin g ival co ntour (9-1k) Root-to-crow n movements are contrai nd ica ted beca use they ca n undermine a nd chip
off the ceramic margin (9 -11)
374
------:---
,
\
-- - - - - - - - - - ..----;-- -
-
.. '
\
.c '
"
.'
\ ,'
'
"
------ ------------~-------
--- --
9
I
MAINTENANCE AND REPAIRS
Polishing
Fluoridation
Heavy stains on accessible margins can be re-
Topical fluorides, especially acidulated phos-
moved with fine silicon points (eg, Dialite Fine
phate fluoride (1.23%) gels, must not come in
16D-21, Brasseler] or sonic brushes with
contact with the porcelain because they have
W
dentifrice. Gingivally, placement
of a
deflection
cord helps in this task (Figs 9-1 m and 9-1 n).
an etching effect and can damage the ceramic surface 2 0-23
Dentifrice (or extra-fine aluminum oxide polishing paste] and a rubber cup can be used to
Sodium fluoride [2%) gels are always preferred
polish the restored tooth (Fig 9-10).
because of their inoffensive nature. 2 1.23
Coarse polishing pastes must never be used because they can dull the surface
of the porcelain.
: -h
FIGURE 9-1 (CO~ITINUED). Optimal inspection can be carried out when a deflection cord has been placed. Trauma
to the soft tissues can be prevented by stabilizing the cord with a periodontal probe while a spatula is used to insert
the cord into the sulcus (bimanual insertion technique, 9-1 m) To remove heavy marginal staining, diamond silicon
points can be used safely because the deflection cord protects the marginal gingiva [9-1 n). Final polishing can be
carried out simply with a soft rubber cup and dentifrice to prevent damaging the ceramic surface (9-10)
376
-
.---~ ~ --~
. ---
9 I MAINTENAN CE A N D REPAIRS
COMPLICATIONS AND REPAIRS
A preventive measure to reduce the risk of fa il-
What must be emphasized is the "pos itive "
ure wou ld be to provide the pati ent w ith a hard
acrylic maxill ary splint to be wo rn a t night.
Such a n appliance is absolutely indicated for
ou tco me of BPR comp lica tio ns; in most cases,
repa ir can be made w ith simpl e means at
minim um costs (see Figs 9 -4 and 9-5 ), The re-
pati ents w ith acknowl ed ged nocturnal cle nching o r g rind ing ha bits, w ith or w itho ut BPRs.
pa ira b ility o f BPRs can a lso be attributed to
recent developm ents of intraor al repair sys-
C linica l exp erience clear ly show s that pain-free
tems and tools . Among these , the intra oral
sandb laster is the most essential device fo r
pa tients usually do not comply very well in
wearing such p reventive nigh tguards , even
ce ra mic repair (Fi g 9 -3 a ).
w hen a minimum thickness of resin is used for
ma ximum comfo rt (Fig 9-2 ). O n the o ther hand ,
Surface roughening by e tching has the
stro nges t e ffect o n ce ra mic-resin bond
splints designed fo r therapeutic reasons have
proved their efficacy and are used by pa tients
strength Y How ever, intraoral use of hydrofluoric acid ca nnot be recommen ded . Efficient sur-
because they feel a physical need (eg , my-
face co nd itio ning ca n be safely obtained in
ofasc ial pain) .
vivo by sandbla sting w ith the intraoral sa ndblaster. A fine sand with 30-~m particles has
Postbond ing crac ks,24,25 chippi ng,26 frac ture,6,i6
6
and microleakage ,9 are among the possible
co mplicatio ns of BPRs; these problems and the
related risks have been discussed throughout this
boo k. Data w ith the lo ngest observa tion time for
po rcela in veneers have bee n provided by Friedmen ," w ho reported a 7% occurrence of complications over 15 years of clinica l service .
378
been develo ped spec ifica lly for intraora l use (93b) . Beca use this sand has been modified w ith
silica, it w ill Si multa neo usly allow the roughening and incorporation of silica into the substrate, a lso cal led tribochemical coa ting, The
silica -enriched
surface
wi ll then react wi th
sila ne [chemica l co upling) . Tribochemicall y pretreatin g the po rcelai n results in a sig nifica nt increase of bonding characteristics .28,29
.
.'":
,. '\
.;. ,
v
j "
FIGURE9-2:PREVENTIVEHARD ACRYLIC MAXlllARYNIGHTGUARD. Patients wi th BPRs can be considered as patients wit h inlocl teet~ . Thi s pa tient has BPRs on the four m axillary incisors (9-20). It is recommended that at-risk individuals (c1enchers and bruxers) be given a protective ap pliance such as a maxillary splint' (9-2b) wi th·full-. archcover'.
'
'. '
age to ptovide intEirocciusal protection arid a nterior gUidance (9-2c). '
FIGURE 9-3 :" NTRAORAL SfNDBlASTERS . D evices onthe market 'include (top to bottom} D ento-prep (Ronvig), Mi. croetcher (Danvillel, cm'd Rondoflex .(Kovo) (9-30). Blastin'g pressure is 2 to 3 bars (30 to 42 psi) . lt is rnondctorv that
thep atient's eyes cin~ " ai rwcys beprotected (w ith a mask and,rubbe r dam ;resp~ct i ve ly) and lhotinte nse suction be
used to avoid disseminotion of the sand. The contoinerco n be load ed wi th v arious types-of sand . Sil ica-modified
sand (Cojet-Sa nd, 3M Espe] is recommended for intrao ral use ( 9~ 3bl . .
"
"
'
"
.
,
- - -
-- - -
9
I M A INTE NA NCE AND
REPAIRS
Chipping
requir ed . The followin g proced ure
mended (Fig 9-4) :
IS
recom-
Chipping is defined as a cahesive fracture that
occurs wi thin the body of the po rcela in in areas
of intense po int load ing [usua lly an accidental
traumat ic force). Mi nor chipping of the incisa l
1. Isolate the dental segment under rubbe r dam
to protect the patient's airways from sand inhalation .
ed g e ca n occ ur a t any time during the life of a
BPR. The pa ttern of this de fect closely resembles
2 . Load sand into intraoral sandblaste r.
3. C heck efficie ncy o n a metal strip (meta l must
enamel chipping fo und in ag ing intact teeth.
turn a uniform dark color).
4 . Sandblast the chipped ceramic surface for
about 15 seconds . (Neig hbo ring teeth should
be protected wi th a metal matrix.)
5 . Apply silane and allow solvent to evaporate
(dry thoro ug hly w ith air and wait 5 minutes) .
6 . Apply ad hesive resin, thin, a nd cure.
7 . Restore w ith light-cu ring co mposite as for an
intact natural tooth.
When esthetics and function are not co mpromised , the chipped surface can be selectively
polis hed w ith fine-grain d iamonds a nd silicon
points a nd left as is.
In severe cases, the lost fragm ent should be replaced w ith composi te. Condi tio ning o f the ceramic surface (sandblasting and silan ization) is
FIGURE 9-4 : REPAIR OF A CHIPPED VENEER. The pat ient presented wi th a chipped ce ramic veneer a nd admitted
having accide ntal ly bitten a metal fork (9-4a) . Rubber dam is placed over the an terio r teeth. The fracture is coh esive,
and no other alterati ons of the remai ning tooth-restoration complex are de tected (9-4b) . A metal strip is w edged to
prote ct the neig hboring tooth du ring microsa nd blasting 19 -4c) . Scotchprime ceramic primer (3M Espe) w ill be applied ;
first, a 6 0 -second condi tio ning with pho sphor ic acid (9-4dJ, followed by rinsing a nd drying , must precede applicatio n of this silane (no t req uired with other silanes such a s Silicoup [Kulzer] o r Espe-sil [3M Espe]). Eva pora tio n of the
solvent and condensa tio n of the silane requires more tha n 5 min, but the process can be acce lerated with dry warm
a ir (ha ir d rye r a t low power). The patient must not be ane sthetized to be able to respond in ca se of excessive heat
(9-4e) . A fter the de fect has been coated with adh esive resin, a light-curing restorative comp osite can be used (9-4 f).
Excess composite ca n be detected by rubbin g ar ticulating paper ove r the facial surface (9-4g) . Following gro ss ex'
cess removal w ith a scalpe l, the restoration can be finished wi th silico n po ints and disks. This BPR has been serving
for more than 6 years 19-4h).
380
-~----
9
I MA INTENAN CE AN D REPAI RS
Fracture
A mong a ll of the cases presented in this book ,
on ly two BP Rs fractured , a fter 5 a nd 7 years of
clinical service. In both cases , the frag ment
w as recovered and reattached as illustrated in
und erlyin g tooth substrate is dentin. In the
case of indi rec t restorat ion s, improper den tin
bonding of ten results from the method used
to app ly the d entin bo nding a gent (eg , o missio n o f immed ia te dentin bo nd ing as described in Chapters 6 a nd 8 ).
Fig 9-5 . Follow ing care ful elimina tio n o f the remainin g co mpos ite, re bond ing w a s carried out
as in a classic luting proced ure . The exa ct
cau se of such fa ilures ca n vary. Two scenarios
Postbonding cracks
must be di sting uished a nd ca n sometimes occur
o n the same tooth .
As illustra ted in Fig 9 -5, a fractured frag ment
• The luting composi te rema ined o n the tooth,
w hich sugges ts debo nding a t th e po rcela inco mposite interface . This co uld be th e result of
na tely are mo re pro blema tic beca use curre ntly
there are no procedures that can address this
impro per bonding (eg, o mission of ad hesive
resin to w et the etched po rcelain), co ntamination of the etched surface (eg , o mission of
can be eas ily reattached with a n exce llent esthetic ou tco me. Postbo nd ing cra cks unfo rtu-
problem. If tol erated by the pa tient, flaws must
o nly be fol low ed , a nd no spec ific interventio n
ca n be reco mmended a t present. The pa tient
must be informed tha t cracking does not consti-
ultrasoni c clean ing folloWing etching ), or im-
tute a risk for the remaining underly ing toot h
proper use of silane co upling ag ents (eg, insufficient d rying).
substance . These fa ilures can occur quite ear ly
in the life o f a BPR w itho ut show ing any signs
• The luting com pos ite remained on the cera mic wo rkpiec e, w hic h sugg ests debonding at the tooth-co mposite interface . This sce-
of progression over the years (see Fig 7 -1).4
nari o seems to occ ur essentia lly w hen the
C racked BPRs should be rep laced o nly in case
of unesthetic flaw s (deeply stained ) upon the
pa tient's req uest.
FIGURE 9-5 : PARTIAL LOSS O F BPR BY CERVICAL FRACTURE . The cer vical part of this BPR lost retention du ring its
seventh year of clinica l service (9-5 a) The patient forTunate ly recovered the ceramic frag ment [9 -5b). The inner surfac e and fractured edge is first sa nd blasted , then etched w ith hyd rofl uoric ac id and sila nized . Beca use traditiona lluting proced ures w ill be a pplied, pla cement of rubb er dam is req uired (9-5c j. Fol lOWing elimina tio n of compos ite remnants fro m the too th surface w ith a diamond bur at low speed, the intraora l sa nd blaster is used for fina l clea ning and
roughen ing of the fractured po rcela in edge 19-5d, 9-5e) . Final co nditio ning of the tooth surface is car ried out w ith
phosphori c acid etchi ng (enamel and roughen ed cerorn ic ], fol low ed by ap plica tio n of silane to the frac tured edge .
Exp osed den tin would requi re the additional use of a dentin bondi ng age nt. Ad hesive resin and a reg ular resto ra tive
composi te are used to place the frag ment [9 -5 f) The fina l view show s adeq uate integ ra tio n of the rea ttached fragment a nd invisible repair tra nsitio n line (9-5g). The result is sta ble after 8 months of cl inical service despite the patient's ra ther poor o ral hyg iene (9-5 h). This BPR has been serving for 10 years.
382
.v.
"
\
',\
.
.
"
/
-----------
9
I
MAINTEN AN CE A ND REP AIR S
REPLACE ME NT OF CLASS 3 C O MPO SITE
In a number
of
clin ical situa tions, veneers must
be placed over existing , yet cl inica lly accep ta ble, interdental co mposites (see Fig 6 -1ge).
The par tial wraparound desig n is a rea sonable
c ho ice , even tho ugh total wra pping of Clas s 3
restoratio ns by BPRs ca n be indi ca ted and excellent ad a ptat io n ca n be o btai ned betw een
new BPRs and preexisting interdenta l composites3 0 3 1 Due to the favorab le surviva l of BPRs,
the q uestio n may be ra ised w hether replacement o r rea lization of new C lass 3 res to rations
ca n be car ried out by a pa lata l acces s w ithout
removing o r a ltering an existing BPR. As is the
case in a repair situa tion, intraoral bo nd ing to
po rcelain seems to be a critica l step, a nd it has
bee n demonstrated that resto rative procedu res
made from the pa latal aspect of veneered inciso rs ca n succeed provided that a ppropria te
cerami c surfa ce co nd itio ning is c c hieved ."
He re a gain , intra oral a p plicatio n of hydrofluoric acid must be avo ided , espec ia lly in an
o pe ned cavity. The followin g a lternative proced ure is pro posed [Fig 9 -6 ). First, the clea ned
exposed dentin of the ca vity must be sea led
w ith a de ntin bond ing age nt. For a smooth esthetic transition , marg ins of C lass 3 ca vities
must be beve led , incl ud ing the bucc al a spect
(interface w ith ce ra mic) if the restorati o n marg in is visible. Following placement of a metal
matrix to protect the neighboring tooth, the ceramic is a brade d , etched for 60 second s w ith
35% phosp horic aci d , and silani zed. Fu rther
steps of the restora tive procedure ar e similar to
those fo r the intact tooth .
FIGURE 9-6: STEP-BY-STEP ADHESIVE PROCEDURE FOR REPLACEMENT OF A CLASS 3 COMPOSITE. The existing restorat io n a nd a ny decay a re removed (9-6a) The exp osed dentin surfac e is immediately sealed (9-6 b, 9 -6c );
any dentin bondin g agen t ca n be used as lo ng as manufac turer's protoco l is followed. An enamel bevel of ab out 1
mm is crea ted (9-6d j. A protective meta l matrix is placed , and the ceramic marg in is microsandblasted for 10 to 15
seco nds (9-6e) . The ename l and ceramic marg ins are etched fo r 60 seco nds w ith phospho ric aci d (9 -6f); etching of
the abraded ceramic is o ptio na l a nd migh t be suggested by some sila ne manufac turers. The cera mic margin is
sila nized (9-6g) a nd dried thoro ugh ly w ith a ir. Ad hesive resin is applied (9 -6h) and immed iately cured (9 -6 i], followe d
by incrementa l resto ratio n.
384
9
I
M AINTEN A NC E A ND R EPAIRS
References
1. Calami a JR. C linical eva luation of etched porcelain veneers . Am J Dent 19 89;29-15
2 Peumans M , Van Meerbeek B, Lambrechts P, VuylstekeW auters M , Vanherle G. Five-year clinica l performance of
po rcelain veneers. Q uintessence Int 1998;2 9 :21 1-22 1.
3. Fradeani M. Six-year follow-up w ith Empress veneers. IntJ
Periodoniics Restorative Dent 19 9 8; 18 :2 16-2 25 .
4. Magne P, Perraud R, Hodge s JS, Belser U. C linica l performance of novel-design porcelain veneers for the recovery of coronal volume and length Int J Periodontics
Restorallve Dent 200 0 ,4 0 441 -45 7
5. Dumfahrt H . Porcelain laminate veneers. A retrospective
evaluation after 1 to 10 years of service: Part II-C linical
results. Int J Pro sthadont 2000; 13 :9-1 8 .
6 . Friedman Mj. A 15-year review of porcelain veneer failure: A clinician's observations. Co mpend Contin Educ
Dent 1998; 19 :6 25-6 36
7 . Wall s AW, M urray JL M cCabe JF. Composi te lamina te
veneers: A clinica l study J O ra l Rehabil 1988; 15
439-4 5 4 .
8. Rucker LM, Ri chter W, M acEntee M, Richardson A. Porcelain and resin veneers clinica lly evaluated: 2-year resu lts.
J Am Dent Assoc 19 9 0 ; 12 1:59 4 - 59 6.
9 . Lacy AM, W ada C , Du W , W ata nabe L. In vitro microleakage a t the gingiva l margin of porcelain and resin
veneers . J Pro sthet Dent 19 9 2;6 7 :7- 10 .
10. Meijering AC, Roe ters Fj, Mu lder J, C reugers N H. Patients' satisfaction w ith different types of veneer restorations. J Dent 19 9 7 ;25493-497
11. Kreul en CM, Creugers N H, Meijering AC. Meta-analysis
of anterior veneer restorations in c1i nicol studies. J Dent
19 9 8;26 34 5-35 3.
12. M eijering AC , C reugers N H, Roeters FJ , M ulder J. Survival
of three types of veneer restora tions in a clinica l tria l: A
2 .5-year interim evaluation. J Dent 19 9 8;26 :5 6 3- 5 6 8 .
13 . Chan C, Weber H. Plaque retention on teeth restored with
full-ceramic crowns: A comparative study. J Prosthet Dent
198 6 ;5 6: 6 66-6 71 .
14. Koidis PT, Schroeder K, Johnston W , Ca mpag ni W . Color
consistency, plaque accumulation, and external marginal
surface charac teristics of the collarless meta l-ceramic
restoration. J Prosthet Dent 19 91 ;6 5: 39 1- 40 0 .
15. Kourkouta S, W alsh Tl, Davis LG . The effect of po rcelain
laminate veneers on gi ngiva l health a nd bacterial plaque
characteristics. J C lin Periodontal 19 94 ;21 :6 3 8- 6 40 .
16. Walls AWG . The use of adhesively retained all-porcelain
veneers during the management of fractured and warn anterior teeth: Par t 2. C linica l results after 5 years of followup. Br DentJ 19 9 5 ; 17 8 .3 37-340 .
386
17 . M iller IN \. Porcelain veneer protection plan: M a intenance
procedures for all porcelain reslo rations. J Esthet Dent
1990;2:63-66
18 . Plagmann HC , War tenberg M, Kocher T. Changes in the
enamel surface after calculus removal. Dtsch Zahnarztl Z
19 89;44 2 85 - 28 8
] 9 . TopolI HH , Lange DE , Hugelmyer T, Ha nnema nn D. Surface changes of enamel, root cementum and fillings after
treatment w ith too th clea ning instruments. Dtsch Za hnorztl
Z 1989;44 :387-390 .
20 . Jones DA. Effects of topical fluoride preparations on
glozed porcelain surfaces. J Prosthet Dent 1985 ;53 :
4 8 3-48 4 .
2 1. W underlich RC, Yaman P. In vitro effect of topical fluoride
on denta l porcelai n. J Prosthet Dent 1986;55 3 85-3 8 8 .
22 . Demirhanog lu ST, Sahin E. Effects of topical fluorides and
citric ac id on overglazed and o uloq lczed porcelain surfaces. Int J Prosthodont 19 9 2;5 :4 34-4 40 .
23 . Kula K, Kula I] . The effect of topica l APF foam and other
fluorides on veneer po rcelain surfaces. Pediatr Dent
19 9 5 ; 1735 6- 361 .
24 . Borghi N, Berry TG . Post-bonding crock formation in
po rcelain veneers. J Esthet Dent 1997;9 :51 - 5 4 .
25 . M ag ne P, Kw on KR, Belser UC , HodgesJ S, Doug las W H
Crack propensity of porce lain laminate veneers: A simulated operatory evalua tion . J Prosthet Dent 1999;8 1:
32 7- 33 4 .
26. N ordb o H, Rygh-Thoresen N , Henaug T. C linica l performances of porcelain laminate veneers w ithout incisal overlapp ing 3-year results. J Dent 19 94 ;2 2 :34 2-34 5 .
27. Roulet JF, Soderholm KL Longmate J. Effecls of treatment
and storage conditions on ceramic/composite bo nd
strength. J Dent Res 19 9 5 ;7 4 :3 81-387.
28 . Sun R, Suansuwan N , Kilpatrick N , Swa in M . C haracterisa tion of triboc hemica lly assisted bonding o f composite
resin to porcelain a nd metal. J Dent 2000;28 :4 4 ] - 4 4 5 .
29. Robin C , Scherrer SS, W iskoll HW , De Rijk WG,
Belser Uc. W eibull parameters of co mposite resin bond
strengths to porcelain and noble a lloy using the Rocatec
system. Dent Mater 2002; 18 :389-395.
30 . C hristga u M, Fried l KH, Schma lz G, Edelmann K.
Ma rgina l ad apta tion of heat-pressed glass-ceramic veneers to Class 3 composite restorations in vitro. O per Dent
19 9 9 ;24 :2 3 3-244 .
3 1. M agne P, Douglas W Ho C umula tive effects of successive
restorative procedures on onterior crow n flexure: Intact versus veneered incisors. Q uintessence Int 20 0 0 ;3 1:5-18 .
GUIDE TO
CL INICAL CASES
A number of clini ca l cases have been presented throug ho ut this book . To
help the reader fol low a co mplete case treatment in sequence, this qu idc
lists each case a nd the location of all clinica l steps involved .
.
----~-
G U ID E T O CLI N ICA L CA SES
BPRs on teeth 12,11, 21 , and 22
Preoperative situatio n..
Fig 2-12 b
Final preparatio ns
Fig
Impressions
Provisional s
Try-in a nd luting
Preope rative situatio n
. Fina l prep ara tio ns .
388
6-23
Fig 6-23
Fig 6-28
Fig 8c2
Fig 4"4
Fig 4-4
Fina l situation
Follow -up .
Fig 474
Repoi r
Fig
Fig 4-140
9-5
G UI DE TO CLINIC AL CASES
,
' O rthodo ntic therapy
,
plus BPRs on
,
teeth
iJ,'12, 1.1,21,22)
an'd23
.
.
\
..
.
\.
Preoperative situation
Fig 4 -5
Preparation principles
Fig 6-20
Final preparations
Fig 4-5
Final situafiori/foliow-upFig
4-5 '
,"
.
.-'
, BPRs ;nteeth 13, ,12 , 11,21,
. 22,ond23 :
,
'
Preoperative situation
' D iag nostic ap proach ,
Fi nal preparations
Fi nO! ' situation
Followu p ,
Fi g 4~6
" , Fig 5-10
'
Figs 5-10
Figs 4-6 a nd 5JO
Fig 7,1 ' ,
'
389
GUIDE TO CLINICAL CASES
Internal bleaching of tooth 21; BPRs on teeth 1- 1 and 21
Preope rdtive situation
Fig 4-7
Tooth preparations
Final situation/follow-up
Fig 6-4
Fig 4-7
Repair
Fig- 9-4
BPRs on teeth 11 and 21
Preoperative situation
390
Diagnostic approach
Fig 4-8
Fig 5-5
Tooth preparations
Figs 4-8 and
Ceramic layering
Fig 7-9
Final situation/fol low-up
Figs 4-8 and 7-9
6 c3
G UID E TO C LINIC A L CA SES
BPRs on teeth 11, 21, 22 , 23,41 , and 42
Preoperative situation
Diagnostic approach
Tooth preparations
Final situation/follow-up
Fig 4-10
Fig 5-8 .
Fig 5-8
Figs 4-10 and 5-8
Orthodontic therapy plus full-coverage crowns on teeth 13, 12, ,11,21 , 22, and 23;
BPRs on teeth 44, 43, 42 , 31, 32,33 ,~nd 34
Preoperative situa tion
.I ooth preparations
Ceramic lOyering/ try-in
Final situation ,'
Fig 4-1 2
Fig 7-1 1
Fig 7-1 1
Figs 4- 12 and 7-1 1
39 1
G UIDE TO CLINI CAL CASES
Con ~ectivet issue ' graft at teeth 21 and 22;BPRsonteeth,n, '21,and 22 ,
"
'
Fig S4 '
", p iagnostic"approach,
Tooth prepo rations
'F inal situation
Fig 6-22
J ig ¢-2 2
Figs 5 -4 and 6-2 2
, ', .free~and compos ites on teeth
" Preoperative situation
Diagoostic approach
Composites ,
Tooth preparations
Provlsio nols
"
Master casts
Ce ramic loyering
Fi nal situation
392
Fig S4 '
Preo peroti ves iluotion
, Surgery
12 and 22; BPRs on teeth 1 1
, Fig 5-6
Fig 5-7
' Fig 5"6
,
Fi gs 6- 10 and 6- 16
Fi g6~2 6 "
.Figs 7-3 to,7-6
Fig 7~8 '
Figs5-6 and 7-8
G UID E TO CLIN ICA L CAS ES
Internal' bleaching pf teeth 11' and22; BPRson
,
,
Preoperative situotion
Diagnostic approach
Final preparations
, Try-in end luting '
, Final, situation
teeth ~ 12,1-1,
21, and
2'~
Fig ,5 c 9
Fig 5-9
Figs 6-.18 and 8-10
Fig 8 -10
Figs 6- 18and8-10
BPRs on teeth 12dnd 1 1; PFM 'on tooth 21
Preoperative situation
Diagnostic approach
Fi nal preparations ,
, Prebondinq crock
Final situation
, Follow-u p
,', ,
Fig 5-,1 1
Fig 5- 1 1
Fig 5- 1,1
Fig 8- 15 '
Fig 5- 1 1
Fig 8- 12
393
GUID E TO CLINI CAL CASES
.. , BPRs on teeth 12,
'1 1,21,
and 22
",
-"
.
",
Preoperct ives.luofion
F.ig 5-12
,,\
,
".
Dioqnostic approach
'Fina l' P\eporatiohs
Provisio no ls ,
Special effects
" Fina l situation '
P\e\ientive splint
394
,.
Fig 5 -12
Fig 5-12
'Fig 6-25
Fig 7-1 0
, Figs 5-12 and
Fig 9-2
7-10'
GUIDE TO CLINICAL CASES
A
BPRs on teeth 11 and 21
BPRs on teeth 12, 11, and 21
Fig 4-2
Fig 4-3
BPRs on teeth 13,12,11,21,22, and 23
Fig 4-11
395
GU IDE TO CLI NICA L CAS ES
\
"
BP~s on teeth 12, i 1i 21 , and 22 ', Fig 4-13
.
~
\
BPRs on teeth 11 and 21
396
Fig 6 1
G UIDE TO CLI ICAl CASES
BPRs on teeth 13,' 12,11 ,21 ,22, and 23
BPRs on teeth 1 i and 21
Fig 9-1
397
The sculptures d isplayed w ith eac h chapter of this book were crea ted by Sw iss ar tist A nita G ehler
of G eneva . Th e intention is not o nly to esta blish a rela tionship between sculpture a nd esthetic de ntistry but a lso to refresh the reader's eye and appea l to the senses through ar t. In the five sculptures
presented in Ch apters 2 to 8 , the for m, texture, and nature of the materials used by the artist co nveya har mony betwee n bod y a nd spirit. The sculpture shown in C hapters 1 and 9 features the legend ary character Wi lliam Tell to emphasize the Sw iss o rig in of this boo k.
CHAPTER 1: GUILLAUME TELL. Partial view of 2.47-m-high bronze sculpture. Original artwork exhibited in Ma ttenInterlaken, Switzerland, in front of Tell 's Freilichtspiel (Open-Air) Th eater.
CHAPTER 2: L'ENVOL (Flight). Cement sculpture, 40 cm high.
CHAPTER 3: SANS TITRE (No Title) . Cement sculptu re, 33 cm high.
CHAPTER 4 : LA VIE EST BELLE (Life Is Bea utiful). Cement sculpture, 43 cm high.
CHAPTER 5 : LE SECRET (The Secret). Frontal view of 40-cm-high cement sculpture.
CHAPTER 6: LE SECRET. Rear view.
CHAPTER 7: LE SILENCE [The Silence). Frontal view of 8-cm-high bronze head.
CHAPTER 8: LE SILENCE . La teral view.
CHAPTER 9 : GUILLAUME TELL . Full view.
398
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
399
INDEX
Page numbers followed by "!" indicate Figures, those followed by''/''
indicate tables
A
Acid etching
ceramic-res in bond strength effects
of, 378
description o f, 348
Acrylics
diagnostic mock-up, 20 0 ,
200f-203 f
provisional restorations crea ted
using , 280f-28 1f
Ag ing
a nterior de ntition cha nges, 44-4 8
enamel effects , 46, 46f
smile effects, 46
Alveolar mu cosa , 60
Amelogenesis imperfecta, 16 0
Anterior dentition
age-related changes in, 44-4 8
ana tomy of, 28 , 29 f
d imensions of, 70
Attached g ingiva, 60
B
Biomimetics, 50-5 2
Bipupillary line, 9 1, 93 f
Bleaching
bond ing de lays c her. 328
description of, 186 , 18 8
internal. See Bleaching, w alking
bleach technique.
vital
composite resin placement and ,
104
400
description of, 46
enamel adhesion strength effects,
104
for fluorosis stains, 100f-1 0 1f,
104
nightguard , 10 2- 105
for posttraumatic discolo ration,
100f- 10 If, 102 f- 10 3f
wa lking bleach technique
adhesive resto rative materials,
11 2
description o f, 1 10
long-term success of, 1 10
pa latal restoration oher,
1 16 f-l1 7f
process of, 110- 1 12 ,
11lf-115f
roo I resorption risks associated
w ith, 1 10
teeth resistant to, 136 f- 137f
Bonded porcelain restorations. See
also Ce ramics; Porcela in veneers
c her orthodontic surgery, 220,
220f-223 f
cera mic layering
characterized ena mel skin, 3 14,
3 14 f- 315f
completed restoration, 3 18 ,
3 18f-32 lf
co ntouring, 3 14 , 3 17, 3 17 f
cutback dentin, 3 10 , 3 1Of- 3 1 1f
dentin buildup, 3 10, 3 1 1f
dentin characterizatio n, 312,
3 12f- 3 13f
descrip tion of, 306
enamel covering, 3 12f-31 3f,
31 2-314
enamel incisal w all, 3 12,
3 12 f-3 13f
firing , 314, 3 14 f-3 15f, 3 18t
first ba ke, 3 12 f-3 13 f,
3 12-3 14
glOZing, 3 16
opaque dentin, 310
su rface finishing, 3 16, 3 17 f
combi ned indica tions for,
16 4-1 6 5 , 268 f-269f
complications o f
chippi ng, 380, 380f-3 8 1f
crocks, 382 , 382 f-383 f
fracture, 382, 38 2f-383 f
splints for preventing, 378
types of, 378
composite resins for, 33 6 , 337f
configuration o f, 3 30
crocking of, 330
crow ns, 15 4
description o f, 148
fa brica tion techniques
cost g lass-ceramic restora tions,
298
machined ceramics, 298
platinum foil , 29 8
pressed ceramic, 29 8
refractory die, 296-298 , 297f
slip casting, 29 8
feldspalhic, 52 , 294, 296
hygiene practices for
fluoridati on, 376
pol ishing, 376, 376f-377f
scaling, 374, 374 f-375 f
interdental black triangle closed
using , 268 f-269f
long-term resu lts of, 372,
37 2 f-375 f
INDEX
multiple, 352
patient satisfaction w ith, 37 2
periodo ntal soh tissues around,
16 6f- 16 8f
placement of
ad justments after, 353-35 5
interdental ad justments,
356-3 58
occlusal ad justments, 35 3- 355
procedure for, 350-352
porcela in-fused-to-metal crown
and, 21 2, 2 16, 2 17 f-2 19 f
posterior teeth, 170-174
prebonding cracks in, 366,
36 6 f- 36 7 f
repa ir of, 378
retention of, 37 2
seating of, 34 0 f, 352
silica-enriched surfaces, 378
splint use, 37 8 , 37 9f
tooth preparation considerations,
200, 240
treatment ap proach, 180
w raparounds for, 252-25 4
Brightness , 84, 84f
Burs, 24 2, 24 3f, 244 , 24 51
C
Ca nines
anatomy of, 28 , 28 1
maxillary, 76 , 761- 7 71
Cast
moster, 29 9-305
soft tissue, 304- 3051
Central incisors, 72- 75
Ceramics. See 0150 Bonded porcelain restorations; Porcelain.
composite resins and
comparisons between, 294
crack propensity 01 porcelains
based on ratio of, 294
cracking 01, 364, 3641-365 1
history of, 130
layering of
characterized enamel skin, 3 14 ,
3 14 1-3 151
completed restoration, 3 18,
3 181-3211
contouring, 3 14 , 3 17 , 3 171
cutback denlin, 3 10, 3 101-3 11I
dentin buildup, 3 10 , 3 1 1I
dentin characterization, 3 12,
3 121-3 131
description 01, 306
enamel covering, 31 21-3131,
3 12-3 14
enamel incisal wa ll, 3 12 ,
3 12f- 3 13f
firing , 3 14, 31 4 1-3 151, 3 18t
lirst bake, 31 21-31 3f,
3 12-3 14
glazing, 3 16
opaque dentin, 3 10
surloce linishing , 3 16, 3 171
masking of, 32 61- 3291,
3 26-32 8
Si lane-treated, 344, 346
stratification of, 30 6 1-3091
surlace cond itioning
description of, 342
hyd rofluoric ocid etching ,
3421-3 43 1, 342-344
silanization, 344, 34 6
steps involved in, 34 71
try-in perlormed c lter, 344
tensile streng th of, 52
types 01, 29 4-296
wear properties of, 296
Cervical embrasures, 14 0
Ce rvical ma rgins, 248
Chemical treatment
description 01, 10 0 , 10 01- 10 1I
indica tions, 10 0
Chipp ing, 380, 38 01- 38 1I
Class 3 restorations, 262-265,
38 4 , 38 4 f- 38 5 f
Class 4 delects , 260, 261 I
Colo r
esthetic considerations, 84- 87
selection 01, 230-23 4
shade documentation, 23 0-234
Commissu ral line, 9 31
Co mpliance, 26
Co mposite resins. See 0150 Direct
composites.
adva ntages and disadvantages
of, 131 t
ap plication of, 346, 3471
bonded porcelain restorations
using, 3 36 , 33 71
ceramics and
comparisons between, 29 4
crack propensity 01porcelai ns
based on ratio 01, 294
charac teristics 01, 13 1t
description of, 336
dual-cure, 336
light-curing, 3 36, 35 2
physical properties 01, 50
polymerization rate 01, 336
selection of, 336, 3 371
shrinkage 01, 364 , 36 41-365 1
tag lormation, 36 0
thickness 01, 362
vital bleaching and, 10 4
Co noid teeth, porcelain veneers for,
13 8 , 1381-1 391
Co ronal Iracture, porcelain veneers
lor, 154- 15 7
Cracks
enamel, 38 , 42 , 4 21, 196 , 294 ,
296
porcelain veneers , 330, 365 1
postbonding, 3 8 2, 38 2f-383 f
prebonding , 366, 3661
Crow n
Width/ height ratios, 68 , 68 1, 70f
rigid ity of, 50
shape corrections belore diagnostic mock-up, 204 1-2071
stress distribution in, 50
Crown Ilexure, 30
Crown Iracture
partial, 24
porcelain restorations for,
15 2f-1 5 3f, 25 8
Crown res torations, 2 12, 2 16 ,
2 171-2 191
D
Deflection cords, 244 , 244 f- 24 5f ,
27 4 ,2741,27 6 , 376 f- 377f
DE]. See Dentinoenamel junction.
Denti n
od hesive a pplication, 348 , 349,
358
aging effects, 44
a natomy of, 26, 26f, 8 1f
buildup. 31 0 , 31 1f
cutback, 3 10, 31 Of-3 1 1f
discoloration, wa lking bleach technique for, 112f-1 15f
fluorescence 01, 80, 86, 86f
function of, 4 4
immediate bonding of, 27 0-272 ,
360f
margin cond itioning , 273f
physicol properties of, 53 t
40 1
~-
INDEX
tooth conditioning co nsidera tions
for exposure of, 34 8
Dentin bonding ag ents
bonding methods for, 358
composite resins. See Co mposite
resins.
considerations for marg inal gap,
358- 360
resin tog formation, 360
description of, 270, 27 2
lig ht-activated, 360
thickness of, 36 2
Dentinoenamel junction
definition of, 38
description o f, 335
embryo logic development of, 4 0 ,
40 f
scal loping of, 3 8 , 38 f
stress transfer function of, 42
structure of, 3 8, 38 f- 43 f
Diagnostic approach
mock-up. See Diagnosti c mock-up.
overview o f, 17 9
summary overview of, 224, 225f
wa xup. See Diagnostic w axup.
Diagnostic mock-up
acrylic template for, 200,
200f- 203 f
bonded porcelain restorations,
200
co ronal volume retraction or displacement, 20 2, 204
for demand ing patients, 204 ,
208-2 12 , 212f-2 15f
enhanced , 20 8f
laboratory prepara tion of, 20 2
lip remodeling using, 202,
204 f- 207f
patient reactions a nd approval of,
200, 202
porcelain-fused-to-metaI crown and
bonded porcela in restora tions
using, 2 12, 2 16, 217f- 2 19 f
sandwich technique, 2 12 f-2 15 f
simple acrylic resins used for, 202
traditional, 208 f- 21 1f
Diagnostic w axup
essentials for add itive, 196,
198-2 0 0
lateral incisor shape and volume
mod ifications assessed using ,
190f-1 9 5 f
steps involved in, 196 , 19 8- 200
402
tissue reduction gUided by, 242 ,
242f-24 3f
treatment outcome predictions
based on, 19 8
Diastemata closure, porcelain veneers for
description o f, 14 0 , 141 f-1 46f
tooth preparations, 266-269
Die. See Refrac tory die.
Direct composites. See 0 /50 Composite resins.
description of, 120
freehand ap plica tion of, 120 ,
120f- 12 lf, 17 0 f- 17 4f
hybrid, 120
lateral incisor sho pe and volume
modifications using, 18 8,
188 f- 195f
limitations of, 120
three-increment stratification technique, 12 2 , 12 2f-1 25 f
translucency of, 12 2, 122f
Discolorations
bleaching procedures for
teeth resistan t to , 134-1 37
vital, 10 0-104
w alking bleach technique,
110- 112
fluorosis stains, 1OOf- l 01 f, 104
masking techniques for,
326f-329f, 326-328
opaque dentin for, 3 10
porcelain veneers for, 134- 137
posttraumatic, 100f- 10 1f,
10 2f-l 03 f
E
Elastic mod ulus, 5 0
Enamel
ag ing effects, 4 6 , 4 6f , 19 6 ,
19 7f
anatomy of, 26, 26f-2 7 f
anterior teeth, 44
butt marg in, 256
cho rocrerlstlcs of, 188 , 19 6
crocking of, 38 , 4 2, 4 2f, 19 6 ,
294 , 296
facial w ear pattern s, 196, 197 f
fluorescence of, 86 , 86 f
fun ction of, 44
generalized dysplasia of, 16 0 ,
160f- 16 3f
loss of
causes, 15 8
description of, 4 8, 4 8f-4 9f
localized, 15 8
porcelain restora tions for, 15 8 ,
15 8f-15 9f
morphology of, 44 , 44f- 4 5 f
opalescence o f, 78 , 78f-79f
physico ] properties of, 53 1
posterior teeth, 4 4
prisms, 25 6, 256f-2 57f
thickness
acid etching to reduce, 348
restoration of, 4 8, 48f- 4 9f ,
19 6 ,1 9 7 f
stress distribution based on, 36,
36 f-3 7 f,4 8
thin, 2 42 f- 24 3f
vital bleaching effects on, 10 4
Estheti cs
description of, 5 7
fundamental criteria
color, 84- 87
gingiva l health, 6 0, 60f- 6 1f
gingival levels, 64, 6 4 f
gingival zenith, 62, 62f
incisal edge configuration,
88 -90
interdental closure, 60, 6 1f
interdental contact, 6 4 , 6 4 f
low er lip line, 9 1, 91 f-9 2f
overview of, 5 8 , 59f
smile symmetry, 9 1, 9 3f
surfa ce texture, 82 - 8 3
tooth axis, 62 , 62 f
tooth characteriza tion, 78-8 1
tooth di mensions, 6 4, 66f,
68-70
porcelain veneers for, 14 6 ,
14 6f-147f
subjective integra tion of, 58 , 59f,
94
treatm ent planning considerations
bleaching . See Bleaching .
d irect composites, 18 8,
18 8f-195f
mucoging ivol surgery, 186 ,
186f -1 87f
orthodontics, 188
orthog nathics, 188
Etching
ceramic-resin bond strength effects
of, 37 8
description of, 348
INDEX
F
Face-bow, 302
Facial groove, 24 4 , 24 4 f-2 4 5 f
Feldspathic porcelain
description of, 52 , 294
hydrofluoric acid etching of, 34 4 ,
34 4 f-3 4 5 f
Finish ing
ceramic surface, 3 16, 3 17 f
provisional restorations, 28 4 ,
286f-287f
tooth preparation, 246
FleXibility, 26
Fluorescence, 86, 86f-87f
Fluorescent stain, 3 12
Fluorida tion, 376
Fractures
bonded porcelain restorations,
38 2, 38 2f-383 f
coronal, 154-1 5 7
crown
partia l, 24
po rcelain restorations for,
15 2f- 15 3f, 258
incisors
descriotion of, 154f-155f
pa lat~ 1 concavity avoidan ce,
25 6
porcelain veneer for, 25 4-25 8
Free gingi va, 60
G
G ingiva
conditioning of, for impressions,
27 4f-2 75 f,2 7 4- 27 6
connective tissue g raft for improving contour of, 186f-1 87f
contour of, 24 8
deflection of, 244 , 244f-245f,
27 4 , 274 f, 2 76
hea lth of, 60, 60f-6 1f
levels of, 64, 6 4 f
zenith of, 6 2, 6 2f
G laZing , of provisional restorati ons,
28 4 , 2 86f-2 87 f
G olden proportion, 6 4, 6 6 , 66f
H
Hue, 84 , 84 f
Hybrid composites, 52
Hydrofluoric acid etching, for ceramic surface conditioning,
342 f-343 f, 34 2- 344
Hygiene practices, for bonded
porcela in restorations
fluoridation, 376
polishing , 376, 376f-3 77f
scaling, 374, 374f- 37 5f
I
Immed iate dentin bondi ng,
270-2 7 2, 360f
Impressions
description of, 274
gi ngival conditioning for,
274 f- 275 f,274-276
immediate dentin bonding before,
270-27 2
one-step, doub le-mix technique,
276, 276 f-2 79f
Incisors
anatomy of, 2 8 , 29f
dentin-bonded porcelain veneers,
50, 5 lf
edge of
configurations of, 88 - 9 0
lower lip as gUide for,
148f-149f
modeling of, before di rect composite application,
120f-1 2lf
wea r patterns, 2 16, 2 20
fractured
description of, 154f-1 5 5f
pa latal concavity avoida nce,
256
oorcela in veneer for, 25 4- 25 8
fu'nction of, 28
inlerincisal angle of, 9 0
lateral
characteristics of , 76, 76f-77f,
91
shape and volume modifications,
before porcela in veneer
placement, 188 - 195
length and prominence augmentation using porcelain veneers,
146-1 5 2
mandibular. See M a nd ibular incisors.
maxillary. See M aXillary incisors.
reduction of, 245f, 246
in sandwich provisiono l restorations, 28 6 f
w raparound, 25 2- 25 4
Interdental ad justments, 356-358
Interdental black triangles closure
description of, 60, 6 1f, 140
intrasulcular margin for, 268 ,
268f
tooth preparations for, 26 8 ,
268f-269f
Interdental contact, 6 4 , 64f
Interdental preparation
definition of, 248
OSCillating techniques for,
248f-249f, 248 -25 0 ,
250f-25 1f
Interdenta l w rapa rounds,
25 2-25 4 , 262 , 264
Inverted "V" rule, 90, 90f
L
Laboratory
d iag nostic mock-up, 202
pa tient manag ement by, 184 ,
184f- 185f
shade documentation wo rkplace
in, 230-23 1f
La teral incisors
characteristics of, 76 , 76f- 7 7 f,
91
sha pe a nd volume modi fications,
before porcelain veneer placement, 18 8-1 9 5
Load stress. See Stress.
Low er lip
diag nostic mock-up for remodeling
of, 202, 204 f-207 f
esthetic considerations, 9 1r
9 1f-92f
incisal edge configuration using,
148f-1 4 9f
M
Mandibular incisors
fractured , porcelain restorations
for, 156 , 15 6f-1 5 7f
stress di stri bution during functioning, 34, 34f-35f
M arg in configuration and localiza tion
bun. 254
cervica l, 248
dentin, 27 3f
403
IN DEX
interdental preparatio n for, 248 ,
248 f- 24 9 f
pa latal, 25 4 , 258 f-259f
proximal, 248
su bg ingival, 250
Marginal gop, 358 - 36 0
M asking
preventive, 328
selective intrinsic, 3 26 ,
326f- 3 27 f
M axillary incisors
central, 7 2- 75
erosion and w ear ot, 7 2
fracture of, 24, 25 f
lateral. See Lateral incisors.
shope 01, 7 2-7 5
stress d istribution during functioning, 3 2 , 33 f
M axillary teeth
canines, 76, 761- 7 7 f
incisors. See Ma xillary incisors.
Mechanical testing, 30, 3 1f
M egabrasion, 10 6-1 0 8 ,
107f-l08f
M etamerism , 2 30 , 2 30 f
M icroabrasion, 10 6 , 10 8
M icrosandblasting , 298
Mu cog ingival junction, 60
M ucog ingival surgery, 186 ,
186 f- 187 f
o
O cclusal adjustments, after bonded
porcelain restora tion placement,
353-355
Operatory team, patient management by, 18 2 , 18 3f
O rthodo ntics
bonded porcelain restorations
after, 22 0 , 2 20f- 22 3f
treatment planning , 188
O scillating prepara tion,
248 1- 2491, 248- 250,
250f- 25 1f
p
Palata l co ncavity, 36, 25 4
Pal atal fracture line, 25 2 , 253 f
Pa latal mini-chamfer, 15 0
Patient management
description of, 180
dentist-patie nt interactions, 18 2 ,
18 3 f
404
by laboratory team, 184 ,
184f-1 85f
by operatory team, 18 2, 18 3f
Photog raphy
description of, 224 , 226
equipment for
camero body, 226, 226f-2 27f
Ilash system, 226, 228 1-2291,
22 8- 23 0
lens, 2 26
shade selection using, 232-23 4
Place ment 01 bonded porcelai n
restorations
adjustments a fter, 353 - 35 5
interdental ad justments, 356-358
occlusal ad justments, 353-355
procedure for, 350-352
Plaque Index, 166
Platinum foil technique, 298
Polishing , 01 bonded porcelain
restorations, 37 6 , 376 f-377f
Porcelain
ad vantage s and d isadvantages
of, 131 t
bacteria l accumulation, 37 2
charac teristics of, 13 1t
historic uses of, 130 , 13 2
indicat ions, 130 f, 132
plaque reductions associated w ith,
372
prebonding crac ks in, 366, 366 1
Porcelain veneers. See also Bonded
porcelai n restorations.
biologi c conside rations, 16 6-1 6 9
bonded, 14 8
ceramic layering
characterized ena mel skin, 3 14,
3 14 f-3 15f
co mpleted restoration, 3 18,
3 18f-3 211
contouring, 3 14, 31 7, 3 17f
cutback de ntin, 3 10, 3 1Of-3 11f
dentin buildup, 3 10 , 3 11f
dentin characterization, 3 12 ,
3 12f- 3 13f
description of, 306
enamel covering, 3 121-3 131,
3 12-3 14
ena mel incisal wa ll, 3 12 ,
3 121-3 131
firing, 3 14, 3 14 f-3 15 f, 3 18t
first ba ke, 31 2f- 3 13f,
3 12- 3 14
glO Zing, 3 16
opaque dentin, 31 0
su rface finish ing, 31 6 , 3 17 f
co mplication rate lor, 378
configuration of, 33 0-3 31
cracking of, 3 30 , 365f
in endod ontically treated teeth,
136
leldspathic. See Feldspathic porcelain.
fine bonded, 153f
history of, 130
indications
anterior teeth requiring major
morpholog ic modifi cations,
138-1 51
C lass 3 defects preexisting,
26 2- 26 5 , 38 4 , 38 4 ~ 3 85 f
C lass 4 defects preexisrmq,
260, 261 f
combined, 164-1 6 5
co ngenital a nd ocquired malformations, 16 0 , 160 f-1 6 3 f
conoid teeth , 138 , 13 81- 139 f
coronal fracture, 15 2 f-153 f,
154-1 5 7
d iastemata closu re, 140 ,
14 11-146 f
d iscolored teeth resista nt to
bleaching , 134-1 37
enamel loss, 15 8 , 15 8f-1 5 9 1
incisal length and prominence
augmentation, 146-152
incisor fracture, 254- 258
interdental black tria ngles, 14 0
overview of, 132 , 13 3t
masking of, 32 6 f-329f ,
3 26-328
posterior teeth, 17 0-1 7 4
teeth restored using
biomimetics of, 50, 5 1I
charac teristics 01, 136
stress distribution of, 136
in thick vs. th in teeth, 260, 260f
Posterior teeth
po rcelain veneers for, 170-1 7 4
relractory d ie considerations,
302
Provisional restorations
ocrvlic materials lor, 280f-28 1f
bonding of, 2821-28 41,
28 8 f- 2 89f
fabricati on of, 2 80-284
I NDEX
finishing 01, 284 , 286f-287f
glaz ing 01, 2 84 , 2861-287f
removal of, 338
sandwich technique, 2 84f-2861
spot etching of, 3 38
Proximal margins, 248
R
Refractory die, for bonded porcelain restoration fabrication
description 01, 29 6- 29 8, 297f
master casts, 299- 30 5
posterior teeth occlusion, 302
preparatory steps for, 302
single die, 299 - 302
soft tissue cast, 304- 30 51
solid model, 302 , 30 41
stone die, 299 , 30 01-3 0 1f
try-in considerations, 3 38
Resi n tags, 360
Rubber da m, 340
S
Sandblasters, 378 , 379f
Sandwi ch technique
lor diagnostic mock-up,
2 12 f-2 15f
for provisional res torations ,
2841-286f
Scaling, 374, 37 41-3 7 51
Selective intrinsic masking, 326,
3261-327f
Shade documentation, 230-23 4
Shape effects, for tooth length and
w idth compensations, 322 ,
322f-325f
Silanization, 34 4, 34 6
Silica, 37 8
Silicon index, 24 4, 244f-24 51,
2461-2 47 f
Slip casting, 29 8
Smile
ag ing effects on, 4 6
personality and, 9 41-95 f
symmetry of, 9 1, 931
Soft tissue cast, 304- 30 5 f
Splints, 378 , 3791
Spot etching, 2821-28 41,
28 8f-289f, 33 8
Stone die, 299 , 300f-30 1f
Stress distribution
aging effects, 48
CER/CPR ratio effects, 330
Class 3 res torations, 2621-2631
enamel thickness and geometryellects , 36 , 361-3 71, 4 8
geometric irregularities and , 36
low levels of, 36
mandibular incisors, 34 , 34 f-35f
rnoxillory incisors, 32 , 33 f
mechanical testing of, 30, 3 1f
palatal concavity, 36 , 25 4
palatal margin changes and , 254
Subgingival margins, 25 0
Surface texture, 82 -83
T
Tooth
aging effects, 44-48
biomechanical response to restorative procedures , 50
characterization of, 78-8 1
color of, 84-87
components 01, 26 , 261
crown w idth/ height ratios, 68 ,
6 81, 701
dehydration of, 23 4
dimensions of, 64 , 66f, 68 -70
esthetic criteria for, 58
fleXibility of, 26
fragment reattachment, 118,
1 18f-1 19 f
historic descriptions of, 23 - 24
loss of, palatal fracture line considerations, 252
mechanical testing of, 30, 3 1f
opa lescence of, 78, 78 f-79 f
physiologic performance of, 24 ,
251
proporlionality of, 64 , 66f
shape effects lor length and w idth
compensations, 322 ,
322 1-3 25 f
stresses on, 30
surface conditioning of, 34 8,
3491
surface texture of, 82- 83
thick, 260 , 2601
th in, 260, 2601
tra nsparency of, 7 9 f, 80, 8 1f
typal forms of, 74 , 741-75f
volume assessments, 224
w idth of, 66
Tooth axis, 6 2, 62 f
Tooth preparation
bonded porcelai n restoralions,
200
Class 3 defects preexisting,
26 2-265
Class 4 delects preexisting, 26 0 ,
26 lf
considerations for, 240
crack propensity and, 33 0
diagnostic waxup for, 242
diastemata closure, 266-269
elements 01, 246, 2461-2471
equipment for, 242 , 242f-24 3f
example of, 240f-24 1I
linishing of, 246
interdental black triangles closure,
268 , 268 f-269 f
for lateral incisor shape and volume rnod iiicotio ns. 19 2f
margin configuration and localization
butt, 254
cervical, 248
interdental preparation for, 24 8 ,
24 8 f- 249f
palatal, 254 , 258f-2 59f
proximo], 24 8
subgingival, 250
principles of, 242
procedure for, 244-247
thick vs. thin teeth , 260 , 260f
wraparound , 252-254
Treatment planning
bleaching. See Bleaching .
direct composites, 18 8,
18 81- 19 51
laboratory participation, 184,
186
mucogingi val surgery, 186 ,
186 f-1 87 f
orthodontics. 188
orthognathics, 18 8
overview of, 179
Tribochemical coa ting, 378
Try-in
description of, 338
process of, 3 38 f- 3 39 f
refractory die use, 338
rubber da m for, 340
surface conditioning belore
description 01, 342 , 348, 349f
hydrofluoric acid etching,
342 f-3 43 f, 34 2-3 4 4
silanization, 34 4 , 346
405
INDEX
steps involved in, 34 7 f
try-in performed olter, 34 4
surface contamination secondary
to, 340
U
Ultraconservative treatments
bleaching . See Bleaching .
megabrasio n, 10 6-1 08 ,
10 7 f- 10 8 f
microab rasion, 10 6 , 10 8
tooth fragment reattachment, 1 18,
11 8f-119f
Veneered w axup, 7 4
Vital bleaching
composite resin placement and,
10 4
description of, 46
enamel adhesion streng th effects,
104
for fluorosis stains, 100f- 101 f,
104
nightg uard , 10 2- 10 5
for posttraumatic d iscoloration,
10 0 f- 10 If, 102 f- 10 3f
teeth resistant to, 134 f- 135 f
Von Mises criterion, 32 , 155 f
V
Value, 84 , 84 f
Veneer. See Porcelain veneers.
406
W
W alking bleach technique
adhesive restorative materials,
11 2
description of, 1 10
long-term success of, 1 10
pa latal restoration a fter,
116f-11 7 f
process of, 1 10 -1 12 , 1 1 If- 1 l 5f
root resorptio n risks associated
with , 110
teeth resistant to, 136f-1 37 f
W axup. See Diagnostic w axup.
W raparound
C lass 3 restorations preexisting,
264 , 26 4 f- 26 5 f, 3 84
description of, 25 2- 25 4